\VAHli ..: GI.UM
A NO
VOCABULAHY
UCSB LIBRARY
SWAHILI GEAMMAE
AND
VOCABULAEY
DRAWN UP BY
MRS. F. BURT
LONDON
SOCIETY FOR PROMOTING CHRISTIAN KNOWLEDGE
NORTHUMBERLAND AVENUE, W.C.
1910
•WIU.IA'.T ri.mVKS AND SONS, I.'VITK.n, LOS1XJX AXP ItKCC'LKS.
PREFACE
THIS little work is an attempt to adapt the Berlitz method of learning modern European languages to the needs of the student of Swahili ; its aim is to enable the learner to acquire a working knowledge of the language without laborious research or great feats of memory. Grammatical rules occupy a subordinate place : they are introduced incidentally and are not to be regarded as a separate subject of study : the ear, rather than {he eye, is the organ to be pressed into the service. Words are arranged in subject-groups in order that, by the natural association of ideas, the student may help himself to learn Swahili much as a child picks up its mother tongue. The exercises should, if possible, be reiterated and amplified with the aid of a native teacher, until the ear is thoroughly accustomed to the sounds and the mind trained to follow the constructions. This method, if carefully pursued, should soon lead to technical accuracy.
The standard of Swahili adopted is that set by the Eev. W. E. Taylor, M.A., to whose valuable works the writer is greatly indebted. He has kindly furnished the Syllabary and Part I. of the work.
A. E. B.
BOUBNE END PABSONAOE, BOXMOOR, 1910,
A 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART I
FAOB
INTRODUCTION AND ARTICLE ON PHONETICS ... ... 7
PART II.
TWENTY-ONE STUDIES IN THE FAMILIAR LANGUAGE OF DAILY
LIFE, CONSISTING OP :—
(a) VOCABULARY ... ... ... ... ... 24
(6) EXERCISES FOR READING AND TRANSLATING (i) SWAHILI
(ii) ENGLISH ... ... ... ... ... 24
(c) GERMANE GRAMMATICAL NOTES ... ... ... 24
(fZ) GRADED STUDIES IN SWAHILI GRAMMAR ... ... 24
KEY TO THE EXERCISES ... ... ... . ... ... 132
TABLE OF MONEY, WEIGHTS, AND MEASURES ... ... 152
SPECIMENS OF SWAHILI LETTER-WRITING ... ... 154
SWAHILI CALENDAR ... ... ... ... ... 157
TABLE OF SYNONYMS ... ... ... ... ... 158
TABLE OF HOMONYMS ... ... ... ... 159
PART III VOCABULARY SWAHILI-ENGLISH ... ... 1G2
PART I
INTRODUCTION
SWAHILI is a member of the Bantu family of African languages found in the region, and to the south, of the Equator, and all partaking of certain remarkable features peculiar to this family alone, of which the most striking is, that all objects in the known universe are divided into classes, which not only mark the nouns, but also all the adjectives, pronouns, and verbs connected with them. This is effected by means of the classifier prefix which differs according to the class of the noun, and whether it is singular or plural. Besides this, the Nominative or Subjective Prefixes and the Objective Infixes, are thrown together with tense particles into one word with the verb stem ; so that one word may form a complete and luminous sentence.
The conveniences of this system will be seen from a study of the Rev. W. E. Taylor's Groundwork sheet.
Swahili has the additional advantages above others of these languages, first that it has been enriched and diversified by the influence of Arabic, Hindustani, and to a slighter extent, of Persian and Portuguese and also by a written poetical and religious literature extending over a long period.
The Swahili language is broadly divided into three main Dialect-Groups :
THE SOUTHERN ; THE NORTHERN; THE CENTRAL.
(a) The Southern includes Ki-Unguja, the Zanzibar!, in which the labours of Bishop Steere and the U.M.C.A. have been directed to producing the existing version of the Bible: Ki-P'emba, spoken on P'emba, the Emerald Isle, from which cornes a moiety of the clove supply:
SWAHTLI GRAMMAR
Ki-Mrima, ou the Southern Mrima or "Mainland," opposite and to the south of Zanzibar.
(6) The Northern comprises Ki-Amu, the speech of Lamu or Amu and its neighbourhood ; Ki-Pafe, the Pate dialect ; Ki-Gunya, the brogue of the Northern Islanders called Wa-Gunya or, by the Arabs, Bajuni : Ki-<i-kuu is the Mainland variety of this brogue (ITi-kuu, connected with nfi-k'uu, = Main-land.)
(c) The Central. The only member of importance in this group, is the Mombasa or Ki-Mvi/a, but this speech is taken as the standard for some distance along the coast N. and S. of Mombasa Island, and in and among the districts on the confines of the other groups.
TABLES SHOWING THE INTER-KELATIONS OF THE CENTRAL WITH THE SOUTHERN AND NORTHERN GROUPS OF SWAHILI DIALECTS.
To le studied as occasion requires.
TABLE I. shows how nearly the Central Group is related to the Southern, and in what respects the Northern Group stands in contrast to the former two.
(a) Literal Changes — Southern.
Cerebral T (in some Cerebral T
Mrima B) J
SH(in P'emba FY) Z
w
M (prefix) VI (prefix) YTJ (prefix)
(to) Grammatical Changes —
menu. T |
JSortnern. CH (Bajuni) |
J 8H |
Y S |
Z w M (prefix) VI (prefix) YTT (prefix) |
DH (Bajuni) V (frequent) N (prefix, frequent) ZI (prefix) U (prefix) |
Relative suffixes vari- ous, according to class and number
The suffix - perfect quite obsolete
Relative suffixes vari- ous, according to class and number
The suffix - perfect seldom used except in poetry
All classes except Lo- cative relative suffix o (sing, and plur.)
The suffix-perfect in full use
INTRODUCTION
(o) Verbal Changes —
-je, how ? (suffix) -je, how ? (suffix)
hivi, thus, etc. hivi, thus, etc.
iye 1 how ? (not a
suffix) hiyau, thus, etc.
TABLE II. shows on the other hand some of the affinities the Central Group possesses with the Northern dialects.
Southern.
CH NJ
ninakupen'/ani (and several other more or less " barbarous " Zr. forms), I love you (plur. obj.)
Central.
Dental T Dental N£>
nawapen<Za, I love you (plur. obj.)
Northern.
Dental T Dental NZ> nawapen^/a, 1 love you (plur. obj.)
TABLE III. — A third Table is capable of being constructed of points wherein each group differs from the others. One chief word may be cited as an example —
Southern. ninakuja, I am coming
Central. naja, I am coming
Northern. niyao, I am coming
TABLE IV. — Central differs, where Northern and Southern agree, to the advantage of the Mombasa Group.
Southern.
Ar. ih (kuzani), dh (ramazani), dh ( zambi), frequently are pro- nounced like Z Ar. th (selaea) is pronounced S, some- times.
-ake (poss. pron.) '
Central.
Ar. th (ku</iaui), dh (-dAani), dh (dhambi),
are pronounced as
in Arabic Ar. th (thalatha) is
always pronounced
TH (except in -su-
bu<u.) -akwe (poss. pron.)
Northern.
Ar. th (kuzani), (Ih (-zani), dh (zambi), sometimes pro- nounced like Z Ar. th (thelatha or Bel-) is pronounced S (occasionally).
-ake (poss. pron.)
1 Accordingly, in S. and N. Swahili,. wake, female (pi.), is indistinguishable from wake, his (pi. of I), the inconvenience of which may be imagined.
10 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
The above Tables demonstrate the truth of the assertion that Mombasa is linguistically the Central dialect, as well as geographically. They also show that, generally speaking, in form the Mombasa dialect resembles rather the Southern dialect group than the Northern. Again it is nearer the Northern in the important quality of rich- ness of vocabulary, compression, and flexibility, and to the Southern in the greater distinctness and variety of the prefixes. The Tables will prepare the student to deal with the other groups of the language as occasion arises.
PHONETICS
THE Swahili sounds are capable of being represented by means of twenty-four of the letters of the Koman Alpha- bet, singly or in combination, supplemented by the use of three diacritical marks, and, where necessary, by the use of an inverted comma (') to represent the Arabic 'ain. Q and x are not used in writing Swahili. C is not used alone. Its soft sound is represented by s and its hard sound by k.
INSTRUCTIONS ON THE PHONETICAL EXERCISES.
We begin with the simpler sounds and pass gradually to the more difficult, taking each as it comes, each to be practised with the native teacher.
VOWELS.
Of single sounds first take the Vowels, which should "be practised by themselves for at least one whole day, and should be rehearsed before other work daily for the first three weeks, in order to get ear and voice weaned from the English ring. This is most important. After that, one should go over them certainly once weekly for three months, and even then they should be occasionally run over with the teacher, so that any relapse into a false pronunciation or accent should be corrected directly it is observed. Such relapse, though to be guarded against, will seldom occur, if the vowels are once for all well fixed in the " language centres " of the brain, by dint of assiduous practice at the beginning of the long task of perfecting oneself in this language.
In Swahili the vowels are represented by the ordinary five letters, a, e, i, o, u. Swahili vowel sounds
12 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
are distinguished by their purity, and are never in- distinctly slurred, nor do they in the Mombasa dialect form " diphthongs," as in English speech. Instance the English final syllables ey, ay, y, which are at least usually pronounced exactly alike. Nor are the Swahili vowels affected to the same degree as the English by the presence of certain consonants. Hence their pure and unerring pronunciation is a matter of the greatest importance, and in our study must take precedence of everything else.
In the vowels, and with succeeding sounds studied, one should exercise oneself as follows : Let the teacher say each vowel, etc. ten times over, then follow him with your best possible imitation once, when he should im- mediately " chime in " with the correct sound once again, in order that you may correct by the ear any error. (A friend will no doubt be at hand to explain his duty to the teacher.) This process should be gone through once again, after which he need only " sandwich " one utter- ance of your own with two of his ; after ten or twenty of such sandwiched repetitions, you may be considered to have done enough for the occasion, and can go on with something else.
NOTE. — The learner beginning these exercises will probably be quite unconscious of the distinctions marked, which are nevertheless keenly felt by the sensitive ears of the natives.
A pronounced somewhat as in English far.
E as the pure sound in eh ! (very short, more
forward); perhaps nearer still, is the e in
French.
I as ee in feet.
0 as o in lo. (0 represents also another sound somewhat as oe in toe, pronounced shortly and without the second half of the English sound.)
II as oo in food.
NOTE. — English faults are such as these : An r sound after a Swahili a ; An impure ee sound instead of the Swahili e ; An " oo " at the close of the o ; as Nooo (=No).
PHONETICS IJJ
Exercise 1. The vowels to be gone through singly as already directed. Then, taking them in order, double each vowel thus : a — a, e — e, i — i, o — o, u — u, and see that each member of the pair is promnmced distinctly (as by the teacher) with the accent or stress on the former of the two (a — a, etc.). Then triple the vowels and as before lay the stress on the last but one of the groups, a — a — a, etc.
NOTE. — This, the last syllable but one, is the natural place for the accent in a Sicaliili word : the object of the latter variations is to secure the purity of the unaccented syllables. Do not drop the voice on the last syllable.
Exercise 2. — Again go through the vowels singly as before. Then try in order the following combinations. If between the two vowels you hear a w or a y sound, see you imitate the teacher; for instance, if he pronounce i— a " iya," or o — a " owa." For between certain vowels occurring together, such a consonantal sound often arises, though theoretically it is not required.
a — e e — a a — i i — a
a — o o — a a — u u — a
e — i i — e i — o o — i
o — e e — o i — u u — i
u — e e — u o — u u — o.
Exercise 3. — Repeat Exercise 2, and then go through the following as a test exercise, saying the contrasted pairs together with the teacher as before.
Pair 1. a — o, a — u.
Pair 2. [ o — u, o — 0.
Pair 3. e — i, e— e.
These present resemblances in sound, which it is exceedingly easy for the English learner to confuse ; and as several of them are of very common occurrence in the language, it is well to guard against an habitual mis- pronunciation— so very easily picked up — from the outset, and to test in this way the effect of the previous exercises in " clarifying " the voice.
34 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Exercise 4. — The following actual Swahili words con- sist entirely of vowels.
au, ai ! (oh I of admiration), oa, ua, aoa, aua, aoe, aue, aoae, uuao, uuae, auuae, uuuao, auae, auuao, aiuae.
The meanings of these words are quite unnecessary to be learnt at the present stage, and if given would only confuse.
NOTE. — Just as o has two sounds, one open and "forward" in the mouth, and the other close and "high" (as in the examples given above of " toe " and " lo ! " respectively), so the other vowels have each an open and a close sound. However, as these distinctions are not so important in their practical use as they are in some neigh- bouring languages, and as the close and the open sounds of the vowels are unvarying in the words in which they occur, it has been thought sufficient at this stage to remark, that of all the five, the sound which is the most important linguistically is the o in its contrasts, and it is that one which should be mastered to begin with.
Exercise 5. — Practise pronouncing with the teacher this series of five vowels with a " catch in the voice " before each :
'a 'e 'i 'o 'u
The (') represents what is called in Arabic a " hamza." It enters into certain interjectional sounds common in the language.
'a 'a strongly spoken, with stress oa the first 'a, means " No ! "
'a 'a 'a is yet stronger, the stress as before on the last 'a but one, and means " Not at all ! "
'ee, gently sustained, — a woman's word for " Yes ! "
CONSONANTS.
We will comment on those only that seem to require notice.
W has two sounds :
1. The ordinary English sound, when it follows on another consonant.
2. The letter, when it stands alone before the vowel,
PHONETICS 15
has something of a v sound, which is however more w than v.
NOTE. — This letter is liable to mispronunciation by some East Africans, not Swahilis, as if it were the ordinary w in English.
T" has its English sound. It is not written between i and a.
Exercise 6. — Pronounce with the teacher the following words, neglecting for the present their meaning : —
Wa, ya, yao, yawa, wayawaya, uwayewaye, wewe, yeye, wao, wawao, yaua, yawaua, iwauayo, wa wayawaya, wawayawayao, wao wauawe wao, iwe wewe wauawa.
(H) In Swahililand " poor letter h " is far from having lost its importance — indeed, Swahili without its h sounds, would be like the play of " Hamlet " without the Prince of Denmark !
(1) The letter in Swahili is usually pronounced exactly at that point of the larynx where the " catch in the throat'' above-mentioned takes place — though this may be neglected by the beginner.
[(2) The letter, when it represents the Arabic ^ (h) in proper names and in certain other words derived from the Arabic, similarly corresponds in its formation to the sound <*• ('), and can be practised after the more im- portant sounds among the Arabic consonants. (See Inset.)]
(3) The " aspirate " belonging to the aspirated con- sonants draws its breath not from the chest, as does the ordinary h (1), but from the breath that has been already passed through the windpipe and stored up in the mouth ; and this will also be treated of in its place.
Exercise 7. — Ha, he, hi, ho, hu.
Haya, hawa, haya hayawi, hao waua, hawa hawaui, huyu awiwa, huyu hawiwi, huyu awawia, huyu hawawii, hawa wawiwa, hawa hawawiwi, huu wawaa, huu hauwai, yaya haya, wao hao, ii hii, wawayawaya wewe, yeye hawaiwai, wawa hawa. (Haa' ! is a very strong negative.)
16 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
(M) Another very common and most important consonant pronounced with the lips lightly pressed together, while the larynx produces sound which passes through the nose.
(1) When the lips are kept together this sound is called " Sonant m " as it forms a syllable of itself without requiring a vowel, and is therefore not strictly speaking a consonant at all (consonant meaning, a letter " only to be sounded with the help of a vowel "). This is a very frequent form of m and, where necessary to distinguish, it is to be written m'.
A variety of the " sonant m " is that —
(2) " Blended " with 6 ; it will be treated of in its place.
(3) Open m, a consonant proper, is produced by the lips opening, not as in English at the centre of the upper lip, which is slightly raised, but rather by gradually drawing down the whole of the lower lip from the corners, the voice or sound from the larynx being sus- tained evenly and gently from the beginning of bringing the lips into position and not " snapped " as in English.
Exercise 8. — Ma, me, mi, mo, mu, m'.1
When this exercise shall have been thoroughly digested and assimilated, say in about a fortnight from the time of commencing it, the pronunciation of these syllables should be made once or twice in the ordinary English way, and the extraordinary contrast that really exists between that and the African pronunciation will become apparent.
Ham', hamu, hamo, ham'muui, m'memuua, haumi, mama, mimi, mee mee, hayawi mema, hawi mwema, maua haya, mwawaua hawa, muwe, wawe, amuoa, hamuoi, hao muwauao, mamae, mamayo, hamuumi, aumia, hauini, haumii, aumie, ham' Waanm, hm'.
(B) Pronounced with the same movement of the lips as TO (3), but the sound is not allowed to escape through the nose, only upon the opening of the lips,
1 This is really a contraction for " mu," the vowel suppressed being alwavs «.
PHONETICS 17
the sound slightly preceding within (with somewhat of the effect of an organ with the swell stop). It therefore differs from the English 6 in the same way as the m.
The full exercise for this letter will be brought in with the consonant p, with which it is closely connected. It will be sufficient here to practise —
Exercise 9. — Ba, bi, bu.
(N) (1) The Swahili n is more palatal than the English, and has a deeper and evener sound.
(2) The Arabic n (nun) is on the contrary more dental — on the teeth — and lighter than the English. The latter need not be practised at present.
Notice the position of the tongue in pronouncing" the n, the fore-edge or point laid evenly across the palate behind the eye teeth on either side (bicuspids).
(3) The " sonant n " (see on " gonant m ") is a frequent sound in Swahili, forming a distinct independent vowelless syllable, the breath and voice being conducted freely through the nose, while the channel through the mouth is stopped.
NOTE. — As the vowel u is always suppressed after the " sonant m " proper, although grammatically required, so the vowel i is often required to be understood after the " sonant n."
(4) " Blended n" which differs from " sonant n " in the same way as " blended m " does from " sonant m " not forming a syllable by itself, will be discussed in its proper place. We need only practise varieties (1) and (3) at this point.
Exercise 10. — Na, ne, ni, no, nu, n'.1
Nina, n'na, n'nani ? n'nini ? amenona, n'nene, mvi him n'nauona, nna iiini? wewe u nani? m' nani na nani? anionae n'naui? nawaona, ham'nioni, n'na nini mimi na wewe ? amuonae humuua, humuua amuonae, huua m'no, huua m'no-m'no, 'n ' ! — hn' ! — 'n'n' !
1 Practise these syllables in the same way as M' was, and with the same conditions. The vowel suppressed after a sonant n is i. SWAHILI GRAMMAR B
18 SWAHILI GEAMMAR
(D) D holds the same relation to n as I to m — it is pronounced from the same point as n and with the tongue in the same position. It therefore differs from English d in being pronounced further back on the palate from the teeth. The voice must be uttered from the throat exactly at the time the tongue is brought into position, and not, as in English d, just after that instant.
Exercise 11. — Da, de, di, do, du.1
Dada, dede Dodo, Dada, auenae nae n' nani ? anenae ni mwanayo, ni Dede, mdudu huyu wamuona ? ni include wa nini ? Ya Dodo ni ya mamae ? rndinru him umeao ni wa baba, midomo yao ni minene m'no, da da, wana hawa wanidona-dona.
Dental d will be further noticed later, and the " blends " of both.
(L) (1) The native I formed on the palate and front teeth, by the blade and point of the tongue (the English I being formed chiefly by the point of the tongue behind the front teeth), the tongue being convex and not concave as in English I.
(2) The Arabic I on the other hand, though pronounced with the convex tongue, is more dental than the English, but need not be practised.
Exercise 12. — La, le, li, lo, lu.
NOTE. — In two or three words a double "1" occurs, and these are all of Arabic derivation, and in which the first I of the // can often be traced to an original n — they are Allahu, God ; ilia, and its derivatives, except, but ; illi, in order that ; killa or kulla, every.
Lala, lele-mama, lulu, ulili, lilo hilo, alilo nalo, lialiwi n nani aliye lala? lini ? n lini? na alale, lalani lualaloni. Hana mali, aliyo nayo ni ya Mola (a name for God).
(R) (1) A souncl formed by trilliny the rim of the concave but well extended front of the tongue. Being trilled it stands in contrast to the English sound, but is entirely d ifferent from the French and German sounds.
1 Practise these sounds in the same way as those above.
PHONETICS 19
(2) The Arabic r is much more strongly trilled than the Swahili, but need not be practised in these exercises. Hwahili r and I are often confounded by some natives, especially by Zanzibar is.
Exercise 13. — Ra, re, ri, ro, ru.
Bara, bahari, Kabai, heri, mara habari, mabaharia waharibu, marere ni inororo, minara ni miema. Kabai na Ribe, ni heri Eabai, ni heri Ribe ? Rabi (a name for God).
We are now again to take up the nasal or n sounds. These are very frequent indeed in the language in the mechanism of which n plays a distinguished part, as will be more plain further on when we come to th» numerous aspirates and blends which that letter forms with other consonants. The two consonants we are now to discuss, — although each is represented, owing 1o the exigencies of the Roman alphabet, by two letters apiece, — are quite simple sounds, and not compounded of n and the other consonant which follows it. This fact must bo grasped to begin with, so that the eye is not allowed to mislead the ear, as would almost certainly occur if the warning is not attended to from the first to regard them as, not compounds, but simple sounds.
NY. Pronounced with the back of the tongue against the palate, the point being all the while kept well down ; a nasal sound corresponding to the Spanish 5, and not at all to be confrnmded with " ni."
Exercise 14.— Nya, nye, nyi, nyo, nyu.
Yanya, nyanya, uyuni, nyama, nyouyoa, unyo, nyii (cry of hysena^), nyali, nyunia yenu nyoani, m'nyoe, huyu nyanya hanyoi, m'nyonyoe uyuni huyu, nyuni anyonyo- lewa, nyanya hanyolewi, yaninyea, munyu ni wa nyanyae.
(NG-') is nasalised n, as in Eng. " singer," " ringer ; " to be contrasted with ng in finger. Exercise 15. — Practise pronouncing the former as if written si-ng'er, ri-ng'er ; then reverse, thus, ng'er-si, ng'er-ri. NOTE: Further exercises below, in connection with the blend ng (the sound in finger).
20 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
VOICE AND BREATH CONSONANTS. — In every language most of the consonants are divisible into these two classes. Exercise 16. — (a) Utter a loudly whispered hiss, thus, sss. (6) Do this again, only during the hiss, and in the middle of it, practise bringing your voice suddenly into play, and in a moment you will find that the consonant has altered, and you have changed unawares from the sss to a continuous " ezz " sound ; thus ssszzz. The difference therefore between s and z depends upon the voice accompanying the sound or not ; s accordingly is called a breath consonant, and z a voice consonant, (c) Now do the same with fff (efff). On bringing the voice to bear you find yourself beginning to say vw (evvv). (d) Reverse the above, stopping the voice accompaniment in the middle of saying the zzz (ezzz) and vw (ewv), and you will have again the " breath " sounds sss, fff. Further corre- spondences can be traced in the Syllabary, after that we have stopped to examine, first, a few pairs of simple consonants ; and, secondly, consonants in combination with N, and the strange effect it has upon them.
(CH and J.) These are produced very simply with the back of the tongue against the palate, making a soft velvety sound, which some vainly try to imitate by saying them as if ty, dy. Exercise 17. — ja, je, ji, JO, ju ; cha, che, chu ; jana, juzi, chema, jema, chuma, jua, chua.
(K and G.j Somewhat resemble the pair ch and j in their character and method of production. NOTE : Beware of uttering ch or k with the English stress, or you may seem to aspirate them, and so possibly say something quite different from what you intended. (See the table of HOMONYMS.) Exercise 18. — Ka, ke, ki, ko, ku ; ga, ge, gi, go, gu. Jee, Unguja, waja ? siji ; sijui.
(D, T.) From previous practice (p. 18) this pair will come easily, the t corresponding to the d, as s to the z. Exercise 19. — Ta, te, etc. ; dada, tata ; dede, tete ; dodo, toto ; dudu, tutue, mtoni.
(D, T.) A pair contrasted with the preceding in that the utterance is from a point forward of the English sound, the tip of the tongue being laid close against the back ot the upper front teeth (cp. Ar. dal and te).
PHONETICS 21
Exercise 20. — Da, Je, etc. ; /a, te, etc., tata. ; <e/e ; dia, dua. Contrasts : tua m/o wako mtoni ; mti him utfue na rini. Namtuma ku/tima ; natumia aftimacho.
COMPOUNDS OF N; BLENDS AND ASPIRATES. — The rule is that with voice consonants, N forms " blends," but with breath consonants, " aspirates " ; thus : Blends, mb, mv, nj, ng, nz. Aspirates, ch', p', k', t', t'. In the blends ng, mb, we have the hard (English) sounds of g, b, and similarly the soft sounds of ch and j in ch' and nj become hard as English ch and j ; while d in nd has a strange " cerebral " sound like a rolled r. N before v becomes rav ; before s and f it is simply absorbed and disappears. Note that the aspirates are pronounced with the supply of breath already in the mouth, and not from the chest.
Exercise 21. — (a) Practise mba, nda, nga, nza as single syllables, e.g. not as if emba, but as mba. (6) Go through the whole five vowels with mb, — as mba, mbe, mbi, etc. (c) And with nz, ng, nj, nd, nd. (d) Practise similarly t'a, t'e, t'i, t'o ; and go through the vowels also with t', p', ch', and k'. (e) Practise the Homonyms (see end. of book) with your teacher. (/ ) Go through the Syllabary, and get your teacher to fit each syllable as far as possible with a meaning, or find it in a " living " word.1
1 That difficult interjection "Mng'wpc" described in African Aphorisms, § 396, will form aii excellent vocal gymnastic; and so will the " click assentive," used by womeii, and produced by drawing down the back of the tongue from the soft palate at the same time that, with a rapid jerk, the chin is thrown into the air — the lips, meanwhile, being kept well closed.
22
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
SWAH1LI SYLLABARY
a |
e |
i |
o |
u |
a |
e |
t |
o |
H |
ba |
be |
bi |
bo |
bu |
mba |
mbe |
mbi |
mbo |
mbu |
bwa |
bwe |
bwi |
||
bya mbwa |
bye mbwc |
byi mbwi |
||
bywa cha |
bywe che |
bywi chi |
clio |
cliu |
ch'a |
ch'e |
ch'i |
ch'o |
eh'u |
ehwa |
chwo |
chwi |
||
ch'wa |
ch'we |
cli'wi |
||
da |
de |
di |
do |
du |
nda |
udc |
11 di |
ndo |
ndu |
ndwa |
ndwe |
udwi |
||
da |
de |
di |
do |
eta |
nda |
rida |
ndi |
ndo |
ndu |
ndwa |
ndwe |
udwi |
||
dba |
dlie |
dhi |
dho |
dim |
fa |
fe |
fi |
fo |
fu |
i'ya (Zr.) fywa |
fye i'ywe |
fyi fywe |
fyo |
fju |
ga |
ge |
gi |
g° |
gu |
nga |
uge |
ngi |
ngo |
ngu |
ngwa ha |
ngwc he |
ngwi hi |
ho |
hu |
hwa |
hwe |
hwi |
||
ja |
je |
ji |
jo |
ju |
nja |
nje |
nJi |
njo |
nju |
jwa |
jwe |
jwi |
||
jijwa ka |
njwe ko |
njwi ki |
ko |
ku |
kwa |
kwe |
kwi |
||
k'a |
k'e |
k'i |
k'o |
k'u |
k'wa |
k'we |
k'wi |
||
la |
le |
li |
lo |
lu |
l\va |
Iwe |
Iwi |
||
m' |
||||
ma |
me |
mi |
mo |
mil |
mwa |
mwe |
mwi |
||
mja |
mye |
myo |
myu |
|
n' |
||||
na ~2i |
ne |
ni |
no |
nn |
SYLLABARY
23
ng'a |
ng'e |
ng'i |
ng'o |
ng'a |
HWiV |
nwe |
nwi |
||
ng'wa |
ng'we |
ng'wi |
||
nya |
nye |
nyi |
nyo |
nyu |
nj'wa |
nywe |
nywi |
||
pa |
pc |
Pi |
po |
pa |
pwa |
pwe |
pwi |
||
pya |
||||
p'a |
p'e |
p'i |
p'o |
p'u |
p'wa |
p'we |
p'wi |
||
ra |
re |
ri |
ro |
ru |
rwa |
rwe |
nvi |
||
rya |
[rye] |
|||
M |
86 |
si |
80 |
8U |
sha |
she |
•hi |
sho |
shu |
swa |
swe |
swi |
||
shwa |
shwe |
shwi |
* |
|
ta |
to |
ti |
to |
tu |
twa |
twe |
twi |
||
t'a |
t'e |
t'i |
t'o |
t'a |
t'wa |
t'we |
t'wi |
||
Ml |
to |
ti |
to |
<u |
<wa |
twe |
twi |
||
t'a |
t'e |
t'i |
t'o |
t'n |
£'wa |
t'we |
t'wi |
||
tha |
the |
thi |
tho |
thu |
va |
ve |
vi |
vo |
TU |
vwa |
vwe |
vwi |
||
vya |
vye |
vyo |
vyu |
|
wa |
we |
wi |
wo |
\vu |
ya |
ye |
yi |
yo |
yu |
ywa |
ywe |
ywi |
||
za |
ze |
zi |
zo |
zu |
nza |
nze |
nzi |
DZO |
nzu |
zwa |
zwe |
zwi |
||
nzwa |
nzwe |
nzwi |
ARABIC SOUNDS OCCASIONALLY USED, TO BE PRACTISED WITH ARABS FROM ARABIA.
a
'a ha
gfca
sa
'dhs.
ta
ka
he
Mo
ghc
bi
Mi
si dhi
ti ki
ho leho gho so
"u (hamza) 'a ('am) hu (he) khu (Me) ghu (ghain) su (sad) dhu'(dh&d) tu (te) kn (kaQ
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
PART II
There is no article proper in Swahili, neither definite, in- definite, nor partitive.
The Swahili Verb has no special interrogative Form. The difference between statement and question is made solely by the voice.
STUDY I
-Greetings
nduguyo, your brother (or sister). jee = ? or ! (generally precedes a
question), bwana (v.), sir, gentleman, master,
lord.
bibi (v.), madam, lady, mistress, bwanawangu, my master, dear sir. bibiyangu, my mistress, dear
madam, mimi, I, me. wewe, thou, thee. yeye, he, him, she, her. na, and, with, gani? what? which? nami, and I, with me. nawe, and thou, with thee. nae, and he (or she), with him
(or her).
naam, yes (classical). ndiyo, yes (general). la, no (classical), siyo, no (general), sana, very, quite, indeed, a great
deal, too much.
mwana (i.), child, son, daughter, mwanayo, your child. Marahaba ! Thank you, it is well, -ema, good.
Jambo ? How are you ? 1 familiar
Good day ! \saluta-
Jatnbo ! Well. Good day ! ) tion. Hu jambo ? Are you well ? How
do you do ? Are you better? Si jambo. I am well [thank you].
I am better. U hali (iii.) gani? Are you
feeling well ? Ni hali njema. I am quite well
[thank you]. Yu hali gani? How is he? la
he quite well ? Yu hali njema. He is quite well
[thank you]. Ha jambo? Is he (or she) well
or better ? How is he ? Ha jambo. He (or she) is well or
better.
Good morning ! Good evening ! Good-bye! Go in
Sabalkheri ! Msaalkheri ! Kwa heri!
happiness. Kwa herini (plur.).
happiness. Ahasan/a ! Thank you ! You have
done well ! This is good news ! ndugu (iii.), brother, sister.
Go (ye) in
NOTE. — In the Exercises square brackets [ ] denote that the word they enclose is to be left untranslated.
NOTE. — Roman Numerals placed after a noun indicate the class it telongs to. Arabic Numerals preceding a word refer to a footnote.
STUDY I 25
Bead and Translate
Bwana na bibi. Mimi na bwana wangu. Wewe na mwanayo. Mimi na wewe na yeye. Bibiyangu na ndu- guyo. l Jambo. Jambo sana. Sabalkheri ! Bwana, jambo? Jambo. 2Uhaligani? 2Ni hali njema. Jee, nawe, u liali njema? Ni hali njema sana. 3Hujambo? 3 Si jambo. Ahasanta ! Bibi, jambo! Jambo! Nawe liu jambo? Mimi si jambo ahasanla. Jee, 4nduguyo, aha jambo? Ha jambo bibi. Na 4 mwanayo, yu liali iiaui? 2Yu liali njema sana. Ahasanta! Msaalkheri, 5 bwana. 5 Bibi, 6 kwa heri. Kwa heri.
Translate
Good morning ! How are yon, Madam ? Very well, thank you, Sir. Are you feeling well? Quite well, thank you. How do you do, Sir? I am well, thank you. Is my master well ? He is quite well. And my mistress, is she well? She is quite well. How is your brother? He is quite well, thank you. How is your sister ? Thank you, Sir, she is quite well. He and you and I. My master. Dear Madam. Your brother. Good evening, sir. Good evening, Madam. Yes ! No ! Good-bye.
1 Lit. " affair," " matter," plur. mambo (v.), used idiomatically as a greeting.
2 Ni, u, yu = three pers. sing., pres. indie., strong verb " to be," conjugated with hali (state), refer to state of health (also tu, mu, tea, in plur.).
* Si, hu, 7ta = thrce pers. sing., neg., pres. indie., strong verb " to be," conjugated with/amfio, stand for, ''Is there nothing the matter with you ? " " There is nothing the matter with me," etc. (also hatu, hamu, hawa, in plur.).
4 -Yo = yaJto, thy (poss. adj.).
s A noun may, by its structure, belong to one of the irrational classes and form its plural accordingly (e.g. mabwana, mabibi), and yet by its meaning belong to the living being or sentient class. In this case it usually takes the concords of Cl. I. As Huyu Inoana yuaja (this gentleman is coming), wale mabibi hawaji (those ladies are not coming). See " Groundwork of Swahili Language," bv Kev. W. E. Taylor, published by 8.P.C.K.
0 Lit. " for good."
26
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
SIMPLE TABLE
CLASS I. |
CLASS 11. CLASS III. CLASS IV. CLASS V. |
||||
Kational. |
Irrational. |
||||
MT'U |
MTI |
N |
Kl |
(MA) |
|
or |
or |
or |
or |
or |
|
Sentient Class. |
Tree Class. |
Species Class. |
Small ThingClase |
Action Class. |
|
Sing. Plur. |
Sinff. Plur. |
King. Plur. |
Sing. Plur. |
Sinff. Plur. |
|
Classifier |
M' Mu Wa |
M' Mu Mi |
N N |
Ki Vi |
(Ji) Ma |
Prefix |
|||||
Typical JVotm |
m't'u wat'u person people |
rrtl miti tree trees |
nyumba nyumba house houses |
k'itu vit'u thing things |
jina majina name, names |
man men |
|||||
Typical Adjective |
mdogo wadogo short, little, |
mrefu mirefu tall, high, |
k'ubwa k'ubwa great, big, large |
kibaya vibaya bad |
jipya mapya new |
|
long |
||||
Remarks |
Includes only |
Not anim- |
Both animates |
S o me t h i n g |
Many verb- |
on Class |
nouns which |
ates. Wide- |
and inani- |
small and |
al nouns |
Character- |
represent |
spre a d i n g |
mates. Most |
compnct |
denot i n g |
istics |
persons,some |
exten s i v e |
animals and |
action. |
|
•words of for- |
things, e.g. |
fruits. Com- |
Large |
||
eign origin |
moto, mto, |
mon nouns of |
things. |
||
and verbal |
mkono |
foreign origin. |
Fo r e i g n |
||
nouns denot- |
In this class |
nouns of |
|||
ing "agent." |
nouns begin- |
office |
|||
Names and |
ning with ch, |
||||
nouns of any |
k, p, t, t (un- |
||||
other class, |
less foreign) |
||||
representing |
are aspirated |
||||
persons, take |
thus — ch', k', |
||||
the agree- |
p', t', t' |
||||
ments of |
|||||
Class I. |
STUDY I
27
OF CONCORDS
CLASS VI. CLASS VII. |
CLASS VIII. CLASS IX. CLASS X. |
|||
Irrational. |
Locatives and Time. |
|||
(Jl) |
U (0. & W.) |
PA |
KU |
MU (Plur. of VIII. |
or |
and |
or |
or |
and IX.) or |
Monster Class. |
A bstract Class. |
^^ Place Class. |
Motion Class. |
Within Class. |
Locative Termination -Nl. |
||||
Sinff. Plur. |
Sinff. Plur. |
Stuff, and Plur. |
||
(Ji) Ml |
U Nyu |
Pa |
Ku |
Mu |
or -ni suffix |
or -ni suffix |
or -nl suffix |
||
ubaya |
(nyumba) -ni pa at or by the |
(uyumba) -ni kwa to or towards the |
(nyumba)-ni mwa Sinff. within |
|
(house) |
(house) |
(house) |
||
Plur. to the |
||||
(houses |
||||
jit'u mijit'u |
uzl nyuzi |
pahali |
kufa |
mwahali |
ill-conditioned person persons |
string strings udogo |
a place (" somewhere") |
to die, death, " dying |
places |
nyonge minyonge |
m'bovu mbovu |
pazuri |
kwangu |
mpana |
mean, weak |
rotten |
beautiful |
my |
broad |
ubovu, rotten |
||||
(used with ab- |
||||
stract nouns) |
||||
Abnormal things |
Names of countries. Qualities. |
The va r i a b 1 e prep o s i t i o n pa (of) and |
The variable preposition Kwa (of) and |
The variable preposition mwa (of) and |
Plural con- |
prefix pa or p |
prefix kw fol- |
prefix mu or m |
|
cords same |
following the |
lowing the lo- |
following the |
|
as Cl. III. |
locative, de- |
cative, denote |
locative (ex- |
|
note rest in, |
motion to- |
pressed or |
||
or at, a place |
wards a place. |
understood) |
||
N.B.— The lo- |
denote — (1) |
|||
cative m a y |
within (sinff.), |
|||
often be only |
(2) to, towards |
|||
underst o o d — |
(plia:) |
|||
not expressed |
28
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
STUDY II
Watumishi — Servants
m't'u (i.), man, person, somebody.
m'toto (i.), boy, child (boy or girl).
'maji (v. pi.), water.
moto (ii.), fire, heat.
k'itu (iv.), thing, substance,
something, anything, n'/aa (iii.), hunger, famine, pssa (iii.), pice, zainu (iii.), turn, watch, 'mafata (v. pi.), oil, fat. /aa (iii.), lamp, k'elele (iii.), noise, k'engele (iii.), bell, kazi (iii.), work, task, employ- ment.
sabrmi (iii.), soap, nguo (iii.), cloth, clothes, chakula (iv.), food, bread, a meal, ki/ambaa (iv.), duster, towel, rag. mwenzi (i.), companion, fellow,
equal, ku-tumika, to serve, to be in
service.
ku-sikia, to hear, to feel, ku-tezama, to look, to look at. ku-twaa, to take, ku-oga, to bathe, ku-nawa (mikono), to wash
(hands).
ku-fua, to wash (lit. beat) clothes. ku-osha, to wash, to cleanse
(things). ku-la, to eat. ku-isna, iini.sh. kisha, ukisha, ( = when you have
finished) then.
ku-ja, to come.
ku-fanya, to do, to make.
kw-enda, to go.
ku-pata, to get, to have, to bo
able, kn-lala, to sleep (primarily, to
lie down, to go to bed). ku-nunua, to buy, to purchase, ku-leta, to bring. ku-?aka. to want, to require, ku-nyamaza, to be quiet, silent, ku-weza, to be able, to " can.'' ku-ru'/i, to come back, return,
punish.
ku-sahau, to foriM. ku-tengeza, to prepare, to arrange,
set in readiness, ba'fo, not yet. haifai, it won't do. sasa, now. sasa hivi, just now, at once,
directly.
pia, also, too, as well, altogether. in, only, just, fena, again, and ... as well,
besides, also, moreover, basi, enough, that will do then ! upesi, quick, quickly, fast. kwa, by means of, for, from, by,
with, to.
vizuri i well, very well, good ! vyemaj nicely, beautifully. haya ! Come along ! Now then !
All right ! Here ! lini 1 when ? -a, of.
1 See "General Xotes on Nouns," note 2, Study XXI.
STUDY II 29
Read and Translate
Mtoto, 2 ndoo. - Leto maji. Naam, Bibi, 3 n'tfaleta sasa hivi. Haya, upesi! Wasikia? Nasikia, Bibi. Twatfaka chakula sasa. Vyema, Bibi, 3 tuteleta upesi. Jee, Bibi. Wasikia ndaa? Nyamaza, mtoto, fanya 4kazi <u. Haya, Bibi, nimeleta chakula. Jee, mtoto, umeleta [5na] maji? 6 Mwenzangu 3alileta, Bibi. Basi sasa waweza kwenda k(u)oga. Kudi upesi. Ndiyo, Bibi. 6 Mwenzangu ateka maji 7 ya moto na sabuni. Vyema, 3 atfapata. Mwafanya k'elele sana, watoto ! TwaJaka (ku)lala. Bibi, nataka pesa nipate kununua chakula. Haya basi, twaa pesa. Enda upesi. Ahasania, Bibi !
Translate
Have you brought [the] lamp, boy? Not yet, Ma'am, my fellow [servant] 8 has gone to buy oil. 9 When will he come back? He will come back directly, Ma'am. Have you washed [your] clothes? Yes, Ma'am, I have washed [them]. Did you wash (and) the duster? No, Ma'am, 1 forgot [it]. Can you bring [some] water? Yes, Ma'am, I can. My fellow [servant] has come now, Ma'am, it is (m) 10 his (yakive) turn to serve. Very well, let him bring [the] food then, we want to eat. Ba quiet, boy, you make too much noise, it won't do. Very well, Ma'am, I will be quiet DOW. Bring [the] lamp quickly, we want to look at something. That will do, you can go now.
2 .ZVdoo = imperative of kuja. Lete = imperative of kuleta. These are the only two irregular imperatives in Swahili. All others retain the final vowel of the stem, e.g. shika, hold ! samehe, forgive ! rud/, return ! titbu, repent !
3 The objective particle may be omitted in familiar language.
4 Tako (your) understood.
5 Conjunctions are used more freely in Swahili than in English.
0 Contraction of " mwenzi wangu " (my fellow-companion). For contracted suffixes see Study XVI.
7 Lit. " water of heat," i.e. hot water or water just from the fire. See Study XI. for variable preposition "of" or " from."
8 Kwenda, to go, kwisha, to finish, and all monosyllabic verbs retain the ku of the infin. in certain tenses. Vide Study VI.
8 The interrogative, like other adverbs, follows the verb in Swahili.
10 Adjectives usually follow their substantives.
30
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
w |
00 |
>-, o e s o> W "g |
§ 1 |
S |
II |
(C O |
|
S5 "*"* |
en |
||||||
1— 1 H 1— 1 CO |
.5 | |
w d EH PH H 0 g B |
•5 |
& a _J. |
of • fco s ^ -C P |
1C ,5 Cl a o |
|
O |
S H |
• |
---^^~" |
cT «T aT |
o o |
O |
|
T |
s |
^ 1 |
M tC |
I |
5S3 — — p |
.§ j 'N '"" |
-4-> |
g |
"SI |
'C |
CH |
'S |
f |
oT |
fl |
t^f |
-2 |
"a |
s |
- 2 «T |
d 3 |
<y |
|
_ |
^"*> |
u |
.2 |
o S ** c |
g =s |
c |
|
H |
•«" |
S |
| |
a |
2 g^ ^ |
& |
|
O <J cl |
m |
p § ° M r^. |
5 £ £ |
'3 of a "a |
s 1 1 i 1 |
|l ill |
§ |
P5 |
M |
H |
_; |
(N CO |
i-i i<i «' |
2 |
|
w |
.8 |
^ |
CO |
||||
i-S |
UH EH |
,2 |
|||||
P3 |
sT •«* |
O |
_s |
S |
"o |
||
< |
_c |
S |
'-i4 |
X |
3 |
m o |
|
P O |
•4 o 2 |
^ = |
S o |
'•*• o |
^ "a- •w ® |
«a I |
|
« |
D . pt, .Qi 1 -^ |
o "o |
si |
^ |
•S o ~ % |
*3 a |
|
K |
kx< •" |
w ^^ |
'"" i |
Ji |
ill 1 |
'§ c a |
|
w |
be |
w S |
o? |
o cf K |
0 |
||
P-; i— i |
1 S |
— fl C"1 o H H |
J-3: |
60 C fe S *" |
60 <o O > 3 03 |
a O |
|
W |
•** |
W -^ |
CQ |
|
^^ s "^ |
s—~~—^. ~ |
"^ |
PH CC |
00 |
1 *** |
d X |
ff — is |
«? 1 |
H |
|
B^ |
(S -g |
tc |
r2 |
„ |
|||
a |
5 |
£ |
cf -" |
2* |
|||
*5» |
"3 |
>-> c< |
> y> |
||||
^~ |
at |
.5 |
— " Jj' |
~ -^ |
|||
ja |
s |
^ '£ |
S — |
||||
O |
o |
., , |
r & "S |
-5 a
5 a
S . . vi
STUDY II
31
" 1 1 |
•S -S |
.•a R 1 |
G I |
3 |
1. |
ri P |
|
o ~ |
"*"* •• t£ |
-9s c8 ^^ o |
• •-T |
f \^ |
|||
£ "5 si s |
o aijj |
-5 "±: as 'S'N- 1 |
"5 g |
/-N 13 |
S |
•33 |
'5 „ |
6 | |
»- c3 «^ |
«-.•§ o |
1 |
k o |
3 |
ii a |
s"^ |
P |
j3 ». 03* |
"rH rf* |
o |
^^ |
p |
• r-l |
*"H .— r |
(3 |
^" -2 "P |
C*"S |
^ |
•— '^« rW P |
.- — '^ |
||
•g c3 os'^ -^ |
"S •" "os "^ |
•g |
3 IS |
'-^4«S |
^ 5^'eS "^ |
||
£ |
"75 a |
S 8 p |
g |
H |
"p 03 |
5 a ^ |
|
8 |
|||||||
ft |
r-I i>i CO |
r-I <?i CO |
£ |
1-H |
c<i eo' |
r-!iN CO |
rf
5 S * r-! csico'
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
*••<•».<«•
f 1 to n 3 *• ** tJD |
| |
,5 >*H M a |
to a <H 'N |
1 1 (fl o, 1 J |
M EC |
| O 0 OP t£ tf. it |
|||||
S «i |
§ < |
I |
cT |
1 £ li |
£ |
^ |
ff |
= = = |
|||
n 0 0 |
| 27, IMPERATIVE | 2»rf 7'Zur. k |
-PRESENT AND P |
Pers. Pronominu |
'3 5 a 1 « 7^ CO |
;ween the pronomi , and let him tie. 3 terminal change OOD.— PAST TEI "article -nge- or -n |
Pers. Prunoinina! |
q 9 to |
Jp :. "a |
ci N >. eo |
N |
|
IMPERATI |
tie (Mou). SUBORDINATE rim/ tie (thou). |
BJUNCTIVE MOOD.- |
"i -x' i | S ^£ S ^ |
Subjunctive insert IM bel Ex. — Akafunge, end in e, i, or n, make m CONDITIONAL M Characteristic Tenso F i |
'i jl C w |
J "s |
'•" -5 ^ 0 |
||||
of g |
P |
aT |
to |
03 to |
|||||||
CQ |
8 |
~o3 <o ^ .2 "S £ |
£ |
||||||||
6=1 *3 |
' ^^ ""x. "S s _• -^ T — r~^ |
||||||||||
i ^ |
M S3 |
pf |
.S | - ? |
I te |
« « ii |
||||||
c^ |
£ |
3 |
£ |
mr. |
•S a a |
P |
|||||
•~ fts |
fi |
.^ t. ^ ^ |
O |
•f* |
-r- P |
-X |
|||||
S .g |
"3 |
o |
1 |
"3 |
to |
3} |
of |
||||
M ^ |
*"s |
w •-. |
c |
Q |
to |
to |
|||||
-a |
S O |
s" |
1 |
'ti |
2 |
^ v — |
OJ 0 |
||||
~i |
| |
1 |
1 |
o |
6 |
'^ |
a " |
tc ti |
|||
pg, |
H J- O *i fc |
§> £ |
0 to a |
C |
l"a |
||||||
DD |
'S 9 of |
£ |
'ft |
P |
03 |
STUDY III
STUDY III
Walimu — Teachers
mwalimu (i.), teacher, professor, learned man, schoolmaster.
mwanafunri (i.), scholar, pupil.
chuo (iv.), book.
wino (no pi.) (vii.), ink.
kalamu (iii.), pen, pencil.
peseli, peniseli (iii.), pencil.
harufu (iii.), letter (of alphabet), scent, smell, odour.
lugha (iii.), language, tongue.
kiti (iv.), chair.
meza (iii.), table.
neno (v.), word.
maana (v. pi.), meaning, reason, because.
maana yakwe, its or their mean- ing.
leo, to-day.
jana, yesterday.
nciia (iii.), way, road, street, path.
lafarfhali, please, if you please.
kujifunza, to learn.
ku-soma, to read, to go to school, to study.
ku-aniiika, to write.
ku-sema, to speak, to say, to talk.
ku-<amka, to pronounce.
ku-ambia, to tell.
ku-sikiza, to listen.
ku-endeleza, to spell.
ku-jua, to know.
ku-elea, to be clear, to enlighten.
ku-shika, to hold, to catch, to seize, to take.
ku-ona, to see, to find, ku-weka, to put, place, put-by,
ordain, appoint, ku-jaribu, to try, to test, to
tempt, ku-furahi, to be pleased, happy,
glad.
ku-uliza, to ask (a question), ku-jibu, to answer, ku-fundisha, kofunza, to teach, ku-pa, to give. ku-k'ed, to sit down, to stay, to
dwell.
nini ? what ? (pron.). gani ? what (adj.). matamko (v.), pronunciation, kw-anza, to begin, kwanza, first, kw-isha, to finish, kisha, then (when that is finished),
afterwards, also. ku-chelewa, to be late, labuda, perhaps, that may be. mbonal why? hawezi, he is sick, sana, thoroughly (or any adverb
expressing completeness). karatasi, paper, masuali
(v.), questions.
masiala
mauzo
maulizo
majibu (v.), answer.
msteri (ii.), a line.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
34 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
1 Bead and Translate
Jee, mwalimu amekuja? Bado, Bibi, yuaja sasa, namuona 2n<iiani. Bwana, jambo ! Jambo Bibi ! Mtoto lete viti. Bwana, k'efi. Abasan/a, Bibi, 3nimek'efi. Sasa naiaka kalamu na karatasi. Haya, Bwana, fafadhali shika kalamu. Watfaka 4 niandike mimi ? Naam, Bibi, jaribu kuancZika sasa. Jee umekwisha 5 andika ? Ndiyo, mwa- limu, nimekwisha. Basi, sasa 4na/aka usome. Nisome chuo gani ? Soma chuo 6 cha kwanza. Soma maneno. TJkisha, 7 nambia 8 maana 9 yakwe. 10 Yakwelea ? Naam, mwalimu, yanelea sana. Wajua maana 9 yakwe ? Najuu. Vyema Bibi, soma /ena. Ukisha, endeleza maneno. Soma sana nipate kusikia. Tamka vyema maneno njifunzo kusoma vizuri.
1 The English custom of suppressing titles in the conversation of equals would appear abrupt and discourteous if attempted in Swahili.
2 "-ni" suffixed to nouns denotes locative case, and may be variously translated by the prepositions by, at, to, within, on, of, from, etc. See Table of Concords.
3 Most Swahili verbs of posture really signify the taking up of a position, e.g. kuk'eti = to sit on the ground. Hence the perfect tcnst- (nimek'e/i) = I have taken up a position (J am seated), and the Present Tense (nak'efi) = I am in the act or habit of (sitting) and so, in this case, has come to mean I dwell, or stay.
4 Here the Swahili construction analyzes more logically than the English " me to write."
5 After an auxiliary, the Infin. Jcu of the principal verb is frequently omitted.
« See note 7, Study II.
7 Contraction of nianibia. All objective particles preceding imperatives, require the final a of the stem (either primary or derivative) to change to e, except when the 1st pors. sing. obj. particle precedes, in which case the final a is retained. E.g. Nipeleka, Nipelekani, Nipelekea, but Mpeleke, Tupeleke, Wapelekee.
8 See "General Notes on Nouns," note 2, Study XXI.
9 Yakwe (not yao, although it refers to words). N.B. — Possessive adjectives, having reference to inanimate objects, never take a plural form.
10 Lit. " Are they clear to you ? " — maana has no sing.
STUDY in 35
Translate
Why is [the] teacher late to-day ? Perhaps he is n ill. No ! He is coming now. Good-morning, teacher, are you feeling well ? Quite well, thank you. [Do] sit down. 12Give me a book, please, Bibi, and you take a book and read. Now put the book 13on [the] table and listen. I will ask you questions. Very good ! And I will try to answer. That will do now, you have answered well. I am very pleased. Do you want ink ? Yes (I want) and a pencil (also). The pupil is trying to speak the Swahili language (luglia ya Ki-swahili). He can read [the] letters. When did he begin? I taught him [the] first line yesterday.
11 The Pres. Indie, of kuweza, to be able, conjugated negatively, stands for "I am sick," etc. To express the primary meaning " I am not able," etc., the Neg. Fut. is frequently used " sifaweza," etc.
12 See note 7 (p. 32).
13 See Note 2.
36
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
TABLE OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS— WITH
SEPARABLE PHONOUNS (those that can
Class I. |
Class 11. |
Class III. |
Class IV. |
|
Singular Subjective and Objectice |
mimi, I or me wewe, thou or thee yeye, he or him, she or her |
uo, that same (tree) |
iyo, that game (house) |
kicho, that same (thing) |
Plural Subjective and Objectiee |
swiswi, we or us nywinywi, ye or you wao, they or them |
iyo, those same (trees) |
zizo, those same (houses) |
vivyo, those same (things) |
Singular Abbreviated Pronoun |
mi, I or me we, thou or thee ye, e, he or him, she or her |
o, it (the tree) |
yo, it (the house) |
cho, it (the thing) |
Plural Abbreviated Pronoun |
swi, we or us nywi, ye or you o, they or them |
yo, they (the trees) |
20, they (the houses) |
vyo, they (the things) |
Other separable pronouns are nani! (who?) and nini 1 (what?) — both indeclin-
other). The latter threo
By prefixing na to the abbreviated form, we get the conjunctive pronoun— And
thing) By prefixing ndi- we obtain the Emphatic
INSEPARABLE PRONOUNS (those bound
Class I. |
Class II. |
Class HI. |
Class IV. |
|
Singular |
ni, n', I |
u, w, it (tree) |
I, y, it (house) |
ki, oh, it |
Subjective |
a, w, thou |
(thing) |
||
Prefix |
a, yu, he or she |
|||
Plural |
tu, tw, we |
i, y, they |
zi, z, they |
vi, vy, they |
Subjective |
ma, mw, m', you |
(trees) |
(houses) |
(things) |
Prefix |
wa, w, they |
|||
Singular |
ni, n, me |
u, w, it (tree) |
i, y, U (house) |
ki, ch, it |
Objective |
ku, kw, k, thee |
(thing) |
||
Infix or |
mu, mw, m', him or |
|||
Prefx |
her |
|||
Plural |
tu, tw, us |
i, y, them |
«i, z, them |
vi, vy, them |
Objective |
wa, w, you |
(trees) |
(houses) |
(things) |
Infix or |
wa, w, them |
|||
Prefix |
-ni, the abbreviated form of nini (what *) can be suffixed to any
NOTE. — The objective infix immediately precedes the stem of the verb.
NOTE. — The " mu (3rd pers. sing, obj.) is used
STUDY III
37
PRONOMINAL PREFIXES AND INFIXES.
stand alone as independent words).
Class V. |
Class VI. |
Class VII. |
Class VIII. |
Class IX. |
Class X. |
lilo, that eame (word) |
lilo, that same (mon- ster) |
no, that same (string) |
papo, that same (place) "just there " |
kuko, that same (direc- tion) "just there" |
|
yayo, those same (words) |
iyo, those same (mon- sters) |
zizo, those same (strings) |
mumo, those same plucea "just there- in" |
||
lo, it (the word) |
lo, it (the monster) |
o, it (the string) |
po, it (the place) |
ko, it (the dying or direction) |
|
yo, they (the words) |
yo, they (the monsters) |
zo, they (the strings) |
mo,they (the places) |
able — mwenyewe (himself), mwenyi (having, possessing), mwengine (another,
are declinable (see p. 62).
I, and me (/tarn/) ; and he, with her (nae) ; and it (the word) (nalo) ; with it (the
(nac/io), eti1.
Present of the Verb " To Be." See Study XIV.
up in the construction of the verb).
Class V. |
Class VI. |
Class VII. |
Class VIII. |
Class IX. |
Class X. |
li, 1, it (word) |
li, 1, it (mon- ster) |
u, w, it (string) |
pa, p, it (place) |
ku, kw, it (dying) |
|
ya, y, they (words) li, 1, it (word) |
1, y, they (monsters) li, 1, it (mon- ster) |
zi, z, they (strings) u, w, it (string) |
pa, p, it (place) |
ku, kw, it (dying) |
ma, mw, m', they (places) |
ya, y, them (words) |
i, y, them (monsters) |
zi, z, them (strings) |
mu, mw, m', them (places) |
verb as an inseparable particle. Wafanyani 1 What are you doing ? It is generally expressed as well as the noun in the objective case, before the vowels o and u, and sometimes before «.
38
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
STUDY IV
Nyumbani — In the house
mlango (ii.), door, entrance.
ufunguo (yii.), key.
ukumbi (vii.), ball.
roshani (iii.), balcony.
</araja (v.), stairs, steps (of stone).
dirisha (v.), window.
chumba (iv.), bedroom, room.
ghala (v.), store-room.
sakafu (iii.), flat stone roof or
pavement.
dari (v.), house-top, roof, orofa (vii.), upper storey, sebule (iii.), private room, ua (vii.), courtyard, baraza (v.), verandab. kizingifi (iv.), door-step, mkeka (ii.), mat. zulia (v.)> carpet. Moo (iv.), mirror, p'aka (iii.), cat. ku-angalia, to regard, to behold,
to visit, to be careful, ku-panda, to go up, come up,
climb.
ku-sb.uka, to come down, go down, ku-funga, to sbut, close, ku-fungua, to undo, open. ku-<oka, to go out, to come from,
leave (situation), come out. ku-ngia, to go in, come in, come
on (of rains, etc.). ku-pea, ku-fyagia (z'bar), to
sweep.
ku-sugua, to rub, polish, clean, ku-safi, to clean, cleanse. ku-/afute, to look for, search, ku-ita, to call.
ku-sihi, to beseech, pray (peremp- tory), ku-teka, to laugh, to mock at,
smile.
ku-lia, to cry, weep, ku-ngoja, to wait, to wait for. a! oh!
n'de, out, outside, n'dani, in, inside. <'ini, down, below, juu, up, upstairs, over, above,
against, wapi ? where ? kidogo (adv.), a little, rather. wazi (indecl. adj. and adv.),
open, ajar, clear.
siku (iii.), day, twenty-four hours, nsiku (vii.), night. m/ana (ii.), day-time, mid-day, kucha (ix.), dawn, sunrise, kuiwa (ix.), sunset. miana kuiwa (or kuiwa), all day
long, usiku kucha (or kucha), all night
long.
tele, much, many, plenty, a lot of. p'anya (iii.)> rat. haidhuru, never mind, it c!ce»
not matter.
STUDY IV 39
Bead and Translate
Fungua dirisha, iiafaka kutezama n'de. Naona wat'u /elo nf/iani, tufungo mlango upesi. Ufunguo u wapi? Uko juu. Enda darini kaangalie. Wat'u l wamekwisha kwenda sasa, jee nifungue mlango? Ndiyo, 2fungua, kisha pea daraja na ua, na mabaraza pia. Narfaka mkeka kuweka kizingitfini. Ngoja kidogo utepawa. 3Yuko wapi p'aka ? Paka anatoka sasa hivi. Anakwenda wapi ? Labunda ana kwenda ku£afu<a p'anya. Mwite, natfaka ale chakula ; asikia ndaa usiku kucha alifanya k'elele. Jee, mtoto umesugua kioo? Naam, bibi, nimesugua pia na madirisha. Jee wewe ulikwenda wapi? Nalikuwa sakafuni nikilia. Mbona ulilia ? 4 Maana nalitfaka kutoka n'de, iakini naliitwa. Haidhimi !
Translate
Come down, I pray you, at once. Your sister is looking for you. Where is she ? She is in the private room. Tell her to come (pres. subj.) into the hall. The bedrooms want sweeping (pass, inf.) and [the] store-room also. Is the door of the upper-storey open? No, it is 5 shut. Open [it] then. The boy wants to come inside. Very well, let him come inside and go down below (sub. subj.). The teacher has laughed all day. Why did he laugh ? Ask him. He says he saw a rat looking (part, tense) in the mirror (loc.). Are there (icako) many rats in the house ? Yes, there are very many.
1 The use of the auxiliary verb kwisha (to finish), is a favourite way of expressing an emphatic perfect. It may be translated " already," but is more often omitted altogether in English. This verb Itwislia has an idiomatic perfect, much used —
nsha, I have finished. tunsha, we have finished.
unshu, mnsha,
ansha, unsha, insha, etc. wansha, insha, yansha, etc.
2 See note 3, Study II.
3 See note 5, Study I.
4 Maana = (primarily) meant MJ, cause, etc., but has come to serve as a conjunction (because, that is wfey), and may stand at beginning or end of clause.
5 Perf. Tense of Passive. See next Study.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
1 •8 |
U fefl o .S c a el p3 o ^ 3 |
1 |
ast been. i, or it has been. |
§ s 1 lit £ j» S |
||
1 |
b |
5 |
Ill |
(3 ? "* •«^ », |
||
1 1 |
|| |
H i |
^ |
-i « 5s •« |
0> i&l |
|
2 |
a |
ef |
oT |
|||
•F-t |
•— .— > ^* |
H c^ |
i |
^ ^ |
||
OB oT |
^ ^ § "35 |
H -S |
p |
s s |
||
f3 ^ |
3 S fe S « |
M |
JC ^ |
|||
Q3 *j^ |
S 5 ••* so |
M ^* |
||||
08 |
2 ^2 _& c3 |
-; |
^-^ |
^^"^ • -*^ |
^^— L — |
|
P5 w |
<D tC :2§ £•§ |
Si- Hi o ,« |
§1 X PH | £ |
~g 0 |
Q B «P 3s a Q^ " ® |
.11 '5 "" |
o |
*: 1-i |
.- '5 '5 .2 g, s * e S J g^ |
"3 c 1 |
s S |
a J | e"^! |
1 «-"a •2 •§ >- |
o 1 |
o> . - c! b* o • |
'& A ,-3 "" a,, |
p ° £ O |
ime or |
a - « 3 8 S ® ® 5 «* a a- e. |
0 . « 0 iiill |
v— x |
t-.2 |
'C^ |
S K |
s |
P S |
5'S :* |
r |
"Is |
^'~; . |
w 1 |
_• |
(NCO |
r-I 3^1 :-: |
1*3 |
— *~^ |
'> -^ - |
||||
^N |
f | |
BS i- |
h- 1 H |
|||
O |
§£ |
1^8 |
0 |
|||
w |
05 2 |
£&* |
5 |
|||
g- |
& •S^ 0 |
$h%^ iSllli |
i— i |
•5 |
<« Ji 2! |
|
j" |
01 n3 |
-» s u |
• |
rS |
||
W |
tfj |
• w t4 1*1 zf |
w no |
^ |
Js^ |
• I* 1 i»-S |
Ij |
cs -2"^ S § • -2 II |
H ^ |
. |
|||
S "S |
H .S |
,» |
||||
g ^J |
C ^ 05 •SJ'L'2 |
CQ |
^*< |
|||
"2 s |
. |
|||||
»^4 ? |
• *^» ® |
w S |
^ |
^fjf1 |
||
-£'3 o o^ |
&ll |
c: K CU <H |
•if |
of |
||
t> 0) |
t^ |
p |
||||
_ t< O O) |
Ut ^ |
"c3 c |
a 3 ^ C3 |
'> |
||
H ** |
0 ^ |
I |
— S |
|||
0 |
||||||
1 o w G |
i* i, |
1 |
P *r |
J |
||
S-; |
^^•a |
° rfft |
S c3"'<* |
|||
^ i |
f 5 1 |
I |
'5 |
P ^> |
5 a ss |
|
^ |
O r*s |
£ |
~ |
c^i «5 |
i-i ci co |
STUDY IV
41
«r
"
*
5* «5i***»
•-;•** a
II
Ilr
3 A
Oa j-
J *
5 SrS
D i o |
o -jS ~ ; -s *l'a ^--§ |
e 1 |
rt d |
-•;5~o- fi"aa*S |
o" & |
rH 9* CO |
||
e |
k |
C3 |
||||||
1 |
^ ^ "*' •£" '" £ |
| |
0 J- ^>2 |
P.--2 g "^^.jJ* |
1 1 |
k 3 |
||
2 ° |
||||||||
^oiis^--^ •S.g'3^ |
£;3 |
•~~M «J '^-'3^ |
& g |
J^ |
||||
• |
'S "3 "5 -2'S ^ |
• |
C P |
cj -5 S ft |
0) |
|||
E |
£ |
H |
||||||
£ |
i-i *4 CO i-J IN CO |
£ |
r-H ri |
co ^<>iec |
_^ |
|||
d |
||||||||
.& |
||||||||
» |
"S |
|||||||
'•£ |
23 |
|||||||
3 |
a |
a |
||||||
^ |
•** |
PH |
||||||
Q |
•«* |
.-T |
||||||
s |
ij |
8 »^i |
•J |
*S |
||||
••^. •8 %' . g |
M • g |
oo S § S |
%r ** ^ v P^> "» £ s |
| |
OS |
|||
,4 Si 1 1 i |
w H |
5 O ^S |
A ^ *> i-c ^ ^ «5>-fc* |
•9 i— i |
& |
|||
1 § ^ 1 1 »> |
w g |
11 |
'e ists'e a gas |
§ |
3 |
|||
K |
*~H S -« £ S>S |
H |
0 0 |
e ceo |
o 00 |
.j- |
||
O9 is w H 1 |
&i .a OQ |
of of * It p 3 ,2 3 ^ ^^J^_ |
i •< * |
f |
_^ |
s" s of ^ S_^_ |
*a at » J3 |
«5 >j. |
ri |
V »> ». |
H |
00 |
*• r. +. |
0) |
o> r3 |
||
fC |
i B £ |
"^ '> |
IVNIU |
Prefixe |
sl| l| |
« o |
r *^ 1 * |
|
Qj |
r^ c3 -rt •— • |
1!) |
"3 |
S" o? of J 'S |
s |
rO •* H ^ |
||
._ , Gi N N |
J3 |
"^ ^ *^£ *N oT |
pJ3 |
|||||
i |
•— • S •• .^~ |
°g |
-"'"^ J5 aT^ |
s |
^ ^^ ^^ |
|||
o 5 |
w «^.- S"S |
Ct |
a |
fl * 'S "^ |
K* |
'S'3'S |
||
2 |
3 c£" M •• S |
® |
||||||
"^ |
^ ^.s^ -^^r'l, |
fi |
c3 a |
eTa o, Jj*-^ * |
^ |
I-H s>i co |
||
oj |
1^^" s'ii" |
j |
•a-S- |
•i"1 5 "a ^ |
- |
|> |
||
1 |
FH o4 05 i-i iri co |
(2 |
— ?i r: PH' iji co' ^ |
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
VE MOOD. | 2nd Plur. iwani or m'we, be ye. |
IMPERATIVE. | 2nd Plur. mkawe, and be ye. |
J w ^ CO H H H B M |
Pers. Pronominal Preflxes. 1. tu that ice may or mighi be, or let us be, 01 Chilli we be ? 2. m' \ we, that ye may or mz'gAi ( be. 3. wa, i, zi, vi, ya, i, zi 1 <7ta< Mey mtty or mighi / be, or Zef them be. onominal prefix and stem. Nikawe, and let me be. [OOD— PAST TENSE. Plur. Pers. Pronominal Preflxes. 1. tunge or tungeli \ we should have been. 2. ninge or m'ngeli ye would have been. 3. wange, inge, zinge, \ kuwa, they would or might vinge, yange, inge, f have been. ziiigc |
|
>— i H 4 PS H |
W H $ i— i |
Q O O |
|| ° 1 g H |
g e S \ <3 » •« ^S 4 ', IS «> s &; |
PH 3 |
P M |
a I* 1 N-S o ^ s|J r-1 t, » fi ^ O o5 F" t- 1 ~S ^ |
||
I 3, oe Mow. |
SUBO (Z be thou. |
JUNCTIVI |
«-^ ^.c. Q S* S ei Il«i,- 8 ° ssJ S i^ ®^ ^ •" r«ff *-" ^ ^3 •" s«m53'*!2SS S '"~e»S? aTffiJ *~H "*• ,5 •2i'~ O * « °* r^ -^ 'SoH'ci'BO'T' U "S •* 1 J> 8 M! fC ifl "* ^ |
|
fc |
c |
« |
yj |
_ |
o |
03 |
|||
S |
of if |
02 | |
.1 |
> •S ? |
e |
03 |
5 |
—^~—^ 'a |
'*% *^L |
F |
3 |
«; -^ T^- 02 |
ai *^ •> •> - |
|
2* |
g* |
*S " ~03 |
*g 9 2 ^ |
|
S3 1 |
1 |
-: :- i •2 -"a § |
" -^ —",300 *< a) ^3 ^ ^ o3 to |
|
c*j |
»l |
s 13 o |
a '3 9 gs « * |
|
i .*£ ™ |
O ^ . "^ © CJ |
|||
PK ^ »- O |
^ §3 ° ®"-S G § |
|||
• "2» _r |
.S fl fl . — — — |
STUDY V
43
NOTE. — The verbal suffixes po, Tto, mo, may be suffixed to all these persons and tenses, also interrogatively and negatively, as —
Pers. Sing.
1. Nipo, I am here.
2. Umekuwafco, thou hast been there.
3. Yn/co, he or she is tJiere, he or she exists. 8. ufco ? is it (the mat, mkeka) there ?
3. haki^o, it (the mirror, kioo) is not here.
Plur.
1. tukiwamo, if we are in it, if we have to do with it.
2. m'takuwamo, ye will be in it.
3. vralikuwapo, they were here.
STUDY V Mezani — At the table
nguo * ya meza (iii.), table cloth.
kijiko (iv.), spoon.
uma (vii.), fork.
sahani (iii.), plate, dish.
2 kisahani (iv.), saucer.
kikombe (iv.), cup.
bilauri (iii.), glass, tumbler.
sinia (v.), tray.
sanduku (v.), box, cupboard.
kawa (iii.), dish-cover (plaited).
chai (iii.), tea.
kahawa (iii-)» coffee.
sukari (iii.), sugar.
mkate (ii.), bread, loaf, cake.
asali (iii.), honey, syrup.
fayari, ready, in readiness.
kuan</ika, to set in order (table).
kuondoka, to go away, to get up,
to leave. kuondoa, to take away, remove.
kunwa, to drink.
ku<oa, to put out, give (out), take out, to offer.
kuweka, to put, put away, keep, appoint, put off.
kupakua, to dish up.
kupasha moto, to warm up.
kupoa moto, to get cold.
kuate, to leave, leave off, to give up.
kukunrfa, to fold.
kukun</na, to unfold.
kumiza, to swallow.
kufafuna, to chew, eat.
kuon'fa, to taste, try, to tempt.
3 kupiga, to beat, strike.
k'iu (iii.), thirst.
sawasawa, even, straight, pro- perly.
kabisa, altogether, entirely, quite.
1 See " of," Study XI.
2 "Ki" = common diminutive prefix. See note 5, Study XVIII.
3 " Piga " is capable of various meanings according to the noun it is coupled with — kupiga msfari, to draw a line ; kupiga k'engele, to ring a bell; kupiga ch'apa, to print; kupiga k'elele, to make a noise ; kupiga t'eke, to kick ; kupiga fundo, to tie a knot ; kupiga magot'i, to kneel ; kupiga pasi, to iron ; kupiga mbinja, to whistle ; kupiga k'ura, to cast lots ; kupiga yowe, to shout out in fear, etc.
44 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Jama, boy's name. nani ? who ?
bari'/i (iii.), cold, cool. hivi, thus like this.
safi, clean. asububi, morning, this morning.
t'aka, t'akat'aka (iii.), dirt. hapa, here.
kwamba, that (conj.), whether as * /amn, sweet, nice, sweetncsa.
if, if. kumwaya, to spill, to pour away,
lakini, but. kumwaika, to be spilt,
kweli (iii.), truth, true, indeed. katika, in, into, on, among, etc.
Nrfoni tukak'efi mezani, chai ifaletwa sasa hivi. Nguo ya meza si safi, mbona ? Nasikia kwamba Juma alimwaya kahawa hapa asubuhi. Mwite Juma. Juma ! waitvva. Naam bibi, n'nakuja, 4sxilinita? Ndiyo n'nakwita. Ni kweli ulimwaya kahawa katika nguo ya meza leo ? Si kweli bibi. Kahawa imemwaika, lakini si mimi ! 5 N'nani basi ? Labuda ni p'aka, nalimuona chumbani. P'aka aweza kumwaya kahawa? Aweza, akisikia kiu na 6 kufaka kunwa. Haya basi, ondoka sasa. Mwambio AH alete sukari na mkate na asali. Viko wapi visa- hani? Vimo sandukuni, walisahau kuviweka mezani. Vilete upesi, chai ifapoa moto. 7 Imekwisha kuwa baridi kabisa; haifai, watoto, kuchelewa hivi. Sasa nafaka vijiko na vikombe.
4 -/amu, tupn, tonga, and other adjectives are capable of an adverbial use, in which case there is no concord.
4a The unavoidable use of the familiar pronoun " thee " and " thou " to persons of all ranks and ages is as much to be regretted as the exclusive use in English of the polite form " you."
s «|p " _ copula "ni " contracted.
6 " Na " (and) cannot connect two finite verbs. In the Past Indie., Subj., and Imper., the subordinate tense with " ka " introduces the " and " and obviates the difficulty. In all other cases, the second verb must be put in the Infinite, which then bears the force of the tense and mood of the preceding verb. Neither will " na " connect two adjectives. If we wish to predicate two or more qualities of one substantive, the second or last (whichever follows the " na ") must bo converted into an abstract noun. Ex. Mt'u huyu ni mwema net upole.
» See note 1, Study IV.
STUDY V 45
Translate
Glasses and plates 8 are wanted for the table, people are coming for 9 mid-day meal here to-day. Shall I bring spoons and forks too ? Yes, I want to set the table now in readiness. Will they drink water ? Yes, they will drink water 10 if it is clean. Take a tray and dish up the food, then ring the bell to call the people. You have forgotten to put the dish-covers n over the dishes. Tell the cook to warm up 12 yesterday's fowl. Try to fold the cloth properly. Can you set the table nicely if the cloth is not clean ? No ! it will not do. We tasted the honey and we found [it] sweet. The child swallowed something and he said, " It is sugar." If it 13 was sugar he would have smiled, but now he is crying. Let us go away, he will leave off. If a child cries he will not get (hapati) cake (loaf of sweetness).
EXPLANATION OF DIFFERENCE BETWEEN STRONG VERB To Be AND SIMPLE COPULA
1. The strong verb "to be" is that which affirms, not the peculiar quality or identity of the thing or things, person or persons, but the place, the circumstance, state, or surroundings, in which it, or they, happen or are desired to be, differing according to number and person, tense and mood, as seen above.
2. (a) The u-eak verb " to be " or simple copula (ni = " is " or " are " — same for all classes) is confined to the present tense of the Indicative, and differs only from the strong verb in the third persons of that tense. It is used when
8 Verb must take concords of cl. iii. to which both nouns belong. But see note 2, Study XII.
" Trans. " meal of mid-day," and so in all cases where one sub- stantive is used to qualify another.
10 Participial tense.
11 See note on Adverbial Prepositions, Study XX.
''-' There is no possessive form in Swahili. See note 9.
13 The impersonal " it " when not referring to any afore-mentioned noun, is translated by the pronominal " i " (as in cl. iii.) and its correlatives.
46 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
one wants to affirm of a thing or things, person or persons, that it or they " is " or " are " of a certain quality (not involving the state or position in which it (or they) happen to be) or to i lentify two titles or nouns —
Fulani ni mwema, so and so is good.
Wevi ni wangi, thieves are many.
AValimu wangu ni Ali na my teachers are Ali and Abudulla, Abdallah.
(6) The Negative Simple Copula is si (he, she, or it) " is not," (they) " are not " ;
Ex. Fulani si mwema, so and so is not good.
Wevi si wangi, thieves are not many.
Walimu wangu si Ali na my teachers are not Ali and
Abudulla, Abdallah.
Si kweli ? is it not true ?
Ni kweli, it is true.
PASSIVE VERBS
Passive stems are formed —
1. By inserting w before final vowel in verbs ending in a, or ea — •
Ex. Kufungwa, to be shut.
Tutfaelewa, we shall be enlightened.
2. By adding wa to verbs ending in i or e.
Ex. Kurudiwa, to be punished.
Alisamehewa, ho was forgiven.
3. By inserting liw or lew between the final vowels of the stem when it ends in to, oa, or ua.
Ex. Kuoa, to marry, to wed.
Kuolewa, to be married (eaid only of
the bride).
Kufua, to wash.
Kufuliwa, to be washed.
Kukimbia, to run away.
Kukimbiliwa, to be pursued.
STUDY VI 47
Kutia, to put In, makes kutiwa and kutiliwa. Kuua, to kill, makes kuuwawa.
4. Verbs ending in u, change the u iato i and add wa.
Ex. Kutubu, to repent, kutubiwa; kushukurn, to give thanks; kuslmkuriwa, except kusahau, to forget, which makes kusahauliwa.
Monosyllabic verbs are mostly irregular —
Kula, to eat, kuliwa, to be eaten ; kupa, to give, ku- pewa and kupawa ; kuja, to come, kujiwa ; kufa, to die, kufiwa.
Passive subjunctive is formed as follows : —
Nirudiwe, that I may be punished.
Kifuliwe, that it (cl. iv.) may be
washed.
Passive negative is formed thus : —
Sifungwi, I am not bound.
Hasamehewi, he is not forgiven.
STUDY \l
Mekoni — In the kitchen
m'pishi (i.), cook. munyu (ii.), salt,
m'iuzi (ii.), stew. pilipili (iii.), pepper,
k'uni (iii.), firewood. soko (v.), market.
1 kibiriti (iv.), box of matches. maivu (v.), ashes,
kisu (iv.), knife. mashizi (v.), soot, smuts, blacks,
sufuria (v.), saucepan. makaa (v.), coals, embers,
mwiko (ii.), spoon (large). wall (vii.), cooked rice,
mbuzi (iii.;, cocoa-nut grater. k'uku (iii.), fowl,
nazi (iii.), cocoa-nut. " mboga (iii.), vegetable, nyama (iii.), meat, flesh, game, kupika, to cook (boil or stew),
animal. kuk'anga, to fry.
1 A single match (seldom used) = kijiti, a small piece of wood.
2 " Mboga " is also applied in a wider sense to any relish or sauce (meat, fish, etc.), that is eaten with the plain boiled rice or Indian corn porridge. Kiteweo = another generic term for the same thing, Boga (pi. maboga) a pumpkin, must not be confused with " mboga."
48 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
kuoka, to bake. kuyaika, to melt,
kutokosa, to boil (trans.). kuk'ata, to cut.
kutokota, to boil (intrans.). kuoza, to rot.
kuchemka, to boil „ kufinika, to cover,
kuloma, to toast, brand, burn, nkoko (vii.), crust on pot.
prick. chungu (iv.), small cooking-pot,
kuwaka, to burn (intr.), to burn nyungu (Hi.), cooking-pot.
up. rntnngi (ii.), water-pot,
kuwasha, to light, kindle. kandarinya (Hi.), kettle,
kuteketea, to catch fire. birika (v.), cistern, trough,
kuteketeza, to burn, consume (tr.). moshi (ii.), smoke.
kukuna, to grate, to scratch. maziwa (v.), milk.
ku?in<7a, to kill (animals). tangu, since,
kutia, to put in. makusudi (v.). purpose, on pur- kukoroga, to stir. pose.
kuungua, to be scalded, scorched. katika, in, into, from, etc.
kufembea, to walk about, take a baaJae,halafu(z'bar), afterwards,
walk. presently, later,
kufurika, to boil over, to overflow. knondoa, to take away.
Bead and Translate
Mpishi alisahau kuwasha moto. Mbona hukuwasha wewe basi ? Sikupata k'uni 3maana, mpifhi anakwenda kununua sokoni. Haidhuru waweza kutfinda k'uku ukam- weke tayari. 4 Yuko wapi k'uku ? Yuko uani yuatembea. .Tee afatfukwa kwa chakula cha mtfana? Naam a<a/akwa. Nipa kibiriti fafa^hali, moto hauwaki. Tia ruafuta kidogo, uJawaka npesi. Sioni raafuta, labuda yamekwisha. La, hayakuislia, 5yamo ghalani. Naliyaona jana. Jee wa- tokosa nyama? La, naik'anga. Umepika na wali pia? Sikupika. Nipa kisu nik'ate mboga. Mboga xiraeoza. Haxikuoza, liujui k'itu wewe. Angalia, maziwa yafurika. Ondoa snfuria motoni. Maziwa yamengia raashizi (see note 9, Study XVI.). Haidhuru.
Translate
Have you put salt and pepper in the stew ? Yep, a little, but I did not put [any] in the vegetables. Do not stir the milk with a knife, stir [it] with a spoon. Look,
* Vide note 4, Study IV. 4 See note 5, Study I.
* The preposition (in) is frequently duplicated, being expressed both in the verb or verbal suffix and in the locative case of the noun.
STUDY VI 49
you have burnt [your] clothes, did you not feel the heat V No, I did not feel anything. Has the boy grated the cocoa-nut ? Not yet, he will do [it] later. The cook has taken the cocoa-nut grater. Are you cooking with coal ? No, we cook with firewood. If we want to bake we cover the saucepan with 6Lot embers. Why has the boy not taken away the ashes ? Perhaps he forgot. The water is boiling, will the kettle melt ? No, I know it will not melt ; it was made on purpose to boil water. I see smoke coming out (it comes out) of the window.
B Trans. " embers of heat " and so in innumerable cases owing to the paucity of adjectives, see Study VIII. For " of," see Study XI.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
50
SWAHILI GBAMMAB
^ |
a aj |
|||||
•J- •|| |
d •S .g « |
1 |
2 g T3rg l§ z% |
|||
**** I* |
O "Q ^ |
-._ |
^^1 |
|||
55 * |
2*c ° S *•§ «" "^ ^ "S *> «* 3 °° *^> 21 tf- H^S^s |
a g"e ^S^ ^^ s» §&l |
03 to £ |
§1 00 32 o d S* £ 60 |
||
3 k |
aO |
ri S tc |
i |
DO |
as ;- ^6 |
|
s s 1 3 |
I |
& * § c H QQ ^ |
b & S CM |
2 |
Is8 ••8 c s O no |
|
* *• |
& ^ |
? i iyi |
If |
.2 « |
a^ a s 0 <3 |
|
s |
rt* ^ •• r^ |
S3 *^ C! |
bC |
0,d |
||
I ^ |
CM .5 |
I ipjf |
*p« |
g a ^ |
§1 •s ™ oa >» |
|
H H 3 jl |
08 o 1 |
J |
o *s s4 |
^ 53" a s |
c 'a K |
£-=J 0.6= gni 0 (y OrM |
i |
^ |
g £- '53 ^3 -fl |
M^if> |
V |
.s§ |
|
3 3 |
-2 |
1 |
H (2 i-J N eo |
^ c<i eo |
O 0 O |
"S s to o |
3 -~ |
i -c |
"3 |
M |
V a |
|i |
|
5 4 3 |
,0 |
.s |
2 -Jl O H*^ •^ « 2.-" I-* •£ |
jj -|.|'f |
6 |
11 |
:> |
• |
rS |
•""so |
g "o |
«~ |
* § |
5 3 |
O fc |
f |
o o ., 44 |
•s^l |
1 |
ce* |
ta |
8 |
?-§ •»*"" |
1 §>^i |
1 |
•S-3 |
|
P |
of |
••«( •**><: |
•r. |
00 CQ |
||
5 a 3 |
frl M |
oO O |
00 - H 'S) H ^ | |
'So |
a Q •r. 0 |
cS •« |
3 2 /2 |
i |
1 S -8 § 0 1 -a -^l m | ^ |
c8 .^-'S |
;rbs whos |
s'| |
|
i |
"3 ^ "3 d" |
s -^ |
T |
(J> "^ |
||
H |
.j1'* |
i_ |
*^ y/ |
|||
1 ^^ |
_§ |
(S*~ |
||||
* of |
<D S. |
|||||
r^3 """* Oj |
^r |
^ &* |
||||
fi 0 cf-^^ |
"S o! ci |
H^ - o> |
||||
t"*-* |
'a.'c!'£5. |
.a |
STUDY
51
52
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
1
s
a ca a
1 -a &"
'
•2 . •* S
*3
§
C
O
! 1
2 -g
O X
C
2 3 ,«« "" *a*rf -
*
i: H a 'ta
a
'J
"* e.2.2 a £ ~ '•5 "33 5 13 "3 S, 5 ^l
d^ d'
II
i *£ »*&
i S .«
I .S .A)
a rz & fe I ^.2«^
fc |-2 |§
STUDY VII
53
STUDY VII
(lit.
Kgome (iii.), fort.
gereza (iii.), prison.
forodha. (iii.), custom-house.
ukuta (vii.), wall.
lango (v.), gate.
jiwe (v.), stone.
uvumbi (vii.), small fine dust.
vumbi (v.) litter, large dust.
t'ope (iii. pi.), mud.
mvua (iii.), rain.
upepo (vii.) wind.
jua (v.), sun.
mpagazi (i.), porter, carrier.
mbiu (iii.), proclamation buffalo horn).
masikini (iii.), poor mau, beggar.
mtumwa (i.), slave.
muungwana (i.), free born man, gentleman.
mwana mume (i.), male (boy or man).
mwana mke (i.), female (girl or woman).
mt'u mume (i.), man (adult).
mt'u mke (i.), woman (adult).
mume (i.), husband, man.
mke (i.), wife.
kupita, to pass, cross over, sur- pass, excel.
kufuata, to follow.
kufuatana, to go in company or file, to accompany.
similla ! sumile ! make way !
kaanguka, to fall, to fall down.
kuiba, to steal.
kuchoka, to be tired.
kuamkua, to greet, to speak to.
knpigana, to fight.
Ni heri, It is better (fol. by subj.).
kufika, to arrive, reach, lead to.
kuvuma, to blow, roar.
Mjini (ii.) — In the town
kuioroka, to run away.
kutti, to obey.
koala hum, to release, to free.
kunya, to fall (as of rain).
kutunza, to take care (of), to watch.
kukosa, to miss, to fail, transgress.
kuk'nta, to meet, to come across,
to meet with, to find, kukut'ana, to meet (recip.), as*
semble.
AfueZ&ali, It is better. kwa, at the house of (" chez ") to. kwetu, at our house or home,
" chez nous," in our country, kwenu, at your house or home,
in your country, kwao, at their house or home, in
their country.
gari (v.), carriage, waggon, trolly, k'ando, aside, apart, on or by or to
one side, fulani (iii.), so and so, such a one,
some one.
wala, neither, nor (or), kesho, to-morrow, mwivi (i.), thief (pi. wevi). kesho kutwa, day after to-morrow. 1 ngoma (iii.), dance, drum, p'ingu (iii.), fetter, charm, kivuli (iv.), uvuli (vii.), shade,
shadow.
mtoro (i.), runaway slave, truant, -kali, fierce, strong, cruel, hunt (pi. mahuru), free, -kuu, chief, main, zamani (iii.), time ; (also used ad- verbially ; formerly, some time
ago).
kijana (iv.), young child, child. kijana mwana mome, boy, lad. kijana kike, girl, lass.
Haya twende n'de tukatembee kidogo. Twende uvu- lini basi, hapa jua ni kali. Mimi nafoika kwenda ngo- meni, tupite kwa ndia gani? Sijui ndia mimi, lakini
1 Kupiga ngoma = to beat a drum ; kuteza ngoma = to dance.
54 SWAHILI GBAMMAB
fulani ^linambia kwamba ndia k'uu yafika ngomeni. Lango la mji lilikuwapo hapa zamani nasikia Labuda ni kweli, sikuwapo. Sikizani, nasikia k'elele, wapagazi wapi- gana ! Afud/taliusiende(orusende) kuangalia, wako wat'u tele na uvumbi tele. Kisha mvua 2 yatfaka kunya, ni heri turudi nyumbani. La ! Tusingie bado, mvua haiji, upepo wavuma sana. Twende forod^ani basi tukaangalicinagari. Sumile, sumile ! gari laja upesi, ondoka ndiani. Tunza ! liko jiwe hapa, linaanguka ukutani. Mwalimu yuko yuasema na masikini— jee tuniwamkue ? Naam, tum- wamkue — ni mt'u mwema. Vijana watufuata, wambie wasije. Mtumwa akiforoka twamwita mtoro.
Translate
Only men are wanted, they are beating the drum to call Hhem. The women are tired, they cannot go. Perhaps they will follow afterwards? No, they have missed the trolley, they will 4 stay at home now. Never mind, they can go to-morrow morning. Will they not be late? Yes, they will be rather late, but the men will wait [for them]. People are assembling at our house, what are they looking for? We are told that they are poor, they want 5 bread. It is better to give them (Jtuwapa) bread, that they may not steal. If they steal they will be put in prison. There is (ziko) much mud and dirt here, let us pass to one side. Will you be able to reach home the day after to-morrow? Yes, we shall be able [to] if we do not meet [with] wind or rain. They issued a proclamation (beat the buffalo horn) at the gate this morning to say that slaves who obey their G masters (jbwana zao} will be 7 set free.
1 The " i " in " ni " is frequently elided.
2 " Taka," used as an auxiliary, stands for " is going to" " in on the point of."
» See note 1, Study XIV. « See note 3, Study III.
* For " bread " in the wide sense use " chakula." European " bread " is an unknown luxury to the simple native.
6 " Bwana " and " bibi " take plurals in both cl. iii. and cl. v. See note 1, Study VIII.
7 The technical expression is " kuafika huru," using the Quasi- rassive for the Passive. See Study XVII.
STUDY Vlt
55
1 H H |
'o? £ |
§i°- i!4 M|^; (A C3 « d, 1 C^ S 44 cp 43 ^rj |
* *• c to 05 qj « *• 8 ;si i s>« of § 1 03 |
of £ S 44 " 8 ' ¥-£ £ §03 |
|
-< 3 3 |
0 44 o3 O |
£ -3 5 3^1 a 45 „ d |
'S~ a J3 .^ |
& - * oj 5 *§ '^ |
|
^ |
"B 44 |
S ••'3 44 p ^ „ |
•sf2 |
fijff |
|
3 5 |
o € *^s <u rO |
MOOD, |
_. , of 6» s a fe j* "*^ 3 S 44 gq 4n 43 fM ^j |
? & -2 •§ 'P .-s ^1'apl i |
|
•2 |
pq |
£ rH (N CO |
i-5 e4 co c^ |
<£ T-H IM' co |
|
^ |
K^ |
w |
|||
H |
§ |
1— 1 H |
I |
| |
|
P H 3 |
:utokuwa |
INDICA |
1 -3 |
£ |
^ "*" •«• |
>• |
44 |
•£ J ° |
ill |
Is ^ |
|
5 5 |
e |
H HSS^ |
ii| |
llr |
|
3 |
*s* |
H |
g1 |
||
H |
'"•' |
P |
|||
Q |
^ e» |
,3 |
1" ^ |
||
1 ^ |
Sj , |
>s ' ^ r~~~ |
|||
w 8 '-§ § 3 |
o3 |
1 "as 9 |
|||
fc 1 ^43 |
S |
03 rj pt |
|||
'5 S o3 44 |
5 ^^ ^'s |
||||
•5 *3 23 E? |
|||||
a -^J^ |
•^ .rJ" |
jj ~3 S ^ r^3 |
|||
^ " |
> 03 |
Q o3 D _r 5 ^3 of «5 ^ |
|||
pQ gj1 |
§ is ^5 |
||||
£ *3& |
« ft |
^ '=s -S -S -fl "S" ^ •S a a*"1 "**" |
PH i-5 i
56
"si *
egg ££ «
III
^^>^
!
M
^*—
s .£..2*
f^ CD CD
£ '5"1
^ .8,
•« af
•2 "S *
i "5 I a a|l| »l"al >N
.
i
PI PH <N eo
HILL GRAMMAR |
||||
3 g 5 |
b |
|||
£ |
||||
i=i "1 s-s s |
1.S |
|||
1 |
Is- « |
"o |
||
h |
||||
0 |
^* ^D ^ o5 |
r< -V- |
||
1 |
S »j -g *•••« |
•S* |
||
^ |
1 * Sl S |
'e S |
||
1? |
^5 ^S |
S |
||
^ |
||||
|» |
u oT |
|||
1 • |
S |
^S £ |
~^ |
|
"a fe |
i H H |
| |
"aa |
|
'3 |
| |
£ |
OQ •<-• |
|
o .£ |
1 |
1 |
. — 00 |
|
• |
Q |
| |
•~'Z |
|
P |
^ |
<• |
J' |
•2 ""^ |
O |
JE |
^'S |
||
O » |
'S IN |
H |
'53 '» • s 9 E ^ |
1 ^ |
> |
1 |
(2 ^ e>i |
cc |
|
hH H |
1 Q |
3 «•£& |
"«* O |
|
IMPER. |
do not be. |
i cq > |
,g> S ^> | c^ ag |
|"i |
8 21" |
— i |
oT° "^ 5* |
||
* |
"5 «-« "S S |
"c S rd |
||
3 |
D |
rC |
||
g |
||||
£ |
OQ |
&> & £ * |
||
1 |
1/3 ^ ^— |
r |
||
40 |
|E '5 |
|||
P |
a |
^ j* |
||
£ |
I |
*S ._r |
||
H |
— oo |
|||
1 |
a |
*B, |
||
'33 |
1 |
• ,j- |
||
o |
"" CD |
|||
s? |
.-T f |
|||
K |
£ |
s .- 'S |
||
'e |
'£ •* |
. --a |
||
1 |
•— OQ i °. |
§ |
||
(2 rH (N |
M |
STUDY VII
57
E S |
B |
1 |
|
r< *< |
rl * |
03 |
|
§ 1 |
1 |
1 |
|
s ^ |
1 |
1 |
|
111 |
a 1 a 1 s>* |
a |
|
V |
|||
I &' |
Q |
£ |
|
of |
J3 |
||
. |
& |
a |
|
O |
<$ |
||
^a |
M |
||
— |
— * — • ^ |
o |
|
*n *^[ |
^s^ |
a |
|
w" >r=* |
o o o |
-c |
|
K fc£ £> g-] fH 0jQ |
^.2C.2D |
•3 |
|
£ _5 .a |
"^ ri _rt |
o |
|
^ 2 *"" * |
a |
||
o ~ ? f |
* |
.2 |
|
PRESENT |
1 -.2 ° § to a kp £ fc "^ |
^ of &, o nil § N £>N C 9 w CD J^^^j |
1 eo •«*! |
A |
(S rH c4 |
CO |
d, a |
£ |
<a » |
o 02 |
|
0 |
1 1 |
1 |
• rH B |
£_, |
"g |
a* |
s |
P |
i -^ |
--s J |
i |
O o |
g | 5 a' y ; |
o ^ , e |
CO II |
*si *> « « s ' rfS o rl |
i'S "o 5 „ a |
II |
|
.i |
M |
o g |
|
*** * % |
oT oT o* cT |
o> ~ |
|
.a a) |
|||
<a -j3 |
JH -S .S S g |
5 a |
|
<u "JJ |
<S o |
||
5-2 j? a « '3 |
C3 r^ ^ <3 03 |
<D ^> > a '^ ^ |
|
^ 3 |
#N cT |
cs a |
|
o *• O t. s ® tc 5 |
aflfl |
tc-S |
|
aD'3 a |
a C8 03 CQ 53 |
S -is |
|
Cn QQ pj^ |
A |
H* |
|
<U |
|||
f^ ri' <N |
CO |
5 |
58 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
THE VERB "To HAVE,"
kuwa na, to have,
kutokuwa na, not to have.
The verb To Have is formed from the verb To Be by subjoining the word " na " (with) to the Strong Verb in all persons and tenses, positive and negative.
Ex. — Nina, or n'na, I have; sina, I have not; u/a- kuwa na, thou wilt have ; wasiwe na, that they may not have.
NOTE I. — In the present tense only does the " na " form one word with the verb stem.
NOTE II. — Occasionally the verb To Have has to trans- late the (English) verb To Be. Where we say, there is, there are, the Swahilis say there has, there have [i.e. the place, etc., has (in it such and such things)]. For instance— Hapa pana wat'u- tele, Here there are many people, lit. This (place) has people plenty. Kuna upepo mwingi leo ? Is there (does there exist) much wind to- day? Hapana mkate. There is no bread (here). Hakuna kuimba, There is no singing.
NOTE III. — This verb has an idiomatic inversion of subject and object. Whereas in English we say — Salehe has them (the keys\ in Swahili we get " zina Salehe " (funguo), they have Salehe! Vide Psalm xxxvi. 9; Luke ii. 14.
STUDY VIII
M'tu na Rafikiye — A man and his friend
Eafiki (iii.), friend. ndugu (iii.), mke (i.), sister,
jina (v.), name. cousin.
habari (iii.), news, tidings. jamaa (iii.), family, society, re-
mgeni (i.), guest, visitor, stranger. lative.
baba (iii.), father. kinabibi, women folk, ladies,
mama (iii.), mother. kinabwana, men folk, gentlemen,
ndugu (iii.), mume (i.), brother, 'mjomba (i.), uncle (mother's
cousin. brother).
1 " Mjomba " is also an up-country term for a Swahili.
STUDY VIII
59
°°8hangazi (v.), aunt (father's sister).
mgonjwa (i.), sick person.
ugonjwa (vii.), sickness.
HoJi ? May I come in ? Is any one there ?
HoJi ! Come in !
Karibu ! Be welcome- !
Siterehe ! Don't disturb yourself ! (lit. " rest," " take your ease.")
kukaribisha, to welcome.
kukumbuka, to remember.
kuonana, to see one another, to meet (recip.).
kupen^a, to love, to like, to be fond of.
kutakia, to hate.
kutakua, to carry, take.
kupeleka, to send, convey, con- duct, take.
kuomba, to pray, to beg, to ask for.
kaiosha, to be enough, to suffice.
kusalimu, to salute, send compli- ments.
kupiga hof/i, to knock at the door.
kubisha nodi, to knock at the door.
kuzungumza, kosumulia, to talk, to converse.
kujiznngumza, to amuse oneself, by talking, etc.
Read and Translate
1 Kafiki wa baba anakuja kutuangalia, mkaribishe. Nam'jua, si mgeni. Karibu, Bwana, pita ndani ! Sirfarehe,
00 Paternal uncles and maternal aunts are reckoned so near of kin as to be a kind of senior or junior parent according to the progenitor's original position in his family.
Ex. Babangu mkubwa, my father's elder brother.
Babangu mdogo, my father's younger brother.
Mamangu mkubwa, my mother's elder sister.
Mamangu mdogo, my mother's younger sister.
1 Kafiki, like most other sentient nouns (whether referring to persons or animals) in irrational classes, takes concords of both its own class and cl. i. As a rule, possessive adjectives follow the irrational class, and other adjectives cl. i. Ex. Eafiki yangu huyu mwema ; ng'ombe zanga hawa wawili. The verb almost invariably follows cl. i.
kuzua, to invent.
kunradto ) excuse me ; pardon !
niwia rad/w /do not be offended.
inshalla, please God.
Al hamrZu lillahi, Praise God, thank God.
-enyewe, -self, the owner.
afia (iii.), health.
-ot'e, all, whole.
ha?a, even, till, until, so that, as far as.
au, or
ela, ilia, but, except.
-gonjwa, ill, sick.
sikuzote, always.
pasipo, where there is not, ex- cept, without.
-je 1 how? what? (after verb).
-ni 1 what ? (after verb).
hapana burfi, no doubt, without doubt, probably.
barua (iii.), letter, missive.
zairZi, more, besides, further, especially.
jawabu (v.), answer.
siku hizi, nowadays.
Ati ! look, they say, see ! I say!
Ulaya, Europe.
bisikoti (iii.), biscuits.
nimileti (iii.)> lemonade.
60 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
bibi, usiondoke. N'nakuja kuleta babari fa. Habari gani ? Wat'u wot'e hawajambo ? Wotf'e hawajambo, aha- sanfa. Habari ni ya afia t\i. Tena baba na mama waku- salimu sana, wa/aka habari ya kwenu. Huku 2 hakujambo. Twafaka babari ya buko 3utokako. Kwetu imokunya mvua sana, ha/a wat'xi wot'e wafurahi. Maana mvua yaleta vyakula tele, Kweli, bwana, na tuombe kwamba ifike hapa pia. Insballa itfakuja. Mtoto ! Lete bisiko/i na nimile/i kwa bwana mgeni. Hodi ! Hodi ! Karibu ndani. Kina bwana, k'etfini. Ham'jambo ? Hatujambo, al hamdu lillahi. Wageni hawa wafoka Ulaya, wanaleta barua kwa inwalimu. Mwite mtoto yule mwana mume apeleke barua bii upesi. Ati ! mtoto, enda na barua kwa mwalimu Abudulla, a/akupa jawabu mwenyewe. Mwa- limu azungumza na mjomba wakwe (his) na shangazi lakwe.
Translate
Some one is knocking at tbe door, tell him to come in. 4 It is enough to say " welcome " — he will enter without doubt. 5What is your name? You do not know me. I am a stranger to you. Pardon me, I am come to beg (some) rice, I am ill. If you are ill, you cannot eat rice. It is better [for you] 6 to drink milk. Take these pice and buy (some) milk. Thank you, lady, I do not like milk, I will buy a cup of coifee. There are (wako) many sick persons in the town nowadays. Yes, but formerly there (they) were more. Your brother has come, what does he want ? He wants to meet with you. He will wait .until to-morrow if you are not able to speak with him now. 7 Let him wait then, he is always coming. He says his (zakwe) relatives hate him and (tena) they have invented something (neno) against 8 him (yakwe).
2 " Hakujambo," lit. "It (place or direction) has nothing the matter " = We are all well here.
3 " Where you come from." For Relative Particles, see Study XI.
4 See note 13, Study V.
s Trans. " Your name is who ? " For Possessive Adjectives sec Study IX.
8 Vide note 4, Study III.
7 Here prefix conjunction " na " with elided vowel.
8 See note on Adverbial Prepositions, Study XX.
STUDY VIII
61
(/) 0 |
S |
2 1 |
|
3 • — 1 |
^fl |
& q |
,5 o p, ^ |
a |
s |
'£ -u |
0 §* n S |
S |
g) |
•+J a |
,2 S 3 i. |
,_, |
43 |
o |
60 ^ |
o |
•0 |
'S |
'So ^ |
h |
a |
Sfi r/1 |
1 1 M £ |
•s §».sr
s -5 £. *•
S i» •** (D
S ^S^ S
53 ^3 So 55 ^
2 ~ S
• o -^
' ^ /— v o g*
p '•§ '* «
° £ » 8 ***
'^'S ^J "^ •2 o q^3 g«
o <n •
CO S
H ^
^ .J-
tn ^
c3
03 f[-j r
P p c8
» OQ 5S
Z gj ^
w o o e
^15 «
& a.hn =>
if
"-» s
P CK
•5
•KL
Q>
> H >• H
5 M
H
3 5
H d 2 P g-
cc g £ *
C8 02 H «
•
o1 cT P" P" ^ -^
O
'
f
a g
•i -fi
a 2
/-«; -s
S3 ^ 5
_ 00 ^
2 n s s
->e j^s^if'I!" U
•3 § •S '* S ^ i '» * -2 •« -2 S -S I f3
3 1 §2- Sis a :s s' I s 5 § :e I
CQft^OQflHOQ^&rjaH
T a
a a x M
62
k 6 e a |
1 "o i 0 |
ine, anotlier |
k |
L |
1 "o a 8 0 |
(elsewhere) |
-ja e ef 'So |
||||
Vn |
bn |
6 |
6 |
'So |
k |
c |
L |
||||
TIVES) |
mwengiue, m'u; |
wengine, other \ |
mwengine, m'n; miengine, other |
nyengine, anotl nyeugine, other |
§ d 'Ei'bo o o 0 >• |
k ll ef.S |
jingiuo, another myengine, o(Ae; |
wengine, mwcn nyengine, other |
pengine, anothe |
kwengino, ku (elsewhere) |
mwengino, oMe: |
^; "? |
t m 00 |
••*> '>> a <D > a |
£ & >> >> N "« |
'>. | |
S1!" |
o ° |
mwenyi, „ |
>-> c 0 N |
c' O |
a o & |
mwenyi, „ |
OT |
1 |
o |
• |
^1 |
^** |
S § |
C| |
1 |
9 |
a |
|
~ » |
'^;":-/ |
a"» |
^•xS |
"^ v S |
.I'S |
S |
••?. |
QJ |
|||
o O2 |
f |
V *'- 8 § ll |
£| 51 |
ll ^1| |
S § SI |
s » §j \2''« |
S 00 1 s Si |
•§ * Sot's |
J |
^> i> |
i |
15 |
Sl |
ll |
31 |
1^* ?5 03 ^> |
s^s ^> to |
1 | |
^ |
00 |
^ |
||
of |
*T^~ |
•S ^ |
•"S "*! |
" *** |
•2 •* |
«•* |
•"5 -c |
_-2 |
„ |
£ |
|
mwenyew |
possessc wenyewe, |
wenyewe, yenyewe, |
yenyewe, zenyewe, \ |
chenyewe, vyenyewe |
lenyewe, i yenycwe, |
lenyewe, i yenyewe, \ |
wenyewe, zenyewe, \ |
ponyewe, \ |
k wenyewe |
mwenyew |
CQ OQ
K X
STUDY IX
63
STUDY IX
Nguo na Mapambo — Dress and Ornaments
kilemba (iv.), turban.
k'anzu (iii.), tunic.
joho (v.), overcoat.
kizibao (iv.), waistcoat, jacket,
blouse.
kikoi (iv.), loin-cloth, suruale (Hi.), trousers, koti (v.), coat, rinda (v.), skirt. leso (iii.), large handkerchief, mamijli (iii.), small handkerchief, kofia (iii.), hat, cap, helmet, mwavuli (ii.), umbrella, fulana (iii.), vest. msbipi (ii.), belt, girdle, fishing
line.
ki/ambi (iv.), coloured cloth, mtambo (ii.), machine, mkufu (ii.), chain, kuvaa, to wear. kuvika, to dress, clothe (tr.). kuvua, to take off, undress, kumiliki, to possess, to own. kurarua, to tear, kuraruka, to be torn. kushona, to sew, to stitch, to
make, kushonewa, to be sewn for, to
have made for one. kujipamba, to adorn oneself.
kunyete, to be conceited.
kupima, to measure.
kupimiwa, to be measured for.
kupotea (inlrans. only), to be lost, to go astray, to err.
kufaa, to suit, to be fit for, to become, to be proper or right, to " do."
kupumuzika, to rest.
kuazima, to lend, to borrow.
kupasa, to be necessary, to be- hove, to " must."
mfuko (ii.), pocket, bag.
kiatu (iv.), boot, shoe, sandal.
mshoni (i.), tailor.
kifango (iv.), button, stud.
bakora (iii.), walking-stick.
marashi (v. pi.), scent, perfume.
hariri (iii.), silk.
p'amba (iii.), cotton.
kateni (iii.), linen.
sufi (iii.), wool.
p'ete (iii.), ring.
maridadi, finely dressed.
jirani (iii.), neighbour.
mbali, far away, distant.
jioni (iii.), evening, in the evening.
dunia (iii.), the earth, the world.
Head and Translate
Kizibao changu chatfaka kushonwa, kipeleke kwa mshoni katika ndia k'uu. Mshoni yule hashoni vyema. Labuda akiazima mtambo afaweza. Nifamwambia. Kanzu yako inararuka, :yakupasa kuivua. Niafanyaje? siwezi kuvaa kanzu ya baba. Twaa kanzu yangu, itakufaa. Ahasantfa, rafiki yangu, i/anifaa sana. Kweli, pasipo
1 " Kupasa," implying moral obligation, is only used impersonally of sentient beings, " Yanipasa " (it behoves me), etc. But we can say " napaswa " (I am obliged) or " yapasayo " (things which are necessary).
64 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
rafiki mt'u hawezi kukWi duniani. Mandili yangu inapo- tQSL. La ! haikupofea, mtoto huyu anaiona asubuhi hapa barazani. Nafurahi sana. Maana, mama 2 alinipa zamani. Marinda ya watoto wanawake yafaka kufuliwa, waulize kwamba wamekwisha 3 nunua sabuni. 4 Hawako sasa wa- nawake, wamekwenda kuteinbea mjini Jee, wamekwenda mbali? Sijai 5 walikokwenda, n'tfampeleka jirani huyu awafafute.
Translate
The porters' turbans are 6 lost, they say that thieves came [in the] evening and (they) stole them. If they find those thieves they will beat them, and put them in (vika) fetters. It is not good to steal. Let us dress (her) this little girl [with] a large handkerchief, it is enough. She will not feel cold, the sun is strong [in the] daytime. Where will she sleep [at] night? She will sleep with 7 my sisters (ndugu zangu wake), they will take care [of] her. Our neighbour has been measured for [an] overcoat, he will be very conceited. Where is your umbrella? I left it in the hall, please bring it. Forgive me, I forgot to bring your silk belt and your bag. Your teacher came to beg [for] my shoes yesterday, but I was not able to give [them to] him. Never mind, he will stay at home 8 and rest.
2 The verb "kupa" only takes the indirect objective particle, which must always be conjugated with it.
3 See note 5, Study HI.
4 Verbs frequently precede their subjects.
5 " Ko " = relative particle of place. See Study XI.
6 " Are lost " = state, hence use of perf. tense.
7 The possessive and demonstrative precede the qualifying and numeral adjective— both follow the noun. For concords, see note 1, Study VIII.
8 See note 6, Study V.
STUDY IX
65
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES
(SOMETIMES CALLED POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS)
The possessive adjective immediately follows the noun it quali6es — taking precedence of other adjectives.
'•'•A-s ( S. wangu, my (man) wako, thy (man) wakwe, hit, her, or its
I. | (man)
P. wangu, my (men) wako, thy (men)
IV.
IS- \P.
S.
P.
v,(| vn.{*
VIII.1 S. IX.1 S.
X.1 P.
m.
IV I8'
1V-\P. v Is-
v-(p.
vi Is- vii. 1 1
VIII.1 8. IX.1 S.
wangu, my (men) wangu, my (tree) yangu, my (trees) yangu, my (house) zangu, my (houses) changu, my (thing) vyangu, my (things) langu, my (name) yanga, my (name*) langu, my (monster) yangu, my (monsters) wangu, my (string) zangu, my (strings) pangu, my (place) kwangu, my (dying or
direction) m wangu, [in] my
(places)
wetu, our (man) wetu, our (men) wetu, our (tree) yetu, our (trees) yetu, our (house) zetu, our (houses) chetu, our (thing) vyetu, our (things) letu, our (name) yetu, our (names) letu, our (monster) yetu, our (monsters) wetn, our (string) zetu, our (strings) petu, our (place) kwetu, our (dying) or [in] our (direction)
mwetu, [in] our (places)
wako, thy (tree) yako, thy (trees) yako, thy (house) zako, thy (houses) chako, thy (th ing) vyako, thy (thi ngs) lako, thy (name) yako, thy (names) lako, thy (monster) yako, thy (monsters) wako, thy (string) zako, thy (strings) pako, thy (place) kwako, thy (dying
or direction) mwako, [in] thy
{places)
wenu, your (man) wenu, your (men) wenu, your (tree) yenu, your (trees) yenu, your (house) zenu, your (houses) chenu, your (thing) vyenu, your (things) lenu, your (name) yenu, your (names) lenu, your (monster) yenu, your (monsters) wenu, your (string) zenu, your (strings) penu, your (place) kwenu, your (dying) or [in] your (Direc- tion)
mwenu, [in] your (places)
wakwe, his, . . . (men) wakwe, his (tree) yakwe, his (trees) yakwe, his (house) zakwe, his (houses) chakwe, his (thing) vyakwe, his (things) lakwe, his (name) yakwe, his (names) lakwc, his (monster) lakwe, his (monsters) wakwe, his (string) zakwc, his (strings) pakwe, his (place) k wakwe, his (dying or
direction) mwakwe, [in] his
(places)
wao, their (man) wao, tJieir (men) wao, their (tree) yao, their (trees) yao, their (house) zao, their (houses) chao, their (thing) vyao, their (things) lao, their (name) yao, their (names) lao, their (monster) yao, their (monsters) wao, their (string) zao, their (strings) pao, tlieir (place) kwao, their (flying) or [in] tlteir (direction)
mwao, [in] (places)
their
•The agreement is with the thing possessed, not with the possessor.
1 None but these can follow the locative. SWAHILI GRAMMAR E
66
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
STUDY X
Sokoni (v.) — At the Market
mai (v.), eggs.
ii (la k'uku) (v.), egg (hen's).
ndizi (iii.), banana.
kiazi (iv.), sweet potato.
chungwa (v.), orange (sec p. 130).
d&tn. (v.), young cocoa-nut.
ndimu (iii.), lime.
mumunye (v.), vegetable marrow.
ujaka (vii.), spinach.
tango (v.), pumpkin.
samaki (iii.), fish.
ng'ombe (iii.), cattle, cow, bull.
mbuzi (iii.), goat.
k'ondoo (iii.)» sheep.
nnga (vii.), flour.
kitunguu (iv.), onion.
t'ende (iii.), dates.
mtele (ii.), rice (uncooked).
rtoibi (v.), washerman.
kuuza, to sell.
kulipa, to pay (for).
kugusa, to touch.
kudanganya, to cheat, deceive.
kupatikana, to be obtainable, to
be found, kusumbua, to annoy, tease,
trouble, worry (tr.). kukasirika, to be angry. kushiudana, to dispute, contend,
compete.
kushindana bei, to bargain, kuhasiri, to lose in a bargain.
kuokota, to pick up (of solid
bodies).
kuzoa, to gather up, to scoop up. kusalia, to remain, to be left, kuzoea, to be used or accustomed
to.
kuteza, to play, to dance. ktihisabu, kuhasibu, to count,
calculate, reckon. TJnguja, Zanzibar. Mzungu, European, White man. saramala (v.), carpenter. raJili (v.), pound (lb.) bei (iii.)j bargain, trade, ghali, dear, expensive, rahisi, cheap, easy, pesa ngapi or nyingapi ? how
much ?
kiasi gani ? what price ? kikapu (iv.), grass basket, kasuku (v.), parrot. hasara (iii.), loss. fai(/a (iii.), g^in* profit, fujo (v.), confusion, muddle, -ngi, much, many, -ngapi 1 how much, how many ? -ngine, other. juzi, day before yesterday, a day
or two ago, the other day. haki (iii.), right, rightcoubiuss,
juslice, honesty, funr/i (v.), artizan, expert.
Read and Translate
Wazungu wapenda eana machungwa, sikuzo/'e waja sokoni knyanumia. Yauzwaje machungwa ya Unguja siku hizi? Yauzwa ghali, ^oja pesa t'atu inoja pesa
1 Syllables, words, and phrases are frequently reduplicated with varying significance — here to give the distributive sense, " Three pice each." See Study XXI.
STUDY X 67
t'atu ; maana hayapatikani mangi. Eafiki zetu wali/af uta mbuzi kummmua, • wasimwone. Wangolimfanyani mbuzi, hawana 3pakumweka? Kweli hawana pahali, wangeli- mdnrfa kwa ckakula hapana budi. Mbuzi ana nyaraa nyingi 4 ya kufosha wat'u wangi, ukimntmua rahisi yuna faida sana. Ati ! bwana wafaka ndizi ? Pesa ngapi ndizi zako? Nne pesa bwana. A! siwezi kununua ndizi hizo, zinaoza. Tupite kwa masikini yule, auza vit'u vingi — rnadafu, 2'ende, viazi, mainumunye, raatango ndimu, ha<a vitunguu na mtele. Muulize auzaje, mtele, kiasi gani ra/ili ? Usimguse ng'ombe yule, ni mkali sana.
Translate,
The fish-market is not far away, will you go and visit it? Yes, but I have not paid [for] this flour. That flour is dear, let us go to another man. That man is 5 used to cheat Europeans. You are (have) right, he is a thief. The day before 3 esterday he disputed with me about (juu ya) a parrot. He wanted much money (many pice), but I knew that he (that parrot) was ill, and besides he could not speak a word. So (basi) I picked up my basket and left him. He was very angry, and now if I pass by he always does something (neno) to annoy me. What is all this confusion about (confusion this all, its meaning is what ?) This poor woman has met with loss — all her eggs have fallen down, and she (nae} cannot gather them up. Washermen and carpenters and all artizans are found at the Market.
- Pres. Subj. Neg. is much used to replace the Past Indie. Neg. when an adversative sense is required, " but (they) did not," or " but (they) were not."
3 Pahali understood, i.e. a place of ( (or for) to put him).
4 See note on Adjectives, Study VIII.
5 I.e. " has become accustomed " = Perf. Tense.
68
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
NUMERAL ADJECTIVES
Numerals take the class-concords of tboir nouns, is here given ; for others see Study XVIII.
Class III.
moja, one (house) mbili, two (houses) t'atu, three nnc,four • t'a.no,fice
eifoi,1 sx eabaa,1 seven
nanc, eight
tisia, kenda,1 nine
kumi,1 ten
kumi na moja, eleven
kumi na mbili, twelve
kumi nci t'atu, thirteen kumi na nnc, fourteen
kumi na t'&no, fifteen kumi na sUa,1 sixteen kumi na sabaa,1 seventeen kumi na nane, eighteen kumi na kenda or kumi
tissia,1 nineteen iskirini,1 twenty ishirini na moja, twenty-one
SOME ADJECTIVES OF QUANTITY
11.
III.
IV.
VII.
VIII. IX.
S. mwingi, much or
great I', \vangi, many
( S. mwingi, much \ P. mingi, many S. nyingi, much
P. nyingi, many S. kingi, much P. vingi, mvny S. j'ngi, much P. mangi, many S. jingi. much I', mingi, many S. ungi (mwingi).
much
P. nyingi, mrmy P. pangi, much S. kungi, much
X. P. mwingi, many
mwingapi ? how much ? wangapi ? how many ?
mwingapi? how much ? mingapi ? how many ? nyingapi (ngapi) ? how
much?
nyingapi ? how many ? kingapi ? how much ? vingapi ? how many ? j ingapi ? how much ? mangapi ? how many ? j ingapi ? how much ? mingapi ? how many ? ungapi (mwingapi) ? hoic
much *
nyingapi ? how many ? pangapi ? how much ? kungapi ? how much ?
mungapi ? or mwingapi? how many 1
wofe,2 live whole (man)
sofc,3 we
nyot'c, you <tll (meii)
Vfot'c, titey
vfot'e, the whole (tree)
yo^'e, all (trees)
yof'c, the whole (Jtouse)
zot'o, all (houses') cho<V, the ichole (thing) vyot'e, all (things) lot'c, the ichole (name) yof'e, all (names) lot'e, the whole (monster') yo<'e, all (monsters) \\ofc, the whole (string)
zot'e, all (strings)
pof'c, the whole (place)
koi'e, all (flying)
(kof'e ko£'e, on all sides, everywhere)
mo£'e, [m] all (places), all over inside, (all about, in every direc- tion)
1 Same in all classes.
* The conjunction " pia '
" -of'e," making " all " or " the whole of it, them, us," etc. When preceding, it forms one word ; if combined with " wo£'e " (3rd pers. plur.), the " w " is elided— '• piaot'e."
* The aspirate here disappears after the sibilant, "a."
STUDY XI
69
STUDY XI DuJcani (v.) — In a shop
biashara (iii.), trade. mwenyi duka (i.), shopkeeper. bid/taa (iii.). merchandise, dhahabu (iii.), gold. fedka. (iii.), silver, money, pauni (iii.), sovereign, pound, reale, riali (iii.), dollar (2 Ks.). rupia (iii.), rupee (Is. 4<Z.). roboo (iii.), a quarter (of a dollar
= J rupee), nusu (iii.), half (nusurupia =
£ rupee), thumuni (iii.), an eighth (dollar),
groat = 4 aunas. ana (iii.), anna (Id.). kasuroboo, three-quarters (of any
thing), lit. less a quarter, mizani (iii.), balance, scales, mawe ya mizani, weights, shuhuli (iii.), business, occupation, aina (iii.), class, kind, species. kuwia, to be creditor to. kuwiwa ni, to be in debt to. ku(?ai, to claim, to sue. kuvunc/a, to break (" change.") kuvmu/ika, to be broken, break- able.
kutoza, to tax, to fine, to exact. kuMani, to think, to suppose, to
presume, kufikiri, kuiafakari, to consider,
reflect.
kukimbia, to run away (from), kupasua, to tear, split, chop, kugawanya, to divide, distribute, msumari (ii.), nail, tack, marudufu (iii.), twill calico
(thick).
marikani (iii.), unbleached calico, bafuta, (iii.), common nainsook, uzi (vii.), wire, thread, string. alama (iii.), mark, sign, spot. </eni (v.), debt, mwenyi deni (i.), creditor, mrfeni (i.) debtor, ni, by (of the agent), mzee (i.), old man. mwongo (i.), liar, uwongo (vii.), lie, falsehood, bure, useless, free, in vain, to no
purpose, gratis, for nothing, namna (iii.), sort, kind, specimen, -baya, bad.
-zuri, beautiful, nice, pretty, mkono (ii.), hand or cubit
(18 in.).
shuka (iii.), four hands, doti (iii.), eight hands, gunia (v.), sack, chunia (iv.), iron, shaba (iii.), brass, sifuri (iii.), copper, -chache, few, a little, some, koti (v.), coat, jacket
Head and Translate
Mwenyi duka huyo ni mt'u asiye haki. AkivumZa rupia a'wapa wat'u pesa mbaya. Ati ! x mzee, thumuni, siku hizi ina pesa nyingapi? Thumuni, mtoto, ni pesa kumi na si/a au ana nne. Zamani nalipata pesa kumi na sabaa kwa
1 This, with mtumia, mama, taba, etc., must not be considered as disrespectful a mode of addrees as the English equivalent would be.
70 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
thumuni. Sif/tani kwamba ulipata pesa hizo zot'e kwa thumuni, labuda umesahau. 2Fulani aniwia reale mbili nami sina 3cha kumlipa; Nalirnuona juzi, hamwambia "Ngojakidogo." Kweli u masikini wewe,ni heri wende uka- fanye kazi pahali upate fedAa. Fulani ha/angoja sana. Kwamba nalikuwa na nueurupia ningelinunua marikano kidogo kushonewa koti. Nusu-rupia haitoshi kwa koti, u<a/aka zaidi ; labuda kwa roboo t'atu au reale kasuroboo wafakupa kotfi ndogo sana. Muulize mwenyewe. Hodi ndaui ! Hodi karibu ! Tupe mikono mine ya maradufu bwana, yafaa kwa kod ndiyo ? Yafaa sana, 4 mwanangn, ni nguo njema, yafoka Ulaya. Na wewe mwenyewe hufaki k'itu ? Nafaka misumari na magunia na uzi wa shaba.
Translate
It is a good thing to trade (to make trade is well), it brings much profit. If you begin with one sovereign you will get two before 5 many days. But you must reflect and calculate a great deal when you buy your merchandise. And, moreover, you must not (to) have false scales (scales of falsehood), or people will sue you [and] (again) they will run away from you [and] (they) will say, " He is a bad man, do not let us buy from him (his direction)." A good man cannot deceive his neighbours. You (pi.) are in debt to that shopkeeper — you bought of him four yards (eight hands) of nainsook yesterday and (tr. neither) you have not paid him. It is not your business, why do you annoy us for nothing? We shall pay him to-morrow. Gold and copper are not breakable. Iron is a good thing. A debtor is not always a liar. Chop this firewood (pi.). That kind of cloth will not do for a tunic, it is spotted (ina alama-alama).
2 To translate into English idiom the sentence must be inverted.
3 K'itu understood. For Old English use of preposition before Infinitive see Luke vii. 24.
4 See Contracted Suffixes, Study XVI.
5 Translate, " A few days hence," i.e. BaaJaya .
STUDY XI
71
SPECIMEN ADJECTIVES, ETC.
VI.
VII.
VIII. IX.
8. mwoma, good (man) P. werna, good (men)
:S. mwema, good (tree) P. miema, good (trees)
S. njema, good (house) P. njema, good (houses)
S. chcma, good (thing) P. vyema, good (things)
S. jema, good (name) P. mema, good (names)
S. [jema], good (monster) P. [miema], good (monsters)
S. wema, mwema, good (string or condition) P. njema, good (strings)
S. pema, good (place)
8. kwema, good (dying or direction)
VARIABLE
m'baya, bad (man) wabaya, bad (men)
mbaya, bad (tree) mibaya, bad (trees)
mbaya, bad (house) mbaya, bad (houses)
kibaya, bad (thing) vibaya, bad (things)
baya, bad (name) mabaya, bad (names)
baya, bad (monster) mibaya, bad (monsters)
ubaya, mbaya, bad
(string or condition) mbaya, bad (strings)
pabaya, bad (place)
kubaya, bad (dying or direction)
PREPOSITION "OF." wa, of (man) wa, of (men)
wa, of (tree) , ya, of (trees)
ya, of (house) za, of (Jwuses)
cha, of (thing) vya, of (things)
la, of (name) ya, of (names)
la, of (monster) la, of (monsters)
wa, of (string)
za, of (strings) pa, of (place) kwa, of (death)
X. P. mwema, </ood (places) mbaya, bad (places) mwa, (of places)
EELATIVE PKONOUNS
There is no separable Relative Pronoun in Swahili. The variable relative particles given below, which run throiigh all the classes, are bound up in the construction of the verb, just as the personal particles are — some tenses preferring them as suffixes, some as infixes. The Verbs "To Be" and "To Have," which have no verb-stem proper in the Present Tense, borrow the particle of the Historical Past Tense to tack the relative on to, so making aliye, he who is, aliye na, he who has. The Present Negative of " To Have " takes the common negative particle " si " as a stem on which to fix the relative, and by adding " liuwa" to this we obtain the Present (and Past) Negative of the Verb " To Be."
1 This always agrees with tho noun that precedes it.
72
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
.e'i
&a
s S
i.i S*f
s> •« S? ^ e v-/
5 is §g|
"* <*, e s
E g
-S-S
2^
,t:
51J
a3 l|iililli£?i<Mi3
^H^ S g „-? S _•• •*" ** •>*
^HS^^ O O *** ^ "** ^S ^ "*"t
•*. *? ^ 2 *7> hfc O ^i. f^ ^* » 5
0 .3 .2 i ^ •- ~ ° o" 2 •-•* 3 S" -S S
^3 'S ^ '> S >-» » ^3 P 'N & -^ S S >»^ T1 5
S fe
"* r«
l|il^|i}«i ill
>>S o >X >>£ F* c QQf^QQaJQgf^qgA^CJI
I Illli
STUDY XII
73
STUDY XII
Muwili (ii.) — The Body
KKwa (iv.), head.
uso (vii.), face.
jito (v.), eye.
p'ua (iii.), nose.
shikio (sikio) (v.), ear.
nywele (vii. pi.), hair.
mkono (ii.), hand, arm.
kidole (iv.), finger, toe.
chanda (iv.), linger.
chanda cha gumba (iv.), thumb.
guu (v.), leg, foot.
kanwa (v.), mouth.
ulimi (vii.) (pi. ndimi), tongue.
<avu (v.), cheek.
mdomo (ii.), lip.
jino (v.), tooth.
moyo (ii.), heart.
saud (iii.), voice, tune.
-eupe, white.
•a kusholo, left.
-a kuume, right.
kuumba, to create, to form, to shape.
kusimama, to stand (up), to stop (of a watch, etc.).
kulekeza, to point, put opposite to.
kunyosha, to stretch.
kunyoa, to shave.
kuiana, to comb.
kunuk'a, to smell (trans, and neut.).
kuonyesha, to show.
kufahamu, to understand, re- member.
kuuma, to hurt, to pain (neut.), to bite (trans.).
kutuniza, to hurt (tr.), to cause pain, to injure.
kuumia, to suffer (bodily hurt). Mngu (i.), God.
Mwenyiezi Mngu, Almighty God. binadamu (i.), mwanaadamu, sou
of Adam, human being, mau. bega (v.), shoulder, maungo (v. pi.), back, kiungo (iv.), joint, member, kitena (iv.), comb. Mdevu (iv.), chin. ndevu (iii.), beard, nguvu (iii.), strength, akili (iii. pi.), sense, intelligence, upande (vii.), side, mbavu (vii.), ribs, side. -eusi, black. -ekundu, red. (Zamu (iii.), blood, tumbo (v.), stomach, matumbo (v.), entrails, ngovi (iii.), skin, mfupa (ii.), bone, mshipa (ii.), vein, nerve, muscle, ini (v.), liver, ubongo (vii.), brain. ukucha (vii.), nail, claw, figo (v.) kidney, shingo (iii.), neck, k'oo (iii.), throat, glottis, kaakaa (v.), tonsil, kilimi (iv.), uvula. kisigino (iv.), heel, go/i (v.), knee, kifua (iv.), chest, p'umzi (iii. pi.), breath, -gumu, hard, stiff, laini, smooth, -ororo, soft.
Bead and Translate
Nywele zakwe ni nyeusi, meno yakwe ni meupe, Damn ni kit'u chekundu. Maguu na mikono na ma- bega na inidomo na ma to na masikio na magot'i
74 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
1 ttmayo 2mawili 3mawili (in two's), ela ki£wa na uso na kanwa na tumbo na moyo l tunavyo 2 vimoja 3 vimoja tuu (singly). Una vyanda vingapi? N'na vyanda kunii. Una vidole vingapi ? N'na vidole ishirini. Ulimi hauna mfupa. Meno na kucha na mifupa ni vit'u vigumu lakini ngovi na ulimi na mafavu na kilimi na makaakaa ni vyororo. Mt'u mwenyi shingo ngumu hafai. Ngovi ya muwili na maguu yafaka oshwa, lakini ni'tu hunawa (icill wash) mikono na uso (his). Fulani guu lakvve 4 lamuuma. Sikio halipiti kitfwa. Ubongo wa binadamu ndio G ulio wenyi akili, niuwili iidio 5 ulio na nguvu, moyo na misbipa ndiyo 5iliyo na ^amu. Nywele za wanawake zafaka ku/anwa k\va kitena.
Translate
Stretch out your hand [on] this side. Tell him to show me his foot. It is the nose which smells odours [and] it is the tongue which tastes [the] sweetness of (yd) food. Fold [your] hands, children, and stand properly. It is [my] uvula which troubles me, it needs to be cut, I must go to the doctor (dakitari). God Almighty created man and gave him intelligence and strength. Men shave, women do not shave. He showed us the liver, kidneys and ribs 2 of the sheep which was sold in the market yesterday. Breath comes from the chest. The thieves injured [his] throat and back. Her skin is smooth. My right hand hurts me [but my] left has nothing the matter with it (translate "it has not a word"). It is his heels which will suffer from (kwa) those shoes.
1 Objective pronouns with the Verb " To Have " are expressed by relative suffixes, instead of by the ordinary infix. Tunayo = we have them (nouns in Cl. ii. aud v.).
2 When one adjective, verb, adverb, or preposition qualifies or refers fo two or more substantives of different classes, it may either agree with the last of these substantives or take the concords of cl. iv. as here.
3 See note 1, Study X.
4 This neuter verb can only be used transitively of pain to the object's own person. When inflicted by another " umiza" is used.
5 Since the relative particle with the verb " To Have " is em- ployed as an objective, the relative sense is obtained in this indirect way — " it is it which is having," or "it is it which is with."
STUDY XII 75
~ -? .SH-^ni --sl'l 1 -
t" »«« ^ r^j ,2 "flS ^ f^* r^, *** '^ *S "S« ,^ *^ C
-w •* -5 1? .- S -5 'S ~ S .s "S •* ^ S p
76
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
•«• o
"o^
**
'S^S
• ~ .a
•«i -i s ^'
1
•v« .2 ~ g
*S S ""^ >JS "*! o ^ G
3
C^"*v ^* f*\
; o og .« .£
4 .E** .5* us 02 OQ
0 >>
rc
3 a
r? t^_, o_>
t
S ^
a i |
8 |
i1! 1 fl |
und it (m bound the |
1 a 5 |
S -s |
O "*"* * -? |
bound it ( ch bound t |
O "5 3 |
1 :€ |
V S |
|
S1 z 6 £ • p H •«! o |
7 M)^o bound the hou who bountiesi |
he who bound the <e who bound him e who bound me they icho bound j (tree) which bou'i icy (trees) which |
** "^3 || ^ oS 8 ® O ^ |
it (thing) which they (things) ivhi< |
(word) which boit they (icords) whit |
(monster) which ey (monsters) whi |
("trintj) which bm they (strings) w/t, |
S |
|||
M e E i— i (_, |
be jg* §2 'SeH |
r * * rf -"S ~ las? ?;?0 = c a^ a a |
cf cf bO bO |
A So s 3 '-« |
bo g |
\ bO M |
•S S of fS to bo p c |
•"S of c?£ bo a |
of M d |
||
«*H S |
P ej go |
G '' ' |
|||||||||
^i |
r^'S |
03 t*-* |
t*— ' %-H |
O |
'3 |
— N |
"*- :— • |
7 |
." |
G |
|
^ |
^1 |
^ a M '•^H "a |
II ll |
ll |
if |
j 'i |
"o |
1' |
0 .5* "rt |
||
'a Is |
C3-W |
a f- ^ ^ |
^5 N |
•^ |
> |
^5 t*> |
^5 ^ |
"3 |
'N |
e. |
~ c: o J S
15. .2
* S S
cf . ^
bO *
c bo «>
s £
-^ a
.«
OJ OQ OQ ft^' Oj R| 05 &H
CC
STUDY XIII
77
STUDY XIII
Mtoni na Pwani — On the river and by the shore
bahari (iii.), ocean, sea.
nrwana maji (i.), baharia (v.),
sailor, seaman, mto (ii.), river, wimbi (v.), wave, mashua (iii.), boat, kasia (v.), oar. shuari (iii.). calm, tanga (v.), sail, nanga (iii.), anchor, jahazi (v.), ship, craft, vessel, mtumbwi (ii.), canoe, chombo (iv.), utensil, vessel, boat,
dhow.
Jau (v.), dhow, abiria (v.), passenger, ched (iv.), ticket, passport, nauli (iii.), fare. shehena (v.), cargo, meli (iii.), mail-steamer, mvuvi (i.), fisherman, ukambaa (vii.), rope (plaited), kuvuta, to pull, draw (row), kuvuka, to cross over, kuzama, to sink, to be drowned, kttzamisha, to drown (trans.), kuogelea, to swim. kupakia, to ship cargo. ku<npa, to throw, throw away. ku/embea baharini, or majini, to
go for a row. kupokea, to receive, maji yajaa, tide is coming in. maji yapwa, tide is ebbing, kufa, to die.
knvua, to fish.
kusafiri, to travel, to start, to sail.
kutweka, to hoist (sail, load).
kutna, to furl (sail), to put down (load).
kina (iv.), kilindi (iv.), depth, deep sea.
kamba (iii.), cord, line (of coir).
ng'ambu (iii.), the opposite shore.
1 kisiwa (iv.), island.
mwamba (ii.), rock.
nzio (vii.), fish-trap.
nt'i (iii.), land, earth.
Kisauni, Frere Town.
Mswahili (i.), a Swahili.
Mwarabu (i.), an Arab.
Muhindi (i.), an Indian.
Maskati, Muscat.
Amu, Lamu.
r/Aaruba (iii.), storm.
nahodha (iii.), captain, skipper.
mlingot'i (ii.), mast.
banriari (iii.), landing-place, har- bour.
rZira (iii.), mariner's compass.
sukani (iii.), rudder, helm.
karibu (na, ya), near, soon, close by, nearly.
-kavu, dry.
nyavu (iii.), net.
-a pili, the other, the second.
-kubwa, big, great.
-dogo, little, small.
-fupi, short.
-refu, long.
Bead and Translate
Bahari ni k'ubwa, hapana k'itu kiifungacho. Yule rnzee alikuwa baharia zamani, akasafiri hate, Maskati na visiwa vya mbali. Mito ya nt'i hii si mikubwa.
1 Kisiwani, an up-country name for Mombasa.
78 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Mashua ya Mwarabu huyu ndiyo itupelekayo l Kisauni sikuzof'e. Vutani makasia, watoto, maji yapwa, tungelifika ng'ambu, ela ham'kuvuta. Mimi ni mvuvi 2ni/upae nyavu. Upepo ni mwingi, ni heri tutue tanga. Majahazi ya Waswahili 3hufika Malindi na Amu na Unguja ilia hayafiki Ulaya. Mtumbwi hauna nanga wala sukani wzila rfira. Atekaesafiri katika meli yampasa kutoa nauli. Waliindi wako wapi leo ? Wanavuka bandarini kupakia shehena katika rfau lao. Chombo kiliclio ondoka hapa juzi kilipigwa ni d^aruba, maabiria wangi walizama baharini 4 wasiweze kuogelea. Penyi wimbi na milango i papo.
Translate
The fishermen 2 go (hwenda) every day to look for fish in the trap ; if they find them they are pleased. A captain whom our friends knew bound his child to the mast with a rope that he 5 might not be drowned. The little European at the (kule) Custom House is the one 6 (he it is) who receives the tickets from those who journey by (in a) dhow. Cross over [to] the other shore, the tide is coming in. He who does not fish with a line, fishes with a net. They left that poor man who was 7 nearly dying. You are tired already [and] (wala) we are not in sight of (have not seen) (dry) land yet. Hoist the sail [and] let us go to deep water, we shall not find waves or rocks, it is 8 (there is a) calm. "When the sailors are wanted (Fut.) you will not find them on the shore. Our boat is short and [our] oars are long.
1 A few nouns ending naturally in " ni " do not take the locative termination — p'wani, jioni, mizani (?), roshani.
2 The pronominal particle must agree with the pronoun antecedent in number and person.
3 " Hufika " = " can go " or " often go," as opposed to " yafika "- they are going. See Study XIV.
4 See note 2, Study X.
5 The verb " pata " is often used as an auxiliary. Asipate kuzama - asizame.
6 See Study XIV.
7 See note on Adverbial Prepositions, Study XX. • Vide verb « To Have," Study VII.
STUDY XIII 79
MOKE ABOUT RELATIVES
There being no objective relative particle in Swahili, the personal objective infix is used, and the relative made to agree in number and person with this instead of with the nominative —
aiufungao, we whom he binds. wam'fungae, 1 whom they bind.
atcrtfungao, ye or they whom he wa&ufungae, thou whom they
binds. bind.
a/a'fungac/io, it (the thiwj) which wazifungazo, they (the houses)
he binds. which they bind.
uiwfungao, it (the tree) which I uh'fungafo, it (the word or thing')
bind. which thou bindest.
aliowafaka, they whom he wanted. waliyempa, he to whom they gave.
When, therefore, the subject and object are alike in number, the sentence may bear a double meaning —
anifungae, he who binds me or I whom he binds. om'fungae, he who binds him or 7w whom he binds. wafwfungao, they who bind us or we whom they bind. m'tcafungao, ye who bind them or they whom ye bind.
For the use of a relative with other than the four tenses given on p. 75, and to avoid ambiguity generally, there exists in Swahili a convenient relative stem on to which the varying suffixes of nouns and pronouns can be attached — amba ; this immediately precedes the verb.
CLASS
IS. mimi ambae sifungi, / who do not fast.
S. wewe ambae hukwenda, you who did not go.
8. yeye ambae bajaitwa, he who has not yet been called.
P. swiswi ambao turigelipenda, we who would have liked.
P. nywinywi ambao m'likuwako, ye who were there.
P. wao ambao wakali kulima, they who are still cultivating.
IS. no ambao haufcik'atwa, that same (free) which will not be cut. P. iyo ambayo iiak'atwa, these same (trees) which will be cut.
III. P. zizo ambazo ni mbaya, these same (houses') which are bad. S. kicho ambacho chatusumbua, that same (thing) which
IV.
annoys us.
P. vivyo ambavyo havikufaa, these same (things) which did not suit.
80
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
S. lilo ambalo hali/aanguka, that fame (icord) winch will not
Jail. P. yayo ambayo yangcJakwa, these same (words) vhich would
be wanted.
VII. S. uo ainbao si mbovu, that same (string') which is not rotten. VIII. S. papo ambapo papcndeza, that same (place) which phases.
IX. S. kuko ambako walikimbia, that same (direction) ichither they fed.
X. P. mumo ambarao tnlijififa, these same (places') wherein we hid ourselves.
STUDY XIV
Shatitbani — In the plantation or field
shamba (v.), vegetable garden, bus/ani (iii.), flower garden, udongo (vii.), soil, earth, mould. m/anga (ii.), s. sand, pi. light
earth.
m'ti (ii.), tree, plant, nyasi (vii. pi.), grass, jani (v.), leaf.
ua (v.), flower (-lawarirfi, rose ) kisima (iv.), well, ndoo (iii.), backet, tunda (v.), fruit, jembe (v.), hoe. mwitu (ii.), forest, jungle, shoka (v.), axe. banda (v.), hut. kibanda (iv.), little hut. mmea (ii.), crop, siafu (ii.), soldier ants, /ungu (iii.), small ants. shina (v.), root.
-biti, green, fresh, raw, unripe, -bivu, ripe, mature, kulima, to hoe, to cultivate, to
clear ground.
kung'oa, to root out, uproot. kupanda, to sow, plant. kuvuna, to reap, kuzaa, kuvyaa, to bear, lo yield.
kukauka, to dry up, become dry.
kunyauka, to wither, shrivel.
kuteka, to draw water.
kulinda, to guard, keep watch.
kutanda, to j)luck, gather.
kufimba. to dig.
kttfema, to cut down, to fell.
kuvuja, to leak.
knjenga, to build.
kumea, to grow, thrive.
mwiba (ii.), (pi. miba), thorn.
k'unde (iii.), beans.
tuta (v.), raised bed for vege- tables.
kwanini ? why ? what for ?
mk'ulima (i.), agriculturist, hus- bandman, farmer.
mbeyu (iii.), seed, grain.
t'embe (iii.), a grain (Adj. a little, a few).
mpanzi (i.), sower.
mavuno (v. pi.), harvest.
k'wekwe (iii.), weeds.
magugn (v. pi.), tangle, under- growth.
mwembe (ii.), mango tree.
embe (v.), mango.
mbuyu (ii.), baobab tree.
mtomoko (ii.), custard-apple tree.
STUDY XIV 81
mkwaju (ii.), tamarind tree. mnanasi (ii.), pineapple plant.
mpera (ii.), guava tree. -pana, broad.
mlimau (ii.), lemon tree. -embamba, narrow.
mgomba (ii.), plantain tree. kama, like, as, such as, (as it
mdimu (ii.), lime tree. was).
muhogo (ii.), casava. mndu (ii.), hatchet, handbill.
Bead and Translate
Ndugu zetu J mlioweta wanakwenda kulima shambani. 2 Mdogo wao hajui hatfa kung'oa k'wekwe, ndiyo maana ya yule mktibwa kwenda, apate rufunza 2mdogo wakwe. Kuna miti gani 3 shambani 4 mwenu ? Kuna 5 miembe, minazi, luipera, 6 migomba, midimu, mikwaju na mibuyu — yot'e yazaa. Tena kuna mihogo na minanasi na k'unde na matuta ya, viazi. Vizuri Sana ! Mna 7 vyof'e m'fakavyo
1 Ai is sometimes contracted into e ; e.g. wete for waite, kefa for kaifa.
- There are no degrees of comparison in Swahili. " Mdogo wao " stands for "the younger (or youngest) of them," and "mdogo wakwe" for "his younger (or youngest) brother (or cousin)." See Study XVI.
3 When " shamba " takes the locative ending, a special plantation or garden is referred to ; but in the expression " amekwenda shamba " " the country " generally is understood.
•• When the locative is followed by the variable proposition -a (of) or r-itlier of the pos?essive adjectives, different meanings can be obtained, according as to whether the word is put in —
cl. viii. shambani pa Mzungu, signifying at or ly the European's
plantation.
cl. ix. shambani kwa Mzungu, „ in the direction of, or to
the European's plan- tation.
cl. x. shambani mwa Mzungu, „ (a) in or within the
E uropean's plantat ion .
cl. x. mashambani mwa Mzungu, „ (I) to or into the Euro- pean's plantations.
5 All names of trees are in cl. ii. The names of their respective fruits (in the singular) are found by omitting the class prefix. The- ft-nits (themselves) are in cl. v. with "ma" plurals. Nazi, ndizi, ndimu, are exceptions, being in cl. iii.
0 Mgomba is the only tree which differs in nomenclature from its fruit.
7 Elliptical for " Mna vit'u vyoi'e m'vitekavyo." SWAHILI GRAMMAR F
82 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
basi 8 isipokuwa michungwa [<u]« Naam ! Na michungwa hatuifaki, maana matunda 9 yakwe hayafai kitu. Kwa nini ? Machungwa n'liyoyala hapa juzi yalikuwa mafamu sana. Labuda, lakini miti yakwe haikumea huku, yale mazuri yaliwayo yafoka Unguja. Usiteke inaji kwa ndoo ivujayo.
Translate
Farmers who sow bad seed will not reap a good harvest. The owner of (mwenyi) this garden always gives us [some] beautiful flowers. There are not many fruits in this country (there are) 10 only mangoes and guavas and pine-apples and bananas — that is all ! But there are others besides — limes, cocoa-nuts, oranges, tamarinds, custard -apples and lemons, you forgot these. Our neighbours have not yet dug a well in their plantation, they are still building a hut. Your path is broad, ours is narrow. The jungle which was here has all been cut down with a hatchet. The grass and the crops are all dried up n with the hot (fierce) sun, even the undergrowth and leaves and thorns as well. Cut that root with [your] hoe. It is not the sower alone who knows that this soil is bad. These fruits are not fit for eating (pass inf.), they are quite green. Only one is ripe.
8 The impersonal use of the Negative Participial Tense of the verb " To Be " for expressing except, urith the exception of, but, has made the word practically a preposition.
9 See note 9, Study III.
la Tu and pia generally stand at the end of a phrase or sentence. 11 Use "kwa," the instrumental preposition — never "na" which means together with.
STUDY XIV
83
I'HOUGH " |
3 ,>• |
» •8.S-2 S^l* «« -^- -^_ |
2>o» g4 iiJ •SJSS |
|||
% |
11 1-s |
2SS "3 s *s |
* "oo <» <» _ w |
|||
J^ -§« |
030 •g-l-g |
S £ e e « S> |
||||
a o |
a a -2 a ^ /""s » ai •*•* ^j O |
a s a B C 6 |
to —. V s §>^ |
|||
m |
• £j ^} ^. |
~ ~ i. |
1 |
i— < |
||
* |
•^ 03 ^i flD |
V ^ V |
<3 *j"j |
"o |
||
a |
5 |
gf |
H'OOJ |
|||
^ |
S to |
to |
a |
•* -^ to |
00 |
|
00 |
7; |
|||||
M S |
^ fcl — |
L |
S5 |
t» j3 w |
||
"t* 2 |
n * 2 |
H |
S *^4 O *""" |
o |
||
8 |
H ?; H |
S; - — ^ — - |
H |
^ TT^ |
o a o |
|
w |
W |
*» « c"i S^ § J .i^" .|^ |
|£ |
J |
Jj |
1 01 |
rf^ |
3 |
^-x S **^2 cufi |
N .^^ |
B |
N *~1 |
0 |
ryS |
PH ^, M< ^ |
|
2 |
|||
CO |
0 |
1 |-|f |
|^| |
^ |
f| |
"o |
H |
£ |
2 ^ cT P o |
:^> .-'5 |
O |
-rH ^ |
a |
EH |
Pi I-* |
P o _ &1 cT 03 fi o. ° c T-=> S/5" |
8.S.MI |
3 |
sa^lj |
3 |
0 H CO H- 1 |
1 |
n '3 '5* '? /!"•••• |
rteq co |
M |
•8 JB 'S > M ill |
"S |
PH |
,/a |
1 ti ^ |
. . •» |
f |
o»-5 |
1 |
H |
•g |
'•S -S s |
•S .» ** |
!a |
s»-5 |
5 |
0 |
^ |
^5 "*^* co |
^i 1^ O |
EH |
"l»-5"r 5s, |
1 |
CcJ |
. ao |
^ -w'^, |
** S4 S |
p |
~S 3 « |
-2 |
3 |
to p |
"o S § "*" • |
2 "o « |
3 |
p^» ao ^, |
a |
^ O |
o |
|||||
W 0 |
H £ H "= - .2 |
I till |
IPs |
d O |
s 2 ••^* |
0 |
H |
-* O 5 ,r *> |
I«l |
fa o |
OS •- |
s |
|
pT |
r^ .-* |
H |
t£^i4 ^ |
» |
||
o |
-*a |
of g 60 |
& |
£ |
O .C" 05 g a tc |
c« |
CO |
X a |
t*~l C* § a .~ «2 |
o e» ^ s c: |
H |
.s .« o<2 |
T |
s |
Q ^r, ^^ |
^*1 ^^- ^ |
H |
o |
||
o |
5; |
^ ^ |
— |
*. •[ 1 ^" |
-z |
|
o S3 |
f S * -S, 5 |
_cS <S |
H |
'S "ol J<1 |
H |
|
^•"2 |
'5 - |
5* |
•• |
|||
-^ •§ .*. J CJ- |
J >> |
|||||
•< T3 |
£ "S ^'S^ |
c3 tC- ^ o» . |
,^""~ ' |
|||
^ 4) -' 0 |
.5 — -) '.z? ci'^ - 5 |
ff:^" :^ |
••^""•3 ^ *^ '•'J'iJ |
|||
— * |
3 '5 2 '^ S '"' S |
~*^ . — 5 |
•"** i^ *" '^v |
|||
~£ |
o * "~~r <£'"'- |
•- .„- a |
||||
1 |
2 ». c-^ ="|»± r» Q r><^~> ""^ oo '5? J^ |
'S^'a ^ * § "§ 3 S"^ |
•*- -'^'Sa' llr"1 |
|||
o |
1 - ri :^ |
r-Ic-iri |
i-J ^ ec |
84
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
w^
E"1 'oo*
- 9
"A or a
Hu"1 OB variabl
•H <S -2
.» S s *
03 C3
tc bo
a a
cScS 3 3
a IP I
rS S es ,0 s'e g> s
• 3
g> O
-
',:) oS
STUDY XIV
85
b £«
^ C «ti
HI
o f">S
.^^p
m '3 3 ?.
86
SVVAHILI GRAMMAR
STUDY XV
Safarini (iii.) — On a Journey
kiongozi (iv.), guide, leader, mnyap'ara (i.), head man (of
caravan).
msafiri (i.), traveller, mkubwa (i.), chief, big man. mtumia (i.), elder, veteran
(porter).
mkalimani (i.), interpreter, asikari (iii.), policeman, soldier, janmdari (v.), corporal, hema (iii.), tent, mzigo (ii.), load, burden, beramu (iii.), flag, banner, k'ome (iii.). small flag, k'ambi (iii.), camp. p'osho (iii.), rations, food-money, k'ata (iii.), pad or head-cushion
for loads, boma (v.), stockade, palisade,
fence, huruma (iii.), pity, compassion,
mercy.
mbono (ii.), castor-oil plant, kupiga i ago, to camp, kung'oa k'ome, to start the day's
march, kuvunda k'ambi, to break up
camp.
kuterekeza, to halt and refresh. kufasiri. kugeuza, to translate, kuvumilia, to endure, to bear, to
put up with, ku/angamka, to take courage, to
be encouraged, to be cheerful, kuamka, to awake, to wake up. kuamsha, to waken.
kuwika, fo crow (of a cock).
kupiga (bunduki, etc.), to shoot, to fire.
kuinua, to lift.
kukaza, to intensify.
kukaza mwendo, to quicken pace.
kusimamia, to supervise, oversee.
kusemea kuteta na, to scold* reprimand.
nr/ia nyeupe, way is clear.
nJia imekufa, path is overgrown.
killa, kulla, every, each (invar.).
alfajiri (iii.), dawn, daybreak.
mjinga (i.), simpleton, greenhorn, novice.
sirikali (iii.), the government.
iaarisbi (iii.). mail-bearer, mail- runner.
kitete, kiioma (iv.), gourd, water- bottle.
nguvu (iii.), strength, force.
shimo (v.), hole, pit.
mshare (ii.), arrow.
uta (vii.), upindi (vii.), bow.
mwendo (ii.), journey, distance, gait.
ngao (iii.), shield.
jimbi, jogoi (v.), cock.
mzinga (ii.), cannon.
bunrfuki (iii.), gun, musket, rifle.
basfola (iii.), pistol.
mkuki (ii.), spear.
rungu (iii.), club, knobkerry.
mtaimbo (ii.), crowbar.
-zito, heavy.
m'no, very, exceedingly.
STUDY XV 87
Bead and Translate
Wapagazi hawatfaki kutfukua mizigo, wasema ni mizito. Wasipoifukua hawapati posho basi. Wainbie si mbali tuenclako leo, wafakapofika wafapumuzika. Mnyap'ara ni mkali m'no, liana hururaa, sikuzot'e hutota na wat'u. Tena asubuhi kiongozi alikosa nc?ia, tukapo/ea mwituni. Tulipokuwamo m'le tulionana na wasafiri wengiae ambao killa mmoja ali/ukua beramu na buncZuki. Mkubwa wa mji ule yuaja kuzunguraza na mkalimani wetu ambae pekee awez* kufasiri maneno yakwe. Huyu mzee apenrfa kusikia habari ya p'wani. Atfaka tukae hapa siku nyingi, tupige rago kab:sa na kujenga hemazetu. La ! Sipa- pendi, tena maji yamekwisha vifomani mwa asikari, na jamudari asema kwamba hawa^avumilia tukingoja. Wang'oe k'ome basi, sasa hivi, tuondoko : tumeterekeza, yatosha, mlumia.
Translate
The people of these countries always build fences to (loc. case) * their villages. They fight with bows and arrows, spears and clubs ; [and] each one carries a shield. Although we are tired, we must break up camp to-morrow when the cock - crows (particp. tense) ; tell that simple fellow to wake us [at] daybreak. When the government mail-man comes (fut.), the soldiers will fire a cannon. This path is overgrown, we had better go back. If you are bitten 3 by a soldier ant, it will pain (you will suffer pain) ; but the small ants do not hurt [one]. A strong man (man having strength) can lift a crowbar. The women's head-pads fell into a hole. Our porters would have been cheerful if we had not quickened the pace. Do not scold them, only supervise (them). Tell them if they get castor oil from these plants, they will be able to sell it when they return to the coast.
1 See note 4, Study XIV.
2 This is one of the few instances where the verbal prefixes of a sentient noun prefer the concords of the class it belongs to by its
form rather than of the one it belongs to by its meaning.
3 " By" referring to the agent, after a passive, is always rendered "ni."
88
SWAHILI GKAMMAR
¥1
^ s»
a. S,
*ju» S "^ 3 •» ! "s 43 li S^ ~ •*•
g "*•• 3 "!!- a "*" "** tr ""' § 3 'S. z
Q} *-i Qi S C 5 O <D cJ i-i ~ ^
a I sa 1 •S^-^'gi is
no Q M O p
6 o
H
H O H
S
<:
ali. kub
8 of
Si 5
at 2
^ ***/ o! ^* of*?
eJ^s^/ — - CL K!
K ^ '^ r^ ?*-» ff >» O "~s c- f^
- 11 s**i
a rf-r «- |^
a i
i
r-4 § i
£# & M >> 0,'a.
51 £a s a a
pap kuk
6 ^
•§ ^
x*lX ^3
V QQ
e. ^
pf ^
.ft ^
O
PM
CO
STUDY XVI
89
STUDY XVI
Hawa net Nyakati — Weather and Time
hawa hewa (iii.), air, climate,
weather.
waka/i (vii.), time, season, majira (v.), appropriate time, mara (iii.), a time (mara t'atu =
tlirce times).
murfo (vii.), interval of time, zamani (iii.)> time, saa (iii-), hour, watch, clock, f/akika (iii.), minute, moment, jumaa (iii. and v.), ijumaa (iii.),
week.
mweri (ii.) month, moon, mwaka (ii.), year, season of great
rains.
miongo (ii.), decades, mshenri (i.). savage, heathen, masika (v.) (no sing.), great rains, mchoo (ii.), lesser rains, vuli (iii.), latter rains, kusi (iii.), S.W. monsoon, kasikazi (iii.), N.E. monsoon, kushinda, to stay, to spend the
day.
kukawia, to delay, to loiter, kung'aa, kung'ara, to shine, kuandama, to follow, succeed, knzirfi (intr.), to exceed, to
increase.
kupungna, to decrease, diminish, kuonekana, to appear, to be seen,
to become visible, kuongeza (trans.), to add to, to
increase, kupambazuka, to dawn.
kucha, to dawn, to fear.
kulwa, kutua, to set (of the sun).
kutanda, to spread out, to be- spread out.
upeo wa ma<o, limit of sight, horizon.
haina buiii ... , it doubtless . . .
zamani moja, once upon a time.
hapo kale, long ago.
neema (iii.), grace, plenty, pros- perous season.
rfalili (iii.), sig11! indication.
muanga (ii.) light.
nuxu (iii.), brightness.
kiza (iv.), darkness.
mbingu (vii. pi.), sky, heaven.
nafasi (iii.), space, room, oppor- tunity.
ulimwengu (vii.), inhabited world.
wingu (v.), cloud.
nyota (iii.), star, planet.
daima, ever, for ever, always, con- tinually.
mapema, early.
-a kale, old, of old, ancient.
MCHAMMEDAN WEEK.
Ijumaa (siku ya Jumaa), Friday. Jumaa-mosi, Saturday. Jumaa-pili, Sunday. Jumaa-tatu, Monday. Jumaa-ne, Tuesday. Jumaa-fano, Wednesday. Al'hamisi, Thursday.
90 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Bead and Translate
Mwaka huu 1 hakukunya 2 mwaka sana, lakini nichoo na vuli ilikuwa neetna, alhamdulillahi. Jumaa-pili yafaa wat'u wapurazike, na siku si/a wafanye kazi. Mbona ravua yakawia ? Majira ya masika bado ; labuda kesho yafangia, mbingu leo kutfwa zina 3 mawingu-mawingu (cloudy), mvua haina budi karibu ifakunya. 4 Usiku wa Jumaa (i.e. Thursday night) Avat'u walirudi kushinda kwao Jomvu (at Jomvu) 5saa /ano za usiku. Mwezi tdkuhizi wang'ara kucha. Hapo kale kulikuwa kiz* duniani, kisha Mwenyiezi Mngu aliumba muanga, kukawa mini kulla mahali. Mwezi u/aandama (there loill be new moon) juruaa ijayo (it ichich comes next) wakafi wa jua ku<wa, ndipo washenzi wafakapopata nafasi ya ku/eza ngoma zao. Mwaka nliopita kasikazi ilivuma kwa nguvu, lakini kusi kidogo <u. Ni saa ngapi sasa ? Nisaanneza m<ana, Fulani amiliki saa ya fedAa na mkufu wa dhahabu.
Translate
The sign of rain is clouds. Two decades have gone by since our father died (tr. since when he died our father). Where have you been, my child, all this time (muda) ? I did not go anywhere (pahali), I stayed just here (papa
1 The impersonal pronominals "ku" and "pa" are much used instead of the proper subjective particles, and may be translated, " There (is or was, is not or was not), etc." The second " ku " = the characteristic infix of the Past Neg. Ind. and not the Inf. " ku " of the monosyllabic " kunya." See Study VI.
2 This term is frequently applied to the great rains themselves.
3 An instance of reduplication lessening the force of a word. See Study XXI.
4 Nights take the name of the day that follows and not of the one that precedes.
5 Swahili time, like Jewish, is reckoned from sunrise to sunset (6 p.m.), and from sunset to sunrise (6 a.m.). Hence noon is the 6th hour of the day (saa site za m<ana), and midnight is the 6th hour of the night.
STUDY XVI 91
Jtapa~). Your mother called you two [or] u three times, did you not hear ? I heard nothing, I was 7 asleep ! Once upon a time a large star appeared in the heavens. Peoplo of old followed it, and it became their (tr. to them) guide. In these countries the sun sets [at] six o'clock [in the] evening ; [in the] morning it begins to dawn 8 (kwacha) [at] five o'clock. Next Sunday they will come still earlier (tr. will exceed to come early). Good people are decreas- ing in the world. The sky is covered with clouds (tr. clouds are spread out). Famine has 9come into the country. God has for ever given (added) grace and strength to (kwa) His people.
6 The Swahilis are fond of omitting the conjunction " or" both when it connects words and sentences.
7 Since the " me " infix in verbs of posture (see note 3, Study III.) is used for time present, past time can only be expressed by intro- ducing the past tense of the verb " To Be " before it, making it a compound verb.
8 " Kwacha " ±= kuacha (the impersonal pronominal with the Pres. Indie, of a monosyllabic verb). We can say " Jua la«wa " or " lita- kufwa," but cannot make " Jua " the subject of the verb "kucha."
9 With the verb " ngia," used in its wide sense, there is an in- version of subject and object. Whereas in English we say "An epidemic has come into the town," in Swahili it is " The town has come into an epidemic " " Mji unangia m&i&dhi " (cf. Luke xxi. 26). For another of these inversions, see note on Verb " To Have," Study VII.
92
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
-
P
02
CO
H
CO CO
g
P
PH H
5z; o o
II |
s i |
mwenzenu wenzenu |
babaenu |
tumwaze, etc.] |
mwenenu wenenu |
B 8 |
„ |
a! |
| |
||||
la « »-• _ _3 •« S |
-3 |
cT |
-2 S |
«s, |
||
^J S |
O |
i; |
2 s |
*^s |
||
|e T | 1 |
1 |
1 |
© o '? a |
I |
||
H s ^ |
5 |
S £ |
1 |
|||
or |
-t |
|||||
u ** |
s |
g |
||||
£ |
*^ |
O 00 |
||||
X 8 »' |
/*4 • |
ef |
11 |
|||
«" b CH CO |
•^ ti 1 |
rnwenziwe wenziwc |
babakAve, babai (or babae) babaze |
[kit'uclie,jambol |
mwanaAve wanawe |
liukuu (great gra le above contract! |
i |
o |
a *. |
||||
i tc |
o o" |
o •3.2 B N |
1 1 1 |
1 |
1 as & 0 S 2 |
ffl |
t-I o. •O a |
f> i |
g| |
3 1 1 |
§ 0 a CJ on |
mwanao, wai |
If} |
i U .S 1 |
s |
mwenzangu wenzangu |
tc 1 1 | |
mamangu, etc. |
mAvanangu wanangu |
?e), mke (wife), mj of relatives are alsc contractions in the |
CS |
a oo 0 |
|||||
5 <u c |
||||||
OQ £•{ |
^ R; |
05 a; |
J c « |
|||
a "S »•< |
||||||
O O CJ |
||||||
i— I |
<M' |
CO |
•*' |
i^" H |
||
A |
^ |
H" |
H |
Hfa |
STUDY XVI 93
SOME OTHER CONTRACTIONS
The verb prefixes " ha," " hi," " hu " are contracted respectively from " nika," " niki," " ni ku " by the following process —
nik = nk = k' = h
In the same way the future prefix niia becomes n'te, and finally t'.
Similarly, mbwa = ni wa
nda = ni ya
For full explanation see p. 20, " African Aphorisms."
SOME INVARIABLE ADJECTIVES AND QUASI- ADJECTIVES
The following adjectives cannot be used directly to qualify a noun. They may be employed with the relative verb " To Be," or as adverbials to the strong verbs, or substantively following the preposition " of" (-a) : —
hai, alive, living ni hai, I am alive mtu aliye hai, a living man <amu, swer-t, nice uji huu u t&mu, this por- uji ulio <amu, sweet por- ridge is sweet ridge safi, clean, pure ya safi, he is clean k'itu kilicho safi, a clean
thing
karibu, near [soon] wa[po] karibu, they are maji yaliyo karibu. water
near which is near
mbali, far, far away yn[ko]mbali sasa, he is miji ya mbali. distant
far away now towns
n<7e, outside mlikwenda n<7e, ye went mt'u wa nVe, an outsider
outside
n'dani, inside u[ko]ndani 1 are you in- mambo ya ndani, internal
side ? affairs
[yajpi ! (var.) which ? ni ipi ? which (house) is ni zipi 1 which (houses)
it ? are they ? (and so on
throw/It all the clatset)
m&to (lit. eyes), awake yu mafo, he is awake hulala mato, he always
sleeps with his eyes open tupu-tupu, naked alikimbia tupu-tupo, he
ran away naked
94 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
Swahili has no degrees of comparison. There are various ways of comparing — •
(1) By contrasting one statement with another — wewe ni mdogo, yeye ni mkubwa is equivalent to "He is bigger than you."
(2) By the use of the verbs kushinda and kupita (to surpass, to excel), also the verb kuzidi, to increase—
Salim anamshinda Hamisi Salim is stronger than Ha-
kwa nguvu, lakini Hamed misi, but Hamed is the
anawashinda wotf'e, strongest of all.
Wao ni wangi kupita They are more numerous
swiswi, than we are.
Mwaka jana watoto wall- Last year the children were
kuwa wema, mwaka huu good, this year they are
wanazidi, even better.
(3) By the adverb " zaidi," more, and the relative " kuliko," than (lit. '• where there are ").
Nyumba hii ni ndogo, hii This house is small, that is
ni ndogo zaidi, smaller.
Ma/o yako ni mazuri kuliko Tour eyes are more beauti-
yangu, ful than mine.
(4) The indeclinable adjectives " heri " (better) and " bora " (best) are used respectively with a comparative and superlative force.
Ni heri wende, It is better (or well) for
you to go. Bora afia, The most important tiling
is health.
STUDY XVI
r/3
02
^
W
>^ C fa P G |
2 <g 5 |
s» |
4 |
B i |
a •« 1 |
,K |
J B I if |
it may bt- |
.0 1 |
»s |
|
Kg |
•"S y |
•S "" |
C "x |
o |
^~ |
S |
s»/ |
** |
|||
0 .sfksi |
i| |
|| g| |
toever home txoerer louxt |
fefe » ^ S 1 |
•« = 1 1 !> S |
.c» %> |
-S5 1 |
is-. II "" -~ |
atsoerer plo( |
whatsoever |
1 |
S S s » |
Si-« |
y ? |
~$ 2 |
"s 1 |
§ •« |
A |
"B |
tl |
•a |
^ |
|
'o, whosoerer 1 e, whomever ih< o, whoxoever he t'e, whotoever u |
off, u-lioxoever )t'e, whosoever i |
« o 5-2 l-i *£ ox, |
wayo yot'e, irh> ziwazo zot'e, wl |
'v "g J3 JD ~0 "5 ^ >, |
1 ^ °~ _i~ ^1, |
*3 |
"5 o |
wot'e, whatsoer razo zot'e, wliai |
e* of 1L o &, d S &. |
JD Zi o i E p J3 |
muwamo mot'e |
&Z.1L* 0 ^0 § 2 « § £ S £ * |
& i i i |
I i- ^.s ^ |
H != ? |
3'P P_P |
^ O ~ a §1 |
0 8 -n S |
z S -2 S |
? 'S ._. P |
x^> "2 "2 |
^•^ ^> ^rG> 3» 1 |
^\ |
.£ j£ ^ - |
j_£ |
11 |
c £ |
£'? |
0 § |
€ |
a |
N >. P S |
£ |
^ |
•^ |
«. |
|||||||||||
k |
i. |
*> |
i |
« |
1 |
||||||
1 |
| |
1 |
0 |
O |
J |
||||||
•S |
5. |
-i *. |
"i |
"B |
"e |
rC: |
|||||
re; |
k |
^ » |
K - - |
8 P |
^5 |
s |
k |
s |
9 |
||
s B |
» |
K ~ |
^ o X -wl |
V » s 8 o ^5 |
1 1 s~\ |
9 |
fe i ~ 1 |
| |
1 |
1 |
|
s |
B |
0 0 |
*** "^ |
3J |
•|S'| |
•e* |
J5* |
« "5 |
~ij |
"1 |
^s |
£ e |
'I • |
-f 'I. "5 "B r=S rfS |
« 1 |
^ i» |
%*s |
1 |
^: |
11 55 |
ss V |
•h |
E |
"p o |
, any peop |
a o CW P- S <c 4s £ s>tl 8 |> |
o 3 » a> 8 8 cT oj" |
iS-1 C B |
C .-. §91 S s jy~ |
o •S9 r |
.Cj a" 9 |
i--l' 5* x &» |
t Sv s e |
s> R 8 _a |
1 "5 |
^ |
.* |
1 * |
"c "c |
^ « |
8 |
- 7- |
! |
"p |
S |
||
~o p |
"o |
v~ |
>-. N S.S |
^ |
£ £" |
4 |
O |
Cl |
a |
o |
o a |
o |
& p*> |
C O |
^H "^* |
^H |
^» |
^ o |
, V |
X~N |
x~s |
||
c |
J |
*^ |
11 |
o i |
« |
0 T3 P |
o N |
"c |
|||
p |
^J |
' ~ •** |
p p |
— •.*"* |
G |
*c |
""C |
.- p |
"c |
||
'a |
i" |
a a |
S-> |
Si |
p 13 |
'a |
N >> P B |
e. |
^ |
~ |
|
co' |
B; |
050; |
<%&; |
05 a; |
"A ^ |
CO |
a| |
cejai |
oa |
CQ |
CQ |
96
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
STUDY XVII
Barani—
bara (iii.), interior of country.
ziwa (v.), lake, pond.
mlima (ii. ), mountain.
kilima (iv.), hill.
jUo la maji (v.), spring, source.
kijuto (iv.), stream.
nikondo (ii.) wa maji, current, stream.
fombi (v.), ravine, nullah.
genge (v.), cliff, precipice.
n'ti ya tambarare, plain.
kishaka (iv.), patch of jungle.
nguu (iii.). peak of hill.
umande (vii.), flew, moisture.
kunge (v.), mist, haze.
kiko (iv.), pipe.
saburi (iii.), patience.
hatari (iii.)» flanger.
mkoma (ii.), branched palm.
kukwea, to cliinb, to ascend.
kuterem'ka, to descend, go down.
kaua, to kill.
kububujika, to well up, bubble.
kutiririka, to flow, to trickle.
kumimina, to pour (trans.).
kuzoia, to hinder, prevent.
kugeuka, to change, to turn (tr. geuza).
kupatana, to agree, to be recon- ciled.
kuongoza, to lead, to guide.
kakataa, to refuse.
-Up-country
kiitumia, to use, to make Use of, to employ.
katafuna tombaku, to chew (to- bacco).
kunusa tumbaku, to take snuff.
kuvuta tumbaku, to smoke.
sharti, sharuti (fol. by subj.), "must," of necessity.
pamoja na, together with.
kwa nini ? what for ? why ?
mpiugo (ii.), ebony tree.
<aifa (iii.), nation, tribe.
kaoila (iii.), tribe, clan.
shauri(v.), palaver, counsel, plan advice.
a'/ui (iii,), foe, enemy.
vita (pi. iv.), war.
k'ondo (iii.)i quarrel, strife.
mfaume (i.), kiDg, chief.
m<awi (i.), sorcerer, wizard, witch doctor.
gari la moshi (v.), train.
sitesheni (iii.), railway station.
misheni (iii.), mission station.
<?araja (iii.), bridge.
tumbaku (iii.), tobacco.
mahindi (pi. v.), maize, Indian corn.
mtama (ii.), millet, Kaffir corn.
mpunga (ii.), rice (as it grows).
nganu (iii.), wheat.
mpira (ii.), rubber tree, india- rubber.
Bead and Translate
Msafiri ni masikini ajapokuwa mfaume. Eudae bara sliarti awe na saburi ; haini budi a/ak'uta hafari na ina- nibo magunm, labudu a/apata hasara pia. Siku hizi kusa- firi si kamazamani. Sasakuna gari la rnosni likupelekalo 1 kulla upeneZapo — k:limani, fumbini, gengeni, au nt'i ya
1 "Kulla upen</apo" = anywhere (i.e. any place) you like. This convenient mode of representing a noun by its relative particle is much used. Ex. Killa utekacho, every(thing) you want ; yot'e use- mayo, all (the words) you say; tumesikia lililotendeka, we have heard of (the affair) that has happened.
STUDY XVII !>T
t'ambarare. Lakwca juu, laterem'ka rf'iui ; '2 panapo naito au vijuto, lapita kwa daraja, hakuna k'itu kilizuiacho ! Tena wazungu wamejenga sifesheni killa mabali gari lisi- mamapo, illi kwamba wasafirio wapate nafasi kungia na kutoka 3 kama wapendavyo. 4 Mara kwa mara knna vita barani. Kabila 5hii ina k'ondo nakabilahii 6 juu yaj'ifo la maji au neno jingine. Kisha wapigana, na wangi huu- wawa. Watewi woi'e, waume na wake, niadui za wat'u.
Translate
Here there is a mission-station, the people have planted maize and rice and wheat and millet. Also they have a plan to bring a stream of water from that big lake into their fields, in order (illi) to irrigate (Jcutia maji) [in the] dry season (time of fierce sun or north-east monsoon). 7 This (hayo) water is continually bubbling up, and pours 6 over that patch of jungle to no purpose. The heathen [people] who live 6 by the three peaks of hills chew tobacco all day long. [He] who smokes tobacco must use a pipe. They agreed to guide us [to the] place where (psnyi) rubber and ebony trees together with the branched palm trees [grow], but when we got to (fika) their village, they refused. This nation has only a few cattle, they (icenyewe) live [in] a land of mist and dew. Water trickles [down] the mountain as far as the plain.
2 " Where there is, or are " (lit. '• the place which has " contracted from <: palipo na ").
3 The adverbs "kama" (as), "jinsi" (as or how), and "kama vile" (just as) require the relative suffix "vyo" to terminate the verb they precede, in order to complete the sense. There are other instances where plural concords of cl. iv. have an adverbial force —
vizuri, vyema, well, nicely. hivi, hivyo, vivyo, thus, so, likewise, vibaya, badly. vivi hivi, precisely so.
vyengine, differently. vile vile, in like manner.
4 " Time after time," " From time to time," " Now and again."
s Where in English we change the demonstrative k% this " to " that " in order to sharpen the contrast, in Swahili the same adjective is repeated with a change in the tone of voice only.
0 See Adverbial Prepositions, Study XX.
" Demonstratives may sometimes precede their nouns; other adjectives, never.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR O
98 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
DERIVATIVE FORMS OF THE VERB
1. The Causative. The simple verb, and some of the following verb forms, may become causative by changing the termination into -sha, -za, -sa, -ya, -nya or -vya.
(a) -sha. Kupowfta (from kupata), to cause to get ; kvLSomesJia (from kusoma) to cause to read (hence to teach) ; knfnndisha (from kufunza) to cause to learn (hence to teach) ; kunyosAa (from kunyoka) to cause to be straight ; kurusfta (from kuruk'a) to cause to fly (hence to throw).
(fe) -za. Most verbs whose stems end in two vowels form their causatives in -za. Kukataza, to prohibit (from kukataa), to cause to refuse ; kukweza (from kukwea) to raise ; kukimb«za (from kukimbia) to cause to run away ; kufoza (from kutoa) to cause to give out (hence to tax, to fine) ; kupungiua (from kupungua) to lessen, to diminish (trans.) ; kusahawza, to make forget.
(c) -sa. Kutakosa (from kutakata) to cleanse ; kunwsa (from kunuk'a) to take snuff.
(d) -ya. Kupon^a (from kupona) to cause to escape or get out of; kuonya (from kuona) to warn (i.e. to cause to see) ; kukanya (from kukana) to forbid (i.e. to cause to refuse or deny).
(e) -nya. Kufungawya (from kufunga) to have (baggage, mizigo) tied up ; kugawaw^a (from kugawa) to have divided up.
(/) -vya. Kunaw/a (from kunawa) to cause (hands) to be washed i.e. (to wash some one's hands, or face, or feet) ; knlevya (from kulewa) to make (some one) drunk ; knjuvya (from kujua) to make known.
NOTE. — A verb may have two causative forms with different meanings. Ex. kuapa, to swear; knopwfta, to adjure, to administer an oath ; kuopt'za, to swear at, to curse.
NOTE. — Frequently the causative idea would not occur to an English mind which would employ a different verb altogether. Ex. kupanrfteAa (to cause to climb) stands for to raise, to promote.
STUDY XVII 99
2. The Neuter (also called Resultant or Quasi-Passive) used (i) When a state resulting from an action is considered not necessarily implying an agent ; (ii) when we desire to predicate of a substantive that it is capable of receiving a given action. Terminations = ika, ikana (following an a, *', or u, in the stem) ; eka, ekana (following an et or o, in the stem) ; uka, ukana (following a penultimate u in a trisyllabic stem) ; Ex. —
(a) Kupatikana, to be obtainable; kupigika, to be beatable ; kuvundika, to become broken, to be breakable.
(6) Kutendeka, to be " doable," to be done, to have happened ; kukosekana, to be missing, absent.
(c) Kuraruka, to be torn or tearable ; kufumukana, to be separated, broken up; kuzumbukana, to be found, to come to light.
NOTE. — The student must distinguish between Neuters and Reciprocals with -ana terminations ; also between Neuters and Transitives with -ika terminations. In each case the sense will decide. Ex. Kuonana (rec.), to see each other ; kuonekana (neut.), to be visible ; kufitamana (neut.), to be hidden; kupika (trans.), to cook; kuzika (trans.), to bury; kufitfika (neut.), to be concealable; kuangika (trans.), to hang up ; kualika (trans.), to invite ; kualika (neut.), to crack or split; kusimika (trans.), to erect, to set up.
3. The Applied or Prepositional has four uses: (I) To supply the simple verb with a prepositional meaning ; (II) To express completeness (with the word " mbali " (right away) suffixed); (III) To attach to the verb a new meaning ; (IV) To localize action. It is formed by inserting i (after an a, i, or u, preceding in the root), or e (after an e, or o preceding in the root), before the final vowel of the stem.
Examples of Use I. —
(a) Kupatia (from kupata), to procure for (some one) ; kupitia (from kupita), to pass by; kuangukia (from kuanguka), to fall down to, at, or before (some one or something).
(6) Kunenea (from kunena), to speak against; kuo- mbea (from kuomba), to pray for.
100 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
(c) "When the stem ends in two vowels, the letter I is inserted before the prepositional vowel for the sake of euphony. Ex. Kuzuilia (from kuzum), to prevent by; kupasulia (from kupasua), to split with ; kutembelea (from kutembea), to walk about ; kung'olea (from kun^'oa), to root up with or for.
(d) The same rule holds when a Causative becomes a Prepositional. Ex. kuangushia, to cause to fall down to ; kusomeshea, to cause to read from ; kujalizia (from knjaa), to cause to fill up with.
Examples of Use 11. —
(e~) Kutapia, or kutfupilia mbali, to throw right away ; kuishilia (or kupotelea) mbali, to be gone out of reach altogether, to be lost for ever; Kuulia mbali, to kill off out of sight. The prepositional syllable lia is occasion- ally separated from the verb and made an independent word. See Psalms ii. 3, Ixxxiii. 4 (Ed. 1904).
Examples of Use III. —
(/) Some verbs reduplicate the termination to impart a different meaning from that conveyed by the simple prepositional form : Ex. Kupiga, to beat ; kupigia, to beat for or with ; kupigilia, to consolidate a floor or roof by a special process of hammering peculiar to the Swahilis. Kuatfa, to leave; kuatia, to leave to or for; kua/ilia, to forgive, to remit. Kwenda, to go ; kwendea, to go to (a person) ; kwendelea, to go on, to make progress. Kupenda, to love ; kupendelea, to favour.
NOTE. — Some verbs have two prepositional forms which can be used interchangeably. Ex. Kuja, to come, makes kujia or kujilia ; kufa, to die, makes kufia or kufilia ; kufika makes kufikia or kufikilia.
Examples of Use IV. —
(</) Limia hapa, cultivate here ; imeishia huko, it finished off there.
4. The Reciprocal. — Transitive verbs are made recipro- cal by adding -na to the root, intransitive verbs by adding -na to their prepositional form. Ex. Kusaidia, to help ; kusaidiana, to help each other : kushika, to hold ; kushi-
STUDY XVII 101
kana, to hold each other (or to hold together) : kuimba, to sing (intrans.) ; kuimbiana, to sing to one another : kulia, to cry, to call; kuliliana, to call to one another. Causative reciprocals are common — Kusomeshana, to cause each other to read ; kufozana, to fine each other. When the stem ends in two vowels the syllable li or le must be inserted before the ana; ku/oleana, to give out to each other ; kufuliana, to wash for each other, to boat on each other (as waves).
5. The Reflexive. — This is formed by the insertion of the particle ji (selfj immediately before the verb stem. Ex. Kujipenda, to love oneself (i.e. to be selfish) ; kujifanya, to make oneself (i.e. to pretend j ; wajififia nini ? what are you hiding yourself for ? (prepositional reflexive) ; tutfa- jingiza, we will force ourselves in (causative reflexive).
G. The Subtractive. — The idea expressed by the English prefix un- is conveyed in Swahili by inserting the vowel u (and in rare instances o) before the final a of the root of transitive verbs. Ex. Kufumba, to close (eyes, hands, etc.) ; kufumbua, to open, to unclose (eyes, hands, etc.) ; kukunda, to fold; kukunrfua, to unfold; kuvaa (nguo), to put on (clothes) ; kuvua, to take off (clothes), to undress.
7. The Reduplicated, or Modified Form.— This is obtained by doubling the verb stem, and has the effect of weakening the signification. Ex. Kum'piga-piga, to beat him gently; Mtoto alia-lia, the child is fretting (not actually cry ing ) ; kukunda-kunda, to crease (i.e. to make little folds) ; kulewa-lewa, to be giddy (from kulewa, to be drunk).
NOTE (1) — Most of these forms may be made upon one another as well as upon the simple root.
NOTE (2) — Some verbs are only extant under one or other of the derived forms.
NOTE (3) — There are roots which have the appearance of being derived forms, but the sense shows that this is only apparent.
102 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
TABLE OF DERIVATIVE FORMS OF VERBS
The following illustrate the various forms a verb may assume : —
Simple. Causative applied.
kufunga, to tie, bind, fasten, shut, etc. kufunganyia, to cause to bind with.
kufungishia, to cause to tie for. kufungizia, to besiege with.
Passive. Passive applied.
kufungwa. to be bound. kufungiwa, kufungiliwa, to be closed to.
Causative. Neuter applied.
kufungisha, kufunganya, to cause to bind, kufungikia, to close (of itself) to. kufungiza, to besiege, to pen. Reciprocal applied.
kufungania, to be tied together with. Neuter. Eeflexive applied.
kufungika, to be shutablo, to shut of kujifungia, to tie oneself to. itself.
Prepositional. Subtractive applied.
kufungia, kufungilia, to shut for or with, kufungulia, to untie for.
Reduplicated applied. kufungia-fungia, to tie here and there
for.
Reciprocal. Causative passive.
kufungana, to bind each other. kufungishwa, to bo made to fast, to bo
cut off by the tide.
Neuter reciprocal. Subtractive applied passive.
kufungamana, to be tied together. kuf unguliwa, to be opened to.
Neuter reciprocal applied. kufungamania, to be bound together by.
Reflexive. Reduplicated passive.
kujifunga. to bind oneself. kufungwa-ftmgwa, to be tied here and
there.
Subtractive. Subtractive neuter applied.
kufungua, to untie, unfasten, open. kuftmgukia, to open (of itself).
Modified. Subtractive reflexive.
kufunga-funga, to tie here and there. kujifungua, to untie oneself, to relieve
oneself.
Subtractive neuter. Subtractive reflexive applied.
kufunguka, to be openable, to open kujifungulia, to open for oneself. (of itself). Subtractive causative.
kufungusha, to cause to open.
Subtractive reciprocal. Causative reciprocal.
kufunguliana, kufunguana, to open to kufungamanisha, to bind by contract, each other.
Causative neuter. kufungizika, to be besieged.
STUDY XVIII
103
STUDY XVIII Nyama — Beasts, Animals
m win/ fa (i.), hunter, sportsman.
m<nkuzi (i.), bearer, porter.
simba (iii.), lion.
kibok'o (iv.), hippopotamus.
ndovu (iii.), elephant.
i'ui (iii.), leopard.
fisi (v.), hysena, jackal.
ngamia (iii.), camel.
p'unda (iii.), ass, donkey.
farasi (iii.), horse.
nyumbu (iii.), mule.
nyati (iii.), buffalo.
kifaru (iv.), fam(iii.), rhinoceros.
p'unda milia (iii.) zebra.
k'ongoni (iii.), haartebeest.
p'aa (iii.), gazelle.
t'ia (iii.), giraffe.
m'bwa (iii.), dog.
m'bweha (iii.), fox.
makao (v. pi.), dwelling, lair, den.
kundi (v.), flock, herd, crowd.
mdudu (i.), insect, vermin.
k'obe (iii.), tortoise.
p'embe (iii.), horn, tusk, ivory,
corner, kuwinda, to hunt, to chase, to
stalk.
kunguruma, to roar, to thunder, kutambaa, to creep, to crawl, kufanana na, to resemble, to be
like.
kufanya khofu, to be afraid, kutisha, to frighten, to terrify, kufokea, to appear, to turn up, to
happen.
kupiga mbio, to run. kusongea, to approach, to draw
near.
kusheta, to bruise, to crush, kuharibu, to spoil, kuruka, to jump, to spring, kupumka, to fly, to fly away, kusitehili, to deserve, to be
worthy of.
kuparuza, to be rough.
kupeleleza, to spy out, to examine closely.
ba<a (v.), duck.
mbuni (iii.), ostrich.
mwewe (iii.), kite.
ndiwa (Hi.), dove, pigeon.
k'anga (iii.), guinea-fowl.
bawa (v.), wing.
mkia (ii.), tail.
p'opo (iii.), bat, butterfly.
kipande (iv.), a piece, a slice.
p'ole p'ole, slowly, gently, slow gait.
anga (iii.), air, atmosphere.
nguwe, nguruwe (iii.), pig.
kiiungule (iv.), rabbit.
t'umbiri (iii.), monkey.
k'ima (iii.), black-faced monkey.
nyani (v.), ape.
nyoka (iii.), snake, serpent.
satu (iii.), python.
ngwena (iii.), mamba (iii.), croco- dile.
mburuk'enge (iii.), monitor lizard.
k'unguni (iii.), bug.
kiroboto (iv.), flea.
t'andu (iii.), centipede.
jongoo (v.), millipede.
ng'ge (iii.), scorpion.
mjisi kafiri (iii.), wall lizard.
m'<wa (iii.), white ants.
m'bu (iii.), mosquito.
nyuni ndege (zTbar) (iii.), bird.
silaha (iii.), weapon, arms.
risasi (iii.), lead, ball (cannon), bullet.
kicho (iv.), khofu (iii.), fear, dread.
baada ya, after (of time).
baadae, afterwards, after it.
bila, without, except by.
raara, immediately,
104 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Read and Translate
Mwindaji alikwenda 1 bara kuwinda nyama wakubwa- kama simba, na ndovu na nyati na kifaru. Alianrfika (wrote on, i.e. made a written agreement with) wapagazi mia wa kikamba kufuatana nae. Alifukua farasi wawili na nyumbu watono. Ndiani alipiga t'ia mmoja, k'ongoni watatu na p'aa wane illi awapatie cliakula wat'u wakwe. Baada ya mwendo wa siku silashara walifikilia mahali penyi t'umbiri na nyani wangi. Walipokuwa wakitezama nyama hao jinsi waruk'avyo raiti hafa miti, walisikia simba kunguruma 2 karibu nao. Wo/'e walifanya khofu isipoku- wa mwindaji mwenyewe ambae alifukua banduki k'ubwu ya 3 kiznngu makusudi apate kupiga nyama wakali (ol ) nam'na hii. Aliposongea karibu kupeleleza, simba mkc alitokea 2mbele yak we. Mara akalekeza bunduki yakwe, akampiga risasi mbavuni, akaanguka akafa 4 pale pale. Lakini wengine wawili simba waume walioandama nao waliposikia kulia kwakwe, wakafoka mbio mwituni. 5Hapo
1 The " -ni " of the locative is occasionally omitted to give a general and indefinite sense as opposed to a particular and special ibrce which the locative termination conveys.
2 See Adverbial Prepositions, Study XX.
3 The syllable Jsi has various uses —
(a) Diminutive Prefix— Kibweta, little box ; kidude, a little thing.
(b) Language and Nationality Prefix — Kisawahili, the Swahili language; Kimasai, the Masai language; Kingereza, the English language ; Viazi vya Kizungu, European potatoes ; Wapagazi wa Kitaita, Taita porters.
(c) Descriptive or "Sort" and "Kind" Prefix — Nguo za kifaume, royal garments (i.e. of a kingly sort) ; mwendo wa kiume, manly gait ; mambo ya kike, feminine matters ; maneno yo kitoto, childish language; kiusouso, face downwards; kilulifuli, in eager haste; kingalingali, prone, lying flat on the back.
(d) The characteristic particle of singular nouns in the fourth class.
4 There are two ways of making an emphatic demonstrative —
(a) By reduplicating — Ex. yule yule, that same (man) ; pale pale, that same (place) or on that spot, etc.
(b) By prefixing the pronominal particle — Ex. ye yule, that very same man ; pa pale (or pa pale pale), that very same place, etc.
5 The concords of " mahali," have a time as well as n place significance.
STUDY XVIII 105
ndipo yule ni^ukuzt wa bunduki alishikwa ni khofu k'uu, akasema Kazi hii yatisha, nae akakimbia. Hivi mwindaji, masikini, aliafwa pekee, bila silaha. Simba walimruk'ia, wakamrarua vipande-vipande, wakam'la. Wadudu wak'e- tio nyumbani mwa wat'u ndio hawa — ra'bu na ng'ge, na t'audu, na kiroboto na k'unguni na mjisi kafiri. Wajao inara kwa mara na kuharibu vit'u sana sana, ni m<wa.
The python is a large snake, he can crush a donkey or a small zebra. Leopards and 113 senas prowl about (iembea \<nib<:a) [at] night singly (mmoja-mmoja), hippopotami go in (hwenda kwa) a herd. Foxes have their dens in the forest, but dogs like to live in their masters' houses (nyumbani mwa bwanazao^). All birds and butterflies have wings; they fly about in the air. Ducks, guinea- fowls, kites, and pigeons can fly ; ostriches are very large birds, they do not fly. The crocodile has no tongue. The monitor lizard has a long tail, he eats eggs. The flesh of pigs and rabbits was forbidden to people of old. Cats and lions have rough tongues (zakuparuza). The slow gait of (ya) the tortoise takes him (tr. cause him to arrive) far. Apes and big monkeys resemble men. He who creeps [about] in the darkness deserves io be shot. Camels are huge beasts that carry heavy loads — one camel can carry a load of ivory of (ica referring to mzigd) 380 Ibs. [weight].
106
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
NUMERALS—
Class I. |
Class II. |
Class III. |
Class IV. |
Class V. |
|
IS. mmoja |
S. mmoja |
S. moja |
S. kimoja |
8. moja |
|
1... |
P. (of one |
P. mimoja |
P. moja |
P. vimoja |
P. mamoja |
( sort) woraoja |
|||||
2... |
wawili |
miwili |
mbili |
viwili |
mawilt |
3... |
watatu |
mitatu |
t'atu |
vitatu |
matatu |
4... |
wane |
mine |
nne |
vine |
mane |
5... |
wafano |
mitano |
t'ano |
vifann |
ma/ano |
6... |
si/a |
si/a |
Same throughout all Classes. |
||
7... |
sabaa |
sabaa |
Same throughout all Classes. |
||
8... |
wanano |
minane |
nanc |
vinane manane |
|
9... |
tlei'A or kenda |
t isia or kcmla |
Same throughout all Classes. |
||
10... |
kumi |
kumi |
Same throughout all Glasses. |
||
11... |
kumi na |
kumi na |
kumi na 1 kumi na |
kumi n a |
|
mmoja |
mmoja |
moja |
kimoja |
moja |
|
12... |
kumi na |
kumi na |
kumi na |
kumi na |
kumi na |
wawili |
miwili |
mbili |
viwili |
mawili |
|
13... |
kumi na |
kumi na |
kumi na t'atu |
kumi na |
kumi na |
watatu |
mitatu |
vitatu |
matatu |
||
14... |
kumi ua |
kumi na |
kumi na nne |
kumi na vine |
kumi na |
wane |
mine |
mane |
|||
15... |
kumi na |
kumi na |
kumi na |
kumi na |
kumi na |
wateno |
mifcino |
J'ano |
vifano |
matano |
|
16... |
kumi na situ. |
kumi na site |
Same throughout all Classes. |
||
17... |
kumi na |
kumi na |
Same throughout all Classes. |
||
gabaa |
sabaa |
||||
18... |
kumi na nanc |
kumi na |
kumi na nane |
kumi na |
kumi na |
minane |
vinane |
manane |
|||
10... |
kumi na tlsla, |
kumi na fisia |
Same throughout all Classes. |
||
or ken da |
or keiula |
||||
20... |
ishirini |
ishirini |
Same throughout all Classes. |
||
21... |
ishirini na |
ishirini na |
ishirini na |
ishirini na |
ishirina na |
mmoja, etc. |
mmoja, etc. |
moja, etc. |
kimoja, etc. |
moja, etc. |
STUDY XVIII
107
OABDINALS
Class VI. |
Class VII. |
Class VIII. |
Class IX. |
Class X. |
In counting. |
S. moja |
S. umoja |
painoja ("to- |
kumoja |
[mumoja] |
mosi |
1'. mimoja |
P . mmoja |
gether ") |
(" straight |
||
on") |
|||||
miwili |
mbili |
pawili |
kuwili |
[mnwili] |
pili |
initatu t'atu |
patatu |
kutata [mutatuj |
t'atu |
||
mine nne |
pane |
kune : [mime] |
n'ne or uno |
||
mitano fa.no |
pafano |
ku<ano [mutano] |
tano |
minanc | nane
Same throughout all Classes. Same throughout all Classes. | panane | kunane | [munane] Same throughout all Classes. Same throughout all Classes.
kurni na |
kumi na |
kumi na |
kumi na |
kumi na |
|
moja kumi na |
mmoja kurui na |
pamoja kumi na |
kumoja kumi na |
moja kumi ua |
|
miwili kumi na |
mbili pawili kumi na kumi na |
kuwili kumi na |
mbili kumi na |
||
mitatu kumi na |
t'atu patatu kumi na kumi na |
kutatu kumi na |
t'atu kumi na |
||
mine kurni na |
nne kumi na |
pane kumi na |
kune kumi na |
n'no kumi na |
|
milano t'ano pafono Same through |
ku/ano out all Classes. |
tano |
|||
Same throughout all Classes. |
|||||
krrni na kuini na |
kumi na |
kumi na |
kumi na |
||
minane |
nane £ |
panane same through |
kunane out all Classt |
nane s. |
|
ishirini na |
S ishirini na |
>ame through ishirini na |
out all Classt ishirini na |
8. ishirini na |
|
moja, etc. |
mmoja |
pamoja |
kumoja |
moj:v |
108
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
NUMERALS— (continued)
Ordinals. |
Swahali Arabic Numbers. |
|
1st, (w)a kwanza |
1, wahedi |
30, thalatliini |
2nd, (w)a pili |
2, thineni |
40, arubaiui |
3rd, (w)a tatu |
3, thalatha |
42, arubaiui ua mbili |
4th, (w)a ne |
4, arubaa |
50, khamsini |
5th, (w)a <ano |
5, khamsa |
60, sUini |
r.th, (w)a si<a |
6, sita |
70, sabuini |
7th, (w)a sabaa |
7, sabaa |
80, thamaniui |
,Sth, (w)a uanc |
8, thamanya 00, /isiini |
|
'Jth, (w)a tisia or |
9, lisia or fisaa |
100, mia |
(w)a kenda |
120, mia wa ishirini |
|
10th, (w)a kumi |
10, ashara |
150, mia u khamsiui |
llth, (w)a kumi na moja |
11, hieZaashara |
170, mia na sabuini |
1 2th, (w)a kumi na mbili |
12, thinaashara |
200, miteni, miaicni. or |
13th, (w)a kumi na t'atu |
13, thalitaashara |
mia mbili |
llth, (\v)a kumi na nne |
14, arubaataashara |
500, khamsa mia or mia |
15th, (\v")a kumi na <ano |
1 5, khamsifaashara |
J'ano |
16th, (w)a kumi na sita 16, sifaashara |
1000, alfu |
|
17th, (w)a kumi na sabaa 17, sabaataashara |
2000, alfeni or alufeni |
|
18th, (w)a kumi na nane 18, thaminteashara |
||
19th, (w)a kumi na <isia 19, <isaa<aashara |
||
20th, (w)a ishirini |
20, ishirini |
|
21st, (w)a ishirini na |
21, wahedi wa ishirini |
oitce {at once), mara moja |
moja, etc. |
twice, mara mbili |
|
four times, mara nnc, etc. |
||
NOTE. — The initial letter |
J = thuluthi |
|
of the preposition varies with the class of the noun that the ordinal |
1^ — mbili kasu roboo For other fractious see n B9 |
firstly, kwanza |
qualifies. |
£*• V«7« |
secondly, pili |
thirdly, tatu, etc. |
STUDY XIX
109
STUDY XIX Asipitali — Hospital, Dispensary
dakiteri (v.), doctor.
Jabibu (v.), physician.
mganga (i.). native witch doctor,
medicine man. uganga (vii.), profession and
practice of medicine. Jawa (Hi.), medicine, drug, homa (iii.), fever, baridi (iii.), a cold, baridi yabisi (iii.), rheumatism, marad/ii (v. pi.), disease, ndui t'ete (iii.), small-pox, t'ete maji, chicken-pox, nkoma (vii.), leprosy, safura (iii.), anaemia, kifua (iv.), chest (complaint), kidonda (iv.), sore, ulcer, donda (v.), large sore, ipu (jipu) (v.), boil, kiipu <ungn (iv.), malignant boil, t'ambazi (iii.), abscess, jaraha (v.), wound, kijaraha (iv.), the wound (in foul
diseases), p'ele (iii.), the itch.
* mbuba, buba (iii.), the yaws or
frambcesia.
* mti (iii.), skin disease, tertiary
stage of former.
funza (iii.), jiirircr, maggot.
kuugua, to be ill.
kuuguza, to see through an ill- ness— hence, to nurse.
knganga, to apply medicine, to treat medically.
kuumwa ni, to feel pain in, to be bitten or hurt by.
kufura, to swell.
kuiva, to be ripe, or well-cooked, to develop, to come to a head.
kukohoa. to cough.
kuchemua, to sneeze.
kuhara, to have diarrhoea.
kuharisha, to relax.
kutapika, to vomit.
kupoa, to get well, to recover.
kupoza, to heal, to cure (of God).
kupona, to get over it, to pull
through.
kuponya, to deliver, kuioboa kupasua, to break
through, to pierce, to lance, kufaa. to benefit, kutulia, to keep still, to be
tranquil, to be comforted, kutuliza, to alleviate, to comfort, kupumbaa, to be foolish, stupid, kulea, to bring up, to adopt, to
nurse.
kukanyaga, to tread on. kutonesha, to touch a sore place,
lit. to cause to "drop" or
" run."
tone (v.), drop, usaha (vii.), pus, matter. u<ungu (vii.), bitterness, pains, usingizi (vii.), sleep, kit'anda (iv.), bedstead, kip'ofu (iv.), blind person, bubwi (v.), dumb person, kiziwi (iv.), deaf person. kiwe<e (iv.), lame person, hirimu (iii.), young man. makohozi (v.), phlegm, cough, maumivu (v.), aches, pains, makamasi (v.), mucous, mafua (v.), catarrh, msahala (ii.), aperient, bilauri ya kupimia, measuring
glass.
f'upa (iii.), bottle. kUambaa (iv.), bandage.
* Diseases peculiar to Negro races.
HO SWAHILI GBAMMAB
desfori, dasiluri (iii.) custom, mpumbavu (i.), fool, idiot, stupid.
fashion. jasho (v.). heat, perspiration,
mashaka (v. pi.), afflictions, kadh'awakadha, various, other.
trouble. -tupu. empty,
binti (iii.), daughter. tupu-tupu, naked,
tejiri (v.), rich man. sababu (iii.), cause.
msairZia (i.), helper. kwa sababu, because,
upumbavu (vii.), foolishness, p'ole ! cheer up ! I hope you will
folly. soon be better.
Bead and Translate
Bwana, mt'u huyu anaugua sana, muwili wot'e unafura. Mwambie aje basi nimwangalie. Jambo, mzee, u hali gani ? Mimi ni mgonjwa Bwana, mgonjwa sana. 1 P'ole masikini ! Mngn afakupoza mararfM yako uliyo nayo, upoe. Mimi ni /abibu /uu, apozae wat'u ni Yeye Mwenyewe. A' ni mgonjwa sana Bwana, sijui mararf/ti haya kama ntapona, si<apona. Myaka yako yapata mingapi baba? Myaka yangu yapata khatnsini na /ano labuda, bwana. Insliaallah u^apona. Basi kaa hapa kwetu sikTi chache, nlale kit'a- ndani. Tu^akupa <7awa illi upate usingizi, kisha baadae ufaona hujambo, u/akwenda 2zako nyumbani kwako. Ahasanfa Bwana, abasan/a, ri'/akaa. N/ajaribu kutuliz^ moyo wangu. Una nini mtoto 3 we' ? A ! N'na masLaka mangi, kwanza n'na funza maguuni, pili na/omwa ni inwiba kidoleni. Mashaka yako si mazito sana mtoto, ya/aondoka karibu na//*ani. Nf?oo huku kwangu niku/oe funza na mwiba pia, neno dogo hili, lafanyika mara moja. Bwana dakitari, 4 waitwa ni kipofu huyu. Asema aumwa sana ni ma/o tangn alipokwenda kwa yule mganga wa kinyika. Ni upumbavu wakwe basi,Daliouuonyaasiende. Waganga wale hawajui lo lot'e isipokuwa kudhuru wat'u na kuwa- Janganya. Mwambie ak'e/i, /'akuja sasa hivi, 5 wako
1 Etyniologically the word " p'ole " cannot bear the meaning put upon it here ; it is rather the tone that conveys it.
* A very common ellipsis. The omitted word, " ndia " (ways) is never inserted.
3 Familiar abbreviation of " wewe."
4 Translate by Active Voice.
5 " They are there " for " there are." " Kuna " or " pana " might be used, but convey a more general and less definite sense.
STUDY XIX 111
wengine waningojeao, wenyi ukoma na safura na rati na marad/ti 6 kadha'wakadha.
Translate
This is a Government hospital where white people are nursed. Black people go to the Mission Hospital, which is (iliyoko) on the island. There (huko} medicine is given daily (killa siltu) to every one who comes, whoever he may be. Those who are ill receive medical treatment (Jiuganywa) and are cared for. Besides this (zaidi ya liaya mambo} the doctors train (hufunAisha) intelligent (having intelligence) young men [in] this work of mercy. These helpers wash sores, dispense (hutoa) medicine, take out (ng'oa) teeth, and bandage (funga) wounds. Those who have colds, coughs, chest complaints, rheumatism, catarrh and fever live [in] one house, smallpox patients (having s.p.) [in] another (house), and those who are suffering from (wauguo) boils, (or) abscesses, (or) the itch, (or) big sores, or yaws live [in] a third (house). The daughter of (tr. his daughter) the lame rich man came yesterday with a malignant boil; to-day it came to a head and the doctor lanced it. Much pus came away (toka). These two dumb men have fever. Give them each (killa mt'u} five drops of this drug (of) to cause (too.) perspiration, and tell them to go home and go to bed (lala). It is the custom here that every one who wants medicine must 7 bring a bottle — empty and clean ! AVhy do you not keep still ? Because you 8 hurt my sore place. My adopted (wa kunilea) mother has (feels) pains all over her body; she coughs and sneezes continually. Do not go into that house " lest you get chicken-pox.
u This and many other Arabic words do not follow the Swahili rule of accentuating the penultimate.
' A favourite expression for " bring " is " kuja na " (to come with).
8 When transitive verbs express an action that affects a man's person or being, the idea of possession is conveyed by inserting the personal objective infix in the verb, excluding the possessive adjective from the sentence. Ex. Umenikanyaga guu, you have trodden on me (the foot) ; itekuumiza kitwa, it will hurt you (the head).
8 "Lest "is translated by the Negative Subjunctive of "kuja" used as an auxiliary followed by the " ka " tense of the principal verb.
112
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
ADVERBS AND ADVEEBIAL PHRASES
Adverbs generally follow the words they modify, be they verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs. Pure adverbs — especially of manner — are not very numerous, but they can be extemporized to an almost unlimited extent by prefixing the preposition Tcwa to both nouns and infini- tives of verbs. Ex. kwa furaha, joyfully, kwa kuteka, laughingly.
ADVERBS OF TIME
sasa, now.
sasa hivi, hivisasa, 71010 at once.
ha<a sasa, until now, even now.
mara moja, once, at once.
mara nibili, twice, etc.
mara nyingi, often.
mara kwa mara, time after time, from time to time, again and again.
mara (precedes verb), immedi- ately.
<cna, again, (not . . .) any more.
karibu, near, soon, lately, not long ago.
leo, to-day.
jana, yesterday.
jnzi, flay before yesterday.
juzi-juzi, the other day.
kesbo, io-morrow.
kesho-ku<wa, day after to-morrow.
njtondo, three day* hence.
nyuina, after, later.
mapema, early.
asubulii, in the morning.
asubuhi yakwe, the next morning, on the following morning.
asubuhi sana, early in the morning.
alfajiri, at dawn, at daybreak.
a/A uliuri, at noon.
nifana, in the daytime.
alasiri, in the afternoon.
jioni, in the evening, at dusk.
nsiku, at night, in the night.
usiku sana, late at night.
usiku wa manane, midnight (lit.
2 a.m.). kwanza, first, firstly, before (in
the first instance). mwisho, last, lastly. katikati, in the middle. barfo, not yet, slill, as yet. bado kidogo, soon, present'y baadae p'unde, later on, in a few
minufet.
mbele, before, first, earlier. baarfae, afterwards, later. hafa, until, ecen.
palepale, that very moment (past). p'unde, just now, a little while ago. p'iudi, when, in a little while. papo kwa papo, moment 1y
moment.
pnpo hapo, immediately. hapo kale, long ago, a lotig time,
ago. hadma, hotimac, finally, in the
end.
zamani, formerly. mpaka, until. siku liizi, now-a-days. sikuzo^'e, ahcay*. killa siku, daily, every day, re<jn-
larly. eiku kwa siku, now and again,
fitfully. siku liafa siku, day by day, day
after day, from one day to
another.
STUDY XIX
113
daima, continually, perpetually. '/ahari,/or ever.
milclc, for ever ami ever (retro- spective and anticipatory), halafu, afterwards, presently.
kabla or kabula (followed by •• j a "
tense), ere, before. tangu (followed by "po" teiiac),
since. -po- (adverbial infix), ichen.
ADVERBS OF PLACE
juu. up above, upstairs.
hukojuu, up there.
l"m\, down below, downstairs.
pale <ini, down there.
nt'i, on the ground.
ndani, inside, within.
ndc, oiilxiiJe, icithout.
mbele, in front, at the head, on
before.
katikati, in the middle, in between. mbeleni, in the future. nyuma. behind. mbali,/«;- away. karibu, near, nigh. k'ando, aside, apart, to one side. k'ando k'ando, alongside, all
round, all along the side. hapa, here.
hapo, there (place in mind).
pale, there, over there.
huku, here, in this direction.
huko, there (place in mind).
kule, there, in that direction.
humu, in here.
humo, in there (place in mind).
m'le, in there, inside tJiere.
papa hapa, just here.
kuku huku, just there.
mumu humu, just in there.
pale pale, on the same spot.
kule kule, in the same direct inn.
po pot'e, anywhere.
pengine, elsewhere.
pia pia, all over the teliole.
ko<'e kot'e, everywhere.
-po- (adverbial infix), where.
ADVERBS OF INTERROGATION
-je ? (suffixed to verb), how ? kwa gababu gani ? for what
joe ? (introduces question), what 1 reason ?
tangu lini? how long ayo? since
when?
ka^iri gani? in what measure? in ichat proportion ?
wapi ? (-pi ?) where ? whither ? lini? when ! jinsi gani? how in this? kwani? why? wherefore? mbona? why? wherefore?
kiasi gani ? at what price ?
la ! no !
siyo, no, not so.
ADVERBS OF NEGATION
sivyo, not so, not thus.
naam,.ye«. ndiyo, yes, it is go.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION
ndivyo, it is so, it is thus.
II
114
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
ADVERBS OF MANNER AND DEGREE
hivi, vile, hivyo, yivyo, thus, so. vile vile, just so, just the same. vivyo hivyo, precisely the s:ime. kama, as, such as.
-vyo . . . vyo, as ... so.
kama . . . vjo \as . . .
jinsi . . . vyo \asorhow . . .
vile . . . vyo (just as ...
kama vile . . . vyo 'ere» as . . . \kadiri ya . . . vyo, according as . . . no, in proportion as . . . so. vyema, well, nicely. kadbalika, in like manner. vizuri, beautifully, nicely. vibaya, badly, ill. bure, to no purpose, freely, for
nothing.
upesi, quickly, rapidly. upande, on one side, crookedly. p'ole p'ole, slowly, gently. rarafibu, cart-fully. kwa kusikiiika, sorrowfully. kwa majonzi, sadly. KV a urefu, lengthwise. kwa upana, breadthwise. kwa bidii, enthusiastically, ener- getically.
kwa nguvu, by force. vyengine, differently.
vyepesi, easily.
sharfi, necessarily.
mbalimbali, separately.
wazi, plainly, clearly, obviously.
sawa (adj. and adv.)> right.
straight, level, equal. sawa sawa, properly, tu, only, simply (always at the
end of a phrase), kweli (may precede verb), truly,
really.
kwa kweli, thoroughly. haraka, quicldy, hurriedly. ghafula, suddenly, abruptly. sana, very, very much, thoroughly. in 'no, exceedingly, a great deal. haba, a little, very little. kidogo, a little rather. p'unde, a little. kidogo-kidogo, by degrees. hate kidogo, not even a little, not
any.
z&idi, more. kabisa, altogether, entirely, not at
all.
kamwe, not at all, never. halisi, exactly, precisely, genuinely. pekeyakwe, by himself. yayo kwayayo, all over again.
NOTE. — The different uses of Icweli must not be confounded. Ex. Mt'u wa kweli (adj.). a true, just man ; mtu kwa kweli (adv.), truly (in truth) a man • alimsifu kwa kweli (adv.), he did indeed praise him or lie praised him thoroughly.
NOTE. — Halisi can be used adjectively to mean "a thorough." Ex. Ni baharia halisi, he is a thorough sailor.
STUDY XX
115
STUDY XX
Madarasa — School
mkufunzi (i.), teacher.
mzazi (i.), parent.
mafunzo mafundisho (v. pi.), teaching, instruction
liwali (v.), native governor (also wali).
darasa (v.), class.
hikima (iii.), wisdom.
hukumu (iii.), authority, com- mand.
maarifa (\r. pi.), knowledge.
am'ri (iii.), an order, a command.
hisbima (iii.), honour, respect.
had (iii.), handwriting, docu- ment.
hisabu (iii.), sum, calculation.
rahamani (iii.), map, chart.
kibao (iv.), slate (originally of wood).
mbao (vii.), boards, forms.
kosa (v.), fault, mistake, trans- gression.
chuo cha majina (iv.), register.
jiografia (iii.), geography.
ushindani ukaidi (z'bar) (vii.), obstinacy.
kiburi (iv.), pride.
hasira (iii.), anger, indignation.
kinanda (iv.), musical instrument (piano, harmonium, organ).
iokaa (iii.), lime.
fimbo (iii.), cane, stick.
thawabu (iii.), prize, reward.
tuzo (iii.), consolation prize.
zawadi (iii.), present, gift.
kupeleka chuoni, to send to school.
kujKahidi, to endeavour.
kufanya bidii, to take pains.
kuhifimu, to finish education.
kuarifu, to inform (by letter).
kuagiza, to give instructions to.
kudarisi, to hold a class. kuhishimu, to honour, to respect, kuamrn, to command, kukubali, to receive, to accept,
to agree to, to allow, kufuliza, to go on, to persevere,
to precipitate.
kufoa kosa, to blame, reproach, kusifu, to praise, kuonea, to oppress, to ill-treat, kujumlisha, to add (addition), kupunguza, to subtract, kuzidisha, to multiply, kumaliza, to complete, to finish, kukua, to grow (applies only to
animal kingdom), kunena nwongo, to lie, to tell
lies.
kupiga kofi, to clap hands, kupiga k'ofi, to box on the ears, kusikifika, to be sorry, kuimba, to sing, kusbinda, to win, to conquer, to
beat, kutukana, to use insulting
language, to abuse, knona haya, to feel ashamed, kutangulia, to be ahead of, to
take the lead, to precede, kufukiza, to irritate, displease,
offend.
-kai(7i, obstinate, stubborn, -zima, whole, entire, horfari, strong, clever, capable, -tukutu, mischievous, fidgetty. ji/iha(ft (iii.), effort, endeavour. bWii (iii.), zeal, pains, enthu- siasm, ilimu (iii.), learning, doctrine,
study, knowledge. arZabu (iii.), politeness, good
manners, chaki (iii.), chalk.
116 SWAH1LI GRAMMAR
kawaida (iii.), etiquette, custom, wivu (vii.), jealousy, envy.
" the correct thing," unwritten waziwazi. plainly, obviously.
law. wimbo (vii.), hymn, song,
bakishishi (iii.), a gratuity, dole. mashindano (v., pi.), competitiun,
aibu (iii.), shame, disgrace. race,
haya (iii.), sense of shame, mbio (iii.), running, great
modesty. rapidity.
msamaha (vii.)» forgiveness. matukano (v., pi.), insults, vulgar
haja (iii.), request, desire, need. insulting language.
(Zaraja (iii.), promotion, honour, thamani (iii.), price, value.
preferment, degree, order. sifa (iii.), praise, commendation,
uvivu (vii.), idleness, laziness, mapenzi (v., pi.), love, will.
sloth. ruhusa, rukhsa (iii.), leave, per-
-vivu, idle, lazy. mission.
Bead and Translate
Mwana umleavyo, ndivyo akuavyo ! Mwalimu miuoja wa kihindi anaanza (opened) " skuli " katika mji wa kale illi kufundisha kizungu, Wanafunzi wakwe hawafu- nzwi ha/i wala hisabu. Ameandika vijana ishirini na vi ne katika chuo cha majina ela nasikia hawafulizt kuja killa siku, nae mwenyewe hana hukumu juu yao. Ohuoni inwetu swiswi (a< our school) twafunzwa kujumlisha, kupunguza, kuzidisha na kugawanya. Tuna rahamani ukutani, tupate kuelewa habari ya ulimwengu tuuke/io — ilimu hii yaitwa jiografia. 2'ena tuna vibao na peseli na kalamu na mbao mweusi na chaki — vyo/'e vipaeavyo. jMkufunzi wetu ni hodari kwa kupiga kinanda — atuimbisha nyinubo nznri killa namna. Siku k'uu ya ku/olea thawabu tu/aziimba mbele ya wazungu woi'e na kundi zima la wat'n. Ku/akuwa na mashindano eiku ile — killa mtoto ku- shindana na wenziwe kwa kupiga mbio na kuruk'a na mambo mengine. Wenyi kushinda hupawa zawadfi na tuzo, wat'u vrote wakipiga k'ofi. Yawapasa wazazi wo/'e kuwaleta watoto wao chuoni mwetu. Usbindani na uvivu oa matukano hayakubaliwi kabisa. Sharti killa m'tu afanye bidii kwendelea mbele.
STUDY XX 117
Translate
The beginning of all wisdom is to fear God and to keep (fihika) His commandments. The liwali's son (his son the liwali) does not study any longer, he has finished his education. His father sent him to school when he was quite small and he himself persevered, and endea- voured [to get on], so that (hata) he got great praise (many praises) from his master the other day when he left school. If a boy transgresses he must ask forgive- ness, and he (nae) will be forgiven ; but if he hides his faults and tells lies he will be disgraced (jpata aibu\ and (woo) his parents will be sorry. These girls have no manners nor respect, they play [about] all day and (tena) have no one to teach them. If they were allowed (got leave) to come to school they would not be [so] mischievous and obstinate as they are (Jcama vile walivyo). Love is a thing of (having) great value in the world. By love we can help those who are oppressed, and instruct those who have no knowledge. It is not the correct thing here to ask for gratuities. He who does this (thing) has no sense of shame. If your companion is ahead of you do not be displeased. The young men who get promotion are those who honour their parents and teachers. I can see plainly that you will not be able to complete your task this week.
PKEPOSITIONS
Pure prepositions are few in Swahili, the reason, presumably, being that the prepositional form of the verb and the locative case of the noun largely obviate the necessity of using them. They are : —
katika, in, into, among, about, kwa (instrumental) by, by means out of, on. of, with, for, to, through.
hate, even, until, as far as. ni, by (said of the agent).
mpaka, until, till, as far as. pasipo, without.
kutoka, toka, fokea, from, since. bila, except, without.
tangu, from, since, for (tangu (i)sipokuwa (var.), save, except,
siku nyingi, for many days). -a (var.), of.
na, with, together with.
118
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Frequently the same preposition is used with two entirely opposite meanings, each being imparted to it by the verb with which it is employed. Ex. —
Ametoka katika nyumba, Amengia katika nyumba, Nalitoka kwa mwalimu,
Nalingia kwa mwalimu,
lie came out of the house.
Tie went into the house.
1 came out of the teacher's
[house], 1 went into the teacher's
[house].
ADVERBIAL PREPOSITIONS
These are formed by combining in one phrase an adverb and the variable preposition -a (of). Pronouns following these require to be in the possessive case. Ex. —
mbele yangu = before me.
nyuma yakwe = behind him.
kinyume chako = against you.
juu ya, upon, above, over, against,
about, with regard to. <ini ya, under, underneath. mbele ya (or za), in front of,
before (time and place), nyuma ya, behind, after (time
and place).
ndani ya, inside of, in. nde ya, outside of, out of. kabla ya, before (time), kwa ajili ya,/or the sake of. kwa sababu ya, because of, on
account of. badala ya, instead of, in exchange
for.
baada ya, after (time).
k'ando ya, by, by the side of,
beside. k'ando k'ando ya, on both sides of,
round about.
karibu ya, near, near to, nearly. kati ya, during. kati kati ya, in the middle or
midst of.
kinyume cha, against, contrary to, upande wa, on the . . . side of. zak?i ya, beside, in addition to. mabali pa, in lieu of, in place of,
instead of. mfano wa, like, similar to.
Occasionally na (with) is substituted for (y)a. Karibu na, mbali na, pamoja na. These are followed by the objective not the possessive pronoun. Ex. —
mbali naswi =far away from us. karibu nae = near him. pamoja nao = together with them.
STUDY XX 119
CONJUNCTIONS
Several verb tenses have a conjunctive force. Ex. —
(1) The Subordinate Tenses of the Indicative, Impera- tive, and Subjunctive with "fca" (and). Ukafanya (and you made), kafanye (and make), ukafanye (and that you, may make).
(2) The Participial with " ki " (if). Akifanya, if Jte makes.
(3) The Negative Participial with "sipo'' (if not). Wasipofanya, if they do not do [it].
(4) The "Even should" or "Although" Tense with "japo." Nijapofanya, although or even should I do. . . .
(5) The "Though" Tense with "nga" or " ngawa." Tungafanya or ingawa twafanya, though we do. . . .
Other conjunctions not bound up in verbs are —
na, and, but (this combined with the pronominal suffix of a noun
preceding it in fact or thought means " also " : mfaume nae
akenda, the king went also).
pia, also, too (stands at the end of a phrase or sentence), tu, provided that, if so be that, if only, so long as (stands at the end
of a phrase or sentence), lakini, but (see note subjoined), walakini, but.
ilia, ela, but (except) — not strongly adversative. £ena, again, moreover, furthermore, besides, bali, but, rather, but rather, basi, therefore, then, now, so. ndiposa, therefore, and so, that is how it was. kwaniba, kama, kana kwamba, that, whether, if. ya kwamba, ya kuwa, that.
illi, illi kwaniba, in order that, to the intent that, so that, au, au . . . au, or, either ... or. wala, nor, neither . . . nor. pamoja na haya, nevertheless, notwithstanding, kisha, then, kwa kuwa, kwa maana ya, kwa sababu ya, kwani maana, for, because,
for as much as, the reason being. haia, and, even, kwa ajili ya hayo, wherefore.
k'wenda (followed by " ka " tense), supposing that, may be that, isipokuwa, howbeit, but. mithali na (u . . .), supposing (you were to . . . ), (followed by Subj.).
120 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
NOTE ON "AND" AND "Box"
" Na " bears both meanings. In using this word its original force should be kept in mind, which is not that of the conjunction " and," but of the preposition " with."
It means " and " as a conjunctive particle —
Juma na mkewe, Juma and (or with) his icife.
It means " but " as a contrastive particle —
Juma ni mzuri sura zakwe, Juma is handsome as to his na mkewe ni m'ovu, countenance, but his wife in
ugly.
NOTE. — Here "lakini" (but; would be quite out of place.
Na is used to introduce a subjunctive phrase : na tuotnbe, let us pray. When it precedes a vowel the " a " may be elided to form one word. Ex. Naje for na aje.
Ilia, ela, but. The root-meaning " except " must lie borne in mind.
Wat'u woJ'e wamekaja, ilia Everybody came, but you <li<l
wewe hukuja, not come.
Juma ni mzuri, ela mkewe Juma is handsome, but his
si mzuri, irife is not.
Lakini, but. This is always used by way of quali- fying what has been stated in the previous .sentence, <.r what is implied by it —
Juma ni mzuri, lakini ni Juma is handsome, but In /.<
kiwete, a cripple.
Ulinambia ya Juma, lakini You told me about Juma, but
ya mkewe hukunambia, not about his icife.
Isipokuwa, but. The use of this is much the same as " ilia " with an extension of meaning.
STUDY XXI
121
STUDY XXI
Dini — Religion
Maumba (i.). Creator.
Bwana Jesu Masihi, Lord Jesus Christ.
Roho Mtakatifu, Holy Spirit.
Mwokozi (i.), Saviour.
Malaika (iii.), Angel.
Sheifani (v.), Satan, devil.
Mmasihia, Mnasara (i.), Chris- tian.
Muisilamu (i.), Muhammedan.
Jmamu(v.), Mubammedan priest.
Bishopu (v.), Bishop.
Kasisi (v.), Christian minister, presbyter.
Shemasi (v.), Deacon.
Mtume (ii.), Apostle.
Nabii (v.), Prophet.
Kafiri (v.), Unbeliever, Infidel.
Msb.iri.ka (i.), Partner, communi- cant.
Kanisa (v.), The Church.
msikiti (ii.), church, mosque.
Maan(ttko (v. pi.), Writings, Scriptures.
Kuruani (iii.), Koran.
Injili (iii.), Gospel.
Waraka (vii.), Epistle.
Taureti (iii.), Law (of Moses).
sharia (iii.), l*w.
Zaburi (iii.). Psalms (Prayer- Book).
Maagano ya Kale (v. pi.), Old Covenant or Testament.
Maagano Mapya (v. pi.), New Covenant or Testament.
Mithali (iii.), Proverb, simile, allegory.
sura (iii.), chapter (of Koran).
ishara (iii.), sign, miracle, wonder.
zaka (Hi.), tithes.
hakika (iii.), proof, certainty.
msalaba (ii.), a cross.
<oba (iii.), repentance.
kuamini, to believe, to trust.
kusatiiki, to believe, to credit.
kuaburZu, to worship.
kuokoa, to save, to deliver.
kukomboa, to redeem, to ransom.
kutamani, to covet, to desire.
kusilimu ki-masihia, to become a Christian.
kusilimu ki sawahili, to become a Muhammedan.
kusali, to pray, to say prayers.
kuongoka, to change, to l>e con- verted.
kubapu/izi, to baptize.
kuhuburi, to preach (to).
kutuma, to send (used only of persons).
kubasbiri, kufabiri, to prophesy, to foretell.
kuisbi, to live.
kuwa hai, to be alive.
kushariki, to share, to communi- cate.
kushukuru, to give thanks.
kuiukuza, to glorify, to praise.
kushuhudia, to witness, to testify.
kupiga shahada, to witness to Muhammed by reciting the creed.
kuwaza, to think, to consider.
kuinama, to bend, to stoop, to bow down.
kulaani, to curse.
kuapa (kula kiapo), to swear.
kuitika, knitikia, to answer to a call, to respond (as in church).
kuteajabu, to wonder.
kufariki, to die, to decease.
kuzika, to bury.
kufufuka, to rise from the dead.
kutangaza, to publish, to set forth, to announce.
122
SWAHILI GRAMMAS
kufawala, to rule, to reign, to
control, to govern. kufariji, to comfort, kusalibiwa, to be cruci6ed. kufubu, (kuju/a), to repent, imani (iii.), faith, belief, creed,
goodness, sadaka (iii.), religious offering,
sacrifice, alms, ibarfa (iii.), worship, service, wokofu (vii.), salvation, deliver- ance.
ukombozi (vii.), redemption, famaa (iii.), desire, passion, lust, unyenyekevu (vii.), humility. Islam (iii.)> Mohammedanism,
Islam.
raha (iii.), rest, ease, luxury, uongofu (vii.), conversion, nia (iii.), mind, heart, disposition, n'afusi (iii.), self, person, soul,
spiritual being. roho (iii.), spirit, soul. tozi (v.), a tear, maisha (v. pi.), life, existence,
lifetime.
Ushirika utakatifa (vii.). Holy
Communion, asili (iii.), origin, root, source,
nature.
utakufu (vii.), glory, shahir/i (v.), a witness. Kama</7tani (iii.), Muhammcdan
Fast.
mawazo (v.), thoughts, sanamu (iii.), idol, image, picture, laana (iii.), curse, kiapo (iv.), oath, anasa (iii.), worldly pleasures. ajabu (iii.), wonder, surprise, kifo (iv.), mauti (v. pi.), death,
mortality.
kaburi (v.), grave, tomb, maiti (iii.), dead person, kuzimu (iii.), hell, the cold grave, ahera (iii.), hades, the world to
come.
ad/tabu (iii.), punishment, torturo. marufuka (v. pi.), prohibition,
forbidden things, dhambi (iii. and v.), sin.
Bead and Translate
Dim ya kweli ndiyo ituongozayo kwa Mngu na kutn- fariji roho, Twaamini kwamba Mmasihia ndiye rnwenyi kmva nayo dini hiyo. Muisilamu hutnwita Mnasara, kafiri ; lakini pamoja na hay a huserua, Kafir i akufaae J si Muisilamu asiyekufaa ; maana, ajapo 2shikana sana Da dim yakwe 3yeyo na knd&arau wenyi dini nyengine
1 " Si" = is better than. This is a common ellipsis in bye-words and proverbs, and seems to stand for, " [Give me] . . . and not . . . ."
2 Reciprocal verbs are usually followed by •' na " (with) reminding us of the frequent English prefix (or infix) " con- " (com-), with. Equivalents for reciprocals may readi.y be found in words of this category. Ex, Figana, to combat ; shindana, to contend, to compete, to conflict; shikana, to be connected; patana, to be reconciled, (n consent, to make a contract ; jadJiliana, to contradict ; gandamana, to congeal, etc.
* This insertion of the separable pronoun in addition to the possessive makes the phrase correspond exactly to the English, " His own religion,"
STUDY XXI 123
woi'e, liaoni vibaya kaniwe kuwatumia ruakaliii, akijiona kufairfiwa nao tn. Muumba wa mbingu na n/'i na vjot'e vilivymo ndiye Mwenyiezi Mngu. Aliyetukomboa, kwa kutufilia msalabani, ni mwanawe pekee, Bwana wetu Jesu Masihi, ambae ni Mwokozt wa walimwengii wotf'e. Afunzae nia zetu na kutu/awala n'afusi ni Yeye Roho M/akatifu, aabudiwae na kufukuzwa pamoja na Baba na Mwana. Katika kanisa la Masihi kuna daraja t'atu — mabishopu, makasisi na mashemasi. Kazi yao wotf'e ni kuhubiri injili na kulisha kundi la Mngu. Kundi hilo ndiyo jamaa barikiwa ya waaminifu wotf'e. Mabihi ali- weka sakaramenti mbili kwa wafuasi wakwe — Mabapu/izi na Karamu ya Bwana, hiyo yaitwa nayo Ushirika Uta- katifu. Katika chuo cha Biblia kuna tfaureti, vyuo vya raanabii, zaburi, mithali, injili, matendo ya mitume, na nyaraka kadh'awakadha. Vryuo hivi vyoi'e vyam'shu- hurfia Jesu Masihi kuwa ndiye Mwanawe Aliye Juu Sana; wanafunzi wakwe nao walimkubali wakitiwa ha- kika kwa ishara zakwe zo<'e alizotenda mbele yao muda wa kuwamo ulimwenguni. Ilia neno k'uu kupita yofe nikule kufufuka kwakwe mau^ini kwa ajabu kulikoinwo- nyesha wazi kuwa mshindi halisi juu ya kifo na ahera na nguvu zo<'e za kuzimu.
Translate
Man's lifetime is short and (iena) his thoughts are evil. Saying (Inf.) prayers will not take away sin, neither will bowing (Inf.) down to idols cleanse the soul. Muhammedans say there are five things necessary to salvation : To pray, to give tithes for alms, to witness to Muhammed by reciting the creed, to fast [in] Ramadhani, and to go to Mecca. The New Testament teaches us that we are not saved by good works, nor by tears of repent- ance ; but by faith in the Lord Jesus Christ who died for our sake and offered His body as (kuwa) a sacrifice to God for the sins of the whole world. They who believe [in] Him have their nature changed (hugeuzwa asili) by the Holy Spirit, so that they love (icaka-} the things which they formerly hated, and hate those which they
124 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
loved in the first instance. The Muhammedan religion is called the " Easy Way " ; the reason being that those who follow it are not required to give tip worldly plea- sures or the lusts of the flesh. If a man becomes a Muhammedan, sins such as hypocrisy and deceit are not forbidden to him. He who does righteousness is blessed, he who breaks the law of God is cursed. The writings which are accepted and believed by Muhammedan con- verts are called the Koran, a book containing (cJienyi) 114 chapters. In chapters four, six, seven and forty-eight the doctrine of devils and angels is set forth. All the faithful meet in the Mosque every Friday, when the Imamu preaches to them. The Swahilis say, " Give thanks [for] what you have," and again, " The torture of the grave the dead man knows."
INTERJECTIONS
Emotion is so much expressed by gesture in Swahili that Interjections are at a discount. Particularly is this true of the more educated classes. The following are a few Interjections in common use : —
a ! oh ! hebu ! (hwebu), please do ! won't
a-a ! no ! you ?
ahasanta ! thank you I it is well ! howe ! there then !
ai ! oh ! (of pain). kumbe ! what ! behold !
aka ! what next ! ngawa . . . ! (followed by Xeg.
ati ! I say ! look ! you know ! Ind.), oh that !
basi ! stop ! that will do ! enough. laifi ! oh that ! would to God !
chapu chapu ! look sharp ! liurry lau kwamba ! (followed by Pres.
up ! Ind.), oh that !
1 ewa ! all right ! very good ! lo' ! well ! (great surprise).
1 ee wallah ! yes, by God ! ngoja kwanza ! wait a njinute !
ewe ! ee ! O ! halloa ! hi ! ole wangu ! alas ! woe is me !
haraka ! haste ! hasten ! sa' ! yes ! here I am !
haya ! get on ! come along ! salala ! plague upon you !
haya basi ! there now 1 there ! sumile ! make way ! move ! hima ! make haste !
1 See p. Ill," African Aphorisms."
STUDY XXI 125
NOTE ON REDUPLICATION
Reduplication is common in undeveloped or partially developed languages. In Swahili it affects syllables, words, and phrases, and its uses may be classified as follows : —
1. To intensify or emphasize. — Ex. Papale, just there ; pale-pale, on that very spot ; kubwa-kubwa, very large ; moto-moto, decidedly hot; pana-pana, very broad; (ku)sihi-sihi, to beseech earnestly; kuponda-ponda, to crush to pieces.
2. To modify. — Ex. Maji-maji, watery, thin, liquid; mawe-mawe, stony, pebbly, having little stones ; (ku)k'ata- k'ata, to cut about, to make little cuts; (ku)zunguka- zunguka, to walk about ; (ku)lewa-lewa, to be giddy ; kulia-lia, to fret; (ku)ugua-ugua, to feel unwell, to be out of sorts ; kunuk'a-nuk'a, to have a slight smell.
3. To show continuous action. — Ex. Kuruka-ruka, to keep jumping ; (ku)sukuma-sukuma, to go on pushing, driving, agitating ; (ku)tuma-tuma, to be always sending on errands ; kubadili-badili, to be for ever changing.
4. To give a distributive force. — Ex. Mbili-mbili, two at a time ; usiku-usiku, every night, " of a night " ; kidogo huku, kidogo huku, a little here and there ; kikao wat'u hamsini, kikao wat'u hamsini, fifty in a row (or batch or company); kijaacho kiweke k'ando, kijaacho kiweke k'ando, as each one is full, put it aside.
126
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
THE FORMATION OF VERBAL NOUNS
Verbal nouns may be formed — 1. Prom primary verb stems, active or passive, (a) By simply prefixing a sonant m' (mu or mw) to denote an agent and by prefixing u (w or mw) to form an abstract. Ex. —
mrithi. beir, inheritor m/unga (ii.), shepherd muhi/aji, needy person mwenda, a goer
kurithi, to inherit kutanga, to herd, to tend kuhiteji, to want kwenda, to go
mtumwa, slave kutumwa, to be sent
muonewa, oppressed per- kuonewa, to be oppressed
eon muweza, one who is able kuweza, to be able
(God)
uritM, inheritance (uftmgaji), shepherding ubitaji, want mwen.d(o), gait, goir
conduct utumwa, slavery
uweza (uwezo), ability
power,
(&) By the same process as above, with the particle "ji" suffixed. Ex. —
mwimbaji, singer muombaji, beggar
muuaji, murderer mtendaji, doer mwindaji, hunter
kuimba, to sing kuomba, to beg
ktrna, to kill kutenda, to do kuwin<Za, to hunt
(wimbo), song, hymn uombaji, begging, beg- gary
uuwaji, murder (tendo), action (ninda), hunting
(c) By the same process a« above with the particle " fu " or "vu" suffixed, and an occasional change or elision of terminal vowel —
nWanganyifu, deceiver ktuZanganya, to deceive
udanganyifu, deception,
deceit
kuamini, to believe uaminifu, faithfulness
kuongoa, to lead, to con- uongofu, conversion
vert
kuharibu, to destroy, uharibifu, destruction,
corrupt corruption
kupofea, to be lost or upo/evu, prodigality,
wasted waste
ralegevu, desultory person kulegea, to be slack, loose ulegevn, desultorinesa
mlekevu, upright person kulekea, if) be straight, ulekevu, uprightness
upright
mtulivu, person who sub- kutulia, to be quiet, calm, utulivu,subrni8sion,quiet-
imts to discipline resigned ness
mtakatifu, holy person, kutakata, to be cleansed, utakatifu, holiness, purity eaint pure
muaminifu, believer muongofu, convert
m'haribifa, destroyer mpo<3vu, prodigal
STUDY XXI 127
(d) By the same process as above and a change of final vowel, with an occasional softening of final consonants. Ex. — •
mwivi, thief kuiba, to thieve wivi (wizi), theft
mshoni, tailor, seamstress kushona, to sew ushoni, sewing, needle- work
mnyang'anyi, robber kunyang'anya, to rob unyang'anyi, robbery
mpenzi, lover, loved one kupenrZa, to love upenzi (mapenzi), love
mpanzi, sower kupanda, to sow upanzi, sowing
mlinzi, keeper, guard kulinda, to keep, guard ulinzi, protection, keeping
mfuasi, follower, disciple kufuata, to follow ufuasi, discipleship
(e) In a few instances sentient nouns are formed by prefixing " ki " to the verb —
kinyozi, a barber kunyoa, to shave unyozi, shaving
kiongozi, a leader kuongoza, to lead uongozi, leadership
kipofu, blind person kupofuka, to be blind upofu, blindness, spoiled
sight
kizushi, upstart, intruder kuzuka, to come to the surface, to happen
2. Prom causative stems by the same process and a change of final vowel. Ex. —
mzamishi, baptizer kuzamisha, to cause to go uzamishi, baptism
under water muan<7isb.i, writer, scribe kuandisha (kuandikisha), uandisbi, writing
to cause to write muashi (z'bar), mason kuasha C?), to cause to uashi, masonry
builder build (masonry)
mpishi, cook kupisha(?),tocausetocook upishi, cookery
mtumishi, servant kutumisha, to cause to utumishi, service
serve mzishi, undertaker kuzisha, to prepare for uzishi, burial
burial mtozi, exactor kiUoza, to exact (cause to u£czi, exaction
give out)
mwokozi, saviour kuokcza, to cause to save (wokofu), salvation
mlezi, nurse, rearer kuleza (1), to cause to ulezi, nursing, rearing
bring up muombezi, mediator kuombeza, to cause to uombezi, intercession
intercede mpendezi, one who pleases kupendeza, to please upen^ezi, favour, pleasing
(cause to love) msimamizi, overseer kusimamiza, to cause to usimamizi, stewardship
oversee
mlevi, drunkard kulev[y]a, to intoxicate ulevi, drunkenness
mponyi, deliverer kuponya, to deliver (cause uponyi, deliverance
to escape)
128 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
3. From prepositional stems, by the same process—
mtetea, a champion espouscr kutetea, to fight for
mnenea, a reprover kunenea, to speak to, to scold
mtangazia, one who publishes to kutangazia, to publish to m/olea, a giver ku/olea, to give to
mtengezea, a provider kutengezea, to provide or prepare
for
4. Prom reciprocal stems (abstract or collective nouns with the prefix " ma ") —
maonano, a meeting kuonana, to see one another, to
meet
makut'ano, a crowd kukut'ana, to come together
magawanyikano, separation, divi- kugawanyikana, to be separated
sion from each other
mapatano, agreement kupatana, to ajjrce
mapatanisho, atonement kupatanisha (caus. recip.), to
reconcile
maagano, covenant kuagana, to covenant
mapenrfano, mutual love kupentfana, to love each other
mashindano, contention, emula- kushindana, to contend
tion
maimbizano, antiphonal sin<rinjr kuimbizana, to sin"- to each otlicr
majibizano, catechism kujibizana, to answer each other
5. Some passive verbal nouns change the final a to e —
mtume, apostle (or sent one) kutumwa, to be sent
mshinde, conquered one kushindwa, to be conquered
m<eule, chosen one kuteuliwa or ku/auliwa, to be
chosen or elected kiumbe, created one kuumbwa, to be created
Common nouns, concrete and abstract, may be formed from verbs by prefixing sonant m', ki, ma, or u (w before a vowel) —
m'samaha, forgiveness kusamehe, to forgive
m'sa'/a, help kusauZia, to help
m'sangao, astonishment kusangaa, to be astonished
m'sala, praying mat kusali, to pray
kinoo, grindstone kunoa, to grind, to sharpen
kivuko, ford, crossing kuvuka, to cross (water)
kifiniko, lid, covering kufinika, to cover
kiigizo, pattern, copy kuigiza, to copy, to imitate
maombi, prayers kuomba, to pray
STUDY XXI 129
malipo, recompense, reward kulipa, to pay
mateso, affliction kutesa, to afflict
mavazi, style of dress kuvaa, to wear
mavao, clothing kulala, to Bleep
malazi, sleeping-place kutata, to be entangled
matata, complications, tangles kuvuna, to reap
mavuno, harvest kufa, to die
ufu, death kuasi, to rebel
uasi, rebellion kuiba, to thieve
wivi, theft kutisha, to frighten
utisho, alarm, fright kukumbuka, to remember ukumbusho, reminder
Verbal nouns of Arabic origin usually change root vowels and take no prefix —
sifa, praise kusifu, to praise
aharZi, a promise kuahu/i, to promise
baraka, a blessing kubariki, to bless
hisabu, a sum kuhasibu, to count
ibarfa, worship kuabu/Zu, to worship
saburi or subira, patience kusubiri, to be patient
sala, prayer kusali, to pray
furaha, joy kufurahi, to rejoice
faraja, comfort kufariji, to comfort
GENERAL NOTES ON NOUNS AND THEIR
CLASSES
1. Many nouns in "ma" (mostly concrete) have a singular meaning and are in cl. iii. Ex. —
mashua, a boat. maradufu, thick calico,
masikini, a poor man. mashariki, east,
marehemu, the late so and so. raagaribi, west.
marikabu, a ship. mail (pi.), wealth, property
malaika, an angel. (" mail " takes plural concords
marirZadi, a dandy. also from cl. v.).
ma.\ti, dead person. See note 5, majilisi, seat (outside a house —
Study I. used for palavers).
2. Others, also in "ma," having a plural form and taking only plural concords (of cl. v.) stand for English nouns which have no plurality in the idea. These are largely abstract nouns and names of liquids. Ex. —
SWAHILI GRAMMAR I
130
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
mafuta, oil.
maji, water.
maziwa, milk.
marashi, perfume.
manuk'ato, perfumed ointment.
mapenzi, love, will.
maisha, life.
mazoea, habit, custom, use.
mashizi, soot.
maana, meaning, reason, cause.
manufaa, profit.
mafrikio, hatred.
maud, death.
majira, time.
majonzi, grief.
maju/o, repentance.
mara<77d, sickness.
marirf/iawa, abundance.
majaaliwa, enabling (divinely
bestowed).
mail, property (also in cl. iii.). manyezi, abhorrence, disgust, mate, saliva, mamlaka, authority, power.
"Vita" (cl. iv. pi.), war, is an instance of this in another class.
3. The student will observe that nouns beginning with an aspirated consonant belong usually to cl. iii. or cl. vii. (pi.). The following, though bearing a resemblance to nouns of cl. iv., are no exception to the rule —
k'iu (yangu), (my) thirst. ch'umvi (Mi), (this) salt, ch'aga (zetu), (our) store-houses.
k'ima (wangu), monkeys.
(my) black
kinda (young bird or animal) has a " ma " plural (cl. v.).
4. Several nouns are variations of meaning —
mkono (cl. ii.), arm, hand (of
body)
mlango (cl. ii.), door ukuta (cl. vii.), wall kikapu (cl. iy.), small basket unyasi (cl. vii.), blade of grass dharnbi (pi. cl. iii.), sin (collec- tively)
ngoma (cl. iii.), dance, drum kijembe (cl. iv.), pocket knife pesa (cl. iii.), pice mbingu (cl. vii. pi.), heaven mti (cl. ii.), tree, wood ckungwa (cl. iii.), oranges kono (cl. v.), arm (of river, creek, etc.)
in two or more classes with
lango (cl. v.), large door, gate,
entrance
kuta (cl. v.), high wall k'apu (cl. iii.), large basket manyasi (cl. v.), grass, weeds madhambi (cl. v.), individual
sins
goma (cl. v.), big drum jembe (cl. v.), hoe mapesa (cl. v.), small change mawingu (cl. v.), clouds kiti (cl. iv.), stool, chair (of
wood) machungwa (cl. v.), large
oranges
STUDY XXI 131
5. Sentient nouns may be found in nearly all the classes taking the respective plurals of those classes. Ex.—
CLASS II.
mtume, apostle mitume
m/elea, a laying hen mi/e/ea
CLASS III.
mbari, relative, kinsman mbari
p'epo, evil spirit p'epo
k'ala, ichnumen k'ala
CLASS IV.
kibarna, day labourer ' vibarua
kip'ungu, osprcy vipungu
kiumbe, mortal creature viumbe
kiroboto, flea, swift mail-runner viroboto
CLASS V.
Yahu(/i, Jew Mayahii'/i
asi, rebel maasi
/ajiri, rich man ma/ajiri
shekhe, chief, elder mashekhe
ka^/d, judge ma.ka.il Id
kuhani, priest makuhani
CLASS VI. jana, big lad mijana
CLASS VII.
udfiri, u/awatawa, poultry lice (used collectively)
No invariable rule can be given for the concords of other parts of speech used to qualify such nouns ; these sometimes follow cl. i. (e.g. malaika wale watakatifu), and sometimes the " irrational " class to which the word belongs (Ex. Jimbi hili lawika sana). Others again require some "sentient" and some "irrational" concords (Ex. Ndugu zangu watatu wanakuja. Wajolize walim- wona. Kijana kike huyu akwita). See note 1, Study VIII.
1 Probably so called from a chit or ticket of identification.
132 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
TRANSLATIONS OF THE EXERCISES
STUDY I
The master and the mistress. I and my master. You and your child. I and you and he. My mistress and your sister. Good day ! (very) good day ! Good morning. How are you, Sir? (Quite) well (thank you). Are you feeling well? I am quite well (thank you). And are you quite well? I am very well (thank you). Are you better ? I am better, thank you. Madam, how are you ? (Quite) well (thank you). And are you all right ? I am all right (thank you). Is your brother better? He is better, Madam. And how is your son feeling? He is very well indeed. This is good news ! Good evening, Sir. Good-bye, Madam. Good-bye !
Sabalkheri ! Jambo, bibi ! Sijambo, bwana ! U hali gani ? Ni hali njema. Hu jambo, bwana? Sijambo, ahasanfa? Bwana wangu hajambo ? Hajambo sana. Bibiyangu nae hajambo? Hajambo! Nduguyo yu hali gani? Yu hali njema sana. Nduguyo (mwanamke) yu hali gani ? Ahasante, Bwana, yu hali njema. Yeye na •wewe na mirai. Bwana wangu. Bibiyangu. Nduguyo. Msaalkheri, bwana. Msaalkheri, bibi. Naam ! La! Kwa herini.
STUDY II
Boy, come. Bring (some) water. Yes, Ma'am, I will bring (some) directly. Come along (be) quick! Do you hear ? I hear, Ma'am. We want food now. Very well, Ma'am, we will bring it quickly. Are you hungry, Ma'am ? Be quiet, boy, just do (your) work. Now then, Ma'am, I have brought (the) food. Have you brought
KEY TO EXERCISES 133
water as well, boy? My fellow (servant) brought it, Ma'am. That will do, now you can go and bathe. Come back quickly. Yes, Ma'am. My fellow-servant wants hot water and soap. Very well, he shall have (them). You are making a great deal of noise, boys ; we want to sleep. Ma'am, I want pice that I may buy food. Here, then, take (these) pice. Go quickly. Thank you, Ma'am.
Jee, mtoto, unale'a /aa? Bado, Bibi, mwenzangu anakwenda kununua mafuta. Atfarudi lini? Atarndi sasa hivi, Bibi. Jee, unafua nguo ? Ndiyo, Bibi, n'nafua. Uruefua na ki/ambaa? La! Bibi nimesahau. Jee, u<a- pata kuleta maji ? Ndiyo, Bibi, n'tapata. Mwenzangu amekuja sasa, Bibi, ni zamu yak we kutumika. Vyema, alete chakula basi, twatfaka kula. Nyainaza, mtoto, wa- fanya, k'elele sana, haifai. Vyema, Bibi, f'anyamaza sasa. Lete faa upesi, twafaka kutezama k'itu. Basi, waweza kwenda sasa.
STUDY III
Has the teacher come ? Not yet, Ma'am, he is coming now, I see him in the street. Good morning, Bwana. Good morning, Bibi. Boy, bring (some) chairs. Bwana, sit down. Thank you, Bibi, lam seated. Now I want (a) pea and (some) paper. Here, Bwana, please take (this) pen. Do you want me to write? Yes, Bibi, try to write now. Have you finished to write (writing) ? Yes, teacher, I have finished. Well, now, I want you to read. What book shall I read? Eead (the) First Book. Eead (the) word*--.1 Then tell me their meaning. Is it clear to you ? Yes, teacher, it is quite clear to me. Do you know the meaning? I do (know). Good, Bibi, read again, then spell the words. Eead out loud that I may (get) to hear. Pronounce the words well that you may learn to read nicely.
Mbona mwalimu amechelewa leo? Labuda hawezi. La ! yuaja sasa. Sabalkheri, mwalimu, u hali gani ? Ni hali njema. K'et'i (Bwana). Tafa^Aali, Bibi, nipa chuo 1 Lit. " when you finish."
134 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
iiawe twaa chuo ukasome. Sasa \veka chuo mezani uka- sikize. Takuuliza masuali. Vyema (Bwana) nami nifa- jaribu kujibu. Basi sasa, umejibu vizuri. Na furahi sana. Jee, wa£aka wino? Ndiyo na£aka, na peniseli pia. Mwanafunzi ajaribu kusemalugha ya kisawahili. Aweza kusoma harufu. Alianza lini ? Nalimfundisha msiari wa kwanza jana.
STUDY IV
Open the window, I want to look out. I see a lot of people in the street, let us shut the door quickly. Where is the key? It is upstairs. Go and look on the roof. The people are gone now, shall I open the door? Yes, open (it), then sweep the steps, and the courtyard, also the verandahs. I want a mat to put on the door-step. Wait a little (while), you will get (it). Where is the cat ? The cat has just (now) gone out. Where is she gone ? Perhaps she is gone to look for a rat. Call her, I. want her to eat (her) food; she is hungry. All night long she was making a noise. Boy, have you polished the looking-glass? Yes, Ma'am, and I cleaned the windows as well. Where have you been ? I was on the roof, crying. Why did you cry? Because I wanted to go out ; but I was called (i.e. wanted by employer). Oh ! never mind !
Shuka, nakusihi, sasa hivi. Nduguyo aku£afu/a. Yu- ko wapi? Yuko sebuleni. Mwambie aje ukumbini. Vyumba vyafaka kupewa, na ghala pia. Jee, mlango wa orofa u wazi? La! Umefungwa. Ufungue, basi. Mtoto u/ak:i kungia ndani. Vyema, angie ndani aka- shuke /ini. Mwalimu ameleka m/ana ku<wa. Mbona aliteka? Muulize. Asema, alimwona p'anya akitezama kiooni. Wako p'anya tele nyumbani ? Wako tele sana.
STUDY V
Come and let us sit down at the table, tea will be brought directly. The tablecloth is not clean, why (is that) ? I hear that Juma spilt some coffee here this
KEY TO EXERCISES 135
morning. Call Juma ! Juma ! You are called. Yes, Ma'am, here I am (lit. I am come), did you call me? Yes, I did call you. Is it true (that) you spilt coffee on the tablecloth to-day ? It is not true, Ma'am. Coffee was spilt ; but I did not do it (lit. " not I "). Who was (lit. " is ") it then ? Perhaps it was the cat. I saw her in the room. Can a cat spill coffee ? She can if she is thirsty and wants to drink. That will do, go away now. Tell Ali to bring sugar and bread and honey. Where are the saucers ? They are in the cupboard, they forgot to put them on the table. Bring them quickly, the tea will be cold. It is absolutely cold already. It will not do, boys, to be late like this. Now I want spoons and cups.
Bilauri na sahani zafakwa mezani, wat'u waja kula chakula cha mfana hapa leo. Jee, nilete vijiko na uma pia ? Ndiyo na/aka kuaneftka meza fayari sasa. Jee, watekunwa maji ? Ndiyo, watekunwa rnaji yakiwa safi. Twaa sinia ukapakue chakula, kieha piga k'engele ku- waita wat'u. Umesahau kuweka kawa juu ya sahani. Mwambie mpishi apashe moto k'uku wa jana. Jaribu kukuncZa nguo ya meza sawa sawa. Waweza kuancZika meza vizuri nguo ikiwa si safi ? La ! haifai ! Tulionda asali tukaiona <amu. Mtoto alimiza Vitu akasema, Ni sukari. Kwamba ilikuwa sukari angeliteka, lakini sasa alia. Tuondoke, arfaate. Mtoto akilia ha/apata mkate wa <amu.
STUDY VI
The cook forgot to light the fire. Why did you not do it then? I had no firewood, that is why: the cook has gone to buy (some) in the market. Never mind, you can kill the fowl in readiness. Where is the fowl ? It is in the courtyard walking about. Will it be wanted for the mid-day meal ? Yes, it will be wanted. Give me a box of matches, please, the fire won't light. Pot a little oil in, it will burn up quickly. I do not see (any) oil, perhaps it is finished. No ! it is not finished, it is in the storeroom. I saw it yesterday. Are you boiling the
136 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
meat? No! I am frying it. Have you cooked rice as well? I have not cooked any. Give me a knife to cut up the vegetables. The vegetables are rotten. They are not rotten, you do not know anything (at all about it). Look, the milk is boiling over. Take the saucepan off the fire. Soot has got into the milk. It does not matter.
Jee unatia munyu na pilipili mJuzini ? Ndiyo, kido- go ; lakiui sikutia katika mboga. TJsikoroge maziwa kwa kisu, koroga kwa kijiko. Tezama, umeteketeza nguo, hukuona moto ? La ! Sikuona k'itu. Jee, mtoto anakunanazi? Bado, afokuna kisha. Mpishi ameiukua mbuzi. Jee, wapika kwa makaa? La! Twapika kwa k'uni. Tukifaka kuoka twafinika sufuria kwa niakaa ya moto. Mbona mtoto hakuondoa maivu? Labuda alisa- hau. Maji yachemka, jee kandarinya ifayaika ? La ! Najua hai/ayaika. Ilifanywa makusudi kupika maji. Naona moshi yatoka dirishani.
STUDY VII
Come along, let us go out for a little walk. Let us go in the shade then, here the sun is very hot. I want to go to the Fort, which road shall we take ? I do not know the way, but some one told me that the Main Street leads to the Fort. I am told (or I hear) that the Gate of the City stood (was) here formerly. Perhaps it is true, I was not there. Listen ! I hear a noise, the porters are fight- ing. You had better not go to look, there are a lot of people and a lot of dust. (And)^then it is going to rain, we had better return home. No ! do not let us go in yet, the rain is not coming, the wind is blowing too much. Let us go to the Custom-house then and see the trollies. Make way ! Make way ! A trolly is coming at great speed, move out of the road. Take care, there is a stone here, it has fallen from the wall. There is the teacher — he is talking to a poor man — shall we (go and) speak to him ? Yes, let us .speak to him, he is a good man. Some children are following us : tell them not to come. If a slave runs away we call him a runaway (or renegade).
KEY TO EXEECISES 137
Warfakwa waume tu • wapiga ngoma kuweta. Wana wake wanachoka, liawawezi kwenda. Labuda waiafuata baadae ? La ! wamekosa gari, watfak'eti nyumbani saea. Haidhuru, waweza kwenda kesho asubuhi Hawatfachele- wa ? Ndiyo, watfachelewa kidogo lakini wanawaume watfa- wangoja. Wat'u wakut'ana kwetu, watafutfa nini ? Twa- ambiwa kwamba ni masikini, watfaka chakula. Ni heri tuwape chakula wasiibe. Wakiiba waiatiwa gerezani. Ziko t'ope na t'akat'aka tele hapa, tupite k'ando. Jee, utfaweza kufika kwenu kesho-kutfwa ? Naam, tu^aweza tusipok'uta upepo wala mvua. Walipiga mbiu langoni asubuhi kusema kwamba waturnwa wadio bwanazao wafaadka huru.
STUDY VIII
My father's friend has come to visit us, welcome him. I know him, he is not a stranger. Welcome, Bwana, come inside. Do not disturb yourself, Bibi, (please) do not get up. I am only come to bring news. What news ? Are all well? All are well, thank you. The tidings are only of (good) health. Moreover your father and mother send warm greetings, they want news of you. All are well here. We want news of (the place) you come from. With us, there has been heavy rain, so much so that every one is rejoicing. For rain means abundance (of food). That is true, Bwana, and let us trust (pray) that it will come here as well. Please God it will come. Boy ! bring biscuits and lemonade for the visitor. (There's a knock at the door.) May I ome in? Come in ! Do come inside. Sit down, gentlemen ! How do you do ? We are well, thank God. These guests come from Europe. They have brought a letter for (our) master. Call that lad (and tell him) to take this letter quickly. Look, boy, go with this letter to Abdullah the teacher, he will give you an answer himself. The teacher is talking to his Uncle and Aunt.
Mt'u apiga hodi. Mwambie angie ndani. Yafosha kusema " Karibu," atengia hapana budi. Jina lako
138 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
n'nani ? Hunijui, ni mgeni kwenu. Niwia radhi, n'na- kuja kuomba wali, ni mgonjwa mimi. Ukiwa mgonjwa, huwezi kula wali. AfudAali unwe maaiwa. Twaa pesa hizi, ukanunue maziwa. Ahasanfa, Bibi, sipendi maziwa, t'antmua kikombe cha kahawa. Wako wagonjwa tele mjini siku hizi. Ndiyo, lakini zamani walikuwa zaidi. Nduguyo anakuja, arfakani ? Atfaka kuonana nawe. Atfangoja hate, kesho usipoweza kusema nae sasa. N'a- ngoje basi, yuaja sikuzof'e. Asema kwamba jamaa zakwe wam'^ukia, iena wanazua neno juu yakwe.
STUDY IX
My waistcoat wants stitching. Take it to the tailor in the Main Street. That tailor does not sew well. Perhaps if he borrows a machine he could do it. I will tell him. Your tunic is torn, you must take it off. What shall I do ? I cannot wear my father's tunic. Take mine (tunic), it will do for you. Thank you, my friend, it will do nicely. Truly, without a friend a man cannot live in the world. I have lost my handkerchief. No ! It is not lost, this child found it this morning here on the verandah. I am very glad because my mother gave it to me some time ago. The girls' skirts want washing ; ask them if they have bought some soap. The girls are not here now, they are gone for a walk in the town. Are they gone far ? I do not know where they went. I will send this neighbour to look for them.
Vilemba vya wapagazi vinapoiea, wasema kwamba wevi walikuja jioni wakaviiba. Wakiwaona wale wevi watfawapiga na kuwatia p'ingu. Si vyema kuiba. Tumvike leso kijana kike huyu, yatosha. Hatfaona baridi, jua ni kali mtfana. Aialala wapi usiku ? Atfalala na ndugu zangu wake, wao wafam'funza. Jirani yetu amepimiwa joho, a<anye<a sana. Mwavuli wako uko vvapi ? N'nauatfa ukumbini, /afacZAali ulete. Nisamehe, nalisahau kuleta mshipi wako wa hariri na mfuko wako.
KEY TO EXERCISES 139
Mwalimu wenu alikuja kuomba viatu vyangu jana, lakini sikuweza kunipa. Haid/mru, a/ak'e/i nyumbani na; ku- pumuzika.
STUDY X
Europeans are very fond of oranges, they are always coming to the market to buy them. How are the Zanzibar oranges sold nowadays? They are (sold) dear, three pice each, for this reason, they are not easy to obtain (many). Our friends were looking for a goat to purchase, but they did not see one. What would they have done with a goat ? they have no place to put it. (Quite) true, they have no place; probably they would have killed it for food. A goat has a lot of meat (on it), sufficient for many persons. If you buy it cheap it is very profitable. Look, sir ! do you want some bananas ? How much are your bananas ? Four for a pice, sir. Oh ! I can't buy those bananas, they are rotten. Let us go to that poor man, he is selling many things - young cocoanuts, dates, sweet potatoes, vegetable marrows, pumpkins, limes, and even onions and rice. Ask him how he sells the rice ; what price per pound ? Don't touch that bull, he is very fierce.
Soko ya samaki si mbali, jee uJakwemla kuiangalia? Ndiyo, lakini sikulipa unga huu. Unga ule ni ghali, twende kwa mt'u mwengine. Mt'u yule amezoea kuda- nganya Wazungu. Una haki ni mwivi. Jnzi alishi- ndana nami juu ya kasuku. Yeye aliteka pesa nyingi, lakini mimi nalijua kwamba yule kasuku alikuwa mgo- nj\va, na £ena hakuwez* kusema neno. Basi niku/ukua kikapu changu, nikamuatfa. Alikasirika sana, na sasa, nikipita, sikuzotf'e afanya neno kunisumbua. Fujo hili lot'e maana yakwe n'nini? Mwanamke huyu masikini anapata hasai-a — mai yakwe jot'e yanaanguka nae hawezi kuyazoa. Madobi na masaramala na mafundi wof'e hupatikana sokoni.
140 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
STUDY XI
That shopkeeper is a dishonest man (man who has not honesty). If he changes a rupee he gives (people) bad pice. Look here, old fellow, a groat is worth how much (has how many pice) nowadays? A groat, (my) child, is sixteen pice, or four annas. Some time ago I got seventeen pice for a groat. I do not think you got all those pice for a groat ; perhaps you have forgotten. I owe so-and-so two dollars, and I have nothing to pay him. I saw him the other day, and I said to him, " Wait a little." You are indeed poor ; you had better go and work somewhere that you may earn (get) some money ; so-and-so will not wait long. If I had half a rupee I would have bought a little unbleached calico (and) have (had) a coat made for me. Half a rupee is not enough for a coat, you will want more ; perhaps for a rupee and a half, or three-quarters of a dollar, they will let you have a very small coat. Ask the owner (of the shop). Is any one there ? Come in, welcome ! Give u» four hands of twill calico, sir. That will do for a coat, will it not ? It will do quite well, my boy ; it is good cloth, it comes from Europe. And you yourself, do you want something ? I want some nails and some sacks and some brass wire.
Kufanya biashara ni vyema, yaleta fai<ia nyingi. Ukianza na pauni moja utfapata mbili baacZa ya siku chache. Lakini yakupasa kufikiri na kuhasibu sana ununuapo bidhaa yako. Na tena yakupasa kufokuwa na mizani ya uwongo, au wat'u wafakudfai, /ena warfakukimbia, wa<a- sema, " Ni mt'u mbaya, tusinunue kwakwe." Mt'u mwema hawezi kurfanganya jirani zakwe. Wawiwa ni mwenyi duka yule — ulinunua kwakwe mikono minane ya bafutfa jana, wala hukumlipa. Si shuhuli yako, mbot.a watusumbua bure? Tufamlipa kesho. Dhahabu na sifuri hazivundiki. Chuma ni k'itu chema. Mdfeni si mwongo sikuzof'e. Pasua kuni hizi. Aina ile ya nguo Haifa! kwa k'anzn, ina alama-alama.
KEY TO EXERCISES 141
STUDY XII
His hair is black, his teeth are white. Blood is (a) red (thing). Legs and arms and shoulders and lips and eyes and ears and knees we have in twos, but head and face and mouth and stomach and heart we have singly. How many fingers have you ? I have ten fingers. How many fingers and toes have you? I have twenty fingers and toes. The tongue has no bone. Teeth and nails and bones are hard things, but the skin and the tongue and the cheeks and the uvula and the tonsils are soft. A man with a stiff neck (i.e. obstinate) is no good. The skin of the body and the legs needs to be (thoroughly) washed, but a man will only dip his face and hands in water. So-and-so's leg hurts him. The ear is not greater than the head. A man's brain is that which has intelligence, his body that which has strength, his heart and veins are where the blood is (lit. are those which have blood). Women's hair needs to be combed with a comb.
Nyosha mkono wako upande huu. Mwambie anio- nyeshe gun lakwe. Ni p'ua inuk'ayo harufu, ni ulimi uoncZao famu ya chakula. Kunrfani mikono, watoto, msimame sawa sawa. Ni kilimi kinisumbuacho, cha- /aka kuk'atwa Yanipasa kwenda kwa dakifari. Mwe'- nyiezi Mngu aliumba binadamu akampa akili na nguvu. Waume wanyoa, wanawake hawanyoi. Alituonyesba ini na mafigo na mbavu za kondoo aliyeuzwa sokoni jana. Fumzi zatoka kifuani. Wevi walimuumiza k'oo na ma- ungo. Ngovi yakwe ni laini. Mkono wangu wa kuume waniuma, wa kushofo hauna neno. Ni visigino vyakwe vifakavyoumia kwa viatu vile.
STUDY XIII
The sea is vast ; there is nothing that binds it. That old man was formerly a sailor ; he travelled as far as Muscat and distant islands. The rivers of this country
142 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
are not large. This Arab's boat is the one that always takes us to Frere Town. Pull hard (the oars), boys, the tide is going out ; we should have reached the other side (by now), but you have not been rowing. I am the fisherman who throws the net. The wind is strong (much) ; we had better furl the sail. The vessels of the Swahilis go as far as Malindi and Lamu and Zanzibar, but they do not reach to Europe. A canoe has no anchor, nor a rudder, nor a compas«. He who will travel by the mail-boat must pay the fare. Where are the Indians to- day? They have crossed over to the landing-place to ship a cargo in their dhow. The vessel that left here the other day met with, (lit. was struck by) a storm. Many passengers were drowned in the sea, not being able to swim; Where the wave (breaker) is, just there is the entrance (to the harbour).
Wavuvi hwenda killa siku ku<afu<a samaki katika uzio, wakiwaona wafurahi. Nahodha nimoja, waliye- mjua ra6ki zetu, alimfunga mwanawe mlingot'ini kwa kamba asipate kuzama. Mzungu mdogo kule ForodAani ndiye apokeae vjeti kwa wale wasafirio katika marfau. Vukani ng'ambu ya pili, maji yajaa. Asiyevua kwa mshipi, avua kwa nyavu. Walimuatfa yule masikini ambae alikuwa karibu na kufa. Umekwisha choka, wala hatukuona nt'i k'avu bado. Twekani tanga, twende ki- nani; hatu/aona mawimbi wala miamba, kuna shuari. Watfakapotfakwa mabaharia, ham'/awak'uta pwani. Ma- ehua yetu ni fupi, tena makasia ni marefu.
STUDY XIV
Oar brothers whom you were calling have gone to hoe in the field. The younger one does not even know how to ptill up weeds ; that is the reason of the elder one going that he may teach his younger brother. What trees are there in your plantation ? There are mango trees, cocoa-nut palms, guava trees, plantain trees, lime
KEY TO EXERCISES 143
trees, tamarind trees and baobabs — all bear fruit. Besides, there are cassava and pineapple plants, beans and beds of sweet potatoes. Very good indeed ! You have every- thing you want, then, except orange trees. Yes, and orange trees we do not want because their fruit is no good. Why? The oranges which I ate here the other day were very sweet. That may be, but the (their) trees did not grow here; those nice eating ones (which are eaten) come from Zanzibar. Do not draw water with a bucket that leaks.
Wak'ulima wapandao mbeyu mbaya hawatevuna mavuno mazuri. Mwenyi bus/ani hii hutupa sikuzotf'e maua mazuri. Hakuna matunda mangi katika ntf'i hii ; kuna maembe na mapera na mananasi na ndizi tfu-basi 1 Lakini kuna mengine z&idi — ndimu na nazi na machu- ngwa na k'waju na matomoko na malimau, uliyasahau haya. Jirani zetu hawajatfimba kisima shambani mwao, wakali wakijenga kibanda. Ndia yenu ni p'ana, yetu ni iiyembamba. Mwitu uliokuwapo hapa umetemwa wotf'e kwa mndu. Nyasi na mimea yotf'e inakauka kwa jua kali, ha<a magugu na majani na miba pia. Tema lile shina kwa jembe. Si mpanzi peke yakwe ajuae kwamba udongo huu ni mbaya. Matunda haya hayafai kuliwa, ni mabid kabisa. Moja tn ni bivu.
STUDY XV
The porters do not want to carry the loads, they say they are heavy. If they do not carry them they get no food money then. Tell them it is not far where we are going to-day, when they arrive they (will) can rest. The headman is very severe, he has no pity ; he is always scolding the men. And then again this morning the guide missed the way and we got lost in the jungle. When we were in there we came across some other travellers who were each carrying a flag and a gun. The chief of that village is coming to talk to our interpreter, who is the only one able to translate his language. This
144 BWAHILI GRAMMAR
old man loves to hear the news of the coast. He wants us to stay here for some days, to camp out altogether and put up our tents. No ! I do not like (this) place, and besides the water is finished in the soldiers' gourds, and the corporal says that they will not put up with it, waiting much longer. Let them start on the march now at once then and get off; we have had a halt, that is enough, my good fellow.
Wat'u wa n^'i hizi hujenga inaboma mijini mwao. Hupigana kwa nyuta na mishare, mikuki na rungu ; killa mmoja huJukua ngao. Tujapochoka yatupasa kuvunrfa k'ambi kesho jimbi likiwika ; mwambie yule injinga atuamshe alifajiri. Taarishi atekapokuja, asikari watfapiga mzinga. Ndia hii imekufa, ni heri tururfi. Ukiumwa ni siafu, u/aumia ; ela fungu hawautnizi. Mt'u mwenyi nguvu aweza kuinua mtfaimbo. K'ata za wana- wake zilianguka shimoni. Wapagazi wetu wangeli /angamka kwamba hatukukaza mwendo. Usiwasemee, wasiraamie tu.. Wambie wakipata mafuta ya mbono katika miti hii, wateweza kuyauza watfakaporudi p'wani.
STUDY XVI
This year it did not rain much in the rainy season (or great rains) but the lesser and latter rains were plentiful, thank God. It is right that people should rest on Sunday and work for six days. Why is the rain late (in coming) ? It is not yet the proper time for the great rains; they may come on to-morrow, the sky has been very cloudy all day, doubtless rain will soon fall. On Thursday night the people came back from their stay at Jomvu at 11 p.m. The moon now is shining all night. Long ago there was darkness on the earth, then God Almighty created light and there was brightness everywhere. There will be new moon next week, at the time the sun sets ; then the heathen people will get an opportunity for their dances. Last year the N.E. monsoon (blew) was very strong, but the S.E. only very slight. What time is it
KEY TO EXERCISES 145
now? It is ten o'clock in the morning. So-and-so possesses a silver watch and a gold chain.
Dalili ya mvua ni mawingu. Miongo mi will inapila tangu alipokufa babaetu. Ulikuwa wapi mwanangu muda huu wotf'e? Sikwenda pahali, nalike'fi papahapa. Mamaako alikwita mara mbili t'atu, hukusikia ? Siku- sikia loloi'e, nalikuwa nimelala. Zamani moja nyota k'ubwa ilionekana mbinguni. Wat'u wa kale waliifuata, ikawa kiongozi kwao. Katika nt'i hizi jua latfwa saa thinaashara jioni. Asubuhi kwacha saa hidaashara. Jumaa-pili ijayo wa.ta.zidi kuja mapema. Wat'u wema wapungua ulimwenguni. Mawingu yametanda mbinguni. Ntf'i imengia ndaa. Mwenyiezi Mngu daima ameongeza neema na nguvu kwa wat'u wakwe.
STUDY XVII
A traveller is a poor man even though he be a king. He who goes up-country must of necessity have patience, (for) he will doubtless meet dangers and difficulties (lit. hard things), maybe he will also suffer loss. Nowadays travelling is not like (what it used to be) long ago. Now there is a train which takes you anywhere you like —hills, valleys, precipices or plains. It goes uphill, it goes downhill ; where there are rivers or streams it crosses by a bridge, there is no obstacle that it cannot surmount (lit. there is nothing that hinders it). And in addition to this the white man has built railway stations at every place where the train stops, so that those who are travelling may have an opportunity of getting in and getting out just as they like. Now and again there is war up-country — this tribe quarrels with that tribe over a spring of water or some other matter. Then they fight and a great many are killed. All sorcerers, wizards, and witches, are the enemies of mankind.
Hapa pana misheni, wat'u wamepanda mahindi na mpunga, ngauu na mlama. Kisha wana shauri kuleta
SWAHILI GRAMMAR K
146 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
mkondo wa maji katika ziwa lile kubwa mashambani mwao illi kutia maji wakaJi wa kasikazi. Hayo maji hububujika daima na kumiminika bure juu ya kishaka kile. Washenzi wak'efio k'ando ya nguu t'atu hutafuna ttimbaku m/ana kurfwa. Avutae tumbaku sharti atumie kiko. Walipatana kutuongoza mahali penyi mipira na mipingo pamoja na mikoraa, lakini tulipofika mjini mwao, walikataa. Taifa hii ina ng'ombe chache tu, wenyewe huketia n<i ya kunge na \imande. Maji ya/iririka mlimani ha/a nti ya t'ambarare.
STUDY XVIII
A sportsman went up-country to hunt big game — such as lions, elephants, buffalo and rhinoceros. He wrote on a hundred Wakamba porters to accompany him. He took two horses and five mules. On the way he shot one giraffe, three haartebeest, and four gazelles in order to procure food for his men. After sixteen days' march they came to a place abounding with monkeys and apes. While they were watching how these creatures jump from tree to tree, they heard a lion roar near them. They were all afraid except the hunter himself who was carry- ing a large European rifle for the purpose of shooting fierce beasts of this kind. When he went near to examine, a lioness appeared in front of him. He immediately levelled his gun and shot a bullet into her side; she dropped down and died on the spot. But her two male companions who accompanied her, when they heard her cry, ran out of the jungle. At this juncture his gun- carrier was seized with fright, and saying, " This sort of work terrifies," he ran away ! Thus the poor hunter was left alone without a weapon. The lions leaped on him, tore him in pieces and ate him. Insects which inhabit people's houses are these — mosquitoes, scorpions, centi- pedes, fleas, bugs and wall lizards. The ones that re- appear constantly and cause great destruction of property are the white ants.
KEY TO EXERCISES 147
Satu ni nyoka mkubwa, aweza kushetfa p'unda au p'unda milia radogo. T'ui na mafisi hutembea-fembea iisiku mmoja-mmoja, vibok'o hwenda kwa kundi. Mbweha wana makao yao mwituni, ela mbwa hupenda kuk'etfi nyumbani mwa bwana zao. Nyuni wotf'e na p'opo wana ma- bawa ; wapuruka-puruka angani. Mabatfa, k'anga, mwewe na nrfiwa waweza kupuruk'a ; mbuni ni nyuni wakubwa hawapuruki. Ngwena hana ulimi. Mburuk'enge ana mkia mrefa, hula mai. Nyama ya nguuwe na vitangule ilikatazwa kwa wat'u wa kale. P'aka na simba wana ndimi za kuparuza. Pole p'ole ya k'obe humfisha mbali. Nyani na t'umbiri k'ubwa hufanana na wat'u. Atambaae kizani asitfahili kupigwa bunduki. Ngamia ni nyama wakubwa, watfukuao mizigo mizito — ngamia mmoja aweza kurfukua mzigo wa p'embe wa ratfli mia t'atu u thamanini.
STUDY XIX
Sir, this man is very ill, his whole body is swollen. Tell him to come here, then, that I may examine him. Good morning, my good fellow, how are you feeling ? I am ill, sir, very ill indeed. Poor fellow, cheer up ! God will heal you of the sickness you have and you will get better. I am only a physician. He who works the cure is (God) Himself. Oh ! but I am very ill, sir, and I do not know whether I shall pull through this disease or not. Please God, you will pull through. How old are you now ? Maybe I am about fifty-five, sir. Well, stay here with us a few days and keep in bed. We will give you some medicine to make you sleep and then presently you will feel better and will go back home again. Thank you, sir, thank you, I will stay and I'll try and make myself happy (lit. comfort or quiet my heart). What is the matter with you, child ? Oh 1 I have a great many troubles — first of all I have jiggers in my feet, then I've been pricked by a thorn in my finger. Your troubles are not very serious, my child ; they will soon be got over, I think. Come here to me and let me take out both the jiggers and the thorn — it's only a little matter, it can all
148 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
be done in a minute. Doctor ! this blind man is calling you. He says he has suffered great pain in his eyes since lie went to that " Nyika " witch-doctor. It is his own stupidity then, I warned him not to go. Those medicine- men know absolutely nothing unless it is how to injure and deceive people. Tell him to sit down and I will come directly, there are others who are waiting for me — people with leprosy and anaemia and skin disease and various other complaints.
Hii ni Asipitfali ya Sirikali wauguzwapo wat'u weupe. Wat'u weusi hwenda Asipiteli ya Misheni iliyoko kisiwani. Huko dawa hutolewa killa sikii kwa killa mt'u ajae awae yotf'e. Wauguao hugangwa na kutfunzwa. Zaidi ya haya madakitari hufundisha hirimu wenyi akili, kazi hii ya hurutna. Wasairfia hao huosha vidonda, hufoa dawa, hung'oa meno na kufunga majaraha. Wale wenyi baridi, makohozi, vifua, baridfi yabisi, mafua na hooia huk'etfi nyumba moja, wenyi fete nyumba ya pili, na wale wauguao maipu, au t'ambazi, au p'ele, au madonda au mbuba huk'eti nyumba ya tatu. Bind yak we yule kiwe/u iajiri alikuja jana na kiipu tfungu ; leo kinaiva, dakifari akakipasua. Usaha mwingi ukatoka. Hawa mabubwi wa- wili wana homa. Wape killa mt'u matone matfano ya hiyo dawa ya kutoa jasho, kawambie warudi nyumbani na kulala. Ni dasifuri hapa, killa mt'u atekae rfawa sharti aje na /upa — tupu na iliyo safi. Kwa nini hutulii ? Kwa sababu wanitonesha jaraha. Mama wa kunilea aona maumivu mwilini moi'e, akohoa na kuchemua <7aima. Usingie nyumba ile usije ukapata fete za maji.
STUDY XX
As you bring up your child, so will he grow. An Indian professor has opened a school in the Old Town, for teaching English. His pupils are neither taught writing nor sums. He has written down the names of twenty- four children in his register, but I hear that they do not attend regularly (lit. do not persevere to come everyday)
KEY TO EXERCISES 149
and he (himself) has no authority over them. At our school we are taught Addition, Subtraction, Multiplica- tion, and Division. We have maps on the wall, that we may get to understand about the world we live in — this study is called Geography. Then again we have slates and pencils and pens and a blackboard and chalk — every- thing that is necessary. Our teacher is very clever at playing the harmonium — ho makes us sing all sorts of pretty songs. On Prize Day (lit. the great day for giving out prizes) we are to sing them before all the Europeans and a whole crowd of people. There will be races, too, on that day, each boy competing with his fellows in running and jumping and other things. Those who win will get presents and prizes, while all the people clap. All parents ought to send their children to our school. Obstinacy and laziness and vulgar language are not allowed under any circumstances. Every one must take pains to make progress.
Mwanzo wa hikima yot'e ni kumcha Mngu na kushika amri zakwe. Mwanawe liwali hasomi lena, amehirimu. Babakwe alimpeleka skuli alipokuwa mdogo kabisa, nae mwenyewe akafanya bidii na kujitfahidi, hate akapata sifa iiyingi k wa mwalimu wakwe juzi, alipoondoka maeZarasani. Mtoto akikosa, sharti afake msamaha, nae atesamehewa ; lakini akifife kosa lakwe na kunena uwongo, afapata aibu, nao wazazi wakwe watfasikiJika. Watoto hao wanawake hawana adabu walahishima ; huteza miana kutfwa, fenaha- wana mt'u wa kuwafunza. Kwamba walipata ruhusa kuja kusoma hawangekuwa watukutu na ushupavu kama vile walivyo. Mapenzi ni k'itu chenyi thamani k'uu duniani. Kwa mapenzi twaweza kusaidia wale waonewaona kuwa- funza wale ambao hawana ilimu. Si kawaicfa huku kuomba bakishishi, afanyae neno hili hana haya kabisa. Mwenzio akikutangulia usifukiwe. Hirimu wapatao daraja ni wale wahishimuo wazazi wao na wakufunzi wao. Naona waziwazi kwamba hufaweza kumaliza kazi yako ijumaa hii.
150 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
STUDY XXI
True religion is the one which leads us to God and comforts our souls. We believe that it is the Christian who has this religion. The Muhammedan calls the Christian unbeliever (or infidel) ; but at the same time he holds (says) that, " An unbeliever who suits your purpose is better than a Muhammedan who does not." The meaning of this is that, although he is very tenacious of his religion 'and despises all other religionists except his own, he is not at all above making use of (these so- called) unbelievers, if he finds profit in doing so. The Creator of heaven and earth and of all things therein is God Almighty. He who redeemed us by dying for us ou the Cross, is His only Son, our Lord Jesus Christ, who is the Saviour of all the inhabitants of the world. He who instructs our minds and controls our spiritual beings is the Holy Spirit/ who is worshipped and glorified together with the Fatherland the Son. In the Church of Christ there are three orders — bishops, priests (or presbyters) and deacons. The work of them all is to preach the gospel and to feed the flock of God. This flock is the whole company of faithful people. Christ ordained two sacraments for His followers — -Baptism and the Lord's Supper : this latter is also called the Holy Communion. The Bible contains — the Law of Moses, the books of the Prophets, Psalms, Proverbs, the Gospels, the Acts of the Apostles and various Epistles. All these books testify to Jesus Christ that He is the Son of the Most High ; His disciples also received Him (as such) being convinced by all the miracles He did in their presence while He was in the world. But the greatest thing of all is His wonderful resurrection from the dead which demonstrated plainly that He is the complete conqueror over death and hades and all the powers of hell.
Maisha ya binadamu ni mafupi, fena mawazo yakwe ni maovu. Kusali hakuondoi dhambi, wala kusujudia sanamu hakutakasi roho. Waisilamu hunena kwamba kuna
KEY TO EXERCISES 151
mambo matfano yapasaya kwo wokofu — kusali, kufoa zaka kwa sadoka, kupi ga shahada, kuf unga KamadAani na k wenda Maka. Maagano Mapya yatufundisha kwamba hatuo- kolewi kwa vitendo vyema, wala kwa mafozi ya foba ; ilia kwa imam katika Bwana Jesu Masihi aliyekufa kwa ajili yetu, akafoa na muwili wakwe kuwa sadaka kwa Mngu kwa madhambi ya ulimwengu mzima. Wale wamwa- minio hugeuzwa asili ni Koho Mtakatifu, hatfa wakapenda yale mambo ambayo zamani waliyatfukia na kuiukia yale amhayo kwanza waliyapenrfa. Dini ya Islam huitwa " Nrfia i ahisi," maana, wale waifuatao hawaiakwi kua/a aua^a za rfunia wala famaa za muwili. Mt'u akisilimu kisawahili madhambi kama unafiki na udanganyifu si marufuku kwakwo. Afanyae haki hubarikiwa, avundae sharia ya Mngu hulaaniwa. Maandiko yaknbaliwayo na kusadikiwa ni waongofu wa Islam yaitwa "Kuruani"— chuo chenyi sura mia u arubaafaashai'a. Katika mlango wane, wa si /a, wa sabaa na wa arubaini-na-nane ilimu ya masliei/ani na malaika hutangazwa. Waaminifu woi'e hukut'anika msikit'ini killa siku ya ijumaa ndipo awa hubiripo imamu. Wasawahili hunena, "Shukuru uliyo nayo," na /ena " Adhabu ya kaburi ajua maiti."
152 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
TABLES OF MONEY, WEIGHTS AND MEASURES
COINAGE
Silver coins. Eupee. Value 16 annas or 64 pice. „ „ i Eupee. „ 8 „ „ 32 „ „ „ i Eupee. „ 4 „ ,,16 „ „ „ 1 Eupee. „ 2 „ ,,8 „
Bronze coin. Pice. Value j anna.
An Anna is four pice. Pesa nne ni anna moja.
Sixteen anna make one rupee. Anna sitfashara, au kuiui na si/a, ni rupia moja.
Eoboo ya zamani ni pesa thinen wa thalathini, i.e. thalathini na mbili.
The meaning of " roboo " is, one quarter ; thirty-two pice or eight annas is the quarter of a dollar. (The old reckoning.)
Pesa thalathini na mbili, au anna nane, ni roboo ya riale, ni hisabu ya zamani.
Eoboo rupia ni pesa sitfashara.
Thumuni ni pesa sitfashara, maana, ni thumuni ya riale, i.e. the eighth part of a dollar.
Thumuni rupia ni pesa nane, i.e. the eighth part of a rupee.
MEANS OF MEASURING CORN, ETC.
1. Kibaba, which may be divided thus —
Eoboo kibaba, i.e. ^ kibaba. Nusu kibaba, i.e. \ kibaba. Kibaba kasir roboo, i.e. f kibaba.
2. Kisaga, i.e. vibaba viwili.
3. Pishi, i.e. visaga viwili au vibaba vine.
4. Jizila, i.e, pishj
WEIGHTS AND MEASURES 153
WEIGHTS
1. Eatili, equals 1 pound.
2. Mani, i.e. ratili tatu.
3. Farasila, i.e. ratili thalathini na sita (36 Ibe.).
MEASUREMENTS OF LENGTH
1 . Shubiri, i.e. a span.
2. Dhiraa, i.e. a cubit — equals "shubiri mbili" (two Hpans).
3. P'ima, i.e. a fathom — equals " dhiraa nne," or " shubiri nane" (four cubits or eight spans).
The word " wari " is also used by the Indians, it means a yard, and equals two cubits. Ni dhiraa nibili.
154 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
SPECIMENS OF SWAHILI LETTEK- WRITING.
Letter No. I.
Ilia janabi (mpenzi wangu), sheikh (mtukufu), ali mukaram (mwenyi kutukuzwa), ali mukhutaram (ambao asiyefaa kuuwawa), alakhi (ndugu yangu), ali muaddt (mwenyi kutimiza ahadi), Hamis bin Shaibu bin Hamis il Kiliti, Salamahulahutaala (rehema ya Mwenyiezi Mngu aliyetukuka juu ya watu), Salamu aleika (amani na iwe jnu yako), Warakhamatulahi wa barakatu (na rehema ya Mwenyiezi Mngu na baraka), wabadu (baada ya haya), tangu sikn uliyoj-afiri hata leo sitasa pata barua yako wala si wajibu wako katna hayo na walio mbali huonana kwa barua na barua ni nusu ya kuonana na Mombasa tarehe ya leo hakxina ziada ya khabari ilia mvua nyingi sana na nyumba nyingi zimevundika kwa sababu ya mvua kadhalika na pepo jingi sana na siku hizi kume- fanya ugumu sana wa vitu mtele na kitoeo naswi tuna- furahi sana kwa sababu ya mwezi huu ni mwezi mtukufu wa maulidi ya nabii salalakhualthi wa salama (rehema ya Mwenyiezi Mngu na iwe kwakwe na amani), na liakhi (ndugxi yangu), Ali bin Omari amepata mtoto mwana mume na mwezi huu ukisha nimeazimu kusafiri kwenda koma shamba siku mbili tatu na watu wote nyumbani wakusalimu sana na jamaa zako wote wakusalimu sana tena nataka jawabu ya barua hii ya kunijulisha hali yako nisalimia jamaa huko pia wote nawe takabadhi darizaui moja ya kanzu na nusu darizani kofia na vikoi vitatu mikononi mwa hamili li barua tafudhali niuzia kama vita- kavyomkini aidha na khabari ya ndia hata sasa hatujajua mwisho wakwe. Wasalainu. Wakatabahu.
Muhammad bin Maalim bin Bwana Kombo biyedihi. Ta'rihi Alifu thalatha mia wa aruba wa ishirini, 1324. Rabiu, Hawaii thamania.
SWAHILI LETTERS 155
Letter No. 2.
ALHAMDULILLAHI WAHADAHU.
Ilia janabi alimuhibbi aliakram alimukaramu alazizi alakhi Bwana fulani bin fulani hadahulahu taala, wabadu nakurifu hali zetu njema wa thamma nawe kuwa kadhalika ya afia, na zaidi ya khabari klieri nalipoona mtu ajae huko nimeilazimu nafusi yangu kukuarifu hali yangu na kuuliza hali yako basi usiwate kuniarifu hali yako nami kadhalika ya khabari ya huku ni kheri hakuna ilia iii mvua nyingi mwaka huo twataraji itakuwa kheri tuna- furahi sana. Maana katika miji yetu isipokuwa mvua hatuoni vyema na baraka huwa chache tena tunapata khabari ya kuwa Ulaya ya Paris imekuwa mvua nyingi mno kisha nti inatetema zinaanguka nyumba nyingi na watu wangi waliokufa wapata watu alifu tano basi tunasikitika sana kupata khabari hiyo lakini ndiyo kheri inaana kulla neno aletalo Mngu ndiyo kheri. Nawe usiwate kuniarifu khabari za huko upande wa kwenu hala hala. Wasalamu.
Wakatabahu, Mula Alii bin Abdirrahaman biyedihi.
Ta'rihi ithenashara Kabii Liawal. Sanati thalatha niia na aruba wa ishirini.
156 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Letter No. 3.
ALHAMDULILAHI WHADAHU.
(Addressed to a lady.)
Ilia jinabi alimuhibba alakarama alimukharama alaaza alaziza indana alukhti fulana binti fulani hadahulahu taala wabaadu nakuarifu hali zetu ngema wa thamma nawe kuwa kadhalika ya afia wa zaidi ya khabari khevi nali- poona mtu ajae huko kwenu nimejilazimisha nafusi yangu kukujuza hali yangu na kukuuliza hali yako na huku mjini kwetu tuna furahi sana kwa mvua nyingi lakini masikini wanazidi hamn sana maana imetoka khabari ya kuwa mwaka huno kodi ya raajumba itaongezwa basi masikini wasikitika sana maana hali zao ni nzito hawana vit'u lakini watafanyaje hawana jinginelo la kufanya ikenda mno ni kuomba Mngu ndiyo khabari nawe usiwate kuniarifu khabari za huko upande wa kwenu nami kadhalika. Wasalamu.
Nisalimia watu wote kwa huko wakubwa na wadogo waume na wake na huku watu wote wakusalimu salama nyingi. Wasalamu.
Wakatabahu, Mula Alii bin Abdirrahamani biyedihi.
Ta'rihi ithenaashara Rabii Liawal. Sanati thalatha niia na aruba wa ishirini.
CALENDAR 157
SWAHILI CALENDAR
The Muhammedan year consists of twelve lunar months, or 354 days, leaving a discrepancy of eleven days between it and the solar year. As this is never rectified by the introduction of intercalary months, there is no correspondence between the calendar and the seasons, and we find the Fast of Eamadhan, for instance, occurring at all times of the year as it works its way round.
The calendar has thus very little practical value — the seasons, not the months, become the mile-stones in their annual records. In native letters and documents circu- lating among themselves their own dates are still used ; but in commercial and legal transactions the European system of reckoning time is often adopted, and the English names of the months are being gradually assimilated into the language.
The Swahili names for their lunar months are as follows —
Mfunguo Mosi Mfunguo Sabaa
Mfunguo Pili Mfunguo Nane
Mfunguo Tatu Mfunguo Tisia or Kenda
Mfunguo Nne Eajab
Mfunguo Tano Shaban
Mfunguo Si/a Ramadhan
The seasons are briefly —
Kasikazi or Musimu, period of N.E. monsoon from
November to March. Maleleji, short period of calms between the former and
the Kusi or period of S.W. monsoon lasting from April to
September. Kipupwe, part of Kusi, period of cool winds in June and
July.
158
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Demani, " fair winds " in August and September. T'anga Mbili, "variable winds" in September and
October. Maleleji, second period of calms before N.E. monsoon
breaks.
The " rainy seasons " are three, but only the " mwaka " is really dependable. They are : Mwaka (" former " or " great " rains) in April or May, Mchoo (" lesser " rains) in July, Vuli (" latter " rains) in October or November. (For fuller information see " African Aphorisms," p. 28.)
EXAMPLES OF SYNONYMS (DIFFERENT WORDS WITH SIMILAR MEANINGS)
NOUNS
notisi, English " notice," sum- mons.
mbiyu, proclamation (by town crier).
iilani, proclamation, public notice.
ha'kimu, judge, muamzi, arbitrator. ka<Z/ti, magistrate.
dhambi (pi.), sin. kosa, fault, mistake, ba/ili, crime, iniquity, upotofu, iniquity. uMalimu, wrong, unrighteousness, kuasi, transgression, rebellion, ithimu, guilt, guiltiness, ubaya, wickedness, badness, uovu, maovu, evil, badness, ukhaini, treason, treachery, ukhiana, guile, deceit, khatia, fault.
hila, guile, duplicity, udanganyifa, deception.
tk&n&, thoughts, doubts. azima, intentions, thoughts. mawazo, tliouglits, ideas, opinions,
reflections. fikira, consideration, tliouglits.
, difficulty,hardship, trouble. udhia, trouble, bother, annoy-
ance, difficulty. <aabu, trouble, difficulty, per-
plexity.
msiba, affliction, calamity. mateso, sufferings. mashaka, misfortune. rZ/tiki, trouble, distress. huzuoi, grief, sorrow, anxiety. hamu, grief, sadness. majonzi, mourning, grief, sadness.
SYNONYMS AND HOMONYMS
159
VERBS
kumiliki, to reign, to govern, to
possess. kutewala, to rule, to govern.
kuweza, to be able.
kuwabi, to be able (to go to a
place, etc.), ku'iiriki, to spare time for, to
keep an engagement.
kuzizima, to be, or feel, cool or
damp, kufanya baridi, to be [spoiled by]
damp, to be mildewed.
ku/ftani, to think, to suppose, to
presume, kuazimia, to think of, to intend,
to resolve, kuwaza (kuaza), to ponder, to
reflect, kafikiri, to consider, to think
over, kuona, to feel, to think, to
imagine.
kushuka, to come or go down, to
descend, ku/eremka, to go or come down,
to descend (easily), (kn)teleza, to slip or slide down.
kukwea, to mount, to climb (step
by step), kupanda, to ascend, to go up.
kutekabadM, to receive, kupokea, to receive, to take.
kulinda, to keep, to watch, ku/unza, to take care of. kubifatfd, to preserve, to spare, to
keep, to defend. kuweka salama, to protect, to
preserve.
kuokoa, to save, to deliver, kuponya, to cause to escape, to
deliver, to save.
ku/aabisha, to vex, to perturb, kuudhi, to trouble, to bother, kusumbua, to annoy, to disturb,
to harass, kntesa, to persecute, to molest.
A LIST OF HOMONYMS
(WORDS HAVING DIFFERENT MEANINGS WHICH ARE NEARLY OR QUITE ALIKE IN SOUND)
k'aa, crab.
kaa, ember.
(ku)kaa, to dwell, to stay.
k'amba. prawn.
kamba, cord (of cocoa-nut fibre).
kanga, spur of cocoa-nut palm.
k'anga, guiuca-fowl. (ku)kanga, to fry.
k'ata, head-pad.
kata, ladle (threequarters of
cocoa-nut). (ku)k'ata, to cut.
kafa, page of book, (kuji)kala, to strain, mkata. poor man.
kawa, dish cover (of plaited
grassV (ku)kawa, to delay.
kitoto, small child, kitoto, narrow street, alley, crooked path.
k'ofi, a clap (with the hands), kofi, flat part of the hand, double handful.
160
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
k'ombe, shell.
kombe (pi. ma-), large flat dish.
k'onde, field, cultivated land. konde (pi. ma-), fist.
kooti, court, court of justice, koti (pi. ma-), coat.
(ku)kua, to grow.
(ku)wa, to be.
kuwa (conj.), seeing that, since.
k'uku, fowl.
kuku(huku) over there, just there.
kuukuu, old, worn-out.
maziwa (uo sing.), milk, maziwa (pi.), lakes.
majuto, large rivers, majufo, repentance, remorse.
mto, river.
m<o, cushion, pillow.
mwembe, mango-tree, wembe, razor.
mt'u, man.
mtn, tamarisk (?), tree growing in mangrove swamps.
ndoo, pail, bucket.
ndoo ! come ! (irr. imp. of kuja).
nt'a, wax.
nf a, point, end.
n<'i, earth, ground, land, nt'i, ear rings. nti, a chart (?).
p'aa, gazelle, paa, roofing. (ku)paa, to ascend.
(ku)piga k'ofi, to clap hands, (ku)piga kofi, to box the ears (i.e. with the open hand).
p'ia, a top.
pia, also, as well, all.
(ku)taja. to mention, t'aja, tribute, tax.
f'ama, sweepings, rubbish, off- scourings.
/ania, end, finis.
(ku)iama, to move, migrate.
kushika tama, to consider (lit. hold the cheek).
tanga, a sail.
matanga, sails, mourning, f unr-ral
rites.
(ku)tenga, to wander, mfanga, sand.
t'anu, oven, furnace. <ano, five.
faa, lamp, f'aa, obedience, t'aa, long-tailed fish.
tatu, three.
t'&tu, leaven, yeast, fermented matter.
i'avu (za maguu), calves (of logs). t&va. (pi. ma-), cheek.
i'awa, louse.
kutawa, to be in seclusion.
(ku)teka, to draw (water, etc.). mateka, captives' booty, kufeka, to laugh, to smile.
(ku)tema, to clear forest, to spit, (ku)tema, to cut asunder, 1o slash, to hew, to cut oft'.
(ku)tenga, to alight, to perch . (ku)tenga, to separate, t'enga, sea-monster.
t'ete, small-pox, f'ei'e, sparks.
(ku)tetea, to fight for, to
champion. (kuXetea, to walk lame, to halt,
to totter, to cackle (hen).
t'eo, sling, catapult.
f'eo, sieves, winnowing trays.
HOMONYMS
161
tezo, game, plaything. t'ezo, adze.
tini, fig.
t'ini, under, underneath, below.
toka ! go away ! /okaa, chalk, lime.
(ku)tua, to put down, to set (of
sun).
kufua, to rub to powder J'ua, blemish, flaw.
tui, fat, fatness, marrow, " milk "
(of cocoa-nut). f'ui, leopard.
(ku)tukia, to happen, to befall. ia, to hate.
tumo, errand.
<umo, sphere of business, means of livelihood.
/upa, file.
<'upa, bottle, phial.
(ku)topa, to throw, to throw
away.
(kuXupa, to leap. kui'upa mpaka, to overstep the
limit.
t'uu, ant-hill.
), only, merely.
Utatu, Trinity.
ut'ahi, sourness, fermentation.
ko<o, spice from Arabia.
koto, play-hour and play-ground
for slaves .
k'oto, middle joint of finger k'oto, swivel-hook and line. kikoto, switch.
tundu, cage, nest. t'undu, hole. kitundu, nest.
fundo, pocket, purse. mfundo, grudge, old cause of quarrel.
tandu, centipede.
tandu, spider's web.
t'andu (pi.), film on cooked rice.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
162
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
PART III SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
adj. for adjective. pi.
adv. „ adverb. poss.
appd. ,, applied. prep.
cf. „ compare. pron.
compr. „ comprehensive. ref.
conj. ,, conjunction. ref. pron.
contrn. „ contraction. rel.
cop. „ copula. sop.
ctr. „ contrast. sing.
dem. „ demonstrative. suf.
distr. „ distributive. v.
inf. „ infix. v. c.
inter. „ interrogative. v. intr.
intj. „ interjection. v. n.
inv. ,, invariable. v. pas.
man. ,, manner. v. prepl.
n. ,, noun. v. rec.
n. prop. „ proper noun. v. red.
n. redup. „ reduplicated noun. v. ref.
num. „ numeral. v. sub.
part. „ participle. v. tr.
per. „ personal. var.
ph. „ phrase. voc.
for plural. „ possessive. ,, preposition. „ pronoun. ,, reflexive. ,, reference pronoun. ,, relative. ,, separable. ,, singular. „ suffix. „ verb.
,, verb causative. „ verb intransitive.
verb neuter.
verb passive.
verb prepositional.
verb reciprocal.
verb reduplicated.
verb reflexive.
verb subtractive.
verb transitive.
variable.
vocative.
In this Vocabulary, words beginning with a capital lett-r are complete in themselves: those with a hyphen before them require some variable prefix.
Nouns are always given in the singular form when one exists. Derivative forms of the verb are only given in a few instances ; the student is referred to Study XVII., where the subject is dealt with in detail. Verbal nouns, obviously derived, are usually omitted, unless there be some variation in meaning or in form. Numerals placed after a noun indicate the class it belongs to.
SWAHILI-ENGLtSH VOCABULARY
163
A! (intj.), Oh!
A-a ! (intj.), No !
-a (var. prep.), of (agrees with
the thing possessed). AbatJi (adv.), continually, for ever,
always, perpetually. (Ku)abiri (v. intr.), "to make a
journey one way, by sea or
land. Abiria (n. 5), passenger, one who
crosses over. (Ku)aburfu (v. tr.), to worship, to
adore. Ada (n, 3), custom, usage, habitual
practice. Adabu (n. 3), manners, politeness,
good behaviour. (Ku)tia adabu, to teach good
manners by correction. Adhabu (n. 8), punishment, tor- ture. (Ku)a'ii (v. tr.), to accompany out
of the house. (Ku)adbibu (v. tr.), to punish, to
torture.
A<7ili (n. 3), truth, correct con- duct, right. Atfui (n. 3) (also plural maadui),
enemy, foe, adversary. Afa (n. 5), terror, dread, danger,
disaster, horror (mostly used
in pi.).
Afarika (n. prop.), Africa. (Ku)afikana (v. rec.), to come to
terms, to make a compact or
covenant.
Afiuni (n. 3), opium. Afua (n. 3), deliverance, mercy. (Ku)afu (v. tr.), to save, deliver,
pr< serve, rescue. Afudhali (adv.), preferably, better,
ratlier. (Ku)aga (v. tr.), to take leave of,
to bid farewell to. (Ku)agiia (v. tr.), to give in- structions to, to direct. (Ku)agna (v. tr.), to prophesy, io
interpret, to predict, to treat
medically (vide Nyika lagula). Ahadi (n. 3), promise, agreement. AhasaiUa ! (n. 3 and intj.), thank
you ! thanks. Ahera (akhera) (n. 3), Hades,
Invisible World present and
future.
(Ku)abidi (v. intr.), to promise. Ai! (intj.). Oh! (of pain). Aibu (n. 3), shame, disgrace, dis- honour, reproach. Aili (n. 3), guilt, guilty party. Aina (n. 3), kind, sort, species,
class.
Ajabu (n. 3), wonder, astonish- ment. Ajali (n. 3), fate, destiny, bad
luck, calamity.
Ajili (n. 3), sake, cause, reason. (Ku)ajiri (v. tr.), to hire, to engage
for payment. Aka! (iutj.), what next! (Xu)aka (v. tr.), to build, -a kale (var. adj.), of old, olden,
ancient.
Akhiri (n. 3), end, latter end. (Ku)akhiri (v. intr.), to delay, to
remain behind. (Ku)akbirisha (v. c.), to put off, to
postpone. Akiba (n. 3), store, provision,
reserve. Aki(7a (n. 5), officer, captain,
superintendent. Akili (u. 3), intelligence, wits,
intellect, sense, shrewdness, -ako (var. poss. adj.), thy, thine, -akwe (var. poss. adj.), his, her,
hers, its.
Ala (n. 3), sheath, scabbard. Alama (n. 3), mark, spot, sign,
token. Alama-alama '(n. redup.), little
spnts. Kuwa na alama-alama. to be
spotted. Alasiri (n. 3 & adv.), afternoon
(3 p.m.), in the afternoon.
164
SWAHILl GRAMMAR
Alfajiri (alifajiri) (n. 3 & adv.),
dawn, daybreak, at dawn or
daybreak.
Alfu, alifu (n. 5 & adj.), thousand, alhamrfu lillahi, praise God,
thank God. Alhamisi (n. 3 & adv.), Thursday,
(5th day — Jewish reckoning),
on Thursday. (Ku)alika (v. tr.), to invite, to
call ; (v. intr.), to crack, to
click, to split. Alufeni (alfeni) (n. & adj.), two
thousand.
Ama (conj.), or, but. (Ku)ama (v. intr.), to lie on the
chest, to suck.
(Ku)amwa (v. pass.), to be suckled. (Ku)amwisna (v. c.), to suckle. Amali (n. 3), trade, occupation,
endeavour. Amani (n. 3), peace, security,
tranquillity, harmony. (Ku)amba (v. intr.), to say, to
speak.
Ambari (n. 3), Ambergris. (Ku)ambata (v. tr.), to stick, to
cleave, to embrace. (Ku)ambatana (v. rec.), to stick to
each other, to cling together,
to be joined. (Ku)ambia (v. prepl.), to say to,
to tell, to speak, to inform. (Ku)anibua (v. tr.), to peel, to re- move rind or husk, to pare. (Ku)amini (v. intr.), to believe, to
trust. (Ku)amka (v. intr.), to awake, to
wake up, to rouse oneself. (Ku)amkia (v. tr.), to greet, to
salute, to pay respects (in the
morning). (Ku)amkua (v. tr.), to greet, to
visit, to accost or recognise in
passing. Amiri (n. 5), commander, officer,
captain, chief. Amri (u. 3), order, command,
authority, right, power.
(Ku)amirisha (v. c.), to order, to
command. (Ku)amrn (v. tr.), to order, to
command. (Ku)amsha (v. tr.), to awaken, to
rouse out of sleep. Amu (n.), Lamu. (Ku)amua (v. tr.), to judge a case,
to settle a dispute, to give
judgment.
Ana (n. 3), anna, penny, four pice. Anasa (n. 3), worldly pleasure. (Ku)andaa (v. tr.), to prepare tasty
dishes.
(Ku)andama (v. tr.), to accom- pany, to follow. Mwezi ukianrfama, at the new
moon (when the next moon
succeeds this). (Ku)ancfomislia (v. c.), to cause
one to follow another. (Ku)andika (v. tr.), (1) to lay or
set in O'der, to place on, to
plaster; (2) to write; (3) to
ordain. (Ku)anga (v. intr.), to count, lo
reckon. (Ku)angama (v. n.), to be caught
or entangled (in falling). (Ku)angamia (angamika) (v. n.),
to perish, to be lost. Anga (n. 5), atmosphere, air,
climate, ether. (Ku)angaza(nuUo) (v. tr.), to look
up, to fix the eyes, to watch,
to look out, to stare about, to
keep the eyes open. (Ku)angalia (v. tr.), to look, to
pay attention, to behold, to
observe, to visit. (Ku)angika (v. tr.), to hang up,
to hang on a peg, to fasten up,
to suspend, to keep in suspense,
to be reckonable. -angu (var. posg. adj.), my,
mine. (Ku)angua (v. sub.), to unhook, to
hatch eggs, to take down, to
unfasten.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULAEY
165
(Zu)anguka (v. n.), to fall down, to drop down.
(Ku)angushia (v. prepl.), to knock down by means of.
Anuwani (n. 3), address, inscrip- tion, superscription.
(Ku)anza (v. tr. and iutr.), to begin, to commence, to start, to open.
-ao (var. poss. adj.), their, theirs.
(Ku)apa (v. tr. and intr.), to swear, to take an oath.
(Ku)apisha (v. c.), to adjure, to administer an oath.
(Ku)apiza (v. c.), to swear at, to curse.
-a pili (var. num. adj.) (ord.), the second, the other.
Arazaki (n. prop.), Provider (used only of God).
(Ku)arifu (v. tr.), to inform (espe- cially by letter).
Arnbaa (num. adj.), four.
Arubaa<ashara (num. adj.), four- teen.
Anibaini (num. adj.), forty.
Arujuwani (n. 3), purple.
(Ku)asa (v. c.), (vid. kuatisha).
Asa (conj.), if, supposing (followed by " ka" tense).
Asali (n. 3), asali ya nyuki, honey ; asali ya miwa, treacle, cane syrup.
Asbara (num. adj.), ten.
Asi (n. 5), rebel, apostate.
(Ku)asi (v. tr. and intr.), to rebel, to be disobedient.
Asikari (n. 3), soldier, policeman.
Asili (n. 3), origin, root source.
Asiye-neno, innocent person.
AsubuM (n. 3), morning, this morning; (adv.) in the morn ing.
Asubuhi sana (adv.), early in the morning.
Asubuhi yakwe (adv.), on the fol- lowing morning.
(Ku)ata (v. tr.), to leave, to leave off, to cease, to desert, to abandon.
(Ku)ata burn (v. tr.), to set free, to release, to let be, to let alone.
(Ku)atana (v. rec.), to leave mu- tually (divorce).
(Ku)atisha (kuasa) (v. c.), to wean, to break off, to make leave off.
(Ku)atia (v. prepl.), to leave to or for or with, to commit to.
(Ku)atika huru (v. n.), to be re- leased or set free.
(Ku)atilia (v. prepl.), to forgive, to absolve, to pass over.
Ati ! (intj.) I say ! look here ! I suppose so I
Adhuhuri (n. 3), midday, noon, 12 o'clock in the day.
(Ku)atua (v. tr.), to break, to tear in two, to rend, to cleave, to smite.
Au (conj.), or, even.
(Ku)aua (v. tr.), to examine, to survey, to visit, to search, to view, to see after.
(Ku)aulia (v. prepl.), to look after for (some one).
Aula (conj.), or, even.
Auni (n. 3), help, succour.
(Ku)auni (v. tr.), to help, to suc- cour.
Auteni (n. 7), home (see watani), habitation.
(Ku)aza (v. intr.), to ponder, to meditate, to think.
Azima (n. 3), resolve, purpose, in- tention.
Azima-mbi (n. 3), wicked schemes, evil devices.
(Ku)azima (v. tr.), to lend, to borrow.
(Ku)azimia (v. intr.), to intend, to purpose ; (v. prepl.), to lend to, to borrow from.
(Ku)azimu (v. intr.), to intend, to purpose.
Azizi (n. 3), rarity, something dear, beloved, cherished,
166
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
B
Baa (n. 3), evil, calamity, plague,
nuisance (pi. mabaa). Baadae (adv.), afterwards, later
on. Baadae p'unde (adv.), after a little,
presently.
Baada ya (advl. prep), after. Baadhi (n. 3), a certain number,
some (persons). Baba (n. 3), father, uncle (see Note
10, Study VIII.). Baba wa kambo, step father. Babu (n. 3), grandfather, ancestor. Bar/alaya (advl. prep.), instead of,
in lieu of. (Ku)badili (v. tr.), to change, to
alter, to exchange (v. intr.), to
change. (Ku)badilisha (v. tr.), to transform,
to transfigure, to change. (Ku)badilika (v. n.), to be changed,
to be altered, to be transformed. Bado (adv.), not yet, not as yet. Bado kidogo (adv.), not just yet,
after a bit.
Bafe (n. 5). large snake, adder. Bafufa (n. 3), fine longcloth, nain- sook. (Ku)bagua (v. tr.), to separate, to
classify, to sort out, to choose. Bahari (n. 3), sea, large lake. Baharia (n. 5), seaman, sailor. Bahafi (n. 3),chance, luck, fortune. Bahasha (n. 3), envelope. (Ku)bahafisha, to guess, to divine. Bahili (n. 3), miser, avaricious
person.
(Ku)baini (v. iutr.), to distinguish. (Ku)bainisha (v. c.), to reveal, to
make manifest. (Ku)bainika (v. n.), to become
manifest, to be revealed. (Ku)bainiki (v. tr.), to manifest. (Ku)baki (v. intr.), to remain over,
to be left.
BakishisM (n. 3), gift, tip, gra- tuity.
Bakora (n. 3), walking stick. Bakuli (n. 5), basin, bowl. Balanga (n. 3), disease that makes
the skin white. (Ku)baleghe (v. intr.), to reach the
age of puberty. Bali (conj.), rather but, on the
contrary.
Balozi (n. 5), consul, commissioner. Bamba (n. 5), thin plate or disc of
iron, tin, etc. ; counsel. (Ku)bana (v. tr.), to squeeze
(finger). Banda (n. 5), large shed or hut,
booth tabernacle. Bandari (n. 3), landing-place,
harbour. Ban'fia (n. 3), puppet.
Mtoto wa bandia, doll. (Ku)bandika (v. tr.), to lay or
place or attach a thing; to
put a plaster on. (Ku)bandua (v. sub.), to chip, to
break off ; to remove a plaster. Bao (n. 3), game played on a board
with holes.
Bap'a la uso (n. 5), forehead. (Ku)bapn(izi (v. tr.), to baptize. Bara (n. 3), interior of a country ;
(adv.), up-country, inland. Baradhuli (n. 3), rude fellow,
foolish man. Barafu (n. 3), ice. Mvua ya barafu, hail. Baraghumu (n. 3), trumpet, war- horn.
Baraka (n.3), blessing, prosperity. Baraza (n. 5), verandah. Baridi (n. 3), cold, " coolth," cold- ness, dampness ; a cold. Mt'u baridi, person of equable
temperament.
Baridi yabisi (n. 3), rheumatism. (Ktribariki (v. tr.) to bless. (Ku)barikia (v. prep.), to pray
God to bless ; to knock down to
(auction). (Zu)barikisha (v. c.), to bless (used
of God oply),
SWAHILI-ENQLISH VOCABULARY
167
(Ku)barikishia (v. prep.), to pro- nounce blessing (auctioneer) on thing knocked down to bidder. Barikisi (n. 3), barracks. Barua (n. 3), letter, note, bill,
chit.
Barud (n. 3), gunpowder. (Ku)bashiri (v. intr.), to prophesy,
foretell, announce, publish. (Ku)basiri (v. intr.), to understand,
to be wise, intelligent. Basil (intj.), enough, that will
do!
Basi (conj.), then, so, well, there- fore, now.
Bastola (n. 3), pistol. Bate (n. 5), duck. Ba/a mzinga, turkey. Bad (n. 3), tin.
Batili (n. 3), crime, iniquity, un- righteousness. Bawa (n. 5), wing, pinion. Bawabu (n. 5), door-keeper,
janitor.
Bawasili (n. 3), piles, hemorr- hoids, -baya (var. adj.), bad, hurtful,
noxious. (Ku)beba (v. tr.), to carry a child
on the back in a cloth. Bega (n. 5), shoulder. Behewa (n. 3), courtyard, en- closure, upstairs lobby. Bai (n. 3), bargain, price. (Ku)vuno(a bei, to undersell. (Ku)bembea (v. tr. & intr.), to
swing, to rock. Bendera (n. 3) (see bindera). (Ku)jibenua (v. ref.), to lean
upon.
(Ku)benuka (v. neut.), to bend, bulge out, be crooked, be lean- ing.
Beramu (n. 3), banner, flag. Betoto (n. 3), owl. Biasbara (n. 3), trade. Bibi (n. 5), lady, mistress, grand- mother, wife, madam. Bibiharusi (n. 5), bride.
Biblia (n. 3), Bible.
Bidbaa (n. 3), merchandise, trad- ing goods.
Bidii (n. 3), enthusiasm, zeal, diligence, pains, ardour, effort.
Bikira (n. 5), maiden, virgin.
Bila (prep.), without, except by.
BilasM (adv.), without cause, for nothing, gratuitously, iu vain.
Bilauri (n. 3), glass, tumbler.
Bin (n. 3) (pi. bani), son.
Binadamu (n. 3), son of Adam, human being.
Bindera (n. 3), banner, red turkey twill, flag.
Bindo (n. 5), knot or fold in loin- cloth, hence pocket or puree.
(Ku)bingiria (v. n.), to roll (of itself).
(Ku)bingirika (v. n.), to roll, to roll down, to roll away.
(Ku)bingirisha (v. c.), to take or roll away, to remove, to roll along.
Bind (n. 3) (pi. banati), daughter.
(Ku)bisba (v. intr.), to knock at the door, to announce oneself at a house by calling " hodi ! "
Bishipu hi. 5), bishop.
Bisikofi (n. 3), biscuit.
-bid (var. adj.), raw, green, un- ripe, underdone. (01. 4 con- cord, kiwid).
-bivu (var. adj.), ripe, well- cooked.
Bizari (n. 3), curry-powder.
Boga (n. 5), pumpkin.
Boma (n. 5), stockade, fence, fortress, palisade, hedge.
Bomba (n. 5), cylinder, funnel of steamer, pump, pipe.
(Ku)bompa (v. tr.), to pull down, demolish, destroy.
Bonde (n. 5), valley.
(Ku)bonyea (v. neut.), to sink in, to pit, to be soft.
Bop'o (n. 3), gulf, gulley, valley, deep place.
168
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Bora (inv. adj.), best, noble, great, important.
Boriti (n. 3), beam, pole, rafter.
Borohoa (n. 5), stew, hotch-potch, pottage, mashed beans.
(Ku)boromoka (v. neut.),to slide or slither down, to slip, to glide, to fall down.
-bovu (var. adj.), rotten, corrupt.
Bua (n. 5), stalk, stem, blade.
Buba (mbuba) (n. 3), the yaws or framboefcia.
(Ku)bubujika (v. intr.), to bubble up, to burst forth.
Bubwi (n. 5), dumb person.
BucZi (n. 3), escape.
Sina bndi, I have no escape from : hence I must.
Buibui (n. 3), spider.
Bukini (n. p.), Madagascar.
Bumbuazi (n. 3), bewilderment, dumfoundedness, astonish- ment.
(Ku)bunda (v. tr.), to boat down, to annihilate.
BunJuki (n. 3), musket, gun.
Buni (n. 3), coffee-berries.
(Ku)buni (v. tr.), to design, to found, to invent, to originate.
Bunzi (n. 5), hornet.
Bure (adv.), in vain, to no pur- pose, free, for nothing, gratis.
Buriani (n. 3), leave-taking, part- ing, reconciliation.
(Ku)burudi, (Ku)burudika (v. neut), to be relieved of thirst, to be refreshed.
Buruhani (n. 3), earnest, pledge, token.
Buruji (n. 3), fortification, castle, defence, bulwark.
(Ku)buruta (v. tr.), to drag.
Busara (n. 3), prudence, under- standing, sense, subtlety, caution, discretion.
Bushuii (n. 3), cloak of camel or goat's hair (burnoose, blanket).
Bustani (n. 3), garden.
(Ku)busu (v. tr.), to kiss.
(Ku)busiana (v. reo.), to kiss each
other.
Buu (n. 5), worm, maggot. Buyu (n. 5), fruit of the baobab
tree, calabash. (Ku)bwaga (v. tr.), to throw down,
to cause to fall, to dump down. (Ku)bwaga vimba, to murder. Bwana (n. 5), master, lord, sir,
gentleman.
Bwanahamsi, bridegroom. Bwana Jesu Masihi, Lord Jesus
Christ. Bwete (n. 5), small box or desk.
Ch
Cha (var. prep.), of (4th cl. con- cord).
(Ku)cha (v. intr.), to dawn (see Kucha).
(Ku)cha (v. tr.), to fear, to be afraid of.
Chaa (n. 3), tea.
Chaa (n. 4), stable or shed for cattle.
(Ku)ch'acha (v. intr.), to ferment, to turn sour.
-chache (var. adj.), few, small, little.
(Ku)chafulia (v. tr.), to spoil.
(Ku)chafuka (v. neut.), to be excited, to be hurried.
Ch'aga (n. 7 pi.), barn«, grain- stores.
Chai (n. 3), tea.
Chaka (n. 4), summer-heat, drought, desolation.
(Ku)chakarisha (v. intr.), to flutter.
Chakula (n. 4), (something) to eat, food, meal, eatable.
Chamba (n. 4) hiding-place, den, shelter, secret-place for way- laying.
Chambo (n. 4), bait.
Chandfa (n. 4), finger.
Ohani/a cha gnmba (n, 4), thumb.
SWAHILT-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
169
-changa (var. adj.), young, im- mature, unripe, embryonic.
Ch'ango (n. 3), intestines, bowels.
(Ku)chanja (v. tr.), to cut, to prick, to cleave (used of vacci- nation and of native tattooing), to split up, to chop (as fire- wood).
Ghana (n. 4), wooden plate.
Ch'apa (n. 4), stamp, mark.
(Kuipiga cha'pa. to print.
(Ku)checha (v. tr.), to trench (the soil).
(Ku)chelea (v. prepl.), to be in fear of.
(Ku)chelewa (v. intr.), to be late.
Chembe (n. 4), arrow-head.
(Ku)chemka (v. intr.), to boil, to bubble up.
(Ku)chemua (v. intr.), to sneeze.
Chengo (n. 5), halting-place, rest- ing-place.
Chenza (n. 5), tangerine, orange.
Chep chep ! (intj.), be quick ! look alive !
Cheo (n. 4), measure, degree, honour, position.
Chetezo (n. 4), cen-er.
(Ku)chewa (v. pass.), to be feared.
Chicha (n. 5), fibrous part of grated cocoa-nut from which the " tui " has been squeezed.
Chichi (n. 3), old word for fish.
Chichiri (n. 3), bribe.
Cho (var. rel. part.), which, that, it.
(Ku)choka (v. intr.), to be tired, to be weary, to be fatigued.
Chombo (n. ~4), vessel, utensil, tool.
Ch'onge (n. 3), canine teeth.
Choo (n. 4), lavatory.
(Ku)cfiora (v. tr.), to carve, en- grave, make deep lines or marks.
Choyo (n. 4), selfishness, greedi- ness, churlishness, parsimony.
Cb.ua (chnla) (n. 4), frog.
(Ku)chubuka (v. n.), to be grazed.
Ch'uguu (n. 3), heap, pile (lit. Ant-hill).
Chuki (n. 4), anger, irritation.
Chumba (n. 4), room, chamber, bedroom.
Chumbani, in prison, in confine- ment.
Chumvi (Zanzibar) (n. 3), salt.
(Ku)chuna (Zanzibar) (v. tr.), to flay, to skin (see kutuna).
Chuagu (n. 4), cooking-pot (earth- enware), vessel.
Chungwa (n. 5), orange (large).
Ch'ungwa (n. 3), orange (small).
Chunyu (n. 3), brine, gait-crust, salt desert.
Chuo (n. 4), book. Mwana wa chuoni, scribe, scholar.
Chuo cha majina, register, mark- book.
1)
73afu (n. 5), young cocoanut.
DaftUari (n. 5), account-book, record.
Dahari (adv.) for ever, evermore.
(Ku)dai (v. tr.), to claim from, sue, demand from.
(Ku)rfaia (v. prepl.), to plead (legally).
Daima (adv.), continually, always, perpetually.
(Ku)daka (v. intr.), to catch, seize.
Dakika (n. 3), instant, minute, moment.
Z>akiki (adv.), completely, abso- lutely.
.Dakifari (n. 3), doctor, physician.
.Dalili (n. 3), sign, token, trace.
7>ama (n. 3), sheet (of a sail).
.Damu (n. 3), blood.
( Kujdandamana (v. n.), to swarm.
(Kui'/angana (v. n.), to be de- ceived, to be deluded.
(Ku)danganya (v. tr.). to deceive,
170
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
to impose on, to mislead, to disappoint.
Daraja (n. 3), stairs, steps, stair- case, bridge.
Uaraja (n. 3), degree, promotion, preferment, honour, order.
Daraka (n. 3), responsibility. Kutwaa <?araka, to be respon- sible.
Zterasa (n. 5), class, lesson, lesson- hour.
Daxi (n. 3), upper storey, house top, roof.
7>ariri (n. 3), embroidery.
(Ku)darizi (v. intr.), to embroider, embellish.
/)arubini (n. C), telescope, bino- culars.
D&n (n. 3), native boat, dhow, dug-out.
7>auwa (n. 3), cause, lawsuit, case, litigation.
D&vra. (n. 3), medicine, remedy, cure, physic, lawsuit (see (Jauwa).
(Ku)dawaa (v. intr.), to hesitate, to be in suspense or doubt, to be doubtful, to be perplexed.
D&w&ti (n. 3), writing-desk, box, cash-box.
i'emani (n. 3), period of fair winds, between S.W.&N.E. monsoons, about August, cool season.
Dengu (n. 3), lentils.
Deni (n. 3 & 5), debt.
Mr/eni, debtor. Mwenyi deni, creditor.
JJesturi (dasituri) (n. 3), custom, habit, customary.
Dliabihu (n. 3), offering, sacrifice.
Dhahabu (n. 3), gold.
Dhaifu (inv. adj.), weak, wretched, poor, miserable.
Dhambi (n. 3 & 5), sin, crime.
(Ku)dhamini (v. tr.), to give se- curity for, to be surety or sponsor for.
Dhamiri (n. 3), conscience, con- ceptions, thoughts.
(Ku)dharau (v. tr.), to despise. Dharuba (n. 3), storm, stroke. Dhihaka (n. 3), derision, scornful
laughter, ridicule. (Ku)dnihaki (v. tr.), to deride, to
mock, to ridicule. (Ku)dhii (v. iutr.), to waste or
pine away, to be in distress. Dhiki (n. 3), t traits, perplexity,
trouble, distress. (Ku)dhikika (v. n.), to be troubled,
perplexed, tormented. (Ku)dhili (v. tr.),to despise, set at
nought, abase, belittle. Dhiraa (n. 3), cubit, arm, half-
yard (nearly). (Ku)dhoofika (v. intr.), to become
weak or faint.
Dhuli (n. 3), misery, wretchedness. (Ku)dhuru (v. tr.), to hurt, injure ;
(v. intr.), to matter. Haidhuru, nevermind, it does not
matter. ilia (n. 3), compensation, reward,
revenge, amends, blood-money. Dibaji (n. 3), preface. />ini (n. 3), religion. Dira (n. 3), mariner's compass. (Ku)dira (v. tr.), to cut, shear. Dirii (n. 3), metal shield, buckler. (Ku)diriki (v. intr.), to spare time,
keep an engagement ; (v. tr.),
to meet, await. Dirisha (n. 5), window. Divei (fr. duvin) (n. 3), wine. Dobi (u. 5), washerman. -dogo (var. adj.), small, little. Dodoki (n. 5), loofah gourd, fruit
of climbing plant which makes
the " loofah."
Donda (n. ft), large sore.
(n. 5), morsel.
Donge (n. 5), clot, lump, cake, bit,
Dod (n. 3), eight hands (of cloth),
nearly four yards. .Dua (n. 3), prayer, intercession,
petition. Jtaara (n. 3), windlass, crane (see
duwara).
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
171
Dude (n. b), thing, what-is-tbe- namo.
7>uka (n. 5), shop.
(Ka)<7umu (v. intr.), to continue, persevere, abide.
(Ku)dunga (v. tr.), to prick, pie ice.
Uungu (n. 3), watch-housa, watch- tower, plantation - watchers shelter, against wild beasts.
l>ua.i (inv. adj.), mean, paltry, trifling, worthless, despicable.
JJunia (n. 3), earth, world.
7)ura (u. 3), talking parrot.
7>utu (n. 5), substance, shape.
7>uwara (n. 3), wheel, trane, windlass, globe ; (adj ), round.
E
-e (var. poss. suf.) (shortened form
of -akwe), his, her, its. Ee! (iutj.), oh! Ee wallah ! (intj.), yes (by God) !
all right. (Ku)egesha (v. tr.), to land, bring
to land (a boat). Ehe ! (intj.), what ! what then ? -ekundu (var. adj.), red, crimson,
scarlet. Ela (conj.), but, except, that
(slightly adversative). (Ku)elea (v. tr.), to be clear or
plain, to enlighten ; (v. intr.),
to float.
Yanelea, that is clear to me. (Ku)elewa ni..., to understand all
about... (Ku)eleza (v c.), to explain to, to
make clear or plain to. (Ku)eleka (v. tr.), to carry. Elfu (num. adj.) (see Alfu),
thousand.
Elhasili (adv.), ultimately, finally, -ema (var. adj.), good. Ema (n. 5), large wicker basket or
trap for catching fish.
-embamba (var. adj.), narrow. Embe (n. 5), mango (Embe dodo,
large mango). (Ku)enda or (Kw)enenda (v. intr.),
to go, proceed, set out, walk. Amekwenda itwa, (some one) has
gone to call him. Enda zako! (see Note 2, Study
XIX.), go thy way. (Kw)endea (v. prepl.), to go to, or
for, or towards. (Kw)endelea (v. prepl.), to go on,
make progress, continue. (Kw)endeleza (v. tr.), to spell ;
(v. c.), to cause to continue, to
make to last on. (Kw)endesha (v. c.), to make to go,
drive, guide. (Ku)eneai (v. intr.), to spread,
penetrate, permeate. (Ku)eneza (v. c.), to spread over,
cover, distribute. (Ku)enga-enga (v. intr.), to falter,
mind carefully.
-engine (var. adj.), other, another, -enu (var. poss. adj.), your, yours, -enyi (var. prep, or pro.), having,
possessing, owning ; Mwana
wa kuomba, prayed-tbr child;
Mwana mwenyi kuomba, pray- ing child.
Enywi (voc. pro.), ye, you. Enzi (n. 3), majesty, power,
sovereignty, dominion, rule,
authority. (Ku)e'pa (v. intr.), to turn back,
duck, draw back, double, -epasi (var. adj.), light, slight,
easy, thin, quick, versatile. Kwa wepesi, quickly, speedily. (Ku)epua (v. tr.), to remove,
withdraw, turn away, put
nway, take away. (Ku)epuka (v. tr.), to avoid, shun,
be far from, go away from. (Ku)epukana na (v. n.), to be
separated from.
(Ku)epusha (v. c.), to put or thrust away.
172
SWAHILI GKAMMAR
-erevu (var. adj.), cunning, clever,
etc., subtle, shrewd. (Ku)erevuka (v. n.), to become
cuuning, clever, etc. eshe (contd. form of aishe), that
he may finish.
-etu (var. poss. pro.), our, ours, -eupe (var. adj.), white, light,
bright, clear, clean, guileless. -eusi (var. adj.), black, dark,
dingy. Ewa ! (intj.), abbreviated form of
Ee wallah 1 Ewe! (intj.), O! holloa! hi!
F
(Ku)fa (v. intr.), to die, perish ; (Ku)fiwa (v. pass.), to be be- reaved.
(Ku)fia (v. prepl.), to die to or for.
(Ku)fa ganzi (v. iutr.), to go to sleep (of a limb), be callous, be seized with cramp, be dis- tracted with grief.
(Ku)faa (v. tr. & intr.), to suit, do, become, benefit, succeed.
(Ku)fadhili (v. tr.), to show favour to.
Fadhili (u. 3), favour, kindness, condescension, grace.
(Ku)fafanua (v. tr.), to see clearly, discern, report, distinguish consider.
Fahali (n. 5), bull, male of animals, warrior.
(Ku)fahanm (v. intr.), to under- stand ; (v. tr.), to remember, consider. The final " u " often disappears, as in (pi. imp.) " Fahamni."
Fahamu (n. 3), mind, intellect, memory, intelligence.
Faharasa (n. 3), index.
Faif/a (n. 3), profit, gain, advan- tage,
i(fi. (v. tr.), to be profitable
to. Fakhari (n. 3), glory, excel-
lence. (Ku)fana (v. n.), to be successful,
to succeed. (Ku)fanana na (v. recip.), to
resemble, to be like. (Ku)fananisha (v. c.), to draw a
similitude from. (Ku)fanidisha (v. tr), to compare,
liken, make alike. (Ku)fanikiwa (v. intr.), to succeed,
prosper.
Fanusi (n. 3), lantern. (Ku)fanya (v. tr.), to make, do,
perform, act towards (un-
favourably).
(Ku)fanywa (v. pass), to be made. (Kujjifanya (v. ref.), to pretend to
be, make oneself out to be. (Ku)fanya baridi (v. intr.), to
become mildewed. (Ku)fanya birfii (v. intr.), to take
pains, make an effort, exert
oneself. (Ku)fanya khofu (v. intr.), to be
afraid, fear. (Ku)fanyia (v. prep.), to deal
with, act towards (favourably). (Ku)fanyika (v. n.), to be well
made, to be " doable," be
feasible.
(Ku)fanyiza (v. c.), to repair. Faradhi (n. 3), everyday food. Faragha (n. 3), leisure, privacy. Faraja (n. 3), comfort, rest. Farasi (frasi) (n. 3), horse. Farasila (n. 3), thirty-six pounds
(36 Ibs.). (Ku)fariji (n. tr.), to comfort, con-
sole. (Ku)farikana (v. rec.), to be sepa-
rated, alienated. (Ku)fariki (v. intr.), to die, de-
cease. Fasaha (inv. adj.), clean, pure,
correct. (Ku)fasiri (v. tr.), to translate,
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
173
(Zu)fatahi (v. tr.), to open.
Fatashi (n. 3), opener, provider, supplier.
(Zu)faulu (v. intr.), to tack (in sailing).
(Zu)fazaika (v. iutr.), to be troubled, be worried, dismayed.
Fedha (n. 3), silver, money.
Fedheha (n. 3), confusion, dis- honour, shame.
(Zu)fedhehe (vr. tr.), to shame, ridicule.
(Zu)fedheheki (v. n.), to be put to shame, ridiculed.
Feeli (n. 3), wonder, sign, omen.
Fereji (Feleji) (n. 3), drain, rain- pipe, channel, stream.
(Ka)fia (v, prepl.), to die to or for.
(Zu)fidi (v. tr.), to redeem, ransom.
FL/ia (n. 3), ransom, compensa- tion, blood-money.
(Zu)fifia (v. n.), to fall, disappear, fade away, be faint.
(Zu)fifiliza (v. tr.), to cheat, em- bezzle.
(Ku)filia (v. prepl ), to die to or for.
(Ku)filiwa (v. pass.), to be be- reaved (see Fiwa).
Figo (n. 3), kidneys, reins.
Figili (n. 3), species of large radish.
Fiili (n. 3), doing, deed, action.
(K'i)fika (v. intr.), to arrive, attain, reach,
(Ka)fikia (v. prepl.), to come up to, attain to.
Tunafikiliwa ni ageni, a guest lias come io us.
(Kuifikilia (the same as Fikia).
(Zu)fikiliza (v. c.), to fulfil, cause to arrive.
Fikira (v. 3), thoughts, reflections, understanding, consideration.
(Zu)fikicha (v. tr.), to rub between the fingers.
(Zu)fikiri (v. intr.), to consider, reflect, think over.
(Zu)filisi (v. tr.), to bid at auction ;
Filisi k'ubwa, highest bid. (Zu)filisiwa (v. pass.), to have
one's goods distrained, be
bankrupt.
Fimbo (n. 3), rod, stick. (Zu)finanga (v. tr.), to form,
fashion, frame. (Ku)flnika (v. tr.), to cover. (Zu)finikiza (v. c.), to cover by
inverting.
(Ku)finya (v. tr.), to pinch. Fira (fia) (n. 3), venomous snake,
adder.
Firigisi (n. 3), gizzard. (Zu)fisha (v. c.), to cause to arrive,
cause to die, slay. Fisi (n. 5), hyaena. (Zu)fisidi (v. intr.), to become
corrupt or vile. (Zu)fi<a (v. tr.), to hide, conceal.
secrete. (Zu)fitamana (v. n.),to be hidden,
concealed. (Zu)jiMa (v. prepl.), to hide,
conceal from.
Fl^ina (n. 3), conspiracy, treach- ery, calumny, disloyalty, in- trigue. Fito (n. 5), slender sticks or poles
used in building. Fiwi (n. 3), bean. Forodha (n. 3), custom-house. Foromashi (n. 5), wooden box with
partitions, cash-box (made of
teak). (Kn)fua (v. tr.), to beat (clothes
(in washing), forge (iron, etc.). Zufua maji, to bale out water. Mfua chuina. a smith. (Ku)fuasa (v. c.), to teek out,
reproduce, copy a design. (Ku)fuata (v. tr.), to follow, suc- ceed, accompany. (Ku)faataaa (v. rec.), to follow
each other, go in file. (Ku)fufuka (v. n,), to rise from
the dead. (Zu)fofuliwani, resurrection.
SWAH1LI GRAMMAR
(Ka)fuga (v. tr.), to keep or rear
animals. Fujo (n. 5), confusion, muddle,
disorder, tumult. (Ku)fuka (moshi), (v. intr.), to
smoke, fume, throw off (as
heat).
Fukara (n. 5), poor man, beggar. (Ku)fukia (v. tr.),to fill up (hole),
hide (in a hole). (Ku)fukiza (v. c.), to fumigate,
perfume (uvumba). (Ku)fukua (v. tr.), to dig (a small
hole). (Ku)fukuza (v. tr.), to drive
away.
Fulana (n. 3), vest, flannel. Fulani (n. 3), some one, so and
so, a certain person ; (inv. adj.)
such and such (a thing). Falifuli (adv.), in crowds, helter
skelter. (Ku)fulia (v. intr.), to hasten on
with. (Ku)fulia (v. prepl.), to beat on
(as waves or wind), rise up
against.
(Ku)fuliwa ni, to be choked by. (Ku)fuliza (v. c.), to make go on
without stopping, persevere. (Ku)fama (v. 1r.), to hit, shoot,
wound ; weave, sew. (Ku)fumba (v. tr.), to close, stop,
shut, hide. (Ku)fumbana (v. n.), to be closed,
be hidden. (Ku)fumbata (v. tr.), to grasp.
Amefumbata mkono, he has
closed his fist.
Fumbi (n. 5), ravine, gorge, nul- lah ; torrent that runs through
a gorge.
(Ku)fumbika (v. n.),to be hidden Fumbo (n. 5), parable, allegory. (Ku)fumbua (v. sub.), to open,
unclose.
Fumo (n. 5), spear, dart, lance. (Ku)fumua (v. sub.), to uusew,
unpick, undo ; to dismiss.
(Ku)fumukana (v. n.), to come to an end, be separated, be broken up, scattered.
(Ku)funda-funda (v. red.), to dash in pieces.
Fundi (n. 5), skilled workman, expert smith, mechanic,artisan.
(Ku)fundikiza (v. tr.), to lay up money.
(Ku)fundisha (v. c.), to teach, instruct.
Fundo (n. 5), knot, purse (formed by knot ia loincloth), pocket.
Fundo la guu, ankle.
(Ku)funga (v. tr.), to tie, shut, fasten, bind, gird, attach, im- prison, fast.
Kufunga shariani, to bind in law, i.e. to condemn.
(Kn)jifunga (v. ref.), to bind one- self (by promise or contract). (For other derivatives of the verb, see Study XVII.).
(Ku)funga-funga, (v. red.), to tie in places.
(Ku)fungiza (v. c.), to besiege.
Fungo (n. 3), civet cat.
Ftmgu (n. 5), portion, part ; sand- bank, shoal.
(Ku)fungua (v. sub.), to open, Tindo, untie, unfasten.
Fano (a. 3), antelope (small).
(Ku)funua (v. sub.), to uncover, disclose, reveal.
Fanza (n. 3), maggot, jigger.
(Ku)funza (v. tr.), to teach, im- part knowledge to.
(Ku)jifunza (v. ref), to teach one- self, ht:nce to learn.
-fupi (var. adj.), short, brief.
(Ku)fupiza (v. c.), to shorten.
(Ku)fura (v. intr.), to swell, bo puffed up.
Furaha (n. 3), joy, gladness, pleasure.
(Ku)furahi (v. intr.), to rejoice, be glad, be pleased.
(Ku)furika (v. n.), to boil over, overflow.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
175
Furukani (n. 3), sacred books
(Muhammedan). (Ku)futa (v. tr.), to wipe, cancel,
obliterate, blot out ; futa uvu-
mbi, to dust. (Ku)futa (v. tr.), to draw out (as a
sword, etc.).
Futi (n. 3), foot (measure). (Ku)futika (v. n.), to be eradicable,
be cancelled. (Ku)futuka (v. n.), to molt
(feathers, hair). Futuri (n. 3), span. Fuforu (n. 3), first meal after
great fast, breakfast. (Ku)fuza (v. intr.), to progress,
advance, go further (see fuliza). (Ku)fyagia (v. tr.), to sweep. (Ku)fyolea (v. tr.), to abuse, insult. (Ku)fyonya (v. intr.), to mock,
make a mocking noise. (Ku)fyua (v. tr.), to snap or break
off.
(Ku)fyuka (v. n.), to snap, go off. Fyuko (n. 5), trap, gin (made with
a stick and cord).
(Ku)gaagaa (v. intr.), to wriggle.
roll, move to and fro, lie about
on the floor. Gae (n. 5), potsherd. Galawa (n. 5), canoe (see nga-
rawa). Ganda (n. 5), rind, peel, skin,
husk, bark. (Ku)ganda (v. intr.), to congeal,
curdle, freeze. (Ku)gandamana (v. rec.), to stick
together, cleave, adhere. Gando (n. 5), claw (of crab, etc.). (Kn)ganga (v. tr.), to treat medi- cally, apply medicine. Ganil (inv. inter, adj.), what
sort? what? which? Ganjo (n. 5), ruin, desolation. (Ku)ganza-ganza (v. iiitr.), to va-
cillate, waver, prevaricate,hesi- tate, slip. Gari (n. 3 & 5), cart, carriage,
train, trolley, waggon. Gari ya moshi, train (lit. carriage
of smoke).
Garufuu (n. 3), clove. (Ku)gawa (v. tr.), to divide up,
distribute, part. (Zu)gawanya (v. c.),to go shares ;
(v. tr.), to divide. (Ku)gema (v. tr.), to tap cocoa- nut trees for palm-wine. Genge (n. 5), steep place, preci- pice, cliff, rock.
Gereza (n. 3), prison (from Portu- guese " Ecclesia "). (Ku)geuka (v. n.), to turn round,
alter, change. (Ku)geuza (v. c.), to change, alter,
translate.
Ghadhabu (n. 3), anger, wrath. (Ku)ghadhibika (v. n.), to be
angry, be indignant. Ghafi (inv. adj.), gross (weight). (Ku)ghafilika (v. n.), to be in a hurry, make haste, be pressed for time.
Ghafula (adv.), suddenly, ab- ruptly, hastily. Ghala (n. 5), store, store-room. Ghalibu (n. 3), native home, ghalibu (adv.), probably, most
likely, commonly. Ghamu (n. 3), apprehension, sad- ness, grief. Ghanima (n. 3), abundance,
plenty, good fortune. Gharama (n. 3), expenses, costs,
value, woith. Gharika (n. 3), flood. (Ku)ghariki (v. n.), to bo sub- merged, be immersed ; to IHJ wrecked.
(Ku)gharikisha (v. c.), to over- flow, overwhelm, flood. Ghasia (n. 3), tumult, confusion,
hurry, noise, throng. Ghorofa (n. 3) (see orofa).
176
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Ghubari (n. 5), rain-cloud. Ghufira (n. 3), pardon, forgive- ness.
Ghururi (n. 3), vanity. Gtodoro (n. 5), mattress, padded
quilt, rug.
Gofu (n. 5), ruin, desolate place. Gogo (n. 5), log of wood. Goma (n. 5), big drum. (Kuteombana (v. rec.), to quarrel. (Ku)gombeza (v. tr.), to scold,
reprimand.
(Ku)gonga (v. tr.), to knock, beat. -gonjwa (var. adj.), sick, ill. Gonyezi (n. 3), languor. Gora (n. 3), piece of cloth. (Ku)gota (v. intr.), to knock, beat. Goti (n. 5), knee. Goya (u. 5), elegant gait. Gudulia (n. 5),istone water-bottle
(porous).
Gumegume (n. 3), llint. -gumu (var. adj.), hard, difficult,
tough. (Ku)guna (v. intr.), to groan,
grumble, sigh.
Guiiia (n. 5), sack, sacking, bag. (Ku)gura (v. intr.), to move (from
one place to another), change
one's abode.
Gurudumo (n. 5), wheel. (Ku)gusa (v. tr.), to touch. (Ku)gut'uka (v. intr.), to start,
jump, move suddenly, (ku)gut'usha (v. c.), to startle. Guu (n. 5), foot, leg. Gwaride (n. 3), marching, drill. (Ku)gwia (v. tr.), to lay hold of,
catch, seize, grasp.
H
Ha- (contrn. of Kika) (see speci- men verb, Study II.). Nika- nka-k'a-ha.
Ha- (Neg. pref. 3rd p. sing.).
Haba (inv. adj.), few, little, small; (n. 3), a little.
Haba ya kitu, a mere nothing.
Habari (n. 3), news, tidings, story, information, history.
Hadaa (n. 3), guile, deception, cunning.
Hadhari (n. 3), caution, warning.
Harfi (n. 3), limit, restriction, measure.
Haditbi (n. 3), story, tale, fable, anecdote, fiction.
Hafifu (inv. adj.), light, flimsy, light-minded.
Hai (inv. adj.), alive, living.
Haiba (n. 3), beauty, glory.
Haina budi, Doubtless . . .
Hai/asa (followed by inf. of verb), it has not yet . . .
Haja (n. 3), want, desire, request.
Haji (n. 5), person who has done the " Haj " or pilgrimage to Mecca.
(Ku)hajir (v. tr.), to emigrate ; (v. tr.) to banish.
Haki (n. 3), right, righteousness, justice, truth.
Hakika (n. 3), proof, certainty.
(Ku)hakikisha (v. c.), to test, try, prove.
Hakimu (n. 5), judge, governor (also used for doctor).
Hako, he (or she) is not here (or there).
Halafu (adv.), afterwards, pre- sently, by and by.
Halali (inv. adj.), lawful, per- missible, licit, legitimate.
Hali (n. 3), state, condition.
Halimu (inv. adj.), affable, mild.
(Ku)halifu (khalifu) (v. tr. and intr.), to commit a crime, transgress, rebel, swerve from right course of action.
Halisi (adv.) (see adverbs, Study XIX.), precisely, exactly.
Hali-uudi (n. 3), perfumed oint- ment.
Halua (n. 3), a sweetmeat.
Hamadi (n. 3), possession.
Hamali (n. 5), a porter, a coolie.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
177
Hamu (n. 3), sorrow, grief, woe.
Hamuna (ham'na), there is not in it,
Hanamu (kwa) (adv. man.), diago- nally, obliquely.
Handaki (n. b), ditch, trench.
(Ku)hangaika (v. n.), to be eager, be enthusiastic, be assiduous, be energetic.
Hapa (adv.), here, in this place, on this spot.
Hapana, Haknna, there is (or are) not.
Hapana bu<7i, no doubt, doubt- less.
Hapo (adv.), then, there.
Hapo kale (adv.), long ago, once upon a time, of old.
(Ku)hara (v. intr.), to have diar- rhoea.
Harabu (n. 3), injuriousness, liarin, hurt.
Haraka (adv.), quickly, hastily, in haste.
Haramu (adv.), illicit, unlawful, forbidden.
Haram (n. 3), courts of temple (Mecca).
Harara (n. 3), heat, impetuosity, fervour.
Hari (n. 3), heat, perspiration, prickly heat, fierceness.
(Ku)haribu (v. tr.), to spoil, de- stroy.
(Ku)aaribika (v. n.), to be spoiled or destroyed.
Hariri (n. 3), silk.
(Ku)b,arisb.a (v. tr.), to relax, act as an aperient.
Harufu (n. 3), letter (of alphabet), character.
Harufu (n. 3), smell, odour,
perfume.
Harusi (n. 3), marriage, wedding. Hasa (adv.), especially, strictly
speaking, particularly. Hasai (n. v.), eunuch. Hasara (n. 3), loss, damage, injury. SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Hasha ! (adv., strongly negative), not at all ! God forbid !
(Ku)hasibu (v. tr.), to couut, cal- culate, number.
(Ku)hasibika (v. n.), to be calcul- able, swerve from right course of action.
HasWi (n. 3), envy.
Hasira (n. 3), anger, wrath.
(Ku)hasiri (v. intr.), to suffer loss, lose, be out of pocket.
Hate (prep.), until, till, as far as, to; (conj.) even, so that, and.
Hate kidogo, not even a little.
Hate sasa, even now. up till now.
Hateri (n. 3), danger, risk.
Ha<i (n. 3), handwriting, docu- ment.
Hatima (adv.), in the end, finally.
(Ku)nadrisha (v. c.), to take risk, endanger, jeopardize.
Hatua (n. 3), footsteps, footprints.
Hawa (n. 3), (1) air, climate ; (2) Eve; (dem. adj.), these (first class).
Hawezi, he (or she) is ill, sick, (see Mote 2, Study III.).
Haya (n. 3), sense of shame, modesty, respect.
Haya, (1) (intrj.), come along ! come ! (2) (dem. adj.), these (fifth class).
Hayawani (n. 3) brute beast, beast, cattle.
Hazama (n. 3), nose-ring.
Hazina (n. 3), treasure.
Hebu ! (intrj.), just look !
Hema (khema) (n. 3), tent.
Heri (kheri) (1) (n. 3), happiness ; (2) (inv. adj.), well, better.
Hesi (n. 3), screw.
Hi-, contracted prefix, from niki- (Niki = nki = k'i = M).
Hi'/aashara (num. adj.), eleven.
HiiVaya (n. 3), present, gift.
Hifathi (n. 3), protection, security.
(Ku)bifatbi, to protect, preserve, deliver.
Hii (dem. adj.), this (third class). M
178
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Hija (n. 3), pilgrimage.
Hiki (dem. adj.), this (fourth class).
Hikima (a. 3), wisdom, clever- ness.
Hila (n. 3), cunning, craftiness, cheating, guile.
Hili (dem. adj), this (fifth class).
(Ku)jihiliki (v. ref.), to ruin one's self.
Hima (adv.), quickly, hastily.
(Ku)himidi (v. tr.), to praise.
(Ku)himili (v. tr.), to carry, en- dure, support, uphold, sustain.
(Ku)himilika (v. n.), to be bear- able, be tolerable.
(Ku)himiza (v. tr.), to hasten.
Hirimu (n. H), youth, young man.
Hirizi (n. 3), charm, talisman.
Hisabu (n. 3), sum, calculation, amount.
Kwa hlsabu ya, according to.
(Ku)Msal)u (see ' ' hasibu "), ( v. tr.), to number, reckon.
(Ku)hitaji (v. tr.), to need, want, desire.
(Ku)hitimu (v. intr.), to finish one's education.
Hivi (1) (adv.), thus, so; (2) (dem. adj.), these (fourth class).
Hivi sasa (adv.), just now, this minute.
Hiryo (1) (adv.), in this manner ; (2) mem. adj.), these same.
Hiyari (khitiari), (n. 3), choice, pleasure.
Hiyari yako, as you please.
Ko)hizi (v. tr.), to disgrace, put to shame, dishonour.
Ho'Zari(inv. adj.), strong, efficient, capable, able.
Horfi, word used to announce arrival at a door, equivalent in English to " may I come in."
Homa (n. 3), fever, ague.
Hori (n. 3), small dug-out canoe, hollow wooden tray, bay, sound, creek, a calm,
Howe ! there then 1 (hunter's
cry). Hu- (contr. of niku) (niku = nku
= k'u = hu). Hua (n. 3), dove. Huba (n. 5), love, fondness. (Ku)hubiri (v. tr. & intr.), to
preach, proclaim, inform. (Ku)hudhuria (v. intr.), to appear,
stand. (Ku)hudhurishwa (v. c. pass.), to
be made to meet. (Ku)hui (v. tr.), to bring to life. (Ku)huika (v. n.), to conic to life,
live. (Ku)huisha (v. c.), to give life to,
quicken. Huja (n. 3), reasoning, objection,
doubt, concern, reason, cause. (Ku)hujiana (v. c.), to have dial- ings with.
Huko (adv.), there, over there. Huku (adv.), here, in this direc- tion. Hukumu (n. 3), judgment,
sentence, verdict, authority,
ordinance, rule. (Ku)hukumu (v. tr.), to condemn,
sentence, judge. (Ku)hulu (v. intr.), to succeed. (Kujhuluku (v. tr.), to create. Homo (adv.), therein, in there. Humu (adv.), herein, in here. Hum (adj.), free (mahura is the
only plural). Huruma (n. 3), compassion, pity,
mercy. (Ku)hurtunia (v. prepl.), to take
pity on, have compassion on. (Ku)lmsika (v. intr.), to be im- portant, be fitting, be proper,
be incumbent. (Ku)husu (v. intr.), to be related
to.
(Ku)hus'ir7u (v. tr.), to envy. Huyu (dem. adj.), this (one or
person). Huzuni (n. 3), grief, sorrow.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
179
(Ku)iba (v. tr.), to steal, pilfer. Iba//a (n. 3), worship, service,
adoration.
Ibilisi (n. 3), devil, tlie accuser. Id&di (n. 3), number, amount,
complement. L/i (n. 3), feast, festival. I'/ili (n. 3), manners, good be- haviour. (Ku)ifya (v. tr.). to tantalize, put
into bad humour. (Ku)igiza (v. tr.), to imitate, copy. Ihisani (n. 3), goodness, kindness,
mercy.
li (la k'uku) (n. .">), egg (fowl's). lilani (n. 3), proclamation, public
notice. Ijara (n. 3), wages, salary, pay,
reward. Ijumaa (n. 3), week, in a week,
Friday. Ikibali, acceptance, answer (to
prayer). (Ku)ikiza (v. c.), to lay across,
place over.
Ila (n. 3), defect, blemish, nimu (n. 3), doctrine, teaching,
study.
Ilia (prep.), but, except. Illi (conj.), in order that. Imamu (n. 5), Muhammedan
priest. Imani (n. 3), faith, belief, creed,
trust, goodness.
Imara (inv. adj.) (also noun), strong, firm, solid, tough, dur- able. (Ku)tia imara (v. tr.), to confirm,
strengthen. (Ku)imba (v. tr. & intr.), to sing
(Kwimba). (Ku)imbiana (v. tr.), to sing
antiphonally. (Ku)inama (v. intr.), to stoop
down, bow, bend. (Ku)inamia (v. prepl.), to bow down to, worship.
(Ka)inamisha (v. c.), to bow or
bend down, lower. (Zu)inga (v. tr.), to scare, drive
away.
Ini (n. 5), liver. (Ku)inika (v. tr.), to put down,
strike down, lay or cast or
pour down, bow down. Injili (n. 3), Gospel. Inshallab., God willing, please
God, D.V. (Ku)inua (v. tr.), to lift up,
elevate, raise. (Ku)inuka (v. n.), to arise, get up
(after stooping or lying), rise. Ipu (n. 5), boil, tumour. Ipu tnngu (n. 5), malignant boil. (Ku)isha (Kwisha) (v. tr. & intr.),
to finish, complete, terminate. (Ku)ishia (v. prepl.), to finish off
or at. Ishara (n. 3), sign, omen, wonder,
miracle. (Ku)isbi (v. intr.), to live, endure,
last.
Ishirim (num. adj.), twenty. Islam (n. 3), Muhammedanism,
Islam. (Zu)ita (v. tr.), to call, invite,
summon.
Ithimu (n. 3), guilt, guiltiness. (Zu)itika or (Zu)itiMa (v. tr. &
prepl), to respond to a call. (Ku)iva (v. intr.), to ripen, come
to a head (boil, etc.), be fully
developed, be well cooked. Ivu (n. 5), cinder, ember, ashes. (Zuji)ivya (v. ref.), to attempt
something in which one is not
likely to succeed.
Ja (adj.), like, similar to, as. (Ku)ja (v. intr.), to come, -ja- (verb, inf.), not yet. Jaa (n. 5), rubbish-heap, dung- heap, ruination.
180
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
(Ku)jaa (v. intr.), to be full; Kujawa ni, to be filled with ; Xujazwa ni, to be filled up with . . . by.
(Ku)jaali (Kujali) (v. tr.), to enable, prosper, appoint, grant, ordain.
Jabali (n. 5), rook, rocky moun- tain (cf. Gibraltar, i.e. Jabal- el-Tir).
Jabari (n. 5), potentate, mighty one.
(Kuljadiliana (v. intr.), to argue, dispute, contradict, question.
Jana (n. 3), glory, power, majesty.
Jahazi (n. 5), vessel, craft, dhow.
Jahanam (n. 3), Gehenna, hell.
Jamaa (n. 3), relative, family, society.
Jamala (n. 3), obliging act.
Jamanda (n. 5), covered basket.
Jambia (n. 5), dagger.
Jambo (n. 5), matter, affair, thing.
Jambo ! a greeting.
Jamil (n. 3), company, assembly, community.
Jamu'/ari (n. 5), corporal.
Jamvi (u. 5), large coarse mat.
Jana (n. 6), big hulking lad.
Jana (n. & adv.), yesterday.
Jana (n. 5), larva of insect.
Jani (n. 5), leaf, grass, herb.
Janzi (n. 3), paralysis, cramp.
-japo- (verb inf.), even if, al- though, under such circum- stances (see -ngawa).
Jaraha (n. 5), wound, sore.
Jaribu (n. 5), test, trial, tempta- tion (plur. prefl.).
(Ku)jaribu (v. tr. & intr.), to try, attempt, tempt, test.
Jarife (Jarifa) (n. f>), large fishing- net.
Jasho (n. 5), heat, perspiration, sweat.
Jasi (n. 5), ear-ornament.
Jauri (Jeuri) (n. 3), violent deal- ing, oppression, insult.
Jawabu (n. 5), answer, matter,
affair.
(Ku)jaza (v. tr.), to fill. ((Ku)jazi (v. tr.), to grant, accord
a favour to.
-je ? (inter, suf.). How ? Wlial ? Jee ? (inter, part.). How now ?
What?
Jembe (n. 5), hoe, spade, plough. Jeneza (n. 5), bier. (Ku)jenga (v. tr.), to build, con- struct. (Zu)jengekana (v. n.), to bo built
up, be erected, be established,
be buildable. Jengo (n. 5), building. (Kn)jetea (v. intr.), to rely on, have
confidence in, depend on. -ji- (ref. inf.), self. (ZtL)jibu (v. tr.), to answer, reply ;
pass ((Ku)jibiwa. Jibwa (n. ;">), dog, bitch. Jiko (pi. meko) (n. 5), fireplace,
hence kitchen.
Jimbi (n. 5), cock, " chanticleer." Jimbi likiwika, cockcrow. Jimbo (n. 5). region, district,
suburb, field. Jina (n. 5), name. Jinamizi, oppressive fooling
caused by night-mare, or by a
place which gives a creepy
sensation.
Jino (pi. meno) (n. 5), tooth. Jinsi (n. 3), sort, kind, species. Jinsi...vyo (adv.), as, so. Jinsi gani? What sort? What
do you mean ? Jiografia, geography. Jioni (n. 3), evening, dusk ; (adv.),
in the evening. Jirani (n. 3), neighbour. (Ku)jitahirfi (v. intr.), to exert
oneself, take pains. Jitihadi (n. 3), diligence, effort,
pains, endeavour. Ji/o (pi. ma/o). (n. 5), eye ; Jito la
gnu, ankle ; Jito la maji, source,
spring of water, fountain.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
181
Jit'u (n. 6), worthless fellow,
vagabond.
Jiwe (u. 5) (pi. mawe),, stone, rock. Jizila (n. 3), dry goods measure,
60 p'ishi. Jogoi (n. 5), cock, chanticleer (see
Jimbi).
Johari (n. 5), jewel. Joho (u. 5), great-coat, overcoat. Joka (n. 5), large serpent, monster. Jombo (u. 6), big, crumsy vessel. (Ku)jongea (v. intr.), to move near
to, approach. Jongomeo (n. 3), hades Jongoo(n. 5), millipede (1000 feet),
large black insect with red legs. Jozi (n. 3), a pair, couple, brace. Jua (n. 5), sun ; Jua la vitwani,
noon.
(Ku)jua (v. tr.), to know, be ac- quainted with, understand. Juhudi (n. 3), zeal, effort, vigour,
energy. (Ku)julikana (v. n.), to be known,
be notorious, come to light. (Ku)julisha (v. c.), to make known. Juma (prop, n.), a boy's name. Jumaa (n. 3 and 5), week ; Siku
ya jumaa, Friday; i.e. the
great day of the week (Muham-
medan).
Jumaa mosi, Saturday (1st day). Jumaa pili, Sunday (2nd day). Jumaa t'atu, Monday (3rd day). Jumaa ne, Tuesday (4th day). Jumaa i'ano, Wednesday (5th
day).
For Thursday, see Alhamisi. Jumba (n. 5), house, large house. Jumbe (n. 5), noble, prince. Jumla (n. 3), sum, total, the whole. (Ku)jumlisb.a (v. tr.), to add, sum
up.
Jura (n. 3), idiot. Juu (adv.), above, up, upstairs. Juu ya (advl. prep.), on, upon,
over, on the top of. (Ku)ju£a (v. intr.), to repent, re- gret, be sorry.
Juto (n. 5), large river.
(Ku)juvya or (Ku)jnvisha (v. c.), to make known, show how, teach.
Juzi (n. & adv.), day before yester- day ; Mwaka juzi, year before last ; Mwezi juzi, month before last.
Juzijuzi (adv.), a few days ago, the other day.
(Ku)juzu (v. intr.), to be impera- tive or compulsory, be binding on, behove.
Juzuu (n. 5), section of Koran, pamphlet.
K
-ka- (verb, inf.), and (used in subordinate tenses).
K'aa (n. 3), crab
Kaa (n. 5), ember ; Eaa la moto, hot ember.
(Ku)kaa (v. intr.), to dwell, stay, remain, tarry.
Kaba (n. 3), lining on shoulder of " Kanzu."
Kabaila (inv. adj.), noble, free, distinguished.
Kabaili (n. 5), prince, noble.
Kabari (n. 3), wedge.
Kabila (n. 5),tribe, clan.
(Ku)kabaili (v. intr.), to ba oppo- site to, in front of, face.
(Ku)kabilisha (v. c.), to turn to- wards, incline.
Kabisa (adv.), entirely, com- pletely, quite ; (neg.) not at all.
Kabla or Kabula (adv., followed by "ja" tense and advl. prep.), before, ere, previous to.
Kaburi (n. 5), tomb, grave.
Kadhalika (adv.), likewise, simi- larly, soon.
Kadh'awakadaa (adj.), such and such, various.
Kadhi (n. 5), judge, magistrate.
Kar/iri (n. 3), measure, proportion ; Kadiri ya (adv.), in proportion to, according to.
182
SWAHILI GRAMMAK
Kafara (u. 5), sacrifice, offering, alms.
Kafi (n. 5), paddle.
Kafiri (n. 5), unbeliever, infidel.
Kahaba (n. 5), harlot, whore.
Kahawa (n. 3), coffee.
Kaida (n. 3), order, office, ap- pointed method, rite.
-kaidi (var. adj.), obstinate, per- verse.
Kaifa (Kefa) (adv.), so much, more, how much rather, pre- ferably. .
K'ala (n. 3), species of mongoose with bushy tail and no perfume.
Kalala (n. 5), fibrous sheath of cocoa-nnt flower used as fire- wood.
Kalamu (n. 3), pen, style.
Kale (adv.), long ago, formerly ; -a kale (var. adj.), olden, ancient.
-kali (adj.), sharp, fierce, sour, acid, severe, savage, ferocious, cruel.
-kali (verb inf.), still ; (conj.), per- haps, supposing, peradventure, lest.
(Ku) jikalia (v. ref.), to sit doing nothing, settle down
Kalibu (n. 3), furnace, mould, crucible.
(Ku)kama (v. tr.), to milk.
Kama (adv. adj.), as, like, as if, such as, rather than.
Kama vile (adv.), just as, pre- cisely, the same as.
Kama (n. 3), necklet.
K'amange (n. 3), grit, hard sub- stance in food ; applied to a person — incorrigible, intract- able, unruly.
(Ku)kamata (v. tr.), to seize, catch hold of, snatch.
Kamba (n. 3), lobster, prawns.
Kamba (n. 3), cord (of cocoa-nut fibre).
K'ambi (n. 3), camp.
Kambo Baba wa kambo, step- father.
(Ku)kambuka (v. n.), to become
dry.
K'ame (adj.), dried up (said of spot where water has re- ceded).
(Ku)kamia (v. tr.), to reproach, denounce, threaten, to plot, fix on.
Kamili (inv. adj.), perfect, entire, whole, complete.
-kamilifu (var. adj.), perfect, com- plete in all its parts.
(Ku)kamilisha (v. c.), to make perfect or complete.
(Ku)kamua (v. tr.), to wring, squeeze.
Kamwe (adv.) (strongly negative), never, not at all.
Kana (see Kama) (also conj.) ; Kana kwamba, whether.
(Ku)kana (v. tr.), to deny, dis- own.
Kanda (n. 5), long matting bag.
(Ku)kanda (v. tr.), to knead, massage.
Kandarinya (n. 5), kettle.
K'ande (n. 3), store, provision.
(Ku)kanJika (v. tr.), to daub, plaster (a wall).
K'ando (adv.), aside apart; (advl. prep.) Kando ya, by the side of, beside, along side of.
K'andok'ando (adv.), round about, on both sides of, till around.
K'anga (n. 3), guinea-fowl.
Kanga (n. 5), spur of cocoa-nut palm.
(Ku)kanga (v. tr.), to fry, grill.
Kan go (n. 3), frying-pan.
K'ani (n. 3), wrath.
Kaniki (n. 3), dark blue cotton cloth.
Kanisa (n. 5), church.
Kanju (n. 5), cashew apple.
Kanuni (n. 3), rule, canon, law.
Kanuni (adj.), obligatory, com- pulsory, canonical.
Kanwa (u. 5), mouth.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
183
(Ku)kanya (v. tr.), to forbid (c. of to deny), deny to be true, con- vince of error.
(Ku)kanyaga (v. tr.), to tread upon, trample down.
Kanzi (n. 3), store, treasure, treasury.
K'anzu (u. 3), tunic (made of thin white calico).
K'apu (n. 3), large basket.
Karadha (n. 3), loan, credit ; Kutoa karadha, to lend ; Kutwaa karadha, to borrow.
Karaha (u. 3), irritation, annoy- ance.
Karama (n. 3), gift, present.
Karamu (n. 3), feast.
Karani (n. 5), clerk, secretary.
Karate, (n. 3), playing-card.
Karatfasi (u. 3), paper, cardboard, card.
(Ku)karibisha (v. c.), to welcome (lit. cause to come near).
Karibu (n. 3), near relative, kins- man.
Karibu (adv. pi.), near, close, at hand ; (adv. time), soon.
Karibu (advl. prep., followed by " ya " or " na"), near to, close by.
(Ku)karipia (v. tr.), to remon- strate with, reprove, expostu- late, scold, censure, chide.
Kasa (n. 3), turtle.
Kasabu (u. 3), cloth woven of gold thread.
Kasha (n. 5), box (of teak or other fine wood) made by a joiner ; (contr. sanduku = rough box).
(Ku)kashifu (v. tr.), to bring to light or expose evil.
Kasia (n. 5). oar.
Kasi'U (adv.), on purpose.
Kasikazi (n. H), north, N.E. inon- soon, period of N.E. monsoon.
Kasiki (n. t>), pitcher, large stone water-pot.
Kasirani (n. 3), grief, wrath, anger, sorrow.
(Ku)kasiri (v. tr.), to anger,
offend, provoke. (Ku)kasirika (v. n.), to be angry,
be offended.
Kasisi (n. 5), Presbyter, priest. Kasu (adj.), less, minus; Kasu
roboo, three quarters ; Eiali
kasu roboo, dollar less a
quarter, i.e. Ks. 1J. Kasuku (n. 3), parrot. Kaia (n. 5), page of a book. K'ata (n. 3), head-pad. Kata (n. 3), water ladle (made of
three-quarters of a cocoauut). (Ku)k'ata (v. tr.), to cut ; Kuk'ata
neno, to decide; Ndia ya
kuk'ata, a short cut. (Ku)jikafa (v. rcf.), to strain. (Ku)kataa (v. tr.), to refuse ;
(Ku)katawa (v. pass.), to be
refused, to be rejected. Karani (n. 3), linen, flax, hemp. (Ku)kataza (v. c.), to prohibit,
forbid to do a thing; (Ku)ka-
tazwa (v. pass.), to be for- bidden. Kati (adv.), in the m'ddle,
through ; Mt'u wa kati,
mediator. Kati ya (advl. prep.), in between,
in the middle of. Katika (prep.), in, from, out of,
at, ou, about, concerning,
during. (Ku)katika (v. n.), to be cut, be
broken, cut short. Katikati (adv. & advl. prep.), in
the centre or midst. Katili (var. adj.), murderous. Katili (n. 5), murderer. Katu (n. 3), chewing gum. (Ku)kauka (v. n.), to dry, dry iij>,
wither.
Kauli (n. 3), word, utterance. Kaumu (n. 3), hott, army, troop,
prank, people. K'auta (n. 3), grit, -kavu (var. adj.), dry ; Nyama
ndavu, stale meat.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Kawa (u. 3), plaited dish-cover.
(Ku)kawa, (Ku)kawia (v. intr.), to loiter, tarry, delay ; Haikawi kuharibika, it will soon be spoilt.
Kawaida (n. 3), etiquette, good form, custom, fashion, de corum.
(Ku)kawilisha (v. c.), to delay, hinder, cause to be late.
(Ku)kawilishwa (v. pass.), to be delayod.
(Ku)kaza (v. c.), to cause to stay, establish, intensify, tighten, make secure, increase effort.
(Ku)kaza meno, to gnash or grind the teeth.
(Ku)kazana (v. n.), to hold firmly together, be intrinsically strong.
Kazi (n. 3), work, labour, employ- ment, service, business, occupa- tion.
Kefa (seeKaifa) (adv.), how much more, rather.
Kekee (n. 3), gold or silver brace- let, native tool for taring hole.
K'elele (n. 3), noise, sound, tumult, clamour, din.
(Ku)kema (v. tr.), to establish.
K'eme (n. 3), cry, noise.
(Ku)kemea (v. tr.), to rebuke, put down, reprimand.
Kenda (inv. num. adj,), nine.
K'engele (n. 3), bell, gong ; Kupiga k'engele, to ring.
(Ku)jikengeua (v. ref.), to turn deliberately out of the way.
(Ku)kengeuka (v. n.), to turn aside, go astray, swerve.
K'engewa (n. 3), hawk.
(Ku)kereketa (v. tr.), to irritate, prick.
K'ereng'ende (n. 3), partridge,
Kesha (n. 5), watch, vigil.
(Ku)kesha (v. intr.), to watch, keep awake.
Kesho (n. & adv.), to-morrow, on the morrow.
Kesho-kutwa (u. & adv.), day
after to-morrow. (Ku)k'eti (v. intr.). to sit, take
up a sitting posture, live,
dwell. Yuak'eti..., he lives at... Ame-
keti, he has sat down. (Ku)jiketia (v. ref.), to settle
down in a place, sit idle. Khar/aa (n. 3), deceit. Khafifu (iuv. adj.), light, slight,
trifling. Khalifa (halifu) (v. 5), felon,
criminal, malefactor, rebel. Khamsa (num. adj.), five. Khamsini (num. adj.), fifty. Kb.amisfaasb.ara (num. adj.),
fifteen.
Khasa (adv.), especially, in truth. Kharadali (n. 3), mustard. Khafamu (n. 3), bridle, reins. Khafi (had), (n. 3), handwriting,
document.
Khatia (n. 3), guilt, fault, error. Khema (hema) (n. 3), tent. Kheri (heri) (n. 3), blessedness,
happiness ; (adj.) well, better. (Ku)khini (v. tr.), to be false to,
break one's word to. Khisa (n. 3), part, portion, ad- vantage. KhUiari (hiyari) (v. 3), choice,
pleasure. Khofu (hofu) (n. 3), fear, fright,
apprehension. (Ku)khofu (v. tr.), to fear, (Ku)khusika (v. intr.), to be
proper, be fitting, be suit- able. (Ku)khusu (v. tr.), to set aside f >r
a special purpose. Khuiuba (n. 3), sermon, homily,
exhortation.
(It is not thought necessary to
give obvious diminutives of
well-known nouns formed by
the prefix " Ki.")
Ki, a prefix (see Note 3, Study
XVIII.)
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
185
Kia (n. 4), belt, bar, lock ; mem- ber or part (of body). (Ku)kia (v. intr.), to step or pass
over.
Kiama (n. 4), resurrection. Kiambaza (n. 4), inside wall,
partition.
Kiambo (n. 4), seat of a chair. Kianga (n. 4), sunshine (after
rain), fine weather. Kiapo (u. 4), oath. Kiasi (n. 4), measure, price, pro- portion, rate.
Kiatu (n. 4), shoe, boot, sandal. Kiazi (n. 4), sweet potato. Kibaba (n. 4), measure for dry
goods, about one pint. Kibanda (n. 4), little shed or
hut, hovel. Kibanzi (n. 4), splinter ; young
locust. Kibao (n. 4), a slate or small
wooden tablet. Kibarua (n. 4), day-labourer. Kibe (n. 4), hide and seek. Kibiriti (u. 4), sulphur, box of
matches (not a single match). Kibok'o (n. 4), (1) hippopotamus ;
(2) hippo hide ; (3) strokes
with hippo-hide lash. Kibuhuti (n. 4), grief. Kibula (n. 3), north. Kiburi (n. 4), pride, self-esteem,
haughtiness.
Kibuzi (n. 4), kid, young goat. Kibweta (u. 4), small box. Kicho (u. 4), fear. Kic/aka (n. 4), young cocoanut ;
recess or niche in house. Kii/au (n, 4), small boat or vessel
(ink-well). Kidawafi (n. 4) small desk or
box.
Kidemu (n. 4), rag, tatter. Kidevu (n, 4), chin. Kidividi (n. 4), black ornament
for lobe of ear. Kidogo (adj. & adv.), a little, few,
rather.
Xidogo-kidogo (adv.), by degrees, little by little.
Kidole (n. 4), finger, toe.
Kidonda (n. 4), sore, wound.
Kidonge (n. 4), lump, clot, little ball, pill, pillule, tabloid.
Xidude (n. 4), a small thing,, a " what is it."
Kielelezo (n. 4), pattern, example, model.
Kifafa (n. 4), epilepsy.
Kifani (n. 4). sort, kind.
Kifano (u. 4), image, likeness, model.
Kifaranga (n. 4), chicken.
Kifaru (n. 4), rhinoceros.
Kifaume (adv.), in royal style.
Kifiniko (n. 4), lid, cover.
Kifo (n. 4), death.
Kifua (n. 4), chest, chc&t com- plaint, breast, bosom.
Kifufu (n. 6), empty cocoanut shell.
Kifulifuli (adv. man.), in crowds, helter-skelter, pell-mell.
Kifumbu (n. 4), long round grass bag for squeezing grated cocoa- nut.
Kifungo (n. 4), button, fastening, knot, band, bond, prison.
Kifunifuni (adv. man.), flat 0:1 the face, face downwards.
Kifuvu (n. 4), see kifufu.
Kigae (n. 4), potsherd.
Kigano (n. 4), story, tale, story- telling.
Kigari (v. 4), small cart, ap- plied to bicyles and peram- bulators.1
Kigelegele (n. 4), shout of joy.
Kigeugeu (n. 4), chameleon.
Kigoma (n. 4), kettle-drum, small drum.
Kigongo (n. 4), cudgel, stick.
Kiguguta (u. 4), empty Indian- corn cob.
Kigumba (n. 4), arrow-head.
Kiguu (n. 4), lameness (lit. small leg).
186
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Kigut'u (n. 4), lame or maimed
person, Kigwe (n. 4), cord, string, lace,
braid. Kihcrehere (n. 4), regret, remorse,
sorrow, anxiety, penitence. Kiigizo (n. 4), copy, pattern,
model. Eiini (n. 4), centre, heart, inside,
pith, pupil (of eye) ; Kiini cha
ii..yolk of egg. Kiinima/o (n. 4), sorcery. Kijakazi (u. 4), young slave girl. Kijaluba (n. 4), metal snuff-box. Kijana (n. 4), young child, boy,
girl, youth. Kijaraha (n. 4), the wound (in
disease). Kijasi (n. 4), paper ornament for
lobe of ear.
Kijembe (n. 4), pocket knife. Kijibwa (n. 4), young, dog, puppy. Kijiji (n. 4), small village. Kijiko (n. 4), spoon. Kijimo (n. 4), dwarf. Kijisu (n. 4), little knife. Kijiti (n. 4), stick, piece of wood,
small knife.
Kijito (n. 4), spring, source. Kijitu (n. 4), mannikin. Kijoyo (n. 4), half-liking. Kijongo (n. 4), hump-back. Xijukuu (n. 4), grandchild. Kijuto (n. 4), brook, rivulet. JJikao (n. 4), seat, row, group,
company.
Kikapu (n. 4), small basket. Kike (adj.), female, feminine. Kiko (n. 4), tobacco-pipe. Kikoa (n. 4), repast given by turns
in different houses, collection
made for newly-married couple. XikonJoo (n. 4), young lamb. Kikoi (n. 4), loin cloth with
coloured border. Xikombe (n. 4), cup. Kikomo (n. 4), end, termination. Kiko/o (n. 4), whip, scourge, lash,
switch.
Kikozi (n. 4), band of soldiers, regiment.
Kikuku (n. 4), bracelet, stirrup.
Kikuta (n. 4), little wall.
Xikuto (u. 4), monster, jackal, dragon, large hyaena.
Kilabu (n. 3), club.
Kilalo (n. 4), sleeping-place, rest- ing-place.
Kilele (n. 4), point, summit.
Kilelet'a (n. 4), top. apex, pinnacle.
Kilema (n. 4) blemish, defect, deformity.
Kilemba (n. 4), turban, tip.
Kileo (n. 4), intoxicant.
Kilete (n. 4), rowlock.
Kilima (n. 4), hill, mound, knoll.
Kilimi (n. 4), uvula.
Kilimia (n. 4), pleiades.
Kilindi (u. 4), depth, deep, deep water.
Kilinga p'op'o, Dengue fever (Aden ague).
Kilio (n. 4), cry, lamentation, yell, crying, weeping, wailing.
Killa (kulla) (adj.), every, each, all.
Kima (n. 3), black monkey ; (u. 4) price, value.
Kimba (n. 4.), corpse, dead body, carcase.
(Ku)kimbia (v. intr.), to run away, flee, escape, play truant.
(Ku)kimbilia (v. prepl.), to fly to, take refuge in. Pa kukimbilia, place of refuge, shelter.
(Ku)kimbiza (v. c.), to drive away, aid and abet in escaping.
Kimetemete (n. 4), firefly, glow- worm.
Ximia (n. 4), fishing-net.
Kimo (n. 4), size, height, stature-.
Kimungu (n. 4), weevil.
Kimwae (adj.), abundant, plenti- ful.
Kimya (n. & adj.), silence, silent, still, mute, speechless.
Kina (n. 4), depth, deep sea ; metre (in poetry).
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
187
Kina(Bibi), (women)folk. Kina (Bwana), (men) folk. (Ku)kinai (v. intr.), to be surfeited.
be "blase," be satisfied, -kinaifu (var. adj.), abundant,
wealthy.
Kinamasi (n. 4), clay, clay soil. KLnanda (n. 4), generic term for any musical instrument, piano, guitar, etc.
Kinara (n. 4), small tower, candle- stick.
Kinda (n. 5), young (of animals). (Ku)kindana (v. rec.), argue,
strive, contradict. Kinga (n. 4), firebrand, sudden
chance.
(Ka)kinga (v. tr.), to protect, pre- serve, conserve.
Kingalingali (adv.), on the back, prone. Kuanguka kingalingali, to fall backwards. (Ku)kingama (v. tr.), to lie across,
athwart. (Ku)kingamiwa (v. pass.), to be
thwarted, be opposed. K'ingio (n. 3), shield. King'ombe (adv.), in a bovine or
brutish manner.
K'ingoni (n. 3), edge, rim, border. Kingugwa (n. 4), ravenous beast. (Ku)kini or (Ku)kinika (v. intr.),
to be possible or probable. Kinofu (n. 4), chop. Kinono (n. 4), falling, fatted
animal. Kinoo (n. 4), small grindstone,
whetstone.
Kina (n. 4), mortar, mill. Kinubi (adv.), belonging to the Nubians; (n. 4), musical in- strument such as the Nubians use, harp. Kinundu (n. 4), lump, hump oil
back.
Kinweo (n. 4), beverage, drink- able, drink.
Kinyaa (n. 4), filth, pollution. Kinyezi (n. 4), horror.
Kinyongo (n. 4), grudge, offence,
scruple, qualm. Kinyozi (n. 4), harbor. KLnytune (prep.), against, con- trary. Kwenda kinyume, to go backwards.
Kinyunga (n. 4), dough. Kioga (n. 4), mushroom, fungus. Kioja (n. 4), wonder, curiosity
terror.
Xionda (n. 4), wound, sore. Kiongozi (n. 4), leader, guide. Kioo (n. 4) mirror, fish-hook. Kipaku (n. 4), blot, birth-mark. Kipande (n. 4), piece, slice, chip. Kipara (n. 4) bald patch (on the
head), patch of hair. Kipawa (n. 4), gift, present (pre- ferable in plural). Kipele (n. 4), pimple. Kipenu (n. 4) lean-to hut. Kipenzi (n. 4), little darling. Kip'ia (n. 4), pinnacle, point,
battlement, storey. Kipimo (n. 4), measure. Kipindi (n. 4 & adv.), time, season,
some time ago. Kipini (n. 4), handle, nose-jewel,
ear-stud.
Kipofu (n. 4), blind person. Kipupwe (n. 4), cool season, July. Kiraka (n. 4), patch, piece of
cloth.
(Ku)kiri (v. tr.), to confess, own. Kiriba (n. 4), water-skin. (Ku)kiriM (v. tr.), to insult, des- pise, annoy, disgust. (Ku)kihirika (v. n.), to be vexed, be grieved, be provoked, ba irritated.
(Ku)kirimu (v. tr.), to bestow upon, grant, confer a favour on.
Kirisimasi, Christmas. Kirobo<o (n. 4), flea, swift mail- runner.
Kisa (n. 4), tale, legend. Kisaga (n. 4), measure (about two pints).
188
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Kisahani (11. 4), saucer, small plate.
Kisala (n. 4), short prayer, collect.
Kisale (n. 4), remainder, remains, leavings.
Kisasi (n. 4), revenge, vengeance.
Kisauni, Frere Town.
Kisha (adv.), then (when that is finished), afterwards.
Kishaka (n. 4), patch, of jungle or forest, thicket.
Kishindo (n. 4), noise, report, roar, booming-sound, tumult, uproar, panic.
Kishogo (n.4), nape of neck.
Kisigino (n. 4), heel.
Kisiki (n. 4), trunk or stump of tree (fallen). Kisiki cha mvua, rainbow.
Kisima (n. 4), well (of water).
Kisiwa (n. 4), island. Up-coun- try term for Mombasa island.
Kisu (n. 4), knife.
Kisuli (n. 4), giddiness, vertigo.
Kisulisuli (n. 4), whirlwind.
Kiiabu (n. 4), book.
Kitako (n. 4), hinder part, re- mainder. Kitako cha mto, bed of river.
Ki<alu (n. 4), fence.
Ki/ambaa (n. 4), rag, duster, napkin, cloth, towel, bandage.
Kifambi (n. 4), coloured cloth (worn over shoulders).
Kitambo (n. >4), space of time, (adv.), some time ago.
KKana (n. 4), comb.
Kitanda (n. 4), bedstead.
Kitango-pepeta (n. 4), small round cucumber. KKangu (n. 4).
Ki/anu (n. 4), splinter.
Kitanzi (u. 4), loop, noose.
Ki/a/a cha asali (n. 4), honey- comb.
Kite (n. 4), effort, straining, in- tense affection. (Ku)piga kite, to bear down, to strain the inner man, to make an effort accom-
panied by groaning. Of. Gen. 43. 30, " bowels did yearn."
Ki/eko (n. 4), laugh, smile.
KUeku (n. 4), pickaxe.
Ki/embe (n. 4), lisp.
Kitendawili (Kitandawili) (u. 4), riddle, enigma.
Kifepukuzi (n. 4), sprout, shoot.
JLitete (n. 4), gourd, water-bottle.
Kitetemo (cha n£i) (u. 4), earth- quake.
Kiteweo (n. 4), relish, sauce (see Note 2, Study VI.).
Kiti (n. 4), seat, chair ; Kiti kirefu, lounge chair.
Kirtati (n. 4), little blue bird (cordon bleu?).
Kilo (n. 4), gem, jewel, precious stone.
Kitoka (n. 4), hatchet, axe.
Kitoma (n. 4), calabash, gourd, water-bottle.
Kitongoji (n. 4), suburb.
Kitato (n. 4), small or young child, infant, babe.
KUoto (n. 4), alley, narrow pas- sage, winding tortuous path.
Kitovu (n. 4), navel.
Kitu (n. 4), thing, something, substance.
Kitua (cha mti) (n. 4), space oc- cupied or covered by shrub or bush.
Ki/uko (n. 4), fear, fright.
Kiftikuu (n. 4), great grandchild.
Kitumbua (n. 4), kind of crumpet, native bun or cake.
Kitumwa, in low (or slave) style.
Kitundu (u. 4), cage, nest.
Kifungule (n. 4), rabbit.
Kitunguu (u. 4), onion, bulb.
Kituo (u. 4), resting-place, camp- ing-ground.
Kitushi (n. 4), abuse, reproach.
Kitwa (n. 4), head.
Kiu (n. 3), thirst.
Kiumbe (n. 4), creature, created being, mortal.
Kiumbizi (n. 4), soaring bird.
SWAHILI-ENGLI8H VOCABULARY
189
Kiume (adj.), male, masculine. Kiunga (n. 4), plantation. Loca- tive form, Kiungani, has come to stand for grassy surround- ings of plantations. Kiungani (where the " Kiunga "
is), name given to a district in
Z-inzibar, once a suburb called
after a plantation made there. Kiungo (n. 4), joint, something
ailded, as spice, relish, zest. Kiungwana, in gentle style. Kiuno (n. 4), loin, hip, lower part
of back. Kiusouso (adv.), face downwards,
on the face.
Kivirio (n. 4), cry, outcry. Kivuko (n. 4), ferry, crossing. Kivuli (n. 4), shadow, shade. Kivumi (n. 4), noise, report,
fame. KiwancZa (n. 4), plot of ground,
site, enclosure, courtyard. Kiwele (n. 4), udder ; (var. adj.)
sick, old, done for, good lor
nothing. Kiwe/e (n. 4), cripple, lame
person.
Kiwewe (n. 4), amazement, aston- ishment, bewilderment, terror,
shudder. Kiwi (n. 4), evil. Kiwi cha mafo, flinching from
light (of eyes), dazzled sight,
photophobia. Kiwiko-cha-mkono (n. 4), wrist ;
Kiwiko-cha-guu, ankle. Kiwiliwili (n. 4), trunk of body,
body. Kiwingu (u. 4), storm-cloud,
viper ; Kiwingu joshini, squall
seaward. Kiza (n. 4), darkness, dimness ;
Kumefunga kiza, darkness lias
set in.
Kizazi (n. 4), generation. Kizee (n. 4), old woman. Kizibao (n. 4), waistcoat, blouse, bodice, jacket.
Kizibo (n. 4), stopper, plug, hence
a cork.
Kizingiti (n. 4). threshold, door- step.
Kiziwi (n. 4), deaf person. Kizuka(n. 4), fetish, image, idol. Kizunguzungu (n. 4), giddiness,
dizziness. Kizushi (n. 4), upstart, intruder,
innovation. Kizuzi (n. 4), something unreal,
undependable, false, vain. K'oa (n. 3), snail. Ko'be (n. 3), tortoise. Ko«ii (n. 3), tax, rate levied. (Ku)kodolea (ma/o), (v. prep.), to
stare at, fix one's eyes on. Kofi (n. 5), handful (double), flat
of hand (Ln. 6. 29) ; (n. 3), a
clasp (with hands) vide "Piga." Kofia (n. 3), hat, cap, bonnet. K'oga (n. 3), mildew ; (Ku)fanya
k'oga, to become mildewed. K'ogo (n. 3), back of head. (Ku)kohoa (v. intr.), to cough. (Ku)kohoza (v. c.), to bring on a
cough.
Koikoi (n. 3), stork. Koja (n. 3), chain. (Ku)kojoa (v. intr.), to urinate. (Ku)koka (moto) (v. tr.), to stir
or make up (a fire). Koko (n. 5), stone or kernel (of
fruit), (n. 3), thicket, jangle,
swamp.
(Ku)kokoa (v. tr.), to gather, col- lect. (Ku)kokomea (v. tr.), to wedge,
jamb. (Ku)kokota (v. tr.), to drag, draw.
(v. intr.), to trail, drag. (Ku)kokota koo (v.), to have
death-rattle, i.e. to die. Koko/o (n. 3), gravel, pebble. Koma (n. 2), departed spirit. (Ku)koma (v. intr.) to come to an
eud, cease, leave off. (Ku)komba (v.), to scrape or
hollow or scoop out.
190
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
K'omba (n. 3), lemur. Komba-mwiko (n.), cockroach. Kombe (n. 3), bhcll ; (n. 5) flat
dish. Kombo (n. 5), remainder, residue,
posterity, something left. K'ombo (adv.), crooked, bent,
curved. (Ku)komboa (v. tr.), to redeem,
ransom.
Kombora (n. f>), shell, bomb. Kome (n. 3), small caravan
flag.
(Ku)komea (v. tr.), 1o lock, bar. Komeo (n. 5), wooden lock, bolt,
bar. (Ku)komesha (v. c.), to bring to an
end, cause to cease. K'omio (n. 3), throat. (Ku)konda (v. intr.), to become
thin.
Konde (n. 5), fist (straight for- ward). K'onde (n. 3), cultivated land,
field. K'onde (n. 3), kernel or stone of
fruit.
K'ondo (n. 3), battle, quarrel, con- tention, strife.
K'onrfoo (n. 3), sheep ; Mwana- k'ondoo, lamb ; K'on Joo mume, ram. Kongo (n. 5), species of cactus
yielding a strong fibre. K'ongo (n. 3), old cocoanut tree ; K'ongo za Mbuba, symptoms of the yaws.
Kongo! (mwezi), exclamation on seeing the new moon ; (n. 3) arm (distinguished from " Mkono " which is also " hand." (Ku)kongoa (v. tr.), to destroy,
cut oft', pull up by the roots. (Ku)kongomana (v. rec.), to meet together for consultation, con- fer together.
K'ongoni (n. 3), haartibeest. Kongwa (Kongo) (n. 5), yoke.
Kono (n. 3), arm (of sea or lake),
shoot, branch. K'onok'ono (n. 3), snail ; (Zun.),
see K'oa. (Ku)konyeza (v. intr.), to wink,
make a sign. K'onzi (n. 3), fist, handful
(single).
K'oo, throat, glottis. Koo (n. 5), breeding animal — us
laying-hen. (Ku)kopa (v. tr.), to give credit,
cheat, deceive. K'ope (n. 3), eyelid; (Ku)pesa
k'ope, to wink, blink. (Ku)kopesha (v. tr.), to borrow,
lend.
Kopo (Kopwe) (n. 5), cup, goblrt, drinking vessel, pipe (for water).
Korofi (adj.), wicked, bad, base. (Ku)koroga (v. tr.), to stir. Koroma (n. 4), cocoanut not fully
developed. (Ku)koroma (v. intr.), to snore.
groan.
Korosho (n. 3), cashew nuts. Korrathi (n. 3), leek. Kosa (n. 5), mistake, fault, trans- gression. (Ku)kosa (v. tr. & intr.), to miss,
err, fail, mistake, sin. (Ku)kosekana (v. n.), to be absent,
missing.
(Ku)kosesha, (Ku)koseza (v. c.),to make to sin, cause to miss or fall short of. K'osi(kikosi) (n. 3), top of back,
between the shoulders. Kotekote (adv.), on all sides, in
every direction, in every way. Koti (n. 5). coat. Kooti (n. 3), court of justice, law
courts.
Ko/o (n. 3), spice from Arabia; K'o<o (n. 3), rap with knuckles, swivel-hook and line for deep sea. Koto (n. 3), play-hour for slavee.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
191
K'ovu (n. 3), scar, scab.
Kozi (n. 3), falcon (crested).
Ku- is the infinitive prefix ; -ku is the 2nd person sing, objec- tive infix.
(Ku)kua (v. intr.), to grow, de- velop ; "Kulia juu <ini ku moto," grow up tall, it is not on the ground : said to a child.
(Ku)jikua (v. ref.), to be proud, to lx>ast; (Ku)jikuza (v. ref.), to make much of oneself.
(Ku)kubali (v. tr.), to accept, acknowledge, receive; (v. intr.), to agree to, assent, approve.
-kubwa (viir. adj.), big, great, tall, large.
Kubikubi*(adv.), snugly.
Kucha (n. 7, pi.), claws, nails ; (n. i») dawn, dawning, day- break, cast (elliptical for " usiku kucha"), all night long till dawn.
Kufuli (n. 3), padlock.
(Ku)furu (v. intr.). to blaspheme, apostatize, use profane lan- guage.
Kufuu (n. 3), equal, fellow.
Kuhani (n. 3), priest.
Kuko (adv.), there.
Kuku (adv.), here ; Kuku huku (adv.), just here.
K'uku (n. 3), fowl; K'uku mke, hen.
(Ku)kukumiza (v. tr.), to wring out, drain.
(Ku)kuk'uta (v. tr.), to shake off, beat.
(Ku)kukutika (v. n.). to palpitate (heart).
Kola-muwi (n. 3), hush-money.
Kule (adv.), there, yonder, over there.
Kulekule (adv.), just there.
(Ku)kulia (v. tr.), to overpower, affect strongly, gain mastery over, conquer.
Kaliko (lit. " where there are ") (rel. adv.^ than, more than.
Kulla (killa) (distr. adj.), each every.
K'ulungu (n. 3), impallah, ante- lope.
(Zu)kumba(v.tr.), to come against come upon, befall, overtake.
(Ku)kumbatia (v. prepl.), to em- brace, caress.
Kumbi (la mnazi) (n. 3), frond of cocoanut palm ; Kumbi la mnazi, cocoanut fibre.
Kumbifu (n. 5), withered frond of cocoanut palm.
Kumbikumbi (n. 3), white ants in the winged stage.
(Ku)kumbuka (v. tr.), to remem- ber, recollect.
K'umbuu (n. 3), girdle ; K'umbwe (n. 3), morsel of food.
Kumi (num. adj.), ten ; Kumi-na- moja (num. adj.), eleven.
K'umvi (n. 3). chaff, husks.
Kuna, there is, there are (imper- sonal pronominal with verb To have, English To be).
(Ku)kuna (v. tr.), to grate, scratch , scrape.
(Ku)kuncZa (v. tr.), to fold, double ; (Ku)kunrfa uso, to frown, scowl ; (Ku )kun</a maguu, to lie down, rest.
(Ku)kundakunda (v. tr.), to crease, wrinkle.
Kunde (n. 3), bean (reddish-brown — larger than " flwi ").
Kundi (n. 3), flock, herd, drove, swarm.
(Ku)kmWua (v. subt.), to unfold, unroll, undo, open out, sim- plify; Ku kundua maisha, to lengthen life.
(Ku)kunga (v. tr.), to hem.
Kunge (n. 3), mist, haze.
K'unguni (n. 3), bug.
K'unguru (n. 5), check cloth worn by the prisoners : hence the prisoners themselves.
(Ku)kung'uta (v. tr.), to shake out (Mom. Kuk'nta).
192
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
K'unguu (n. 3), raven, antelope
(species of), hart. (Ku)knnguwaa (v. intr.), to
stumble, trip. Kunguwazo (n. 3), cause of
offence, stumbling-block. Kungwi (n. 5), person who in- structs young persons in the
duties of married life. K'uni (n. 3), firewood. Kunradhi, excuse me, forgive me,
do not be angry. (Ku)kunyata (v. intr.), to wear a
deprecating air, have a deplor- ing, down-trodden look. (Ku)jikunyata (v. ref.), to be
bowed down, depressed. (Ku)kunyea (v. n.), to itch, to
irritate. (Ku)kunytia (v. tr.), to scratch,
pinch. Kura (n. 3), lot, share ; (Ku)piga
kura, to cast lots. Kurasa (n. 7), pages (of book), folio. Kuruani (n. 3), Koran. Kusanyiko (n. 5), congregation,
assembly. (Ku)kurubia (v. prepl.), to
approach, draw near to. (Ku)kusa (Ku)k'utislia (v. c.), to
bring upon, cause one to meet
with. (Ku)kusanya (v. tr.), to gather,
collect.
Kushofo (n. 3), the left (hand). Kusi (n. 3), south, south-west
monsoon.
Kusfubani (n. 3), thimble. Kusudi (adv.), on purpose. (Ku)kusufZia (v. intr.), to intend,
propose.
K'uta (n. 3), wall. Knfa (n. 5), large wall. (Ku)kuta (v. tr.), to meet with,
happen to, befal. (Ku)kut'ana (v. rec.), to meet
together. (Ku)kut'anika (v. n.), to gather
together, assemble.
Kuti (n. 5), slip of the frond or
leaf of cocoanut palm tree.
These are cut off the mid-rib
and plaited (see Makuti). K'utu (n. 3), rust. Ku^wa (n. 9), sunset, west, all
day long till sunset, -kuu (var. adj.), chief, main,
great.
-kuukuu (var. adj.), old, worn- out (not applied to persons). Kuume (n. 3), right (hand). Kuwa (conj.), iu that, seeing,
since.
(Ku)kuwaa (v. intr.), to stumble. Kuwili (adj. & adv.), double,
twice over, over and above. (Ku)kuza (v. c.), to exalt, magnify,
make great, promote, cause to
grow.
(Ku)knza (v. tr.), to sell. Kuzimu (n. 3), the cold grave,
Hades. Kwa (prep, intrumental), with,
by, at, at the house of, to, also,
as well as, etc. Ewako- kwakwe (poss. pro.), to
(or at) thy (or his) house, to (or
at) thee (or him). Kwamba (conj.), if. whether,
that. Kwamba si..., if it were not
for... Kwamba hakufanya..., if he had
not done...
K'wang'a (n. 3), hyrax. Kwangu (poss. pro.), to (or at)
my house, to (or at) me. (Ku)kwangua (Ku)kwangura (v.
tr.), to tcrape out. Kwani 1 (intr. adv.), why? of
course !
Kwa nini ? what for ? why ? Kwanza (adv.), firstly, primarily,
before (followed by the "ja"
tense). Kwao (poss. pro.), to (or at) their
house, to (or at) them, equiva- lent to " their home."
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
193
Kwapa (n. 3), arm-pit.
Kware (u. 3), quail, a very large
kind of partridge. (Ku)kwaruza (v. intr.), to be
rough, grating. Kwa sababu gani ? why ? for
what reason ? Kwato (n. 7), hoofs. (Ku)kwatua (v. tr.), to polish, to
rub; (Ku)kwatuka (v. n.), to
shine (by polishing). (Ku)kwea (v. tr.), to climb up,
mount, go (or come) up. K'wenda (conj.), if, supposing
(followed by " ka" tense). (Ku)kwejuka (v. intr.), to fade,
lose colour.
(Ku)kweza (v. c.), to raise, pro- mote, make go up. K'wekwe (n. 3), weeds. K'weleo (n. 3), tongs, pincers. Kweli (n., adj. & adv.), truth,
true, truly, indeed; Mt'u wa
kweli, a true man ; Mt'u kwa
kweli, (he is) in truth a man,
a thorough man; Nimt'u kweli,
he is really a man, no doubt
about him. Kwa kweli (adv.), thoroughly,
indeed and in truth. Kweli kweli (adv.), really, verily,
in earnest. Kwema (adj. cl. 0), a good or
nice (place or condition). Kw'enda (conj.), supposing that,
may be that. Kwenu (poss. pro.), to (or at) your
house, to (or at) you, " your
home."
K'were (k'ware) (n. 3), quail. Kwetu (poss. pro.), to (or at) our
house, to (or at) us, "our
home."
La ! (adv.), no 1 (denial and
refusal). (Ku)la (v. tr.), to eat.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
(Ku)lia (v. prepl.), to eat with ; Mkono wa kulia, the right hand.
(Ku)lika (v. n.), to be eatable, to be worn out (of " viatu, ma- jembe,'' etc.).
(Ku)lisha (v. c.), to feed.
Laa (imp. of kula), to eat.
Laana (n. 3), curse.
(Ku)laani (v. tr.), to curse.
Labeka ! yes ! here I am at your service (answer of a slave when called).
Labuda (adv.), perhaps, possibly.
Ladu (n. 3), native sweetmeat (in form a yellow ball).
(Ku)jilafua (v. ref.), to be foolish, brutish, gluttonous.
Laini (adj. inv.), smooth, soft, delicate, fine.
(Ku)lainika (v. n.), to be smooth.
(Ku)jilainisb.a kwa, to take de- light in.
Laiti! (interj.), oh that! alas!
(Ku)laki (v. tr.), to go to meet (some one).
Laki (n. 3), lac, 100,000.
Lakini (advers. conj.), but, never- theless, still, yet.
(Ku)lala (v. intr.), to lie down, go to bed, recline (not necessary to sleep).
(Ku)lalamika (v. intr.), to bemoan, bewail, lament.
Lami (n. 3), tar, glue.
Lango (n. 5), large door, gate, branch of a family.
Latifu (inv. adj.), meek, tender, kind.
Laukwamba (followed by pros, ind.) (interj.), oh that ! if only !
Laumu (n. 3), blame, reproach.
(Ku)laumu (v. tr.) , to blame, con- demn.
(Ku)laza (v. c.), to lay down, lie flat on the back, put to sleep.
Lazima (adj.), obligatory, neces- sary, essential, indispensable. N
194
SWAHILI GRAMMAE
(Ku)lazimisha (v. c.), to compel,
oblige, constrain, force. (Ku)lazimu (v. tr.), to be binding
upon. (Ku)lea (v. tr.), to bring up, rear,
adopt, nurse, educate. Leba (n. 3), fraud, dishonesty. (Ku)legea (v. intr.), to be loose or
slack, flag, relax effort. (Ku)legeza (v. c.), to let go, give
up, forsake. Leila (n. 3), eve, vigil. (Ku)lekea (v. tr.), to face, be
opposite to, turn towards. (Ku)lekeza (v. «.), to point to (or towards), put opposite to (or against).
(Ku)lemea (v. tr.), to lean upon (or against), set in a direction, press upon, oppress. (Ku)lemewa, (Ku)lemelewa (v. pas.), to be pressed upon, weighed down, oppressed. (Ku)lenga (v. intr.), to aim, take
aim.
Lengelenge (n. 5), blister. Leo (n. & adv.), to-day. Lepe (n. 3), slumber, drowsiness,
doze.
Leso (n. 3), large handkerchief or square of coloured cloth worn by women. (Ku)leta (v. tr.), to bring, fetch,
send, conduct. Lete (irreg. imp. of kuleta). (Ku)levya (v. c.), to make drunk,
rear, bring up. (Ku)lewa (v. intr.), to be drunk,
intoxicated, tipsy. (Ku)lewa (v. pas.), to be brought
up, adopted, educated. (Ku)lewa-lewa (v. red.), to be
giddy, reel, sway, shake. (Xu)lia (v. intr.), to shout, weep,
ring, creak. (Ku)lialia (v. intr.), to whimper,
grizzle, whine.
Libasi (n. 3), garment, clothes. Lijamu (n. 3), bit (harness).
Lilam (n. 3), auction ; Lile (dem. adj., 5th cl. s.), that; Lile kwa lile, same thing over again. (Ku)liliana (v. rcc.), to call to
each other.
Like (n. 3), ferry, crossing-place. (Ku)liza (v. c.), to make cry,
cause to make a noise. (Ku)lima (v. tr.), to cultivate,
hoe, till the soil. (Ku)limbika (v. intr.), to wait or
stay for.
(Ku)limbua (v. sub.), to enjoy result of waiting, e.<j, to eat first-fruits. (Ku)limia (v. prepl.), to hoe for
(or at or with). (Ku)limka (v. n.), to bo \\ isc,
shrewd, intelligent, prudent. Limau (n. 5), lemon. (Ku)linda (v. tr.), to keep, pro- tect, preserve, guard, mount guard over, watch, note. Lindi (n. 5), depth, hole, pit. (Ku)lingana (v. rec.), to bo like each other, resemble, compare ; (v. tr.), to cry unto, call upon. (Ku)linganisha (v. c.), to compare one with 'another, to join to- gether.
Lini? (inter, adv.), when? (Ku)lipa (v. tr.), to pay, pay bark,
pay for, re-pay.
(Ku)jilipiza (v. ref.), to pay one- self back, take revenge. Lisani (n. 3), facirg of Kanzu. Liwali (n. 3), governor (not
applied to Europeans). (Ku)liwata (v. tr.), to tread upon,
trample under foot. (Ku)liza (v. tr.), to sell to. (Ku)liza (v. c.), to make cry, to
cause to weep. Lo! (interj.), there! what ! just
look! (Ku)loga (v. tr.), to bewitch,
enchant.
(Ku)loweka (v. tr.), to put in soak, steep.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
195
Lozi (n. 5), almond.
Lugha (11. 3), language, tongue.
Lulu (n. 3), pearl.
Lumbwi (n. 3), chameleon.
M
M, a sonant letter prefixed to nouns in tho first and second classes.
Ma, plural prefix of nouns in the fifth class.
Maa</ini (n. 3), metal ore.
Maagano (n. 5), covenant, com- pact, agreement.
Maagizo (n. 5), instructions, commandments.
Maaguzi (n. 5), prophecy, inter- pretation, explanation, utter- ance of an oracle.
Maamzi (n. 5), judgment, sen- tence, verdict, justice.
Maana (n. 5), meaning, reason, signification.
Mtu wa maana, important or excellent person.
Maana, kwa maana (conj.), because, for, the reason being, that is why.
Maandiko (n. 5), writing, scrip- tures.
Maanguko (n. 5), fall, falling.
Maarifa (n. 5), knowledge, in- formation, science.
Maarufu (adj. inv.), celebrated, well-known.
Maasi (n. 5), rebellion.
Maawio (mawao) (n. 5), east, sun-rising.
Mabaputizi (n. 5), baptism.
Maburuki (inv. adj.), blessed.
Macnoka (n. 5), weariness.
Madaha (n. 5), wooing manner, ingratiating behaviour.
Madarasa (n. 5), school.
Madanganya (n. 5), deceitful behaviour.
(n. 5), injury, harm.
Madhibahu (n. 3), altar.
Madhihabi (n. 5), sect, following.
Madhubuti (n. 5), confirmation, proof, security.
Madoadoa (n. o), spots (dappled).
Mafua (n. 5), catarrh, cold.
Mafuatano (n. 5), following, con- gregation.
Mafukizo (n. 5), incense (general).
Mafundisho (n. 5), teaching, doc- trine, moral lessons.
Mafungo (n. 5, pi.), limbs ; Kum- sbika mafungo=to collar him.
Mafuta (n. 5), fat, oil, grease.
Mafunuo (n. 5), manifestation.
Magaribi, Magharibi (n. 3), west, sunsetting — hence evening.
Magawanyikano (no sing., u. 5), division, schism.
Magawio (n. 5), distribution.
Mageule, mageuzi (n. 5), change, alteration.
Magogo (n. 5), obstacles.
Magugn (n. 5), tangled under- growth, weeds.
Mahaba (n. 5), love, affection.
Mab.alb.ali (n. 5, pi.), bells on feet.
Mahali (n. 8), place ; Mahali pa (advl. prep.), instead of.
Manama, ointment.
Mahana (n. 3), kind of leprosy.
Mahari (n. 3), dowry paid by bridegroom to father-in-law.
Mahasai (n. 3), eunuch.
Mahali (n. 5), song.
Mabindi (n. 5), Indian corn, maize.
Mahuluko (n. 5), created things.
Mai (pi. of ii) (n. 5), eggs.
Maimbizano (n. 5), chorus, re- frain, i
Maisha (n. 5), life, outward manifestation, of life, lifetime, existence, durability, manner of living.
Maid (n. 3), dead person.
Majaliwa (n. 5), fate, destiny, enabling.
196
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Majani, Mani (n. 5), grass (lit.
leaves), herbs. Majaza (n. 5), gift, present. Maji (11. 5), water, waters; Maji
ya Kimo, deep water. Maji-maji (adj.), watery, liquid,
wet. Maji-mafu, neap tides; Maji male,
ppring tides. Maji mafomu, drinking water,
fresh water. Maji ya barirft, cold water, fresh
water ; Maji ya m'unyu,
brackish water. Maji yajaa, in-coming tide ; Maji
yapwa, out-going tide. Majibizano (n. 5), question and
answer, catechism. Majibu (no sing., n. 5), answer,
reply. Majilisi (u. 3), stono scats outside
house.
Majilisi-shauri, council, palaver. Majira (u. 5), appropriate time,
season.
Majivuli (n. 5, pl.|, shadows. Majivuno (n. 5), ostentation,
pride, boasting. Majonzi (n. 5), grief, distress,
bereavement.
Majuruhu (adj.), wounded. Majuio (n. 5), repentance, pcni-
tenco, regret, remorse. Maka (n. prop.), Mecca. (Ku)maka (v. intr.), to wonder. Makaa ya mawe, coals. Mak'aak'aa (n. 5), soft palate,
roof of mouth.
MakarZara (n. 5), (God's) appoint- ment or ordaining. Makamasi (n. 5), mucous, phlegm. Makamu (adj.), great, important. Makani (n. 3), dwelling-place. Makao (n. 5), abode, dwelling,
lair, den, residence. Makapi (n. 5), chaff. Makasi (n. 5), scissors. Makazi (n. 5), dwelling, stylo of
dwelling.
Makengeza (u. 5), squint.
Makerubu (n. 5), cherubim.
Maki (n. 3), thickness.
Makimbilio (n. 5), refuge.
Makini (n. 5), tranquillity, quiet- ness, steadiness; Kwa makini, with decorum, solemnly.
Makohozi (n. 5), phlegm, cough.
Makombo (n. 5), remnants, re- mains, crumbs.
Makungu (n. 5), brightness of sky in early morning, Aurora, dawn.
Makuruhu (o. 5), annoyances.
Makusanyiko (n. 5), meeting- place, place of assembly.
MakusurZi (n. 5), purpose; (adv.) purposely, on purpose.
Makut'ano (n. 5), multitude, crowd, assembly.
Makuti (n. 5, pi.), cocoa-nut leaves (plaited for roofing).
Makuu (n. 5), great things, pride, self-sufficiency.
Malaika (n. 3), angel ; (n. 5) small hairs on body, plural of laika.
Malazi (n. 5), sleeping-place.
Maleleji (n. 5), periods of calms between N.E. and S.W. mon- soons.
Malham (n. 3), gum, resin.
Mali (n. 3 or 5), riches, property, estate, possession.
Malimbuo (n. 5), first-fruits.
Malimwengu (n. 5), changes and chances of this world.
Malipo (n. 5), reward, payment, desert.
Malisha (n. 5), pastures, grazing ground.
(Ku)maliza (v. tr.), to complete, finish.
Malkia (n. 3), queen.
Malubani (n. 5), oil.
Mama (n. 3), mother; Mamae mt'u, the mother.
Mamavyaa, mavyaa, mother-in- law, on the woman's side.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
197
Mamba (n. 3), crocodile, scales of fish, etc.
Mambo (n. 3) (sing, jambo), matters, affairs, things, cir- cumstances.
Mamlaka (u. 3), authority, power, rule, dominion.
liana (n. 3), manna.
Manani (n. prop.), the Beneficent Ohihammedan name for God).
Man<Zano (n. 3), turmeric ; Rangi ya, yellow.
Man<?ili (n. 3), handkerchief, scarf.
Manemane (n. 3), myrrh.
Manga (n. 3), Arabia.
Mangazimbwe (n. 3), phantom, mirage.
Mango (n. 3), round stone, pebble.
Man! (vide majani).
Manufaa (n. 5), profit, advantage.
Manuk'ato (n. 5), perfume, scent.
Manyezi (n. 5), horror, disgust, abhorrence.
Manyonyota (n. 5), gentle rain, light showers, drizzle.
Manyoya (n. 5), feathers, down, fur, wool, hair.
Manyunyu (n. 5), showers.
Maombezano (n. 5), intercessory prayer, litany.
Maombi (n. 5), prayer.
Maonano (n. 5), meeting together.
Maondo (n. 5), temptation.
Maongeo (n. 5, pi.), increase, pro- duce, addition.
Maonye (n. 5), warning.
Maovu (n. 5), evil.
Mapaja (n. 5), lap.
Mapambauko (n. 5), dawn.
Mapambo (n. 5), adornment, or- naments, decoration.
Mapatanisho (n. 5), reconciliation, atonement.
Mapatano (n. 5), agreement, com- pact.
Mapatilizo (n. 5), vengeance, re- tribution.
Mapema (adv.), early, in good
time ; Asubuhi na mapema,
early in the morning. MapencZano (n. 5), mutual love. Mapenri (n. 5), will, pleasure,
desire, love.
Mapesa (n. 5), small change. Mapigano (n. 5), fighting, battle,
combat, fight.
Mapindi (n. 5), windings, sinuosi- ties. Maponyea (n. 5, pi.), make-shifts,
substitutes for food in famine
time. Mara (n. 3), time, occasion ;
(adv.) immediately. Mara kwa mara (adv.), from time
to time, time after time, now
and again. Mara moja (adv.), once, at once,
just once.
Mara mbili (adv.), twice. Mara t'atu (adv.), three times,
thrice.
Mara nne (adv.), four times. Mara nyingi (adv.), many times,
often.
Mara<//d (n. 3), disease, sicknesp. Maradufu (n. 3), thick twill calico. Marahaba ! (interj). Thank you !
it is well ! Marasha-rasha (n. 5, pi.), fine
rain, drizzling shower. Marashi (n. 5), ecent, perfume. Marehemu (adj.), the late . . .,
deceased. Marejeo (n. 5), return, coming
back.
Maridadi (adj.), finely dressed. MarkZAawa (n. 5), satisfaction,
gratification, compensation,
abundance.
Marijani (u. 3), red coral. Marikabu (n. 3), ship, vessel. Marikano (n. 3), coarse un- bleached calico. (Ku)marisi (v. tr.), to investigate,
search, examine closely. Marisau (n. 5), email shot.
198
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Marufuku (n. 5), prohibition, for- bidden things; Kupiga marti- fuku, to prohibit.
Masazo (n. 5), leavings, remnants, remains.
Mashairi (n. 5), poetry, verses, poem.
Mashaka (n. 5), trouble, misfor- tune, difficulty.
Mashangirio (n. 5), rejoicing, festivities.
Mashapa (n. 5, pi.), floats.
Mashariki (n. 3), east, sun-rising.
Masha Allah! (interj.), what God willeth !
Mashindano (n. 5), conflict, coin- petition, race, contention, de- bate, strife.
Mashifaka (n. 5), accusation.
Mashua (n. 3), boat.
Mashuke (n. 5), ears of corn.
Mashupatu (n. 5), flat broad strips of plaited grass.
Mashurubu (n. 5), whiskers, moustache.
Mashufamu (n. 5), reproach, cen- sure.
Masia, kwenda masia, to walk about with the mind pre- occupied, not observing one's surroundings, abstractedly.
Masika (n. 5), great rains.
Masikani (n. 3 or 5), dwelling, abode.
Masikini (n. 3), poor person, pauper, beggar.
Masiku (u. 5, pi. of usiku), nights (reckoned individually).
Masizi (mashizi) (n. 5), soot, smuts, blacks.
Maskati (n. prop.), muscat.
Maso (irreg. pi. of uso) (n. 5), edges (of knife, etc.).
Masuluhisho (u. 5), atonement, reconciliation.
Mata (n. 5) (sing, uta), bows.
Mafaajabu (n. 5), wonders.
Ma<aka<a (n. 5), stubble, wood- shavings.
Mateko (n. 5), the seat, buttocks.
Ma<akwa (n. 5), request, petition, desire ; Matelizo (u. 5), plaster.
Matembavu (n. 5), charm worn crosswise over shoulders ami side ; (adv. ph.) at the side.
Mafamko (n. 5), pronunciation.
Mafamvua (n. 5), fringe, border of garment.
Matandiko (n. 5), rugs, blankets, bedding.
Matandu (n. 5), spider's web.
Matanga (n. 5), sails, mourning, funeral rites.
Mafango (u. 5), slanders.
Matata (n. 5), tangle, complica- tion; Yuna matata, he id diffi- cult to deal with.
Ma/aza (n. 5), rice gruel.
TS.ata.yo (n. 5), slanders, re- proaches, defamation.
Mate(n. 5), saliva.
Mateka (n. 5), booty, spoil, cap- tives.
Matembezi (n. 5). walking, walk.
Mateso (n. 5), afflictions, distress.
Matilaba (n. 5), desire, ambition, pursuit, wish, quest.
Matilai (n. 3), east wind, east.
Ma<in*Zio (u. 5), altar (for sacri- fice).
Jf&tindo (n. 5), slaughter-house.
Ma(i<i (n. 5), breasts, teats.
Mato (pi. of jito), use;l with Kuwa for " To be awake."
Mafokeo (n. 5), cast, sun-rising.
Matoleo (n. 5), offering, oblation.
Matukano (n. 5), insults, re- proaches, abuse.
Mafukio (n. 5), hatred.
Matakizo (u. 5), provocation, offence.
Matule (n. 5), confusion, shame.
Matumbo (n. 5), entrails, bowels, intestines.
Matumizi (. 5), use, service.
Mafungu (n. 5), bitterness.
Matushi (n. 5), bad language, insults.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
199
Mai'wio, mafweo (n. 5), west, sun- setting.
Mauguzi (n. 5), sick-nursing.
Mauli<?i (n. 5), birth.
Maume na make, masculine and feminine matters.
Maumivu (n. 5), pain, suffering, aches, sorrows.
Maungo (n. 5), the back, back- bone, spinal column. Kupa maungo, to turn one's back on.
Maungwana (n. 5), gentle man- ners.
Mausio (n. 5), commandments, behests, commands.
Mausufu (adj.), well-known.
Mauti (n. 5), death.
Mava (n. 3), burial place, grave- yard.
Mavao (n. 5), dress, garments, habiliments.
Mavazi (n. 5), style of dress, manner of dress.
May! (n. 5), dung.
Mavunda-vyombo (n. 5), breaker, one who smashes crockery.
Mavungu (n. 5), prey.
Mavuno (n. 5), harvest, reap- ing.
Mavyaa (n. 3), mother-in-law.
Mawaa (n. 5, pi.), blemishes, faults.
Mawao (n. 5), east (v. maawio).
Mawato (n. 5), liberty, release.
Mawazo (n. 5), thoughts, opinions, ideas.
Mawe (pi. of jiwe) ; Mawe ya mizani, weights (of scales).
Maweko (n. 5), foundations.
Mawele (n. 5), small edible grain or cereal.
Mawindo (n. 5), game, hunted animals.
Mawingu (n. 5), clouds ; yame- tanda, the sky is overcast (with clouds) ; yametefuka, yame- tanduka = (the clouds) have cleared awav.
Mazao (n. 5) (sing, ozao), fruits,
progeny.
Maziga (n.), censer. Maziko (n. 5), burial. Maziwa (n. 5), milk, breasts,
lakes. Mazoea (n. 5), custom, habit;
(inv. adj.), tame, friendly,
gentle. Mazungnmzo (n. 5), conversation,
amusement. Mbali (adv.), far, far away, far
off, distant, distinct, different. Mbalimbali, unlike, dissimilar,
separate, distinct. Mbambakofi (n. 2), African tree
bearing remarkable seed-pods. Mbambo (sing, ubambo) (n. 7),
wing-bones. Mbao (n. 7), boards, benches,
planks.
Mbao mweusi, black board. Mbari (n. 3), kinsman, relative. Mbaruwai (n. 3), swallow. Mbavu (n. 7) (sing, ubavu), ribs,
side. Mbawa (n. 7) (sing, ubawa), wing,
feathers. Mbawaa (n. 3), gazelle, hind,
antelope.
Mbawazi (n. 3), pity, compassion. Mbazi (n. 3), mercy, compassion ;
(2) bean-plant. Mbega (n. 3), Colobus monkey,
dandy. Mbele (adv.), in front, before,
primarily, previously, forward. Mbele ya (adv. prep.), in front of,
prior to.
Mbeleni, in the future, on before. Mbeyu, mbeu (n. 3), seed, grain. Mbigili (n. 2), thistle. Mbi (mbwi), enclitic denoting
badness.
Mbili (num. adj.), two. Mbili kasu roboo, If (lit. two less
a quarter). Mbili-tatu, two or three, a few,
some.
200
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Mbili kimo. dwarf, pigmy. Mbiliwili (n. 2), thistle. Mbingu (n. 7) (sing, uwingu),
heaven, sky, heavens ; Zina
mawingu, it is cloudy ; Zime-
takata, it has cleared. Mbinja (n. 7), whistle, whistling ;
Kupiga mbinja, to whistle. Mbio (n. 3), running, race, speed ;
Kupiga mbio, to run. Mbiombio (adv.), very fast, at
high speed. MbisM (n. 1), jester, caviller,
scornful person.
Mbiyu, mbiu (n. 3), buffalo-horn, announcement made by beat- ing buffalo-horn, hence pro- clamation.
Kupiga mbiu, to issue decree,
to make proclamation. Mbizi (n. 2), dive ; Kwenda mbizi,
to dive. Mboga (n. 3), vegetable (see note
2, Study VI.). Mbona? (inter, adv.), why? for
what reason ? how is it ? Mboni (n. 3), apple (or pupil) of
the eye, something greatly
prized and cared for. Mbono (u. 2), castor oil plant. Mbu (n. 3), mosquito, gnat. Mbuba (j>uba) (n. 3), a skin
disease, the yaws. Mbuji (n. 1), clever person,
skilled, skilful, able, capable,
adept. Mbuni (n. 1), inventor, founder,
author, composer. Mbuni (n. 3), ostrich. M'buni (n. 2), coffee-plant. Mburuk'enge (n. 3), monitor,
lizard.
Mbuyu (n. 2), baobab tree. Mbuzi(n. 3), goat; Mwana-mbuzi,
kid. Mbuzi (n. 3), iron utensil for
scraping cocoa-nuts. M'bwa (M'mbwa) (n. 3), dog. Mbwa (equals ni wa, contracted
poss. pronoun), whose? of
whom?
Mbwako (equals ni wako). Mbwao (equals ni wao) ; etc. Mbweha (n. 3), fox, jackal. Mbwiji (mbwiaji) (n. 1), beast of
prey (from gwia). Mcha Mngu (n. 1), one who fears
God, godly man. Mchaji (n. 1), one who fears. Mchiro (n. 3), mongoose. Mchoo (n. 3), lesser rains about
July. Mchungwa (n. 2), orange tree
(see note 5, Study XIV.). Mchuruzi (n. 1), small tradesman,
middleman.
Mdalasini (n. 3), cinnamon. BLZanganyifu (n. 1), deceiver,
imposter.
Mdauwa, mcZawa (n. 1), adver- sary, legal opponent, litigant,
defendant. Mdeni (n. 1), debtor. Mdhabidhabina (n. 1), busybody. Mdhambi (n. 1), sinner. Mdhamini, sponsor, surety. Mdimu (n. 2), lemon-tree. Mdomo (n. 2), lip, beak, mouth,
bill. Mdudu (n. 1), insect, worm,
vermin.
Mdumu (n. 2), jug, mug. Mduwara (inv. adj.), round, cir- cular, spherical. (Ku)mea (v. intr.), to grow,
spring up, thrive (only used of
vegetable kingdom). (Ku)mega (v. tr.), to make neat
handful of food for eating. Meko (n. 5) (sing, jiko), kitchen,
fire-place, stove. (Ku)meleza (v. c.), to cause to
grow or spring up. Meli (n. 3), mail steamer. (Ku)memetnka (v. intr.), to glitter,
sparkle, shine. (Ku)mena (v. tr.), to slight, to
despise.
SWAH1LI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
201
Yenenzi (n. 5), conduct, behaviour, walk.
(Zu)menya (v. tr.), to break or divide (of food).
(Ku)meta (v. intr.), to shine, glisten.
Meza (n. 3), table.
(Ku)meza (v. c.), to cause to grow or spring up.
Mfano (n. 2), pattern, likeness, image, figure, similitude, simile.
Mfano wa, like, similar to, such as, according to.
Mfaransa (n. 1), Frenchman.
Mfariji (n. 1), comforter.
Mfaume(mfalme) (n. 1), king, chief, emperor.
Mfenesi (n. 2), jack-fruit tree.
Mfilisi (n. 1), auctioneer.
Mflnanzi (n. 1), potter.
Mfitini (n. 1), traitor.
Mforosaji (n. 2), sycamine tree.
Mfu (n. 1), dead person.
Mfuasi (n. 1), follower, disciple, adherent.
Mfugo (n. 2), flock, any beast of pasture.
Mfuko (n. 2), bag, pocket.
Mfulizo (n. 2), haste.
Mfundo (n. 2), grudge, bad feel- ing ; kiKukulia mfundo = to owe a grudge.
Mfungo (n. 2), fasting-gift sent during Samadhan.
Mfunguo (u. 2), month (see Page of Metals).
Mfupa (u. 2), bone.
Mfuzi (n. 1), forger of silver.
Mfyozi (n. 1), abusive person.
Mganda (n. 2), sheaf.
Mganga (n. 1), witch-doctor, medicine-man.
Mgemi (n. 1), man who taps cocoa- nut trees for palm- wine.
Mgeni (n. 1), stranger, visitor, guest, foreigner.
Mgomba (n. 1), banana or plan- tain tree.
Mgomvi (n. 1), quarrelsome per- son.
Mgongo (n. 2), back.
Mgonjwa (n. 1), sick person.
Mg'umba (n. 2), iron hook at- tached to arrow-head.
Mgwisho (n. 2), long tail of black hair used by witch-doctors.
Mhalifu (n. 1), transgressor, male- factor, rebel.
Mharibifu (n. 1), destroyer.
Mhimili (n. 2), beam, girder.
Mhirabu (n. 2), pulpit.
Mhiiaji (n. 1), needy person.
Mhubiri (n. 1), preacher.
Mia (n. & adj.), hundred; Mia mbili, two hundred.
Miateni, mifeni, two hundred.
Miayu (n. 3), yawn ; Kwenda miayu, to yawn.
Mic/irara (adv.), ever, always.
Mie(miye) (proii.), familiar form of tnimi-
Mijuto (n. G, pi.), swollen rivers.
Mikaha (n. 3), marriage.
Mikojo (n. 2, pi.), urine.
Mila (takes cl. 2 concords in the plural, n. 3), sect.
MUele (n. & adv.), eternity, for ever, eternally, through eter- nity.
(Ku)miliki (v. tr.), to govern, reign, rule, possess, to afford.
Mil'ki (n. 3), dominion, power, territory governed, possession.
Mimba (n. 3), pregnancy, concep- tion ; (Xu)fungua mimba, to give birth.
Mimbari (n. 3), pulpit, reading- desk.
Mimi (sep. pron.), I, me.
(Ku)mimina (v. tr.), to pour, pour out.
Mingurumo'(n. 2, pi.), thundering, alarms, terrors.
Miongo (n. 2), decades.
Miraji (n. 3) feast-day, holiday.
Mishabaka (misharabaka) (n. 2, pi.), carving.
202
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Misheni (n. 3), mission, mission- station.
Misiri (prop, n.), Egypt.
Mitanga (n. 2, pi.), light earth.
Mithali (n. 3), proverb, hypo- thesis, parable, allegory ; Mi- thali na, supposing.
Mitilizi (n. 2, pi.), eaves of roof, ground under the eaves.
Miuja (n. 2), perils, dangers, billows, breakers.
Miujiza (n. 2, pi. of Muujiza).
Miwa (see Muwa).
Miwani (n. 2), spectacles, eye- glasses.
Miyaa (n. 2, pi.), palm-leaf slips, used in plaiting mats, etc. (see Muwaa).
(Ku)miza (v. tr.), to swallow.
Mizani (n. 3), balance, scales.
Mizi (n. 2), small roots, suckers, tendrils.
Mja (n. 1), slave; Mjakazi (n. 1), female slave.
Mjane (n. 1), widow.
Mjanja (n. 1), sharper, cheat, swindler.
Mjeledi (n. 2), whip, lash.
Mjenzi (n. 1), builder.
Mji (n. 2), town, village, hamlet.
Mjinga (n. 1), fool, simpleton, stupid, duffer, green horn.
Mjisi kafiri (n. 2), small house lizard.
Mjoli (n. 1), fellow-slave.
MjombV (n. 1), maternal uncle, a Swahili.
Mjukuu (n. 1), grand child.
Mjumbe (n. 1), messenger.
Mjuvi (n. 1), one who knows (also Mjua).
Mkaa (n. 1), dweller.
Mkakamava (adj.), sharp, clever.
Mkakasi (n. 2), ornamental box (round).
Mkalimani (n. 1), interpreter.
Mkanju (n. 2), cashew-nut, tree.
Mkaragazo (n. 2), downpour, " burst " of monsoon.
Mkata (n. 1), poor man.
Mkatale (n. 2), stocks (for feet).
Mkate (n. 2), loaf of bread, bread ; Mkate m<anra, cake.
Mkazi (n. 1), dweller.
Mke (n. 1). woman, wife, female.
Mkebe (n. 2), tin, cannister.
Mkeka (n. 2), mat.
Mkia (n. 2), tail.
Mkimbizi (n. 1), fugitive.
MMndani (n. 1), opponent, enemy.
Mkindu (n. 2), species of palm- tree, leaves of which yield line fibre for making mats.
(Ku)mkini (v. intr.), to be prob- able (see Yamkini).
Mkiwa (n. 1), poor man.
Mkizi (n. 2), a fish.
Mkoba (u. 2), pocket, wallet.
Mkoko (n. 2), mangrove tree.
Mkoma (n. 1), leper ; (n. 2), branched or hyphene palm-tree.
Mkoma manga (n. 2), pome- granate-tree.
Mkombozi (n. 1), redeemer.
Mk'ondo (n. 1), enemy, adversary.
Mkondo (n. 2), current, stream, flood, torrent, way, trail.
Mkongojo (u. 2), staff.
Mkono (n. 2), hand, arm, hand (measure), cubit.
Mkorofi (n. 1), rogue, wicked person.
Muubwa (n. 1), chief, elder.
Mkufu (n. 2), chain.
Mkufunzi (n. 1), teacher.
Mkuki (n. 2), spear.
Mkulima (n. 1), agriculturist, husbandman, farmer.
Mkumbuu (n. 2), girdle, belt.
Mkunazi (n. 2), tropical tree with small green or yellow fruit.
Mkunga (n. 1), midwife.
Mkungu (n. 2), sweet almond tree.
Mkungu (n. 2), bunch.
Mkunguru (n. 2), climatic attack.
Mkut'ano (u. 2), crowd, meeting, assemblage, company, congre- gation.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
203
Mkuu (n. 1), chief, great man.
Mkwaju (n. 2), tamarind tree.
Mkwasi (n. 1), rich man, prince.
Mkwavi (n. 1), a niasai.
Mkwe (n. 1), parcnt-in-law, son- in-law, daughter-in-law.
Mia (also mlaji) (n. 1), cater.
Mlafi (n. 1), glutton.
Mlango (n. 2), door, gate, entrance.
Mlango (n. 2), chater, lineage, tribe, branch of family.
Mle (adv.), in there, inside it.
Mlegevu (n. 1), desultory, pleg- matic person, 'one who is pur- poseless, lax, slack, lazy.
Mlekevu (n. 1), upright, straight- forward person.
Mlele (n. 2), long tail feathers of a bird.
Mlevi (n. 1), drunkard.
Mleza (n. 2), buoy, harbour mark.
Mlezi (n. 1), nurse, a bringer-up of children.
Mlikuu (n. 1), great-great grand- child.
Mlima (n. 2), mountain.
Mlimbolimbo (u. 2), thorn bush (used for hedge).
Mlimau (n. 2), lemon tree.
Mlimwengu (n. 1), inhabitant of •world.
Mlingoti (n. 2), mast, flagstaff.
Mlinzi (n. 1), guard, keeper, guardian, watchman.
Mlio (n. 2), cry, sound, noise (of bird, beast, etc.).
Mlishi (n. 1), shepherd, feeder, provider.
Mlizamo (n. 2), gutter, shoot, cataract, trench, ditch, water- spout (?).
Mlizi (n. 1), professional mourner.
Mmande (n. 3), land-breeze that blows in the early morning.
Mmasihia (n. 1), Christian.
Mmea (u. 2), crop, growth.
M'miji (n. 1), citizen-member of a federation.
Mnaanaa (n. 2), mint.
Mnar/a (n. 2), auction.
Mnadi (n. 1), auctioneer.
Mnanasi (n. 2), pine-apple plant.
Mnandi (n. 2), cormorant.
Mnara (n. 2), tower, minaret.
Mnasara (n. 1), Christian.
Mnazi (n. 2), cocoa-nut palm tree ; Mnazi-mkinda (n. 2), young cocoa-nut palm tree.
Mnenea (n. 1), accuser, one who speaks against.
Mneni (n. 1), orator, speaker.
Mng'aro (n. 2), brightness.
Mngazija (prop, n.), Comoro islander.
Mngereza (n. 1, pi. Wengereza), Englishman.
Mngqjezi (n. 1), minister, servant.
Mngu (n. 1), God (pi. waungu).
Mngumi (n. 2), whale.
Mno (adv.), exceedingly, very much, greatly.
Mnyamavu (n. 1), silent laciturn person.
Mnyanga'nyi (n. 1), robber.
Mnyap'ara (n. 1), headman of caravan.
Mnyau (n. 2), old cat.
Mnyoo (n. 2), worm, prison- chain.
Mnyororo (n. 2), chain, fetter.
Mofa (n. 3), small native cake or bun, originally the oven in which they were baked.
Moja (num. adj.), one, single.
Mola, God.
Molina, our Lord (Mohammedan name for God).
Membee (n. prop.), Bombay.
Mori (n. 3), grease, tallow, fat.
M'osha (n. 1), corpse-washer.
Moshi (n. 2), smoke (mioshi, pi.) ; (Ku)fuka moshi (v. intr.), to smoke (of chimney, etc.).
Mosi (num. adj.), one (in count- ing).
Moto (n. 2, pi. myoto), fire, heat ; Kazi moto, quick work.
Mou, old form of maguu ; Nashika
204
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
mou, slave's expression of hum- ble submission.
M'oyo (n. 2, pi. myoyo, also nyoyo) , heart— organ of life, inind, courage, pluck ; (Ku)shiriki moyo, to give way to one's de- sires, to be proud, overbearing, self-satisfied.
Mpagazi (n. 1), porter, carrier, bearer.
Mpaji (n. 1), giver, generous person.
Mpak'a (prep.), until, as far as, up to.
Mpaka (n. 2), boundary, limit, border; (Ku)rupa mpaka, to exceed the limit.
Mpamba (n. 2), cotton plant.
Mpambe (n. 1), serving maid.
Mpango (n. 2), host, rank, troop.
Mpanzi (n. 1), sower, planter.
Mpapayu (n. 2), papaw tree.
Mpatanishi (n. 1), peacemaker, mediator.
Mpelekwa (n. 1), missionary, sent-one.
Mpelelezi (n. 1), spy.
Mpentfezi (n. 1), flatterer, ingrati- ating person.
Mpenzi (n. 1), beloved, loved one, favourite, dear one.
Mpera (n. 2) guava trees.
Mpilipili (n. 2), red pepper tree.
Mpingamizi (n. 1), adversary, opponent.
Mpingu (n. 2), ebony tree.
Mpini (n. 2), handle.
Mpira (n. 2), rubber tree.
Mpira (n. 2), caoutchouc, india- rubber, hence india-rubber ball of any kind.
Mpishi (n. 1), cook.
Mpita-ndia (n. 1), passer-by.
Mponyi (n. 1), deliverer.
Mpopoo (n. 2), areca-nut palm.
Mpotevu (n. 1), prodigal, delin- quent.
Mpotofu (n. 1), wicked, perverse,
capricious person, one who per- verts others.
Mpumbavu (n. 1), fool.
Mpungufu (n. 1), one who is de- ficient.
Mpunga (n. 2), rice (in the husk as it grows).
Mpuuzi (n. 1), silly, empty- headed person .
Mp'wa (n. 3), shore (from the sea point of view).
(M)pya (var. adj.), new.
Mrama (n. 2), swaying rolling motion as of a ship at sea.
MritM (n. 1), heir, inheritor.
Mrongo (n. 1), liar.
Mrututu (n.i2), green vitriol, sul- phate of copper.
Msaada (n. 2), help, succour, assistance ; (Ku)mtukulia (mt'u) msaada, to help, succour, sup- port (a person).
Msafara (11. 2), caravan.
Msafiri (n. 1), traveller, pilgrim.
Msahafu (n. 2), manuscript copy of Koran.
Msahala (n. 2), aperient, pur- gative.
MsaWia (n. 1), helper, assistant, succourer.
Msaji (n. 2), teak tree, teak wood.
Msaalkheri! good evening ! good night !
Msala (n. 2), prayer-mat (oval).
Msalaba (n. 2), cross.
Msamaha (n. 2), forgiveness, pardon, indulgence, respite, absolution.
Msamba (n. 2)> leg(?); (Ku)piga msamba, to kick out the leg when bathing.
Msana (n. 2), piece of skilled handiwork.
Msangao (n. 2), astonishment.
Msemi (n. 1), speaker, spokes- man.
Mshahara (n. 2), wages, salary.
Mshairi (n. 1), poet.
Mshare (mshale) (n. 2), arrow.
8WAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
205
Mshari (n. 1), wicked person,
evil one.
Mshenzi (n. 1), heathen, savage, country bumpkin, uncivilized person.
Mshinde (n. 1), vanquished per- son.
Mshindi (n. 1), conqueror, victor.
Mshindo (n. 2), thud, detonation, report, dull heavy sound.
Mshinsi (n. 1), visitor per diem (from Shinda).
Mshipa (n. 2), vein, nerve, muscle, blood vessel.
Msbipi (n. 2), belt, girdle, band, fishing-line.
Mshirika (n. 1), partner, com- municant, associate.
Mshi<aki (n. 1), accuser.
Mshoni (n. 1), tailor, sewer.
Mshono (n. 2), seam, join.
Mshumaa (n. 2), candle.
Mshupavu (n. 1), fool, obstinate fellow, rebellious person.
Mshwaki (n. 2), tootli-brush.
Msi-, prefix, equivalent to Eng. suffix " less " ; Msiwana, child- less ; Msikiteko, joyless.
Msiba (n. 2), calamity, affliction, visitation of God.
Msichana (n. 1), damsel, maiden, virgin.
Msikiti (n. 2), mosque, church, chapel, school.
Msikizi (n. 1), hearer, adherent, one of the faithful.
Msikujua (n. 1), ignoramus.
Msilimu (n. 1), Mohammedan.
Msimato (n. 1), sightless person.
Msimamizi (n. 1), overseer, super- visor.
Msimbo (n. 2), by-word, proverb, reproach.
MsinaMari (n. 1), witless per- son.
Msingi (n. 2), foundation.
Msira (n. 2), miser.
Msifadi (n. 1), expert, adept, skilled worker.
Msomi (n. 1), reader, lay-reader,
catechist.
Msonge (n . 2), crowd, throng. Msonobari (n. 2), pine-tree, fir- tree, deal.
Msonsi (n. 1), hair-dresser. Msiaarabu (adj.), precocious,
sharp.
Ms/ari (u. 2), line. Msubukuo (u. 2), blow on cheek,
grazing of the cheek. Msufi (n. 2), a cotton tree (ctr.
Mpamba). Msuko (n. 2), weaving, plaiting,
shaking.
Msukosuko (n. 2), tempest, storm. Msuluhisbi (n. 1), peacemaker,
reconciler.
Msuluhivu (adj.), clever, capable. Msumari (n. 2), nail, tintack. Mtsumeno (n. 2), saw. Mswahili, Msawahili (n. prop.),
a Swahili. Mtaa (n. 2), quarter, district (of
a town).
Mfaimbo (n. 2), crow-bar. Mtaji (n. 2), deal (in playing) ;
Mtaji wa ngoma (n. 1), musical
composer. Mtakatifu (n. 1), saint, holy
person.
Mfali (n. 2), silver anklet. Mtama (n. 2), millet, Kaffir- corn.
Mta-mate (n. 1), spitter. Mtamba (n. 2), heifer. Mtambo (n. 2), machine, trap,
spring-engine. BOana (n. 2), daytime, daylight,
midday, day ; Mlana kutwa,
all day long till sunset. Mtanda (n. 2), strip of dried meat
(cfr. Boer's beltong). M/anga (n. 2), sand, soil, earth,
mould. Mtanganyiko (n. 2), gathering or
meeting together, confluence. Mtangazia (n. 1), announcer,
advertiser.
206
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Mtangulizi (n. 1), predecessor, leader, one in front.
M<auwaa (n. 1), pious, godly person.
MtewanJa (n. 2), wooden sandal.
Miawi, witch, wizard, sorcerer, magician.
M<e (n. 2), sprout, shoot, slip, seedling.
Mtego (n. 2), trap.
Miele (n. 2), husked rice (un- boiled).
Mtembezi (n. 1), gadder-about.
Mtendaji (n. 1), one who acts, man of action.
Mtenda-kazi (n. 1), worker ; Mtenda-upuuzi, evil-doer.
Mtende (n. 2), date tree.
Mtengenezea (n. 1), preparcr, provider.
Mtenzi (n. 1), doer, maker, author, poet.
Mtepa (n. 2), boat with square sails.
Mterehemezi, mteremezi (n. 1), compassionate, merciful person, one who is friendly.
Mtesi (n. 1), adversary, perse- cutor.
Mtetea (n. 1), champion; Mtetea (n. 2), laying-hen.
Mtetemo(wa nti), n. 2, earth- quake.
Mteule (n. 1), chosen one, elect.
Mteusi (n. 1), feast-maker.
Mti (n. 2), tree, wood, timber, pole ; a skin disease peculiar to negro races ; stage of "mbuba."
M^'i (n. 2), pestle (wooden).
Mtii (n. 1), one who is obedient, submissive.
Mtikati (n. 2), noon, midday.
Mtilizi (n. 2), gutter, conduit, piping, guttering ; (pi.), eaves, ends of eaves (where water trickles down).
Mtima (n. 2), heart, core (old Swa.),
ULtindo (n. 2), cutting, pattern, shape, cut, end.
Miini (n. 2), fig-tree.
Mtitimo (u. 2), thunder.
M/o (u. 2), cushion, pillow ; Mto (n. 2), river.
Mtofu wa mato (n. 1), blind man, blind person.
Mtoki (n. 2), swelling and pain in groin.
M/olea (n. 1), giver.
Mtomoko (n. 2), custard-apple tree.
Mtondo (u. 2 and adj.), day after to-morrow : Mtondo goa (n. 2 and adj.), day after that.
Mtoro (n. 1), runaway slave, fugi- tive. (By implication, also robber, plunderer, pirate.)
Mtoto (n. 1), child ; Mtoto mcha- nga, infant.
Mfozi (m/oza) (n. 1), exactor, ex- tortioner, collector ; M/ozi wa ushuru, tax-gatherer, publican (Bible).
Mt'u (n. 1), person, man, someone, human being.
Mt'u mke (n. 1), woman, female (adult) ; M'tu mume, man, male (adult).
Mfti (n. 2), a tree (tamarisk ?) (willow ?).
Mftiku (n. 1), worthless person.
M^ukufu (n. 1), exalted personage, man in high rank. -
MtuKutu (n. 1), obstreperous, fidgetty, unruly person.
Mtakuu (n. 1), great grandchild.
Mfukuzi (n. 1), carrier, bearer, porter.
Mtulivu (u. 1), one who is sub- missive, disciplined, tranquil, obedient.
M/umba (n. 1), sweetheart, fiance'.
Mtumbwi (n. 2), canoe, dug- out.
Mtume (n. 2), apostle, messenger, ambassador, emissary, sent-one,
M/umia (n. 1), old man.
SWAHILI-ENGLISn VOCABULARY
207
Mtumishi (n. 1), servant, domestic,
retainer.
Mtumwa (n. 1), slave. Mtundaufu (n. 2), species of wild
jasmine.
M/unga (n. 1), shepherd. M/ungi (n. 2), earthen water pot. Mtungo (n. 2), a string of things
strung together, a number, a
lot.
Mtushi (n. 1), abusive person. Mftizi (n. 2), gravy, broth, sauce. M^wa (n. 2), white ant. Mtwana (n. 1), man slave. Muajiriwa (n. 1), hired person.' Muaminifu (n. 1), one who is
faithful, trustworthy. Muamu (n. 1), brother-in-law,
sister-in-law.
Muamzi (n. 1), arbitrator, judge. Mnandamo (adj.), following, suc- ceeding (said of next moon). Muandazi, or Mwandazi (n. 1),
preparer of food, baker, cook. Muandishi (see Mwandishi), (n. 1). Muanga (pi. mianga), (n. 2), light. Muangaza (n. 2), enlightenment,
light-hole.
Muashi (n. 1), builder. MucZa (pi. mida) (n. 2), interval
of time, time. Muedini, or muadini (n. 1), caller
to prayer.
Muerezi (n. 2), cedar tree. Muhabeshia (n. 1), an Abyssinian. Muhindi (n. 1), an Indian. Muhifoji (n. 1), needy person. Muhogo (n. 2), Cassava. Muhula (n. 2), appointed time. Muhtmzi (n. 1), smith, workman. Muhuri (n. 2), seal, signet. Muimbaji (n. 1), singer, songster. Muisilamu (n. 1), Mohammedan. Mukateba (n. 2), document, writ- ing, bond. Ku mulika (v. tr.), to throw light
on, illuminate, lighten, shine. Mnmbuji (n. 1), maker of nice things.
Hume (pi. waume) (n. 1), male, husband, man in contradistinc- tion to woman.
Mumu-humu (;idv.), in this same place.
Ku mumunya (v. tr.), to suck, retain in the mouth without biting.
Munmnye (n. 5), vegetable marrow.
Mdu (n. 2). billhook, hatchet, chopper.
Munyu (u. 2), salt.
Ku mung'unjruka (v. n.), to bo putrid, decomposed, rotten.
Muoga (n. 1), coward.
Muombaji (n. 1), beggar.
Muombezi (n. 2), intercessor, mediator.
Muombi (n. 1), one who prays.
Muonewa (n. 1), one who is op- pressed.
Muongezi (n. 1), amuser.
Muongofu (n. 1), convert, believer.
Muotezi, ormuoteji (n. 1), lier-in- wait.
Musimu (n. 2), N.E. monsoon, the hot season (lit. the mon- soon).
Muuaji (n. 1), murderer.
Muujiza (n. 2), miracle.
Muumba (n. 1), creator.
Muungwana (n. 1), person of gentle birth, free man.
Muwa (n. 2), sugar cane; pi., miwa.
Muwaa (n. 2), dwarf fan palm; pi. miaa.
Muali (n. 2), flame ; pi. miyali.
Muwanga (sec nmanga).
Muweza (n. 1), one who is able (used of God).
Muwili, mwili (n. 2), body, flesh, form.
Mvi (n. 2), arrow.
Mvi (n.7, pi), grey or white hair.
MvinJe (n. 2), the casuarina.
Mvinyn (n. 3), wine.
Mvite (prop, n.), Mombasa.
208
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Mviringo (n. 2), round, round- ness, sphere.
M'vo (pi. mivo) (n. 2), flood. Mvua (n. 3), rain. Mvuke (n. 2), steam, vapour,
incense.
Mvuli (n. 1), young man. Mvumo (n. 2), borassus palm. Mvungu (n. 2), hollow space, as
under a bed. Mvuvi (n. 1), fisherman. Mwa (var. prep. cl. 10, following
locative), in, within, to, into. Ku mwaika (v. intr.), to be spilt. Mwaka (pi. myaka) (n. 2), year,
season of great rains ; Mwakani,
in the year's time. Mwakani, in the south. Mwalimu (n. 1), teacher, pro- fessor, learned man. Mwalio (n. 2), wound. Wood put
at the bottom of cooking pot to
prevent food burning. Mwalishi (n. 1), inviter to a
feast. Mwamba (pi. myamba) (n. 2), rock.
Ridge pole of native house. Mwamnda (n. 2), garden fruits. Mwamzi (n. 1), judge, arbitrator. Mwana (pi. wana) (n. 1), child,
son, daughter, mistress, queen. Mwanafunzi (n. 1), scholar, pupil,
disciple. Mwanamke (pl.wanawake) (n. 1),
woman, female. Mwanamume (pi. wanawaurae)
(n. 1), man, male. Mwanamwali (n. 1), virgin,
maiden who has not yet left
her father's house. Mwandamizi (n. 1), follower,
successor, companion. Mwandani (pi. wandani or wen-
dani) (n. 1), friend, companion,
fellow acquaintance. MwanfZa-wazinro (n. 1), lunatic,
idiot. Mwandishif(n. 1), writer, scribe,
butler.
Mwanrfo (n. 2), pasture-fields, hamlet of skepherds' huts.
Mwanga (n. 1), witch.
Mwango (u. 2), lamp-stand, luminary.
Mwangwi (n. 2), echo (usually mwengo).
Mwanya (n. 2), defile, narrow alley, space between teeth.
Mwanza (n. 2), instrument <>f witchcraft.
Mwanzamkwa (n. 1), Name of God (equals Maker and Up- briuger).
Mwanzi (u. 2), reed, bamboo, cane ; pi. myanzi.
Mwanzo (n. 2), beginning.
Mwao (n. 3), under support; Kwa .mwao, properly, well done.
Mwarabu (n. 1), an Arab.
Mwari (n. 2), pelican.
Mwavuli (n. 2), umbrella, sun- shade.
Ku mwaya or mwaga (v. tr.), to spill, throw away ; Ku mwaya matozi, to shed tears ; ku mwaya raaneno, to talk at random.
Mwele (n. 1), sick person,
Mwembe (n. 2), mango tree.
Mwembembe (n. 1), wild bee.
Mwenda (n. 1), he who goes.
Mwenendo, mwendo (n. 2), going, gait, living, conduct, walk, life.
Mwenge (n. 2), torch.
Mwenyeji (pi. wenyeji) (n. 1), citizen, townsman, subject, inhabitant, host.
Mwenyewe (n. 1), possessor, owner ; Mimi mwenyewe, my- self.
Mwenyi (sec enyi) (n. 1) ; Mwenyi deni, creditor ; Mwenyi duka, shopkeeper.
Mwenyiezi (lit. Mwenyi enzi) (adj.), having majesty, power, Almighty (always coupled with God).
SWAHILI-ENQLISH VOCABULARY
209
Mwenzi (n. 1), companion, fellow, comrade.
Mwewe (n. 3), kite, hawk.
Mwezi (n. 2), moon, month ; Mwezi mwandamo, next month.
Mwiba (pi. miba) (n. 2), thorn.
Mwiko (pi. miko) (n. 2), large spoon.
Mwimbaji (n. 1) ; sec muimbaji.
Mwindaji (n. 1), hunter, sports- man.
Mwinyi (n. 1), Lord.
Mwiro (n. 2), trunk, proboscis.
Mwisho (n. 2), end, termination.
Mwito (n. 2), call, calling, elec- tion.
Mwitu (n. 2), forest, jungle, wood, bush.
Mwivi (pi. wevi) (n. 1), thief.
Mwoga, muoga (n. 1), coward, poltroon.
Mwokozi (u. 1), Saviour.
Mwongo (n. 1), liar.
Mwoni (n. 1), teer.
Myanzi or inianzi, pi. of Mwanzi.
Myongo, see miongo. Myongoni mwa (prepl. phiasc), among, in the company of.
Mza (n. 1), seller.
Mzabibu (n. 2), vine, grapes.
Mzaha (n. 2), scorn, levity, ridicule.
Mzalia (n. 1), native or coast- born slave.
Mzalishi (n. 1), midwife, ac- coucher.
Mzaliwa-mbele (D. 1), first-born.
Mzamishi (n. ]), baptizer (lit. one svho causes to sink).
Mzazi (n. 1), parent.
Mzee (u. 1), old man, elder, chief.
Mzeituni (n. 2), olive tree.
Mzi (n. 2), rootlet, sucker, feeler.
Mzigo (n. 2), burden, load.
Mzinga (n, 2), canon, native bee- hive.
MzisM (n. 1), burier, undertaker.
Mzoga (n. 2), carrion, corpse of uncircuincised. SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Mzungu (n. 1), an European. Mzushi (n. 1), one who invents. Mzuzi (n. 1), a tale-bearer.
N
N', abbreviated form of Ni.
Na (conj.), and, also; (prep.) with.
Naam (adv.), yes (classical).
Naanaa (n. 3), mint.
Nabii (n. 6), prophet.
Nadhari (n. 3), caution, discretion.
Nadhiri (n. 3), vow ; Ku-weka nadhiri, to make a vow ; Ku ondoa nadhiri, to pay a vow.
Ku nadi (v. tr.), to sell by auction.
Nafaka (n. 3), corn, cereal, grain.
Nafasi (n. 3), space, room, oppor- tunity, leisure, time.
Nafiki (n. 5), hypocrite.
Ku nafisi (v. tr.), to provide means for development.
Nafusi, nafsi (n. 3), person, self, soul, individual, soul-subject of life.
Nafuu (n. 3), salvation, deliver- ance.
Nahao (n. 3), grammar.
Nahodha (n. 3), captain of vessel.
Najisi (n. 3), defilement, pollution.
Nakishi (n. 3). cuiving, engraving, art of curving.
Ku nakishika (v. n.), to be well carved.
Ku nakishiwa (v. pass.), to bo carved in relief, to be inlaid.
Namba (n. 3), turtle.
Kami (conj. pron.), and I, with me.
Namna (n. 3), sort, kind, pattern ; Namna-namna, all sorts.
Nanasi (n. 5), pine apple.
Nane (num. adj.), eight.
Nanga (n. 3), anchor.
Ku nang'anika (v. n.), to shine, as with oil.
Nani ? (inter, pron.) who ? whom ? 0
210
S\VAHILI GRAMMAR
Ku nanua (v. tr.), to loosen, undo.
Nao (conj. pron.), and, or with, them.
Ku nasibisha (v. c.), to naturalize.
Nasibu (n. 3), accident, mishap, chance.
TSa.tha.ri (n. 3), common sense, discretion.
Nauli (n. 3), fare,, passage money, freight.
Ku navya (v. c.), to partially wash another.
Ku nawa (v. tr.), to wash the hands, face, or feet.
Ku nawiri (v. intr.), to shine.
Nazaa (n. 3), notoriety, exposure, publicity.
Nazi (n. 3), cocoanut.
Nda, cotr. form of Ni ya.
Ndaa (n. 3), hunger, famine ; Ndaa k'uu, great scarcity.
Ndago (u. 3), weed, rush having small tubers attached t> the roots which have a sweet aro- matic smell. Genus cyperus, sweet cane of scripture.
Ndakaka (n. 3), horizontal roof- sticks.
Ndako, rntr. form of Ni yako.
NcZama (n. 3), calf, heifer.
NfZangu, coir, form of Ni yangu.
Ndari (adv.), iuside, within ; Ndani ya (advl. prop.), in, into, inside.
NfZao, cont. form of Ni yao.
Ndau (n. 3), baling ladle.
NYZe (adv.), out, outside; N'de ya (advl. prep.), outside of.
Ndege (n. 3), bird, Zanzibar dialect.
NtZenge (n. 3), he-goat.
Ndeo (n. 3), surfeiting, excess, drunkenness.
NfZeremo (n. 3),- rejoicing, ex- pression of joy, merry-making.
Nrferi (n. 3), eagle, vulture.
Ndevu (pi. n. 7), beard; TTdevu, ia a single hair of the beard.
Ndewe (n. 3), perforated car-lobe, for insertion of ornament.
Ndi, pronominal copula, used in conjunction with pronouns it forms the Amphatic Present of the Verb To be ; Ndimi, it is I.
NfZia (n. 3), way, pith, road, street ; Ndia ya kukata, a short cut. Also, course of action, straight course, sound judgment.
Ndimi, see Ulimi.
Ndimu (n. 3), lime, fruit.
Ndimu za kali, sour limes ; Ndimu za tamu, sweet limes.
Ndiposa (conj.), therefore.
Ndivyo (adv.), thus it is.
NcZiwa (n. 3), dove, pigeon, turtle-dove ; NfZiwa manga, tamo pigeon.
Ndiyo (udv.), yes (lit. they) ; mambo, arc so.
Ndizi (n. 3), banana, plantain (see Mgomba).
Ndoa (n. 3), nurriagc.
Ndole (n. 3), big-toe, claw.
Ndongo (n. 3), land, earth, soil.
Ndoj (n. 3), bucket, pail.
NrZoo (Irreg. imp. of verb Ku ja), come.
Ndoto (n. 3), dreim, vision.
NcZovu (n. 3), elephant.
Ndugu (n. 3), brother, sister, cousin, relative ; Ndugu baba mmoja, mama mmoja, own brother or sister ; Ndugu mama mmoja baba mbalimbali, or rice vtrsd, half-brother or sister.
Ndugu mke, sister, fomilo cousin ; Ndugu mume, brother or male cousin.
Ndui (n. 3), smallpox (sec Tete).
Nduli (n. 3), angel of death.
Nduma-kuwili (n. 3), double- mouthed snake (so-called).
Ndume, third concord of mume.
Nduni (n. 3), new wonder, pretty novelty.
Nduu (n. 3), ground-nut.
SWA HI LI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
211
Ndwele, Ndwee (n. 3), sickness,
disease.
Ndweo (n. 3), pride. Neema (n. 3), grace, prosperous
season, plenty, favour, luxury. Ku neemeka (v. n.), to become
prosperous, to be blessed or
favoured. Ka neemesha (v. c.), to bless, be
gracious to, prosper. Nemsi (n. 3), luxury, opulence,
high estate. Ku nena (v. intr.), to speak, utter,
say. Ku nenea (v. prepl.), to speak
against, accuse. Ku neneka (v. n.), to be possible
to say, pronounceable, nene (var. adj.), thick, stout,
dense, fat, corpulent. Ku nenepa (v. intr.), to become
fat or stout (of persons). Neno (u. 5), word, saying, thing,
matter. Nga or Ngaa (adj.), just so much
as, just a little, like even ;
Huna ngaa pesa moja ? Have
you not even a pice ? Ku ng'aa, or ng'ara (v. iutr.), to
shine, glitter, be bright or
conspicuous. Ng'ambu (u. 3), the other side,
opposite shore (of river, etc.). Ngamia (n. 3), camel. Ngano in. 3), tale, story. Nganu (n. 3), wheat. Ngao (n. 3), shield, -ngapi? (var. adj. of quan.), how
much ? how many ? Ngarawa (n. 3), small canoe
(familiarly called galawa). Ku ng'ariza (v. c.), to polish. Ngawa (n. 3), large civet cat. -ngawa, or -nga (verbal infix),
although, notwithstanding, in
spite of existing circumstances. Ngawa (conj. and interj.), though,
Oh that, if only (followed by
negative).
Ngawa hakuchi, Oh that it
would dawn, would that it
were morning. Ngazi (n. 3), ladder. Ku ng'azia (v. prepl.), to show
light to, illuminate, lighten. Ngazija (n. prop.), Great Comoro, -nge, -ngeli, -gall, infixes of the
conditional mood. Ng'ge (n. 3), scorpion ; Kitumbo
ng'ge. -ngi (var. adj. qnan.), many,
much. Ku ngia (v. intr.), to go or come
in, enten See Note 9, Study
XVI. Ku ngilika (v. n.), to be open,
accessible.
-ngine (var. adj.), other. Ngisi (n. 3), cuttle-fish. Ku ngiwa ni khofu, to be seized
by ftar, experience, feel. Ku jingiza (v. ref.), to introduce
oneself, intrude, meddle. Ng'ngwe (n. 3), border, boundary ;
(pi. 7), line, cord. Ngoa (n. 3), lust, carnal appetite,
envy, longing; Ku lilia ngoa,
to long for. Ku ng'oa (v. tr.), to uproot, pull
up, root out, destroy. Ku ngoa k'ome, to pull up the
caravan flag, start the day's
march. Ku ngoja (v. intr.), to wait, have
patience.
Ku ngojea, to wait for, wait upon. Ku keti kingojo, to keep watch,
wait, lie in wait. Ngoja kwLiiza, wait a bit, wait a
minute.
Ku ng'oka (v. n.), to be rooted up. Ku ng'olea (v. prepl.), to root out
by, with or for, etc. Ngoma (n. 3), drum, dance, ball ;
Ku piga ngoma, to beat drum ;
Ku teza ngoma, to dance. Ng'ombe (n. 3), ox, cow, bull,
cattle.
212
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Ngome (Q. 3), fort, fortress, castle ; hence prison.
Ku ng'ong'o (v. intr.), to speak nasally.
Ng'ongo (n. 7 pi.), strips of miyaa, with harsh inner edge.
Ngovi (n. 3), skin, hide, leather.
Ngumi (n. 3), fist dowuwards.
Ku piga ngumi, to cuff, box.
Nguo (n. 3), cloth, stuff, material, clothes.
Kn nguruma (v. intr.), to roar, thunder.
Ngurumo (n. 3), roaring, thunder.
nguu (n. 3), peak of hill, height.
Nguu, or nguru (n. 3), salt fish imported from Arabia.
Nguvu (n. 3), strength, power, authority, might, force.
Nguwe, nguruwe (n. 3), pig, swine, hog.
Nguzo (n. 3), pillar, post, stake, column, support.
Ngwa, God (used in ejaculatory prayers).
Ngwena (n. 3), crocodile.
Ni (prep.), by (precedes the agent after a passive verb).
Ni (simple copula or weak verb To Be), is, are.
-ni (obj. infix first pers. sing.), me.
-ni? (abbreviated form of Nini?), what, whatever ; Ujapopawani, whatever you might be given.
-ni (locative termination to sub- stantives having the force of almost any preposition of place).
Nia (n. 3), mind, intention, dis- position, heart.
Nikali (first per. sing, continua- tion tense), I em still. Nili (n. 3), laundry blue. Nili (idiomatical Part. Tense of
To Be), I being. Nimilete (n. 3), lemonade. Nina, I have.
Nina (n. 3), old word for mother. Ninga (n. 3), green dove.
Nini? (pron.), what?
Nira (n. 3), yoke.
Njama (n. 3), secret council, mystery.
Njozi (n. 3), walnuts, vision.
Njuga (u. 3), bells (worn as ornaments).
Njugu (u. 3), ground-nuts (Zan- zibar dialect).
Nne (num. adj.), four.
Ku noa (v. tr.), to sharpen, whet.
Ku nona (v. intr.), to get fat (of animals).
Nondo (n. 3), clothes-moth.
Ku nong'ona (v. iiitr.), to whisper.
Ku nong'oneza (v. tr.), to whisper to.
Nokoa (n. 5), overseer, foreman.
Nodsi (n. 3), public notice.
-nsha (idiomatic perfect of kwisha ; see Note 1, Study IV.
Nt'a (n. 3), wax, secretion.
Ni'a (n. 3), point, end.
Ht'i (n. 3), earth, ground, land.
Nt'i (n. 3), earrings.
Nt'i (adv.), on the ground.
Nd (n. 3), chart.
N/ i ya t'ambarare, plain, flat, open country.
Ku nuka (v. intr.), to smell, stink, emit an odour or per- fume.
Ku nuka (v. tr.), to smell, per- ceive by the nose.
Numbi (n. 3), draught or haul of fish, fishing-line.
Ku nuna (v. intr.), to grumble, scowl, growl, grunt, pout.
Nundu (n. 3), hump iu cattle, etc.
Nugnu (n. 3), porcupine.
Ku nung'unika (v. intr.), to grumble, murmur, complain.
Ku nunua (v. tr.), to buy, pur- chase.
Ku nunuliwa (v. pass.), to be bought.
Nuru (n. 3), light, brightness.
Ku nusa, tumbaku (v.tr.), to take snuff.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
213
Nusu (n. 3), half; Nusu-saa,
half an hour. Nusura (adv.), nearly, within a
hair's breadth of. Ku nusuru (v. tr.), to protect. Ku nwa (v. tr.), to drink, absorb
(imperative, Nwaa). Ku jinwea (v. ref.), to quench
one's thirst at. Ku nweka, to be drinkable. Ku nwesheleza (v. c.), to water,
drench. Ku nwisha, Ku nwesha (v. c.), to
give drink to, make to drink. Ku nya, to fall, as rain ; Mvua
yanya, it rains. Ku nyakua (v. tr.), to pick or
snatch up, catch away. Nyama (n. 3), meat, flesh,
animal, game ; Nyama wa
mwitu, wild animal, beast of
the forest. Ku nyamaa (v. intr.), to be silent,
quiet, hold one's peace. Ku nyamaza (v. intr.), to stop
talking, by effort of will. Ku nyamazisha (v. c.), to put to
silence, quiet, still. Ku nyambnka (v. n.), to fall to
pieces, peel off, itself. Ku nyang'anya (v. tr.), to rob,
plunder.
Nyani (n. 3), ape. Nyanya (n. 3), grandmother (also,
tomatoes). Ku nyanyuka (v. n.), to be
tattered or torn. Nyara (n. 3), spoil, booty, plunder,
captive (see Ku teka). Nyasi (sing. TTnyasi, a blade of
grass) ; (n. 7), grass. Ku nyata (v. intr.), to come
stealthily, steal, creep, to go
softly. Ku nyata (v. intr.), to be sticky,
as paint not yet dry. Nyati (n. 3), buffalo, wild-ox. Ku nyatuka (v. n.), to be hurried,
excited.
Ku nyauka (v. n.), to dry up, shrivel, wither.
Nyavu (n. 3), net.
Ku nyea (v. intr.), to itch, irritate, tickle.
Nyemi (n. 3), beauty, joy.
Ku nyenya (v. tr.), to worm in- formation out of another.
Ku nyenyekea (v. intr. and prepl.), to be humble, supplicate, en- treat.
Nyenzo (n. 3), rollers, logs of wood on which a' boat is launched.
Ku nyesna (v. c.), to raiu down, shower down.
Ku nyenyereza (v. tr.), to secrete.
Ku nyete (v. intr.), to be con- ceited, self-opinionated, self- important, exult, triumph.
Ku nye^'esha (v. c.), to increase self-respect, encourage.
Nyie (abbr. form of Nyinywi).
Nyika (n. 3), desert.
Ku nyima (v. tr.), to withhold from, refuse to give to, deprive of.
Ku nyoa (v. intr.), to shave.
Ku nyoea (v. intr.), to evaporate, dry up, subside.
Nyoka (n. 3), snake.
Ku nyoka (v. n.), to be straight, direct.
-nyonge (var. adj.), weak, mean, worthless, insignificant.
Nyongo (n. 3), the back (of the body), bile, gall.
Ku nyong'onea (v. intr.), to feel numb, languid.
Ku nyonya (v. tr.), to suck.
Ku nyonyesha (v. c.), to suckle.
Ku nyosha (v. c.), to straighten, stretch.
Ku jinyosha (v. ref.), to lie down.
Nyoshi (n. 7, pi.), smoke.
Nyota (n. 3), star, planet; Nyota yenyi mkia, comet.
Ku nyonyoa (v. tr.), to pluck feathers of bird.
SWAHILI QBAMMAB
Nyoya (n. 5), feather.
Nyoyo, see moyo.
Ku nyua (v. tr.), to bite off.
Nyuki (n. 3), bee.
Nynma (adv.), behind, afterwards,
later, back, backwards. Nyuma ya (adv. prep.), after,
behind, at the back of. Nyumba (n. 3'), house, cottage,
villa, bungalow. Nyumbn (n. 3), mule. Nyumbu-bara (n. 3), \vildebceste. Nyundo (n. 3), hammer. Nyungu (n. 3), cooking-pot. Nyuni (n. 3), bird. Ku nyunya (v. tr.), to suck, draw
out by suction.
Ku nyunyiza (v. tr.), to sprinkle. Nyusbi (n. 3), eyebrows. Nyuta (pi. of uta). Ny wele (n. 7, pi.), hair ; Unywele,
a single hair. Nwinywi, or Nywinywi (pron.),
ye, you (pi.).
Nzao (n. 3), bullock, calf. N'zi (n. 3), a fly. Nzige (n. 3), locust. Iszlo (n. 3), a large water-jar.
O
-o (var. poss. suf.) (abbrev. form
of -ako), thy. Ku oa (v. tr.), to look, behold,
direct eyes. Ku oa (v. tr.), to marry (said of
the bridegroom): Ku olewa
(v. pass.), to be married (said
of the bride). Ku oama (v. n.), to be soaked or
steeped, swell iu water or be- come soft. Ku oamana (v. n.), to break up,
disintegrate, through being
steeped. Ku oamisha (v. c.), to soften,
steep in water, soak. Oga (n. 7), fear, cowardice.
Ku oga (v. intr.), to bathe. Ku ogelea (v. intr.), to swim. Ku ogesha (v. c.), to wash, give
a bath to. Ku ogopa (v. iutr.), to fear, be
afraid.
Ku oka (v. tr.), to bake, roast. Ku okoa (v. tr.), to save, deliver,
preserve. Ku okoka (v. n.), to be saved,
escape. Ku okota (v. tr.). to pick up.
rake together, individual
articles. Ole (n. 7) (also wele), woe, fate,
God's ordaining or appointing. Ole mbwangu (interj.), woe is
me, alas.
Ku olea (v. intr.), to float. Ku olesha (v. c.), to float or sail a
boat.
Ku oleza (v. c.), to make to swim. Ku omba (v. tr.), to pray, beg.
ask for, beseech. Ku ombea (v. prepl.), to pray for,
intercede.
Ku omeka (v. tr.), to stick in. Omo (adv.), forward, in the fore
part of a vessel. Ku omoa (v. tr.), to spoil by
soaking, to bring to land. Ku ona (v. tr.), to see, fiiid,
observe, feel ; Ku ona haya
(v. intr.), to feel ashamed. Ku jiona(v. ref.). to think oneself
to be, boast. Ku onana (v. rcf.), to meet, see
one another. Ku onekana (v. n.), to be visible,
appear, be seen, known. Ku ont?a (v. tr.), to taste, try,
tempt. Kn ondoa (v. tr.), to take away,
remove.
Ku ondoka (v. n.), to get up, go away, depart, start, appear on the scene.
Ku ondolea (v. prepl.), to take away from.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
215
Ku onea (v. tr.), to oppress, ill- tr< at ; Ku onea mashaka, to afflict.
Ku ongea (v. tr. and n.), to in- crease, become many or much.
Ku ongeza (v. c.), to add, in- crease, augment.
Ku ongezeka (v. n.), to be capable of increase, become more.
Ku ongca (v. tr.), to soothe, to lull a child, lead gently, plea e.
Ku ongoka(v. n.), to be con verted, bo le«l aright, to turn out well.
Ku ongokewa, to bo blessed.
Ku cngopa (v. intr.), to lie, to tell lies.
Ku ongoza (v. tr.), to lead, take the lead, direct, guide.
Ku onya (v. tr.), to warn, show.
Ku onya (v. intr.), to be trans- parent.
Ku onyesha (v. c.), to show, indi- cate, point out.
Ooo (derisive intcrj.), ha ha.
Oowa, hush-a-bye, lullaby.
Ku opoa (v. tr.), to draw up out of a well, extricate.
Orcfa or Ghorofa (n. 7, no pi.), top story, upper story, upper chamber.
-ororo (var. adj.), soft, smooth.
Ku osha (v. tr.), to wash, cleanse.
Ku osheka (v. n,), to be wash- able.
Ku ota (v. tr.), to sprout, grow ; (2) to dream.
Kujota moto (v. intr.), to b *sk or warm oneself by fire ; Ku ota jua, to bask in the suu.
Ku ctama (v. n.), to sit on one's heels, squat, crouch.
Ku otamia (v. prepl. ), to sit (of a hen), hatch.
-ot'e (adj. ), all (see p. ).
Ku otea (v. prep.), to lie in wait for, waylay, lurk.
-ovu (var. adj.), evil, bad.
Oya (n. 7), small handful.
Ku cza (v. intr.), to rot, be
rotten, putrid, spoil. Ku oza (v. c.), to marry, perform
marriago ceremony (eaid of
officiating person or parcnte,
guardians).
Pa (var. prep.), of (8th el. con- cord).
Pa (pronoml. particle, 8th cl.), it, place.
Ku pa (v. tr.), to give, give to (requires indirect obj. particle to be conjugated with it).
Paa (n. 3), gazelle ; (n. 5), side of sloping roof, roof.
Ku paa (v. iutr.), to ascend, mount.
Kupaaza (v. tr.), to grind quickly and coarsely ; Jito lanipaaza, there is grit or sand in my eye; Kusaga is to grind finely.
Padiri (n. 5), padre, priest.
Pafu (n. 3), lung.
Ku pagaa (v. tr ), to seize,
(Ku)pagara (v. tr.), to wear
charms (hirizi).
(Ku)pagawa ni pepo, to be pos- sessed of devil. Pahali (n. 8), place. Paja (n. 5), thigh, hip, lap. Paji(lauso), (or Kipaji cha uso)
(n. 5), forehead. P'aka (n. 3), cat ; Paka mwitu,
Paka vue, wild cat. (Ku)paka (v. tr.), to smear, faub,
paint, anoint, rub, spread upon. (Ku)pakaza (v. c.), to anoint. Pakacha (n. 5), basket made from
the green cocoa-nut leaves. (Ku)pakata (v. tr.), to take on the
lap or knee. (Kujpakia (v. tr.), to take iu
cargo or loads, put on board. (Ku)pakua (v. tr.), to serve up
(food), dish.
216
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Pale (dem. pron.), there, in that place (origly. demon, adj. 8th. cl.).
Palepale, papale (redup. emphat. pron., for off), just there, or then ; on that spot, at that very moment.
(Ku)palia (v. tr.), to choke, permeate, hoe, dig up.
(Ku)palilia (v. prepl.), to dig round a growing crop or plant.
(Ku)paliwa sauti, to be choked.
Pamba (n. 3), cotton, cotton wool.
(Ku)pamba (v. tr.), to adorn, decorate, beautify, bedeck with ornament.
(Ku)pambanisha (v. tr.), to con- trast.
(Kn)pambanua (v. tr.), to differ- entiate, separate, distinguish, between, to make distinct from.
(Ku)pambauka (v. n.), to dawn, break(day), begin to get light.
(Ku)pambanukana (v. n. rec.), to be contrasted with.
Pambizo (n. 3), the surrounding border or edge or ornament of anything, as a table, or a building, or a church, precincts.
P'ambizoni (naut.), in wedge shape.
Pampo (n. 5), ornament, decora- tion (of house).
Pamqja (adv.), together (lit. one place).
Pamoja na (adv. prep.), with, together with.
Pana (see note on verb To have, p. 58), there is, there are.
-pana (var. adj.), broad, wide; Panapana, flat, level.
(Ku)pana (v. rec.), to give each other.
Panda (n. 3), trumpet.
(Ku)panda (v. tr.), to plant, sow, set.
(Ku)panda (v. intr.), to climb, mount, ascend.
(Ku)panda farasi, to ride a horse.
(Ku)pandisha (v. c.), to raise, promote, hoist up.
Pande (pi. of upande, cl. 7).
Panga (n. 5), sword (pi. of upanga, cl. 7).
(Ku)panga (v. tr.), to put or set out in rows, put in array, arrange in order, to rent or hire (a house).
(Ku)jipanga (v. ref.), to set one- self out to be, aspire to, be ostentatious.
(Ku)pangana (v. n.), to be spread out, arranged in order.
(Ku)pangisha (v. c.), (1) to make people sit in rows ; (2) to let or lease (a house) to (some- one).
P ango (n. 3), hole, den, cave.
(Ku)pangusa (v. tr.), to wip^, rub.
(Ku)panua (v. tr.), to widen, broaden, stretch, open wide.
Panya (n. 3), rat, mouse.
Panyamavu (n. 8), quiet place, peaceful spot.
(Ku)panza (v. c.), to slide up on to.
Panzi (n. 5), grasshopper, cater- pillar.
Pao (poss. adj.), their, at their place.
P apa (n. 3), shark.
Papa (adv.), here ; Papahapa (adv. red.), just here, on this same spot.
(Ku)papasa (v. tr.), to grope, touch, feel, with a lingering touch.
(Ku)papatika (v. intr.), to flap the wings, flutter.
(Ku)papatua (v intr.), to flourish, open out.
(Ku)papatuka (v. n.), to blossom.
Papayu (n. 5), Pawapaw fruit.
Papayuka (v. n.), to be light- headed, delirious.
Papo (dem. pron.), there, then ;
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
217
Papohapo (pron. red. emphat.),
(near by), just then, just there. Papo hapo (adv.), at that very
moment, at that very place. (Ku)papura (v. tr), to tear
violently, lacerate, rend. Para (n. 5), bald-headed man. (Ku)para (v. tr.), to scrape. Parafujo (n. 3), a screw. Parap-anda (n. 3), trumpet (espc-
eially the trumpet of the
resurrection). (Ku)parua (v. tr.), to scamp
(work). (Ku)pamza (v. intr.), to be rough,
Imroh, to grate. (KvTpasa (v. tr.), to behove,
" mutt," be necessary, become. (Ku)paswa (v. pass.), to be
obliged. (Ku)pasha (v. c.), to cause to get,
afford, yield ; (Ku)pasha fedha,
to lend money ; (Ku)pasha
msaada, to help.
Pashau (n. 3), energy, enthusi- asm. Pasi (n 3), an iron; (Ku)piga
pasi, to iron. (Ku)pasi (v. intr.), to excel, do
well. Pasipo (prep.) (lit. where there is
not), without. Pasipckuwa na. Pasiwcko. Pasina,
without there being, there not
being. Pasiwe, let there not be, but
there was not (see note 2,
Study X.). (Ku)pasua (v. tr.), to split, rend,
tear (lengthwise). (Ku)pasuka (v. n.), to burst,
split, be rent or torn (longi- tudinally). (Ku)pata (v. tr.), to get, acquire,
obtain, procure, succeed, to be
able. (Ku)pata (v. intr.), to cut, be
sharp (knife). Pate (n. G), twin.
(Ku)patana (v. rec.), to apree, come to terms, be reconciled, consent, be of oiie mind, make a contract.
(Ku)patanisha (v. c.), to reconcile, conciliate.
Patasi (Zanzibar) (n. 5), chisel (see Tapasi).
(Ka)patika (v. tr.), to put in a niche.
(Ku)pa/ika (v. tr.), to put, place.
(Ka)patikana(v. n.), to be obtain- able, procurable ; (Ku)patikana ni, to meet with, have happen to one.
(Ku)patiliza (v. tr.), to punish, visit (retribution).
(Ku)patiza (v. tr.), to take ad- vantage of.
Pato (n. 5), advantage, profit, gain.
(Ku)patwa (v. pass.), to be got bold of (said of sun, or moon, when eclipsed) (see (Ku)shik- wa).
P'au (n. 3), slanting poles in rcof, rafters, beams.
(Ku)paua (v. tr.), to bind rafters to ridge poles, make notches in rafters in order to do this.
Pauni (n. 3), pound, sovereign.
(Kn)pawa, (Ku)pewa (v. pass.), to be given, receive.
(Ku)paya (v. intr.), to talk foolishly, rave, be delirious, talk wildly.
(Ku)paya (v. tr.), to graze (as boat on rock).
(Ku)paza (v. c.), to raise, lift up.
Pazia (n. 3), curtain, screen, veil.
(Ku)pea (v. tr.), to sweep (see fyagia).
Pekee (inv. adj.), alone, solitary, only.
Pekeyangu (etc.), by myself.
P'ele (n. 3), the itch. Almost all pimples are called and spoken of by this name.
218
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
(Ku)peleka (v. tr.), to send, con- vey, take (used of persons and things).
Peleka barua hii kwa . . . , take this letter to . . . ; (Ku)peleka chuoni, lo send to school ; (Ku)peleka mkono (v. tr.), to touch, interfere with, handle.
(Ku)peleleza (v. tr.), to spy, inquire into, examine.
P embe (n. 3), horn, ivory, tusk, corner.
(Ku)penda (v. tr.), to love, like, be fond of, will, wish, approve, prefer.
(Ku)jipenda (v. ref.), to be selfish, self-centred, study one's own comfort.
(Ku)pendelea (v. prepl.), to favour, be partial to, choose, prefer.
(Ku)pendeza (v. c.), to please.
(Ku)jipendekeza, to court favour, be ingratiating.
P'endo (n. 3, pi.), love, will, fond- ness.
Pengine (var. adj.), other (place), hence elsewhere, somewhere else.
Pengine (conj.), on the other hand, supposing, in case.
P'engo (n. 3), no'ch, gap (be- tween teeth, where one is lost, or space made by filing).
Pentekosito (n. 3), Pentecost, Whitsunday.
(Ku)penya (v. tr.), to penetrate, bore into.
(Ku)jipenyeza, to squeeze oneself into.
Penyi (lit. a place having), i.e. whore there is or are.
P'epe (n. 3), chaff, husks.
(Knipepea (v. tr.), to fan, blow.
(Ku)peperusha (v. c.), to blow about, blow away.
(Ku)pepeta (v. tr.), to sift, winnow.
P'epo (n. 3), evil spirit ; (n. 7, pi.),
winds ; P'eponi (loc.), cool winds, Paradise, heaven.
Pera (n. 5), Guava.
Pesa (n. 3), pice, J anna.
(Ku)pesa (kope) (v. tr.), to wink, blink.
(Ku)peta (v. tr.), to bend, crook.
(Ku)petana (v. rcc.), to be bout, crooked, perverse.
P'ete (u. 3) ring.
-pevu (var. adj.), old, full-grown ; (Ku)pevuka (v. n.), to be full- grown, old.
Pezi (n. 5). fin (of fish).
-piT (var. inter, adj.), which?
Pia (n. 3), top, spinning-top ; (conj.), also, too, as well as (tee note on -ote, Study X.).
Pia-pia (adv.), all over, through- out.
(Ku)piga (v. tr.), to beat, strike, knock (this verb tikes its meaning largely from the noun it is coupled with : see note 14, Study V.).
(Ku)piga bunduki, to fire a gun ; (Ku)piga hodi, to announce one's arrival by calling Hodi ! to knock at the door (cquiv.) ; (Ku)piga kofi, to slap, smite, strike, bos on the ears (with the open hand) ; (Ku)piga kofi, to clap hands ; (Ku)piga maru- fuku, to prohibit ; ya msikiti, to excommunicate; (Ku)piga- piga (v. red.), to beat a little, throb ; (Ku)piga rago, to camp ; (Ku)piga randa, to plane; (Ku)piga utari, to tow.
(Ku)pigana (v. rec.), to fight, contend, wrestle.
(Ku)piganya (v. c.), to blend, mingle, mix.
(Ku)pigilia (v. prep.), to make a solid floor or roof by beating with large flat hammers.
(Ku)pigizana (v. rec.). to resemble, t •) be alike.
Pigo (n. 5), stroke, blow.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
219
(Ku)pika (v. tr.), to cook, boil. Pili (num. adj.), two (in count- ing); -a pili (var. ordl.), the second, the other. Pilipili (n. 3), pepper ; Pilipili manga, black (Arabian) pepper; Pilipili hokho, red (African) pepper. (Ku)pima (v. tr.), to measure,
weigh, take measurements of. (Ku)pimwa (v. pas. appd.), to bo
measured for (coat, etc.). (Ku)pinda (v. tr.), to beiid. (Ku)pindamana, to be bent,
curved, crooked.
Pindi (n. 3), appointed time; (adv.), when, at such time as, so long as, while.
Pindo (n. 3), Ixirder of garment, Lrenerally embroidered selvedge.
(Ku)pindua (v. tr.), to overturn, upset, turn up-side down.
Pindwani (inv. adj.), crooked, perverse, morally oblique.
(Ku)pinga (v. tr.), to hinder, thwart, oppose, reject, with- stand.
(Kn)pingamana na, to be con- trary to, opposed to.
Pingu (n. 3), fetter, shackles, handcuffs ; charm, talisman (see hirizi).
Pipa (n. 5), barrel, tub.
Pirimbi (n. 3), flute, pipe.
(Ku)pisha (v. e.), k> make room for one to pass.
Pishi (n. 3), dry goods measure, about two quarts.
(Ku)pita (see degrees of com- parison, Study XVI.) (v. tr.), to pass, pass by, surpass, excel.
(Ku)pitiliwa (v. pas. appd.), to be overlooked, passed by, neg- bcted.
(Ku)pitisha (v. c.), to circu- late; pitisha mkate, pass the bread.
-po (rel. particle, 8th cl.), "Where, when?
(Zu)poa (v. intr.), to get well, recover ; (Ku)poa moto (v. intr.), to become cool, lose heart. (Ku)pofuka (v. n.), to be spoiled ;
(Ku)pofuka mato, to be blind. Pojo (n. 3), species of small pea or
vetch.
(Ku)poka (v. tr.), to deprive, be- reave. (Zu)pokea (v. tr.), to receive, take,
accept.
(Ku)pokonya (v. tr.), to deprive of by force, take or snatch from, spoil, rob, dispossess. P'ole ! I hope you will soon be- better ! (sympathy conveyed by tone of voice), -pole (var. adj.), gentle, quiet,
mild, meek.
P'olep'ole (adv.), gently, meekly, kindly, quietly, slowly, softly, easily yielding.
P'ombe (n. 3), intoxicant made from grain or fruit.
P'omboo (n. 3), porpoise.
(Ku)pomosha (v. c.), to cast down, throw down.
(Ku.pona (v. intr.), to get well, pull through or get over (an illness), to get through safely, to recover, escape.
(Ku)ponda (v. tr.), to pound, crush, beat, bruise, wound.
(Ku)ponda-ponda (v. red.), to re- duce to powder, break by pres- sure, beat continuously.
P'ondo (n. 3), punting-pole.
Pongozi (n. 3), sea-monster.
(Kuyponya (v. c.), to deliver, rescue, save.
(Ku)ponyoka (v. n.), to slip out of one's hand, escape.
P'opo (n. 3), bat, butterfly.
Popoo (n. 3), areca-nut.
(Ku)pooza (v. n.), to be withered, paralysed, palsied.
(Ku)pop'ota (v. tr.), to break, snap, break to pieces.
Popo/e (compr. adj.), any (place)
220
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
whatsoever, anywhere, at any
time. (Ku)popotoa (v. tr.), to strain,
sprain, wring, twist. Pori (n. 3), long tangled forest;
Kutoboa porini = to get out of
the wood. (Ku)posa (v. tr.), to betroth,
espouse, ask in marriagu. Posho (n. 3), food-money, rations,
allowance of provisions. (Ku)pota (v. 'tr.), to bend ; to
string a bow. tot'e (var. adj.), all, every (8th cl.
concord) ; P ote (u. 7, pi.), bow- strings. (Ku)potea (v. n.), to be lost, err,
go astray, perish. (Ku)poteka (v. n.), to be bent ; to
be well strung (bow). Ku)po^elea mbali (v. prepl.), to
be lost for ever, gone out of
reach altogether. (Ku)poteza (v. tr. and c.), to lose,
waste, ruin (morally), lead
astray.
(Ku)potoa (v. tr.), to pervert, dis- tort, disfigure, lead astray, make
crooked ; (v. sub.), to unstring
a bow.
Po'toe(inv. adj.),perverse,crooked. (Ku)potoka (v. n.), to turn from
right course, be perverse. Povu (n. 3). foam, froth, scum. (Ku)poza (v. c.), to heal, to make
well (said of God), cool. P'ua (n. 3), nose, steel. (Ku)pujua (v. tr.),to graze, scratch
slightly. (Ku)pujuka (v. n.), to be grazed
(of the skin), lose self-respect. Pukupuku (n. 3), wasting disease. (Ku)pukulika (v. n.), to wither,
drop off. (Ku)pukusa (v. tr.),to rub between
hands, crumble, throw off, to
shed (fruit). (Ku)pulikiza (v. tr.), to attend,
listen to.
P'umba (n. 3), handful. (Ku)pumbaa (v. n.), to be foolish,
weak, stupid ; to drivel, be
spoiled. (Kuji)pumbaniza (v. ref.), to make
light of. Pumu (n. 5), lung, disease of
lungs (generally asthma). (Ku)pumua (v. iiitr.), to breathe,
rest, recover breath. (Ku)jipunraza (v. ref.), to be at
rest. (Ku)pum(u)zika (v. n.), to take
rest, breathe heavily. (Ku)pum(u)zisha (v. c.), to ease,
give rest to, rest. P'umzi (n. 3), breath, breathing. P'unda (n. 3), ass, donkey ; Punda
milia (n. 3), zebra. P'umte (adv.), a little; P'un<7e
ha<a p'un/Ze ; every now and
again, every moment. (Ku)punguza p'unde ku . . . just to
stop short of ... (Ku)punga (v. tr.), to fan, wave,
swing (as arms in walking). (Ku)pungia (mkono) (v. prepl.),
to beckon to. (Ku)pungna (v. intr.), to become
less, diminish, abate, decrease
(in number). Punguani (n. 3), half caste,
hybrid. (Ku)punguka (v. n.), to fall short,
be wanting, be; deficient, bo
below the standard ; to decrease
(in quantity). Kupungukiwa ni, to lack, be short
of, ba in want of. (Ku)punguza (v. c.), to lessen,
diminish.
Pupa (n. 3), haste, eagerness. (Ku)puruka (v. n.), to fly, fly
away. (Ku)purukusha (v. c.),to postpone,
procrastinate, slight, drive off. (Ku)jipurukusb.a (v. ref.), to be
slack, desultory, casual, to set
lightly by.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
221
P'urukushani (n. 3), foolishness,
senselessness. (Ka)purnra (v. tr.), to pick, pluck,
gather, strip, peel. (Ku)pusa (v. intr.), to leave off
(of rain, etc.). (Ku)puzia (v. prepl.), to blow
upon.
(Ku)pwa (v. intr.), to ebb of tide. Pwani (n. 3), shore, beach, coast. (Ku)pwaya (v. tr.), to clean corn ;
(v. n.), to be loose (clothes,
screws, etc.). (Ku)pwea (v. n.), to come to laud,
reach the shore. Pweke (adj.), unique. (Ku)pwelea (v. prepl), to get low
(water), dry up ; Sauti kupwe-
lea, to be hoarse. (Ku)pweleza (v. c.).to run aground
into shallow or ebbing water, -pya(mpya) (var. adj.), new, fresh,
novel.
B
Raar// (n. 3), thunder, thunder- bolt.
Rabana (n. prop.), our Lord (Mo- hammedan name for God).
Rababi (n. 3), silver.
Rati/d (adj.), content, clement, indulgent, willing, satisfied, favourable.
R^'//(i (n. 3), favour, clemency, pleasure, contentment, blessing, approbation ; Kun r&dhi, do not be angry ; Niwia r&dhi, forgive me.
Rafiki (n. 3 and 5), friend.
Ragham (n. 3), figure, nnmber.
Rago (n. 3), camp ; (Ku)piga rado, to camp, encamp.
Raha (n. 3), rest, ease, luxury, repose, tranquillity ; Raha msterehe; quiet rest, undis- turbed repose.
Rahamani (n. 3), map, chart.
Rahani (u. 3), pledge, security ;
(Ku)weka rahani ; t > pawn. Rahisi (inv. adj.), cheap, easy. Rai (n. 3), strength, prudence,
thought. (Ku)rairai (v. tr.), to beg, beseech,
mollify by entreaty. Rajabu (n. prop.), tenth month in
Moslem year. Rajamu (n. 3), markings on cases
for identification. Raki (n. 3), slaves. Rama<Mani, Mohammedan fast- month. (Ku)ramba (v. tr.), to lick, lick
up. Ramli (n. 3), sand; (Ku)piga
ramli, to tell fortunes (origi- nally by throwing sand). Randa (u. 3), plane ; Kupiga-
randa = to plane. Rangi (u. 3), colour, shade, paint,
tint. (Ku)rarua (v. tr.), to tear, rend,
tatter, tear asunder; (Ku)ra-
ma-rarua (v. red.), to tear to
pieces. (Ku)raruka (v. n.), to be torn,
tattered, rent. Ras(rasi) (u. 3), cape, headland,
promontory. (Ku)rasha-rasha (v. red.), to do
things by halves or superfici- ally.
Rafabu (n. 3), dates (Ar.). Radii (n. 3), pound (In.). (Ku)rauka (v. intr.), to get up
early. (Ka)raukia (v. prepl.), to rouso
early in the morning, pay one
an early visit. Rayia(raia) (u. 3). subject, one
who livts under the power of
another. Reale, Riali (n. 3), Dollar, crown
(2 rupees).
-refu (var. adj.), long, tall. (Ku)rega-rega (v. red.), to waver,
shake about, be rickety, be
222
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
loose, be in a battered con- dition. Eehema (n. 3), mercy, compassion,
pity-
(Ku)rehemu (v. tr.), to have pity or mercy on, take compassion on.
(Ku)rehemea (v. prep.), to have pity, show mercy for (not to).
Eejareja (adv. inv.), retail ; Kuuza rejareja, to sell retail.
(Ku)rejea (v. intr.), to return, go or come back.
(Ku)rejeza (v.c.), to give back, repay.
Eiaka (n. 5), quiver.
Eiali (n. 3), dollar (2 rupees).
Elba (n. 3), interest, usury, covetousness, love of gain.
(Ku)rir7M (v. tr.), to please.
(Ku)rirfMa (v. prcpl.), to grant to, be pleased, comply with, ac- quiesce in.
(Ku)ric7Msha (v. c.), to give satis- faction, cause to accept.
Eihani (n. 3), basil.
Eima (n. 5), large pit (for catching wild animals).
Einda (n. 5), skirt.
(Ku)ringa (v. iutr.), to rejoice, triumph, exult.
Eika (n. 5), an equal.
Eisala (n. 3), message.
Eisasi (n. 3), lead, bullet, ball, shot.
Risau (n. 5), small shot.
(Ku)rithi (v. tr.), to inherit.
(Ku)riyariya (v. red.), to keep looking in one direction, keep one's eye on a thing.
Eizki(riziki) (n. 3), common neces- saries of daily fife.
Eoboo (n. 3), quarter, quarter of a dollar (half rupee) ; Kasu ro- boo, one less a quarter (hence three-quarters).
Eoho (n. 3), spirit, soul, life, im- mortal part of man, disposition, spirit, principle of life; (Ku)ka-
ta roho, to breathe one's last
(breath). Eohoni, part of animal's throat cut
in slaughtering. Eoho Mtakatifu, Holy Spirit. Eojo (n. 5), sediment, dregs. Bokhara (n. 3), alabaster. (Ku)roromoka (v. n.), to spread
(over a surface), diffuse, run. Eoshani (n. 3), balcony, over- hanging verandah. Euaza (n. 3), pattern, model. Eubani (n. 3), pilot guide. (Ku)ru(/i (v. intr.), to go or come
back, return, retire, shrink (of
clothes, etc.) ; (v. tr.) to punish,
chastise. (Ku)ru</isha (v. tr.), to draw back,
give back, return. (Ka)rufuku (v. tr.), to prohibit,
refuse (sec marufuku). Eugurugu (n. 5), swelling. Enhusa, Eukhusa, Eukhsa (n. 3),
leave, permission, liberty. (Ku)ruk'a (v. tr. and iutr.), to leap,
jump, fly, spring, skip, leave
out (in reading, etc.). (Ku)mk'wa ni akili, to be deprived
of one's senses (by a blow), be
stunned. (Ku)ruk'iza (v. c.), to omit, pass
over, skip. (Ku)runda (v. intr.), to be stunted
in growth. Eungu (n. 5), club, staff, knob-
kerry, shillelagh, blunderbuss. Eupia (n. 3), rupee. (Ku)rusha (v.c.), to throw info
the air, throw over, desert,
cast off; (Ku)rusha maji, to
splash.
Eushwa, rushua (n. 3), bribe. Entuba (n. 3), moisture, damp
soil, humidity. (Ku)ruza (v. intr.), to give up as
impossible. (Ka)ruzuku (v. tr.), to supply
with the necessaries of life.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
223
Sa ! (inlcrj.). Yes (sir?) ! here I am !
Saa (n. 3), hour, time, watch, clock; Saangapi? What time?
(Ku)saa (v. n.), to remain, be left.
Saamani (n. 3), tea-things, uten- sils (see Samani).
Sabaa (inv. num. adj.), seven ; -a sabaa, the seventh.
Sabaafaashara (num. adj.), seven- teen.
Sababu (n. 3), cause, reason ; Kwa sababu ya, because of, by reason of.
(Kwa) sababu (gani) ? For what cause? why?
(Ka)sabahi (v. tr.), to greet or pay respects to in the morning.
Sabaifu (n. 3), Sabbath.
Sabuini (num. adj.), seventy.
Sabuni (n. 3), soap.
Saburi (also sabira) (n. 3), patience, forbearance, en- durance perseverance.
Sato (see msaada); (Ku)jaalia saJa, to grant help or grace.
Sadhabu (n. 3), aniseed.
SarZaka (n. 3), sacrifice, alms, offering.
(Ku)sadiki (v. intr.), to believe, credit.
Sa'fiki (adj. inv.), credible, truth- ful.
Safari (n. 3), journey, voyage.
Safi(Swafi) (inv. adj.), clean, pure, guileless, ingenuous, net (weight).
(Ka)safi (v. tr.), (Ku)safisha (v. c.), to clean, cleanse, purify, refine.
(Ku)safiri (v. intr.), to travel, take a journey, start on a journey, set out.
Safu (n. 3), row, line, Lost, army, rank.
Safura (n. 3), Anaemia, dropsy.
(Ku)saga (v. tr.), to grind, reduce to powder; Jiwe la knsagia, grindstone.
(Zu)sagika (v. n.). to be bruised.
Sahala (n. 3), facility, levity, lightness.
(Zu)sahalika (v. n.). to be relaxed.
Sahani (n. 3), plate, dish.
(Ka)sahau (v. tr.), to forget; (Ku)- sahauliwa (v. pass.), to be for- gotten.
(Kuji)sahauliza (v. ref.), to forget one's self.
(Ku)sahanza (v. c.), to make oblivious of.
Sahibu (n. 5), friend.
Sabibl (n. 3), signature, sanction ; (adj.), correct, right, authentic.
Sai<7i (n. 5), prince, sultan, king, lord.
(Ku)sai</ia (v. tr.), to help, assist, aid, succour.
(Ka)sai'Ziana (v. rec.), to help each other.
Sai'/ina, our Lord, your majesty.
(Ku)saili (v. tr.) to question, in- terrogate.
Sakafu (n. 3), beaten floor or roof or pavement.
Sakaramen/i (n. 3), sacrament.
Sala (n. 3), prayer, liturgical formal prayer (in the sense of adoration rather than of petition).
Salala ! (intcrj ), What next !
Salama (n. 3), safety, peace, wel- fare, well-being; (adj.), safe, well, all right; (Ku)weka sa- lama, to keep safely.
Salamu (n. 3) (origly. safety, peace, preservation, deliver- ance), greeting, compliments, kind regards.
(Ku)sali (v. intr.), io say prayers, pray.
(Ku)salia (v. prepl.), to remain over (used intransitively).
(Ku)salibu (v. tr.), to crucify ; (Ka)salibiwa (v. pass.), to be crucified.
Salihi (inv. adj.), good, just, righteous.
224
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
(Ku)salimika (v. n.), to be safe (said of the soul when dying).
(Ku)salinm (salimia) (v. tr.), to greet, send greetings to.
Nisalimia fulani, give my compli- ments to (so and so).
(Ku)saliti (v. tr.), to betray, mingle.
(Ku)salisha (v. c.), to make pray, , by reading, leading or taking prayers.
(Ku)sallimu (v. tr.), to surrender, consecrate.
Sanuu/i (n. 3), manure, dunpr.
Samaki (n. 8), fish; Samaki wa kuk'anga, fried fish (see vua).
Samani (n. 3), tools, utensils, household things.
Samawi (adj.), blue, sky-blue.
Samawad (n. 3), skies, heavens.
Sambamba (adv.), with a train, or following, in line, in rank (as soldiers).
Sambo (u. 3), vessel.
(Ku)samene (v. tr.), to forgive, pardon, excuse.
Samli (n. 3), clarified butter.
Sana (intensifying adverb), very, a great deal, much, etc.
Sanaa (n. 3), Art, craft, handi- craft, skilled work.
Sanamu (n. 3), idol, image, pic- ture.
Sanda (n. 3), shroud, winding- sheet.
Sandali (n. 3), sandal wood.
Sandarusi (n. 3), gum-copal.
Sanduku (n. 5), box, chest, case, chest-of-drawers, etc.
(Ku)sangaa (v. iutr.), to be per- plexed, be in a dilemma, embarrassed, to stand still, from doubt or astonishment.
(Ku)sanii (v. tr.), to fashion with skill, elaborate, work dex- terously.
Sanfuri (n. 3), harp, musical box.
Sarafa (n. 3), exchange (money).
Sarahangi(n. 3), first mate (naut.).
Saramala (n. 5), carpenter, joiner, wheelwright, cabinet maker.
Sarara (n. 3), loin.
Sare (Jina la sare), surname.
Saruf (n. 3), grammar.
Sasa (adv.), now, at this time, at present; Sasa hivi (adv.), im- mediately, directly, at once, presently, just now.
(Ku)sasanya (v. tr.), to gather.
8a(u (n. 3), python, serpent.
Saumu (n. 3). fasting, abstinence from liquids, thirst, Lent.
Sauti (n. 3), voice, sound, tune.
Sawa (adj.), equal, right, correct, straight, just.
(Ku)sawanisha, (Ku)sawanyiza (v.c.), to put straight or right, equalize, level, make alike.
Sawasawa (adj. red.), alike, just the same, even, level.
(Ku)saza (v. c.), to leave over, cause to remain ; Kusaza ku (fa), to be almost (dead) ; Kusaza ikdogo na, to be almost entirely.
Sebule (n. 3), private room, separated lobby near entrance.
Sehemu (n. 3), portion, share, part.
Sekeneko (n. 3), syphilis.
(Ku)selehi (v. intr.), to be service- able, be of use.
(Ku)sema (v. intr.), to say, speak ; (v. tr.), to mention, accuse, tell talcs of, denounce ; (Ku)sema uwongo, to tell lies; (Ku)ji- semea (v. ref.), to meditate, muse, talk idly, complain ; Ku)semeka (v. u.), to be said, be sayable ; (Ku)jisemezana (v. rec.), to talk together.
(Ku)sengenya (v. tr.), to slander, backbite.
Serikali (n. 3), the government.
Seruji (n. 3), saddle.
(Ku)seseteka (v. intr.), to reel, stagger.
Shaaban (n. prop.), eleventh month in Mohammedan year.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Shaba (n. 3), brass.
Shabaha (n. 3), aim, mark, target.
Shada (n. 5), nosegay, sprig.
Shaha (n. 5), prince, king, chief, great man.
Sb.ab.amu (n. 3), fat.
Shahada (n. 3), forefinger ; (Ku)- piga shahacfa, to witness to Mohammedan by reciting creed with first or index finger up- lifted.
Shahidi (n. 5), witness.
Shairi (n. 5), verse of poetry, poet.
Shaka (n. 5), doubt, distrust, suspicion. (Hana shaka = he is the man for the business.)
Shakawa (n. 5), oifence, quarrel, opposition, hostility.
Shake (n. 5), sea-gull.
Shali (n. 3), shawl.
Sham (prop, n.), Syria.
Shamasi (n. 5), deacon.
Shamba (u. 5), field, garden, plantation, cultivated ground.
(Ku)shambua (v. tr.), to peel, husk, clean, pick, pare.
(Ku)shambulia (v. prep.), to attack, assault, lay waste.
Shamili (n. 5), ear ornaments.
Shangazi (n. 5), aunt (father's sister).
(Ku)shangiria (v. prep.), to shout for joy, rejoice, triumph.
Shangwe (n. f>), joy, excitement, ornament, frontlet.
Shani (n. 3), power, glory, ma- jesty, beauty, lovely thing.
Shari (n. 5), evil, ill.
Sharia (n. 3), law.
(Ku)shariki (v. intr.), to go shares, take part in, communi- cate; (Ku)sharikana, to par- ticipate, communicate.
Shard, Shad, Sharurt (adv.), of necessity, " must," by all means.
Sharuti (n. 3), obligation, com- pulsory matters, misfortune. SWAHILI GRAMMAR
(Ku)shaua (v. intr.), to make fair promises not intending to fulfil.
Shauku (n. 3), lust, desire.
Shauri (n. 5), palaver, council, plan, advice, counsel, device, consultation.
(Ku)shauri (v. tr.), to advise, consult.
Shawi (n. 5), bud, branch.
(Ku)shawishi (v. tr.), to tempt, coax.
Shazi (n. 5), oyster- shell.
Shehe (Shekhe) (n. 5), chief, great man.
Shehena (n. 5), cargo, load.
Shela (n. 5), hammock.
Shemegi (n. 3), brother-in-law, sister-in-law (a woman calls her sister-in-law, wifi).
Sherbet (n. 3), drink, beverage, sherbet.
Sherehe (n. 3), rejoicing, mirth.
Sheshe (n. 3), novelty, wonder.
(Ku)sheta (v. tr.), to bruise, crush; (Ku)sheteka (v. n.), to be broken in pieces, to be bruised.
(Ku)sheta-sheta (v. red.), to break in pieces.
Shefani, Sheifani, Shaifani (prop, n.), Satan, devil.
(Ku)shiba (v. intr.), to be satis- fied, be full, have enough.
Shiba (n. 3), abundance, suffi- ciency, enough.
Sbibiri (n. 3), span, handbreadth.
Shi(/a (n. 3), hardship, difficulty, strenuousness.
(Ku)shika (v. tr.), to hold, clasp, seize, grasp, take ; (Ku)shi- kana, (Ku)shikamana (v. rec.), to hold together, cleave or stick together, adhere.
Shikamou (lit. Nashika maguu),
slave's greeting to a superior. Shikazi (n. 5), dollar. Shikio, sikio (n. 5), ear, handle. (Ku)shiliza (v. tr.), to complete,
226
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
to finish ; Ameshilizwa. his education has been completed.
Shimo (n. 5), hole, hollow, pit, cayity, cell.
Shina (n. 5), root, trunk.
Shinda (inv. adj.), half full, partly full, half empty.
(Ku)shinda (see note on Study XVI). (v. tr.), to conquer, sur- pass, excel, beat ; (v. intr.), to stay, remain, pass (time), pay a visit, spend the day.
(Ku)shindamana (v. rec.), to be compact, fitting close into each other.
(Ku)sMndana (v. rec.), to com- plete, dispute, contend to.
(Ku)shindika (v. tr. ), to shut to, to close (door without fasten- ing), press (used of extracting vegetable oil and bottling mineral waters).
(Ku)shindikiza (v. c.), to accom- pany part of the way.
(Ku)shindilia (v. prepl ), to press down, compress.
(Ku)shindua (v. sub.), to open, undo.
Shingo (n. 3 and 5), neck.
(Ku)shiriki (see shariki).
KnshUaki (v. tr.), to accuse, charge with wrong-doing.
(Ku)shifruka (see kushutuka).
Shoka (n. 5), axe, hatchet.
Shokoa (n. 3), forced labour, compulsion.
Shokole (n. 3), eel.
Shomoro (n. 5), sparrow.
(Ku)shona (v. tr.), sew, mend.
(Kn)shonewa (v. prepl. pass.), to be sewn for, have made for one.
(Ku)shonoka (v. n.), to become unsewn.
(Ku)shonua (v. sub.), to unpick, unstitch, undo.
Shore (u. 5)(?) swallow.
Shofo (short form of kushoto), left-handed.
(Ku)shua (v. tr.), to launch.
Shuari (shuwari) (n. 3), calm.
(Ku)shuhudia (v. prepl.), Ku- shulmdu (v. tr.), Kushuhudiza (v. c.), to witness or testify to, bear witness.
Shuhuli, shughuli (n. 3), busi- ness, occupation, employment ; Hana shuhuli = he is just the one.
(Ku)shuhulika (v. n.), to be pressed with business, be occu- pied.
Shujaa (n. 5), warrior, brave man, hero, champion.
Shuka (n. 3 and 5), length of cloth (four hands), loin cloth, sheet.
(Ku)shuka (v. intr.), to go or come down, descend, get cut, alight ; (Ku)shusha (v. c.), to let down, put down, send down ; Kushusha p'umzi, to breathe deep.
Shake (n. 5), ear of corn.
Shukurani (n. 3), praise, thanks- giving.
(Ku)shukuru (v. tr.), to give thanks, worship, have prayers ; (Ku)shukurisha (v. c.), to con- duct worship or prayers.
(Ku)shuru<iza (kusharutiza) (v. c.), to constrain, compel, per- suade.
(Ku)shutuka (v. n.), to start, move suddenly.
(Ku)shu<umu (v. tr.), to reproach, revile, insult.
Si (neg. simple copula, sing, and pi.), (he, she, it) is not ; (they) are not.
Si (1st p. sing, neg., strong verb to be), I am not.
-si- (neg. inf.), not. Mt'u asiye kwao, man with no home.
Siafu (n. 3), soldier-ant, biting- ant.
Siagi (n. 3), butter.
Siala (n. 5), question.
Siara, see Ziara.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
227
Sibabu (n. 3), see Sababu.
Sifa (n. 3), praise, commendation, fame, reputation.
(Ku)sifu (v. tr.), to praise, com- mend ; (Ku)sifiwa (v. pass.), to be praised.
(Ku)jisifu (v. ref.),to boast, sound one's own praises.
Sifuri (n. 3), copper.
Sifuria (see Sufuria), (n. 5), sauce- pan, pot (primarily of copper).
(Ku)sibl (v. tr.), to beseech, im- plore, beg; Nakusihi, if you please.
-sije (ver. inf.), lest (followed by Ka tense).
Siki (n. 3), vinegar.
(Ku)sikia (v. tr.), to hear, feel, be sensible or conscious of, take in, comprehend, obey.
(Ku)sikilika (v. n.), to be audible with difficulty.
(Ku)sikilikana (v. n.), to be audible, be Leaid (all round), come to be known.
(Ku)sikiiika (v. n.), to be sorry, regret, grieve, mourn.
(Ku)sikidkiwa (v. pass.), to be lamented or pitied.
(Ku)sikiza (v. tr.), to hearken, listen.
Siku (n. 3), day (24 hours) ; Siku k'uu, great day, festival, fete.
Siku kwa sikn (adv.). every now and then, intermittently, fit- fully.
Siku ha<a siku (adv.), day by day, regularly, daily, day after day.
(Kilia)siku (adv.), every day ; Siku hizi (adv.), nowadays ; Sikuzote (adv.), always.
Siku biyo -— once upon a time. Silaha (n. 3.), weapon, arms. Silisili (n. 3), chain.
(Ku)silimu (v. intr.), to capitu- late ; Kusalimu Kiswahili, to become Mohammedan ; Kusa- limu Kimashia, to become Christian.
Sima (n. 3), Indian-corn porridge.
(Ku)simama (v. intr.), to stand up, stand still, rise, stop (as of machinery).
(Ku)simamia (v. prepl.), to super- vise, superintend, oversee, stand up for, espouse cause of.
(Ku)simamisb.a (v. c.), to estab- lish, set upright, make stand up.
Simanzi (n. 3), grief, sorrow.
Simba (n. 3), lion ; Simba Marara, man-eating hyaena (striped).
Sime (n. 3), sword, scimitar.
Simi equals si mimi ; Simi nayo, I have not.
(Ku)simika (v. tr.), to erect, set up.
Simo (n. 3), proverb, parable by word. Also verb to be with suffix I am not in it, or con- nected with it.
Simu (n. 3), electric wire, tele- phone, telegraph, cable ; Ku- piga simu, to telephone, etc.
Sintfano (n. 3), needle.
Singa (n. 3), hair (of animals).
Singiza (singizia) (v. tr.), to slander, calumniate, accuse, suspect.
Sinia (n. 3), tray, salver.
(Ku)sinyaa (v. n.), to wither, wrinkle.
(Zu)sinzia (v. intr.), to slumber, doze, be drowsy.
(Ku)sinzilia (v. prepl.), to look askance at, watch suspiciously.
-sipo (v. inf.), except, if.
(Ku)sira-sira (v. tr.), to scamp (work), tiifle with.
Siri (u. 3), secret, mystery.
(Ku)sisimka (v. n.), to sliuddrr thrill, tremble.
(Ku)sisitiza (v. tr.), to enjoin, charge, pre. s upon, to entreat.
Si/a (inv. num adj.), six.
(Ku)siJa (v. intr.), to hesitate, doubt.
228
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Siteashara (inv. num. adj.),
sixteen. Sit&di (adj.), skilful, expert,
clever. Sifaha (n. 3), politeness, deck of
a vessel.
(Ku)sifahabu, vide Sdahabu. (Ku)sitahamili (v. intr.), to en-
dure, be patient, bear, suffer. (Ku)sifahi (v. tr.), to respect,
reverence, honour. (Ku)sitehili (v. intr.), to be
worthy, deserving, deserve,
merit. Sifara (n. 3), covering, cloak,
secret place, protection for
faults. (Ku)sitarelie (v. intr.), to be at
ease, at leisure, at rest. Sitarehe ! do not disturb your- self ! pray do not get up ! (said
to those inside house by person
entering).
Si/awa (n 3), prosperity, abun- dance. (Ku)sUawi (v. intr.), to flourish,
prosper, grow, succeed. (Ku)sifawisha (v. c.), to make
succeed or do well. Si<i (n. 3), virgin. Sitiini (inv. num. adj.), sixty. (Ku)sttiri (v. tr.), to hide, cover,
protect, defend. (Ku)si<irika (v. n.), to be hidden,
concealed. Siuzs (lit. don't ask about), much
more, much less. Siyo, sivyo (adv. neg.), no ! not
so, not thus (these are not
they).
Soko (n. 3), market, bazaar. (Ku)sokoia (v. tr.), to plait, spin,
weave, twist, twine. (Ku)soma (v. intr.), to read, go to
school, study. (Ku)somesha (v. c.), to teach (to
read), instruct. Somo (n. 5), reading lesson ; (n. 3),
friend, chum (namesake).
(Ku)sonda (v. tr.), to suck.
(Ku)songa (v. tr.), to press, crowd, close up, oppress, squeeze, choke, plait (hair).
(Zu)songana (v. rec.), to throng, jostle.
(Ku)songea (v. prepl.), to ap- proach, come near to.
(Ku)songeza (v. c.), to bring near to.
(Ku)songoa (v. tr.), to strangle, suffocate.
(Ku)sonona (v. intr.), to be rest- less, uneasy.
Sononeko (n. 5), grief, pain, un- easiness.
(Ku)sonya (v. tr.), to scorn, dis- dain, make mocking sound at, pooh-pooh, to draw up the lips in disgust.
Sote (adj.). all (of us).
(Ku)soza (v. tr.), to touch, strike, hit.
(Ku)sozana (v. rec.), to jostle, collide.
(Ku)s<ahabu. (v. intr.), to choose, prefer.
Stambul (n. prop.), Constanti- nople.
Subili (n. 3), aloe.
Subira (n. 3), patience.
(Ku)subiri (v. iutr.), to have patience, wait.
(Ku)subu (v. tr.), to smelt, cast.
(Ku)suburishana (v. rec.), to ex- hort mutually to patience.
(Ku)subuiu (v. intr.), to dare, have courage.
Sufi (n. 3), wool
Sufuri (n. 3), copper.
Sufuria (n. 5), copper saucepan.
(Ku)sugna (v. tr.), to rub, scrub, scour, polish by rubbing.
(Ku)sujudu, to worship, bow down to.
(Ku)suka (v. tr.), to plait, twist, spin, weave.
(Ku)suka-suka (v. n.), to shake about, tremble, sway.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
229
Sukani (n. 3), rudder, helm ; Ku-
shika sukani, to steer. Sukari (n. 3), sugar ; Mnara wa
sukari, sugar loaf; Sukari ya
mawe, lump sugar ; Sukari ya
Bungala (i.e. Bengal), moist
sugar. (Ku)sukuma (v. tr.), to push,
hustle, drive. (Ku)sukumiza (v. c.), to cast off,
«et asi«lc, throw over, thrust at,
semi right away. Sukuo (n. 3), large grindstone. (Ku)sukutua (v. tr.), to rinse the
month.
(Ku)snluhisha (v. c.), to concili- ate, make peace. Suluhu Salufani (n. 5), sultan, king,
emperor. (Ku)sumbua (v. tr.), to trouble,
vex, annoy, worry, harrass,
torment. Sumile ! make way ! (Contraction
of Bismillahi, in rae name of
God.) Sumu (n. 3), poison, natural
enemy. (See " African Aphor- ism," p. 117.) (Kn)sumulia (v. intr.), to talk,
chat, converse. (Ku)sumulika (v. n.), to be told,
talked about. Sungula (n. 3), hare. (Ku)sunza (v. tr.), to shake. Sara (n. 3), feature, countenance,
form of face, chapter of Koran. Suria (n. 5), concubine. Suruji (n. 3), inferior mortar. Suruale (n. 3), trousers. Susani (u. 3), Ua la susani, lily. Susu (n. 3), hanging-shelf for
food.
Suudi (n. 3), interest, usury. Suwesi (n. prop.), Suez. Swali, Suali (n. 5), question. Swi (n. 3), fish (obsolete). Swiswi (pron.), we, us.
T
(Zu)ta (v. tr.), to put forth, lay (eggs).
-<a- (verbal infix, indicating future tense).
Taa (n. 3), fish with long thin tail — the thrasher or sting ray.
Taa (n. 3), lamp, lantern ; T'aa, obedience, submission.
(Ku)toabika (v. n.), to be in trouble, be distressed, be anxious.
jTaabu (n. 3), hardship, trouble, adversity, mischief, misfortune, distress.
(Ku)faajabu (v. n.), to wonder, be astonished, be amazed.
(Ku)teakMri (v. intr.), to be late, delay, tarry, linger, loiter.
Taarishi (n. 3), mail-runner, mail- bearer.
(Ku)fabasanro (v. intr.), to smile.
Tabekero (n. 3), snuff-box.
Tabia (n. 3), nature, character, disposition, temper.
Tabiba (n. 5), physician.
(Ku)tabiri (v. iutr.), to prophesy, foretell, prognosticate.
(Ku)tabua (v. tr.), to break down, rend, destroy.
Tafad/jali ! please do me the kindness, I beg of you.
(Ku)tafakari (v. intr.), to con- sider, reflect, meditate, think.
Tafauti (n. 3), difference; Ku- weka Zofauti, to make a differ- ence, differentiate.
Tafi (n. 3), Indian-Ocean fish not much accounted of.
(Ku)tafiti (v. intr.), to pry into.
(Ku)fafuna (v. tr.), to chew, masticate, eat. (Yuatafuna Kiswahili kanamaji, he is a fluent speaker in Swahili).
Tafsiri (n. 3), interpretation, explanation.
(Ku)tefusiri (v. tr.), to translate, interpret.
230
SWAHILI GKAMMAR
(Ku)<afute (v. tr.), to seek or
look for, search, investigate,
examine.
(Kn)taga (v. tr.), to lay (eggs). T'agaa (n. 7, pi.), stems, branches. (Ku)/agua (v. tr.), to choose,
elect. 7'ab.abihu (Kutia), to flourish,
sword. (Ku)/ahadhari (v. intr.), to
beware, to take heed, be on
one's guard, to avoid. Tahara (n. 3), eircumcisiou. (Ku)/aharuki (v. intr.\ to be
excited by anger, be dismayed,
be vexed. (Ku;<ahayari (v. intr.), to be
ashamed. (Ku)ji<ahirfi (v. ref.), to exert
one's self, take pains. (Ku)tehiri (v. tr.), to circumcize. Tai (n. 3), eagle. Taib (inv. adj.), well, good. Taifa (n. 3), nation, Gentile. T'aja (n. 3), tribute, tax. (Ku)taja (v. tr.), to mention,
name.
Taji (n. 5), crown. 7'ajindi (n. 3), elocution. Tajiri (n. 5), rich man. (Ku)<aka (v. tr.), to want, desire,
need, ask, request. Taka (n. 3), dirt, filth ; Takataka
(n. 3), rubbish, refuse, offal. (Ku)fakaba(7M (v. tr.), to receive,
accept.
(Ku)<akabali, sec Kubali. (Ku)tokabari (v. intr.), to be
proud.
(Ku)<akadamu (v. tr.), to precede. (Ku)takasa (v. tr.), to cleanse,
purify, clean, sanctify. (Ku)takasika (v. u.), to be
cleansed, to become extra- ordinarily clean. (Ku)takata (v. n.), to become
clean or clear, be pure, -takatifu (var. adj.), holy, sacred, pure, saintly, chaste.
Takato (n. 5), chastity, cleanli- ness, purity.
Takia (n. 5), footstool, cushion.
Talaka (n. 3), divorce.
Talasimu (n. 3), amulet, charm, talisman, phylactery.
(Ku)teliza (v. tr.), to plaster, to daub.
Tama (n. 3), end, finis, it is finished ; Tama (n. 5), cheek ; T'ama (n. 3), refuse, rubbish, sweepings, offscourings.
(Ku)/ama(v. intr.), to move (from one house to another), emi- grate ; (v. n.), to come to an end : (Kushika)tama (v. intr.), lo meditate, reflect, be silent (lit., to hold the check).
(Ku)/amisha (v. c.), to remove.
Tamaa (n. 3), desire, longing, lust, craving, coveting.
(Ku)<amalaM (v. tr.), to rule, govern, possess, appropriate, purchase, to be promoted.
(Ku)temani (v. tr.), to desire, long for, covet, lust tifter.
Tamasha (n. 3), curiosity, show, something rare.
(Ku)tamba (v. intr.), to go about, walk abroad, pass through.
T'ambi (n. 7, pi.), macaroni, ver- micelli (made by Swahili house- wives).
(Ku)tambaa (v. intr.), to creep, crawl, spread.
Tambarare (inv. adj.), level, flat; N<i ya tambarare, a plain.
T'ambazi (n. 3), abscess.
(Ku)tambua (v. tr.), to recognize, discern, distinguish, decipher.
(Ku)tambulikana (v. n.), to be recognizable, discernible.
(Xu)tamburikana (v. n.), to be well known.
(Ku)tambmisha (v. c.), to make known, to decide.
Tambuu (n. 3), leaf of betel -treo
used for chewing. Tamko (n. 5), pronunciation,
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
231
enunciation, accent, utterance, promise, speech, expression, word.
Tanm (n. 3), sweetness, pleasant- ness.
-<amu (var. adj.), sweet, nice, delicious. (This can bo used adverbially.)
(Ku)tana (v. tr.), to separate, slit up, comb.
(Ku)tanakali (v. n.), to be trans- lated, carried away.
(Ku)<anawari (v. intr.), to shine, jriv<; light.
T'anda (n. 3), link of chain, husk, shell.
(Ku)tanda (v. tr.), to spread out, lace (with rope) ; (v. intr.), to be spread out, be set in array.
Tande (n. 3), tortoise.
Tan</aa (n. 3), open country cleared by burning under- growth.
(Ku)tandika (v. tr.), to spread out, lay in order, set in array.
Tandu (n. 3), tattooing, tribal incisions in face ; (n. 5), web ; Tandu la buibui, spider's web.
Tandu (n. 3), centipede.
T'anda (n. 7, pi.), film or crust on cooked rice, etc.
(Ku)tandua (v. sub.), to strip (a bed) (in contradistinction to tandika, making a bed) and roll up the bedding.
(Ku)tanduka (v. n.), to be folded or rolled up.
Tanga (n. 5), sail; Tanga mbili; period of •variable winds between SW. and NE. Mon- soon after Demani.
(Ku)tanga (v. tr.), to split (as wood).
(Ku)Janga (v. intr.), to wander, err, stroll, collect, or contribute (as of money).
(Ku)/anga-/anga (v.), to stroll or wander about.
(Ku)tangaa (v. n.), to be spread
abroad, be circulated, be well known.
(Ku)tengamana (v. rec.), to be mixed together, make common cause, have fellowship with, join.
Tangamano (n. 5), league.
(Ku)tengamka (v. n.), to cheer up, throw off grief, take courage.
Tangamko (u. 5), joy, cheer, rejoicing.
(Ku)tangamsha (v. c.), to en- courage, cheer.
(Ku)tenganya (v. tr.), to mix, mingle, blend, betray.
(Ku)tenganyika (v. n.), to be mixed.
(Ku)/anganyikana (v. rec.), to be intermingled.
Tangauko (n. 5), trouble, vexa- tion, strength.
Tangawe (n. 3), gravel, grit.
Tangawizi (n. 3), ginger.
(Ku)tangaza (v. c.), to publish, announce, make known, de- clare, divulge.
Tange (n. 3), newly-cleared ground.
Tangi (n. 3), tank, cistern.
(Ku)tengisha (v. c.), to scatter.
Tango (n. 5), contribution, pumpkin, gourd.
Tango pepete (n. 5), dwarf cucumber.
Tangu (adv.), since, after ; Tangu zamani, a long time ago; -a tangu, from the beginning ; Zamani za tangu, old times ; Tangu lini ? since when ? how long ago ?
(Ku)fangua (v. tr.), to abrogate, annul, abolish, bring to nought, make void, separate, loosen.
(Ku)tangulia (v. tr.), to go before, lead the way, be in front, fore- stall, precede.
Tani (inv. adj.), wide-open, out- stretched, uplifted,
232
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Tankil (n. 3), copy (manu- script).
-tano (var. num. adj.). five ; -a /ano, fifth.
Tanu (or fanuu) (n. 3), oven, furnace, kiln.
(Ku)<anua (v. intr.), to expand, stride, stretch out, spread.
(Ku)fanuka (v. n.), to be stretched out ; Kutanuka t'ani, to lie prone with arms extended.
Tanzi (n. 5), snare, trap, noose, loop.
Tanzia (n. 3), announcement of death.
jT'anzu (n. 3), large branch of tree, bough.
Tao (n. 5), arch, curve, bay, harbour.
(Ku)<apa (v. inir.), to shiver, tremble ; Ku£apa-/apa (v. intr.), to fidget, be restless, flounder.
(Xu)fapakaa (v. n.), to be dis- tributed, scattered broadcast, spread.
(Ku)/apanya (v. tr.). to scatter, dis-perse, throw about.
Tapasi (n. 5), chisel (see Patasi).
(Ku)tapika (v. tr.), to vomit, be sick.
(Ku)tarac7/aa (v. pr.), to be pleased with.
Taraji (n. 3), hope, expectation ; Kuteraji (v. tr.), to hope ; Ku- farajia, to hope for, expect.
Tarambeta (n. 3), cornet, bugle.
Taralibu (n. 3), order, decorum, method; (adj.), orderly, care- fully.
Tari (n. 3), timbrel, cymbal.
Tarishi (n. 5), mail-man, runner.
-/asa (v. inf.), not yet, before, ere ; T'asa (inv. adj.), barren ; 7 asa (n. 3), basin.
Tasbihi (n. 3), rosary (contains 99 beads, each one said 1o stand for a name of God).
Tashuishi (n. 3), doubt, mis- giving, distrust.
Tasibili (adj. and n. 3), quickly, haste, rapidity.
Tasila (n. 3), farewell, adieu, leave-taking.
Tasuira (n. 3), picture, en- graving, image.
(Ku)tata (v. intr.), to be en- tangled, complicated, wind.
(Ku)tatanua (v. sub.), to dis- entangle, unravel, solve, un- wind.
(Ku)tatiza (v. tr.), to tie round (parcel).
-tatu (var. num. adj.), tliron; -a tatu, third; T'&tu (n. 3), yeast, leven, fermentation, balm.
(Ku)tatua (v. tr.), to rend, tear, burst, rip up, to unravel, to extricate.
(Ku)tatuka (v. n.). to Ic dis- entangled, unravelled, disin- tegrated, torn into tatters.
Kufatuka (v. n.), to clear away (of clouds).
Tau (n. 3), branding-iron.
(Ku)teua (see Teua) (v. tr.). to choose, elect.
Taumu (n. 5). prop, shore (for boats).
Tauni (adj. and n. 3), pestilence, plague.
Taureti (n. 3), Mosaic law, Pentateuch.
Tausi (n. 3), peacock.
Tauwaa (var. adj.), devout, pious, godly, religious.
Tavu (n. 5), cheek (of face); T'avu, calves (of legs), biceps (muscle), (sing. Utevu).
T'awa (n. 3), louse ; Kutawa (v. intr.), to remain indoors, be secluded (women).
(Ku)£awaeMa (v. intr.), to per- form ceremonial ablutions.
(Ku)iawakali (v. intr.), to trust, have confidence, rely.
(Ku)lawala (v. tr.), govern, reign, have power over.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
233
(Xu)tewanya (v. tr.), to scatter,
disperse, dissipate. (Ku)tewanyika (v. n.), to be
scattered. (Ku)/awaza (v. c.), to enthrone,
install (as ruler). 7'awi (n. 5), branch. !/'aya (n. 3), jaw, jawbone, cheek- bone ; (Ku)taya (v. tr.), to
reproach. Tayari(tiari) (inv. adj.), ready,
willing; Kuweka <ayari, to
prepare. (Ku)tefua (v. tr.), to stir up,
raise, trouble, agitate. (Ku)tega (v. tr.), to snare, entrap,
decoy ; Kutega sikio, to lend
an ear, to incline the ear. Tege (n. 5), bowed-leg. (Ku)tegemea (v. tr.), to lean upon
(literally and figuratively). (Ku)tegemeza (v. c.),' to support,
prop. Tego (n. 3), snare, trap, charm,
spell. (Ku)tegua (v. sub.), to remove,
undo, sprain.
(Ku)teguka (v. n.), to be sprained. (Ku)teka (v. tr.), to draw (as
water), capture, plunder, carry
off. (Ku)teka nyara, to take captive,
loot, pillage, spoil. (Ku)teka (v. tr. and intr.), to
laugh, smile, laugh at, deride,
be merry, ridicule. Teke (n. 3), kick ; Kupiga teke,
to kick. (Ku)tekelea (v. tr.), to reach as
far as, arrive at. (Ku)fekeleza (v.c.), to accomplish,
perform, bring to successful
issue.
(Ku)tekenya (v. tr.), to tickle. (Ku)tekerea (v. intr.), to bo
glad, shout or sing for joy,
rejoice.
Tekeshaji (n. 5). jester, humorist. (Ku;teketea (v. n.), to be on
fire, be burning or burnt, be
scorched. (Ku)teketeza (v. c.), to burn, set
on fire. (Ku)tekua (v. tr ), to break down,
force, undermine, knock, up- root, tear off. Tele (adj. inv. and adv.), much,
many, plentiful, abundant, to
the brim. (Ku)teleka (v. tr.), to put on the
fire with a view to cooking. (Ku)telemka (v. intr.), to run or
come down, descend (see
Teremuka).
(Ku)teleza (v. intr.), to slip, slide. Telezi (n. 3), mire, mud, slipperi-
ncss. (Ku)tema, to spit, expectorate
(see mate), clear forest. (Ku)tema, to cut down, cut, hew,
slash, cut off, fell. T'einbe (n. 3), grain, seed ; (adj.),
a little, a few. (Ku)tembea (v. intr.). to go for a
walk, take a walk or trip;
Kutembea baharini, to go for a
row.
(Ku)jitembelea, to strut about. (KuXembeza (v. c.), to take for a
walk, hawk about, advertise. Tembo (n. 5), palm wine ; Tembo
la tamu, sweet unfermented
palm wine ; Temlo la kali,
strong fermented palm wine. Tena (conj.), again, still, yet,
more, moreover, also, further. (Ku)tenda (v. intr.), to do, act ;
(v. tr.), to do to, act towards
(unfavourably), deal with. T'ende (n. 3), dates, elephanti- asis ; Tende guu (u. 5), leg (of
chair, bedstead, etc.). (Ku)tendea (v. prepl.), to deal
with, do for, act towards
(favourably). (Kn)jitendekeza (v. ref.), to be
occupied with, busy oneself
about.
234
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Tendo (n. 5), act, action.
Tenga (n. 3, pi.), coarse flour ;
T'enga (n. 3), sea-monster. (Ku)tenga (v. intr,), to alight (as
bird on bough). (Ku)tenga (v. tr.), to separate,
set aside, withdraw, sever, set
apart. (Ka)tengea, Kutengeka, to bo
arranged, settled properly,
regulated, made nice. T'engelele (n. 7, pl.)> small
intestines. (Ku)tengeneza (v. tr.), to put the
finishing touch to, bring about
desired end. (Ku)tengeza (v. c.), to prepare.
arrange, regulate, mend, set to
rights.
Tengo (n. 3), dwelling, resting- place. (Ku)tenza nguvu (v. tr.), to
compel, treat violently. T'eo (n. 3), sling, catapult ; Teo
(n. 7, pi.), sieves, winnowing
fans or trays. (Ku)tepetea (v. n.), to be languid,
weary, dilapidated. (Ku)/epuza (tepukuza) (v. intr.),
sprout, shoot, bud, blossom,
spring up. Tepuzi (fepukuzi) (n. 5), shoot,
sprout, branch. (Ku)terekeza (v. intr.), to halt
for refreshments. (Ku)teremea (v. tr.), to take care
of, shew kindness to, make
feel at home.
Teremko (n. 5), steep hill, de- clivity, descent. (Ku)feremuka (KtUeremka) (v.
intr.), to go or come down,
descend, (Ku)tesa (v. tr.), to persecute,
afflict; Kuteseka (v. n.), to
suffer, be in distress. Teso (n. 5), suffering, distress. (Ku)teta (v. intr.), to quarrel, dis- pute, disagree, contend, strive.
T'ete (n. 3), small-pox, grain of corn ; (n. 7), dried stalks of common straw, stagger; t'ete za maji (n. 3), chicken- or water-pox ; T'et'e (n. :•>), sparks.
(Ku)ietea (v. prep.), to oppose, to dispute, to champion, to fight for.
(Ku)<'etea (v. intr.), to walk lame, to halt, to totter, to cackle.
(Ku)tetema (v. intr.), to tremble, shake ; Kutetemeka (v. n.), to shiver, quake, be moved.
T'eu (n. 3), ant-hill ; T'eu, heart- burn, eructations.
(Ku)feua (see <agua and /aua) (v. tr.), to choose, elect, pre- destinate.
(Ku)teuka (v. n.), to break wind, belch.
(Ku)teuliwa (v. pas.), to be chosen, predestinated, elected (see mteule).
Tewa (n. 3), kind of fish.
(Ku)teza (v. intr.), to play, sport, . dance.
(Ku)leza Kinanda, Kuteza gwa- ride = musical drill.
(Zu)teza-feza, to shake about, be loose.
(Ku)tezama (tazama) (v. tr.), to look at, look after, observe.
(Ka)tezamia mbao (v. prepl.), to tell fortunes (by shaking sand on board).
(Ku)tezamika (v. n.), to be presentable, of pleasing appear- ance.
I'ezi (adv.), aft, in Ihe after part of the ship.
T'ezo (n. 3), adze ; Tezo (n. 5), game, plaything.
Thabiii (inv. adj.), firm, strong, immovable, established, fixed.
(Ku)thabKisha (v. c.), to strengthen, confirm, establish, set fast.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
235
T//ahiri (inv. adj.), plain, clear, open, evident, obvious.
Thalatha (num. adj.), three.
Thalathini (num. adj.), thirty.
TVialimu (n. 5), criminal, trans- gressor, fraudulent person.
Thaliiaashara (num. adj.), thirteen.
Thaluji (Thalji) (n. 3), snow.
Thamani (n. 3), value, price, l>r ciousness, worth.
Thamanini (num. adj.), eighty.
Thamanya (num. adj.), eight.
Thamin<aashara (num. adj.), eighteen.
T/iana (n. 3), thought, suspicion, supposition, hypothesis.
(Ku)</*ani (v. intr.), to think, suppose, presume.
Thawabu (n. 3), reward of merit.
(Ku)<7uhirisha (v. c.), to make manifest, show, demonstrate.
(Ku)</ulimu (v. tr.), to wrong, defraud, harm.
Thinaashara (num. adj.), twelve.
TMneni (num. adj.), two.
Thorn (n. 3), garlic.
(Ku)thubu<u (v. intr.), to dare (see subufu).
(Ku)thubu<ika (v. n.), to be assured, convinced of, have proof of.
(Ku)tb.ubudsha (v. c.), to estab- lish, strengthen, convince, con- firm.
Thulutbi (n. 3), third.
Thumuni (n. 3), eighth, groat, four annas, sixteen pice (eighth part of a dollar).
T'ia (n: 3), giraffe.
(Ku)tia (v. tr.), to put in or on or into (used of persons and things). Like piga, this verb is capable of various mean- ings according to the word it is coupled with : Kutia maji, to water or dilute ; Kutia huzuni, to sadden; Kutia ka-
zini, to employ; Kutia moto,
to set on fire. Tiara (n. 3), kite. (Ku)fibika (v. n.), to get well, bo
cured.
(Ku)fibu (v. tr.), to heal, cure. (Ku)tibua (v. tr.), to stir up, as
muddy water. (Ku)tibuka (v. n.), to be in an
uproar. Tibuko (n. 5), commotion, uproar,
disturbance, -tifu (var. adj.), light, fine,
powdery. (Ku)tifuka (v. n.), to rise, fly
(as dust). (Ku)fii (v. tr.), to obey, submit
to. Tikiti (n. 5), water melon,
vegetable marrow. Tiki<iki (adv.), finely ground,
fine, small. (Ku)dlifu (v. intr.), to run risks,
to venture.
Timamu (inv. adj.), full, com- plete, perfect. (Ku)fimba (v. tr.), to dig. Timbo (n. 5), hole, pit, hollow. (Ku)<imbuza (v. c.), to break
through, appear (as sun
through clouds). (Ku)dmia (Kutimu) (v. n.), to be
fulfilled, be complete, bo
perfect, -timilivn (var. adj.), perfect,
entire, complete, brought to
successful end. (Ku)dmiza (v. c.), to accomplish,
finish completely, fulfil. (Ku)'in(fo (v. tr.), to slaughter,
cut off, kill ; to slit cloth
lengthways, cut out; Kutinrfa
kiu, to quench thirst. Ku/in-/a, Ku/hWika, KufinJikia.
(Ku)findikana (v. n.), to be- come less, to be cut off (as
water), be short or scarce,
come to au end, staunch, fail,
be insufficient, waste away.
236
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
(Ku)dndanga (v. tr.),to slaughter.
Tindi (n. 3), tomato.
Tindo (n. 3), chisel.
Tini (n. 3), fig.
T'ini (adv.), down, below, under- neath, inferior ; T'ini ya (adv. prep.), under, beneath, etc.
(Ku)firirika (v. intr.), to flow or trickle down.
Tisaa (inv. adj.), nine.
Tisaafashara (num. adj.), nine- teen.
(Ku)tisha (v. tr.), to terrify, intimidate, scare, subdue.
Tishali (n. 5), lighter.
(Ku)tisMka (v. n.), to fear, be afraid.
7'isia (inv. num. adj.), nine.
Tisiini(tisaini) (num. adj.), ninety.
Ti/i (n. 5), breast, teat, nipple.
(Ku)tit'ima (v. intr.), to thunder, roar, roll (as thunder).
-t'o, an enelitic denoting thoroughness ; Fungat'o haiu- mizi mkono, bind well, hurts not the arm ; Fanyet'o, do thoroughly.
(Ku)£oa (v. intr.), to put or take out, bring or give out, spend, dismiss, omit (to do a thing), part witli ; Kutoakosa, to point out a mistake, blame.
Toba (n. 3), repentance.
(Ku)toboa (v. tr.), to pierce, break through, thrust into, make a hole in.
(Ku)toboka (v. n.), to burst, burst open, come asunder.
(Ku)toea v. (prepl.), to put sauce to food, flavour, make savoury.
Tofali, (n. 5), tile, brick.
Tohara (see tabara) (n. 3), cir- cumcision, cleanliness, purity.
(Ku)toja (v. tr.), to scarify, tattoo, make incisions in skin, cup, bleed, vaccinate.
Tojo (n. 5), incision, etc.
(Ku)/oka (v. intr.), to go or come
out, to have just done such and
such a thing ; (v. tr.), Jasho
lamioka, he perspires ; Aiokwa
nl maiozi, he weeps. (Ku)toka kati (v. intr.), to pass
away, disappear. Tokaa (n. 3), lime, chalk. Tokea (prep.), from, out of. (Ku)iokea (v. prepl.), to go out
by, etc., happen, appear, conio
to pass, be manifest; NWia >a
ku/okoa, a way of means of
exit. (Ku)tokomea (v. n.), to disappear,
vanish, pass away. (Ku)tokosa (v. c.), to boil, cook
by boiling. (Ku)tokota (v. n.), to boil, come
to boiling point. (Ku)tokoz i (v. tr.), to scoff, tease,
provoke. (Ku)/olea (v. prepl.), to give out
to or for; Amemtolea makali,
ho used strong language to
him. (Ku)<oma (v. tr.), to pierce, stab,
burn, toast, brand, prick,
cauterize. Tomo (n. 5), dross. Tomoko (n. 5), custard-apple. (Ku)tona (v. intr.), to drop, drip ;
(Ku)toneka (v. n.), to fall in
drops.
Tone (n. 5), drop. (Ku)tonesha (v. c.), to touch a
sore place (thereby making it
" run " or drop). (Ku)tonga (v. tr.), to carve, point,
sharpen, cleave, hew. Tonge (n. 3), bit, lump, morsel,
piece. Kuiongea (v. tr.) to slander, to
betray. (Ku)<ongeka (v. n.), to be sharp,
be pointed. T'ongo (n. 3), blindness of one
eye. (Ku)tongoa (v. tr.), to sharpen ;
Ku/ongoa Kilcmba, to arrange
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
237
turban symmetrically with a
point. (Ku)<ongokana (v. n.), to be
brought into points at either
end. (Ku)^ononepha (v. c.), to make
rich. (Ku)tononoka (v. n.), to become
rich. Tope (n. 7, pi.), mud, mire, boggy
or marshy earth, dirt, clay. (Ku)topea (v. intr.), to sink (as
in mud or mire, or as an arrow
in flesh), to stick in. Topi (n. 3), hat, helmet. (Ku)topoa (v. tr.), to remove,
take away, counteract (power
of spell, etc.). (Ku)toroka (v. intr.), to run
away, escape, play traunt. -tosa (var. adj.), unripe, hard,
nearly ripe (ctr. -bifi, raw). (Ku)tosa (v. c.), to drown, wet. (Ku)tosha (v. n.), to be enough,
be sufficient, suffice. (Ku)toshewa (v. pass), to be
astonished, amazed. (Ku)tota (v. intr.), to sink, get
wet ; Kutota mato (v. intr.), to
lose eyesight. (Ku)fovya (Kufovyeka) (v. tr.),
to dip. (Ku)foweka (v. n.), to disappear.
vanish. (Ku)/owesha (v. c.), to kill, put
out of sight. (Ku)/oza (v. c.), to oblige, give :
hence to tax, exact, extract,
levy.
Tbzi (n. 5), tear, tear-drop. Tu, 7'uu (inv. adj.), only, alone,
just, nothing but. T'uu (n. 3), white-ant hill. Tu (pron., 1st pers., pi.), we, ua
(also we are, strong verb
to be). T'ua (n. 3), blemish, stain, defect,
disgrace. (Ku)tua (v. tr.), to put or lay
down (load or burden), furl (sail); (v. n.). to set (of sun), halt, camp, sojourn ; Kutua moyo, to feel comforted.
(Ku)<ua (v. tr.), to grate, rasp, grind, or rub to powder..
(Ku)tuama (v. n.), to settle (as sediment).
(Ku)<ubai (v. intr.), to agree to terms (rebels).
(Ku)<ubia (v. prep.), to repent of or towards (God) (used with more seriousness than tubu).
(Ku)£ubu (v. intr.), to repent.
(Ku)tubua (v. tr.), to graze (skin), rub slightly.
(Ku)tubwikia (v. prepl.), to fall or tumble into.
Tufani (n. 3), storm, hurricane, gale.
T'ufe (n. 3), ball (for playing).
-tufu (var. adj.), bad, worthless, corrupt.
(Ku)tufuka (v. n.), to become use- less, bad, etc.
Tui (n. 3), fat, marrow, fatness, oil ; T'ui (n. 3), leopard ; Tui la nazi, oily milk from cocoa-nut squeezed through grass bag to separate from grated iibre.
(Ka)£uja (v. tr.), to strain, filter.
(Ku)<ujika (v. n.), to be strained, filtered, cleansed by straining.
(Ku)hijua (v. tr.), to thin down (as gruel).
(Ku)/ujuka (v. n.), to become thin or watery.
(Ka)hika (v. intr.), to bf moan, low, vile, oppressed.
(Ku)tukana (v. tr.), to abuse, slander, insult, use bad lan- guage to, revile.
(Ku)tukanana (v. rec.), to insult mutually (see matnkano).
(Ku)tukia (kutuka) (v. n.), to hap- pen, chance, come to pass, hap- pen suddenly.
(Ku)takia (v. tr.), to hate, dis- like.
238
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
(Ku)tukiza (v. c.), to cause to hate, annoy, ridicule, tease, offend, vex, displease.
(Ku)tukizwa (v. pass.), to be angry, vexed, offended.
(Ku)<ukua (v. tr.), to carry, bear, endure, put up with.
-fukufu (var. adj.), glorious, ex- cellent, exalted.
(Ku)fukuka (v.. u.), to be exalted, glorified.
(Ku)<ukulia (v. prep.), to bear, carry, or endure for.
(Ku)frikuliana (v. rec.), to bear and forbear, get on well to- gether.
(Xu)fakulika (v. n.) to be bear- able, tolerable.
(Ku)tukusa (v. tr.), to shake, agitate.
(Kujtukusika (v. n.), to be moved, shaken.
(Ku)tukuta (v. intr.), to move, fidget, be restless, uneasy.
-tukutu (var. adj.), fidgetty, un- manageable, insubordinate.
(Ku)<ukuza (v. tr.), to glorify, exalt, magnify ; (v. c.), to make carry.
Tule (adj.), low, base, unworthy.
(Ku)tulia (v. prepl.), to let off, exonerate (from responsibility or blame^; (v. intr.), to bo quiet, settle down, be at rest, tranquil, serene; (v. tr.), to plant, set.
(Ku)tuliza (see Tuza) (v. c.), com- fort, console, quiet, calm, allay, to fix or set (as of eyes).
(Ku)tuma (v. tr.), to send on an errand, commission (used only of persons).
(Ku)tuma(v. intr.), to trade, make gain or advantage, profit.
(Ku)tumai (v. intr.), to trust, be confident.
Tumaini (n. 3), trust, hope, con- fidence.
(Ku)tamaini (v. tr.), to trust, trust
in, rely upon ; (v. intr.), to
hope, expect. T'umba (n. 3), bud; (n. 5), catc,
sheath, cover. (Ku)tumbaa (v. intr.), to loaf
about, lurk, stand idle. Tumbaku (n. 3), tobacco, snuff
(see fctudy 17). Tumbawe (n. 5), coral-rag ; Jiwe
la fumbawe, coral. T'umbi (n. 3), net for fishing made
of cocoa-nut fibre, heap. Tombiri (n. 3), monkey. T'umbit'umbi (adv.), in heaps. Tnmbo (n. 5), stomach, abdomen,
intestines, womb. (Ku)<umbua (v. tr.), to pierce,
wound, perforate, bore a hole
in, break up.
(Ku)/umbuiza (v. c.), to comfort. Tumbuizo (Jumbuize (n. 3), short
flowery poem. (Ku)<umbua (v. N.), to burst
open, split up, be wounded, be
worn through into a hole. (Ku)tumbukia (v. prepl.), to fall
or tumble into. Tome (n. 3), messenger, sent one
emissary.
(Ku)tumia (v. tr.), to use, em- ploy, make use of, spend ;
(Situmii nyama, I do not take
meat). (Kujtumika (v. intr.), to serve, be
in service; (v. n.), to be of use,
be in use. (Ka)tumikana (v. n.), to be used
up. (Ku)tumikia (v. prepl.), to serve
(a person). Tamo (n. 5), sphere of bui-incss ;
Tamo (n. 5), errand, message. (Ku)tumwa (v. puss.), to ]>c .scut
on a message.
(Ku)<una (v. tr.), to flay, skin. Tunda (n. 5), fruit ; Tu'nda (n. 3),
waistlet. (Ku)tunda (v. tr.), to pluck, pick,
gather, to catch.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
239
(Ku)tundamana (v. n.), to hang, hold together.
(Ku)tundika (v. tr.), to hold, sus- pend, to hang on a line.
Tundu (n. 4), nest, long basket, cage.
Tandu (n. 3), hole.
(Ku)tunduwaa (v. intr.), to be silent, morose, taciturn.
(Ku)tunga (v. tr.),to put or string together, thread, compose.
(Ku)funga (v. tr.), to winnow, sift, shepherd, tend, guide.
(Ku)tungamana (v. n.), to be established, hang together as a whole.
(Ku)tungia (v. tr.), to lead, to string up.
(Ku)tungika (v. tr.), to hang up, suspend, to hang on a line.
T'ungu (n. 3), small ant, emmet ; -/ungu (var. adj ), bitter.
(Ku)tungua (v. tr ), to cast down, violate, degrade, profane, dese- crate.
T'unguja (n. 3), tomato.
(Ku)tunguka (v. ^n.), to be cast down, come to grief, evil to befall one.
(Ku)<ungulia (v. prepl.), to look in, peep in, stoop and look in.
T'unu (n. ;!), treasure, rarity, de- light, something prized and valued, present.
(Ku)hmua (v. tr.), to scratch, scarify.
(Ku)iunza (v. tr. & intr.), to take care of, guard, keep, protect, preserve, watch closely, look out.
T'uo (n. 3), camp, encampment.
^"upa (n. 3), file; T'upa (n. 3), bottle, flask, phial.
(Ku)<upa (v. tr.), to throw, throw away, cast, fling.
(Ku)i'upa (v. tr.), to leap, leap over ; Km'upa mpaka, to over- step limit, encroach, go beyond boundary.
(Ku)/upilia mbali, to throw right
away, banish out of sight. -tupu (var. adj.), empty, only,
nothing but ; Tupu (invar, adj.),
naked, nude. Tupu- tupu (adv.), in a state of
nudity or destitution. Turki (n. 5), Turk. (Ku)<urup'uka (v. n.), to escape,
get loose (from confinement). (Ku)<urup'usha (v. c.), to assist in
escaping, set free, deliver,
rescue. (Ku)turuzika (v. intr.), to trickle,
run down. (Ku)tasha (v. tr.), to curse, vilify,
execrate, defame. Tusifusi (n. 5), roaring of waves. Tuta (n. 5), row, raised bed
for vegetables, furrow, com- pany, band. (Ku)t'utia (v. n.), to rise high, bo
lofty. (Ku)tutiza (v. c.), to heap up,
pile together. Tutu! (interj.), hands off! take
. care ! (Ku)tutuma (v. intr.), to rumble,
roll. (Ku)tutuzika (v. n.), to pant,
throb. T\m (tu) (adj. and adv.), only,
merely. (Ku)iuuza (v. intr.), to trickle,
flow.
2\iwashi (n. 5), eunuch. Tuwazi (n. 5), cymbal, timbrel. (Ku)tuza (tuliza) (v. tr.), to soothe,
pacify, console, curry favour. Tuzo (n. 3), reward, consolation
prize, tip, " douceur." (Ku)fwa (v. intr), to set (of
sun). (Ku)twaa (v. tr.), to take, receive,
take with the hand; Kutwaa
p'ole, to treat tenderly. (Ku)twanga (v. tr.), to pound
com in mortar for removing
husk.
210
BWAHILI GRAMMAR
(Ku)tweka (v. tr.), to raise, hoist, lift up, put upon (load or re- sponsibility.
(Ku)twesha (v. tr.), to pay respects to, greet (in the evening).
(Ku)tweta (v. intr.), to gasp, pant, struggle for breath.
(Ku)iweza (v. tr.), to subdue, abase, humble, bring low.
(Ku)ji<weza (v. ref.), to humble oneself, grovel, submit.
Twiga (n. 3), giraffe.
II
IT (pron. 2nd p. sing.). .Also 2nd
p. s. of strong verb to be, thou
art. TJa (n. n), flower, blossom; TTa la
warirZi, rose ; (n. 7), fence round
court, courtyard, enclosure. (Ku)ua (v. tr.), to kill, murder
(cannot be used of slaughtering
animals). UarZui (n. 7), enmity, hostility,
ill-will. Uaminifa (n. 7), faithfulness,
truth. Uangalizi (n. 7), care, super-
vision, providence. Uashi (n. 7), building, con-
struction.
Uasi (n. 7), rebellion, apostacy. (Ka)uawa (Kuwawa (v. pass.), to
be killed, murdered. -ubaa (n. 7), vcxatiousness. Ubahili (n. 7), avarice, miserli-
ness.
Tlbaini (n. 7), discernment. Ubainifu (n. 7), manifestation,
proof. Ubambo (n. 7), slit-stick for
roasting meat on. TTbani (n. 7), frankincense (a
TTbao (n. 7), board, plank. Uba<i (n. 7), lean-to shed, pent- house.
Ubadli (n. 7), iniquity, wicked- ness.
TJbavu (n. 7), rib, side.
Ubaya (n. 7), sadness, wickedness.
Ubeti (n. 7), couplet (poetry)
Ubishi (n. 7), joke.
Ubivu (n. 7), ripeness.
Ubiti (n. 7), rawness, greenness.
Uboi (n. 7), position and work of houee-boy.
TTbongo (n. 7), brain.
Ubora (n. 7), power, superiority, prowess.
Ubovu (n. 7), rottenness, corrup- tion.
Ububwi (n. 7), dumbness.
Ubwabwa (n. 7), pap, sop.
Uchache (n. 7), littleness, scarcity, smallness, insignificance, mini- mum.
Uchafu (n. 7), filth.
Uchaga (n. 7), grain-store, barn.
Uchanga (n. 7). youngness, nn- developedness.
Uchao (n. 7), dawn, morning.
TTdaku (n. 7), slander, gossip.
UfZanganyifu (n. 7), deception, cheating, fraud.
Udevu (n. 7), a hair (of board).
Udhaifu(n. 7), feebleness, wretch- edness, weakness.
TJdhamini (n. 7), security, bail, sponsorship.
(Ku)udhi(v.tr.), totrouble, annoy. persecute, harass, molest ; Lika- kuudhi hafa Ku-Kuua, It mort- ified you.
Udhia (n. 7), trouble, annoyance, vexation, worry, uproar.
(Ku)udhika (v. n.), to b:: in trouble, perplexed, disturbed.
TJdhilifu (n. 7), insignificance.
TJWAi (n. 7), ceremonial purifica- tion (Muha.) Kutanguka urf/m, to be defiled.
(Ku)udhurisha (v. c.), to make excuses for.
TTdhuru (n. 7), excuse.
Udogo (n. 7), (childhood, infancy)
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
241
smal Iness, insignificance, youth- fulness, youth.
Udohoudoho (n. 7), odds and ends.
TTdongo (n. 7), Boil, clay, ground.
Ufa (n. 7), crack, fissure.
Ufanifu(u. 7), success, prosperity.
Ufaume (n. 7), kingdom, kingship.
Ufi'Muli (n. 7), insolence, over- bearing behaviour, rudeness, arrogance.
Ufifilizi (n. 7), distraint, destruc- tion.
Ufisadi (n. 7), ill-fame, vice, vile- ness.
Ufito (n . 7), thin stick, lath, pole.
Ufu (n. 7), death, corpse.
Ufufuo (n. 7), resurrection.
Ufunga (n. 7), long seat on verandah.
Ufunguo (n.7), key.
Ufuo (u. 7), strand, shore, beach, water's edge.
Ufuraha (n. 7), small box for keeping chewing-lime.
Ufyagio (n. 7), broom, sweeping- brush.
Ufyozi (n. 7), abuse, insult.
Uga (see ua) (7), open, space.
Ugali (n. 7), Indian-corn porridge.
Uganga (n. 7), witch-doctor's art, magic.
Ugema (n. 7), tapping of palm- trees for today.
TJgeni (n. 7), state of being a stranger ; TTgenini ; in a foreign country.
TIghaibu (n. 7), chewing mixture consisting of tobacco, lime, betel-leaf, areca-nut and gum (k'atu).
TTgo (n. 7), fence, hedge.
Ugomvi, quarrel.
Ugonjwa, sickness, illness, disease. (Ku)agua (v. intr.), to fall ill, ail,
ache, be in pain. TTgurau (n.) hardness, toughness,
hardship, difficulty. (Ka)ugnza (v. c.) to nurse, see through an illness. SWAHILI GRAMMAR
TJgwe (pi. ng'ngwe) (n. 7), thong, cord, line.
Uhaba (n.7),8mallness, paucity.
Uhai(n. 7), life.
Uhalifu (n. 7), rebellion, trans- gression.
Uhalimu (n. 7), condescension.
Uharibifu (n. 7), corruption, depravity.
Uhasharaii (n. 7), immorality, licentiousness.
Uhasidi (n. 7), envy.
Uhiteji (n. 7), want, need, destitu- tion.
Uhotfari (n. 7), encouragement.
Uhunzi (n. 7), smith-work.
Uhunt (n. 7), freedom.
Uhusida (n. 7), envyings.
Uin«7a (n. 7), hunting, chase, sport.
TTja (n. 7), slavery, servility.
Ujaka (n. 7), wild spinach.
Ujana (n. 7), youth, childhood.
Ujane (n. 7), widowhood.
Ujani (n. 7), captivity.
Ujanja (n. 7), swindling, cheating,
Ujenzi (n. 7), building, construc- tion.
Uji (n. 7), gruel, porridge, stir- about ; TTji wa mtama, kaffir- corn porridge; Uji wa mfele, rice gruel.
Ujinga (n. 7), stupidity, ignorance.
Ujira (n. 7), wages, salary, hire.
Ujumbe (n. 7), message, prince- dom.
U'kabail (n. 7), nobility, dignity.
Ukahaba (n. 7), whoredom.
Ukaidi (n. 7), obstinacy, perver- sity.
Ukakaya (n. 7), extent, expanse.
Ukali (n. 7), fierceness, sharp. ness.
Ukamba (u. 7), belt, girdle.
Ukambaa (n. 7), cord made from slips of dwarf-palm.
Ukambi (n. 7), measles.
Ukamilifa (n. 7), perfectness, in- tegrity.
Q
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Ukanda (n. 7), cord, thong, bridle.
Ukarimu (n. 7), liberality, gene- rosity, large-hcarteduess.
Ukavu (n. 7), insolence, dryncss.
Ukazi (n. 7), dwelling.
Ukelele (n. 7), great noise, out- cry.
Ukeme (n. 7), cry of distress, call for help.
Ukhaini (n. 7), treachery.
Ukhiana (n. 7), guile, deceit.
(Ku)ukilia (v. prepl.), to intend, plan, determine, devise.
Ukinaifu (n.), pride, self-suffi- ciency.
Ukindani (n. 7). stubbornness, con- tradictoriuess.
TJkindu (n.), fine vegetable fibre, strips from leaves of wild date.
TTkiwa (n. 7), poverty, penury, destitution.
Ukohozi (n. 7), phlegm, expectora- tion.
Ukoko (n. 7), crust of food in cook- ing-pot.
TTkonzo (n. 7), goad, long stick with pointed end.
Ukoma (n. 7), leprosy.
Ukombo (n.), crookedness, curved tool for hollowing wood.
Ukombozi (n. 7), redemption, ran- som.
Ukomo (n.), end, termination.
Ukono (n. 7), arm (of lake, etc.), offshoot, branch.
Uk'onyezo (n. 7), winking, making signs with eyebrows.
Ukoo (n. 7), dirt, filth.
TTkope (u.), eyelash.
TTkorofl, impiety, ungodliness, wickedness.
TJkosevu (n. 7), want, deficiency, insufficiency, fault.
TTkubali (n. 7), acceptance.
Ukubwa (n.), size, seniority, priority, greatness.
tJkucha (n. 7), claw, nail.
Uk'ulima (n. 7), cultivation, til- lage, husbandry.
Ukumbi (n. 7), entrance hall.
Ukumbiza (n. 7), space under eaves of house.
Ukumbusho (n.), memorial, me- mento.
Uknnrfufu (n. 7), olearing-up, simplicity.
Ukungo (n. 7), edge, brink, brim.
Ukurasa (n. 7), leaf of book, sheet of paper. (See Kata.)
Ukuta (n. 7), wall.
Ukuu (n, 7), greatness, strength, honour.
Ukwato (n. 7), hoof.
Ukwasi (n. 7), riches, opulence.
Ulabibu (n. 7), perseverance.
Ulafi (n. 7), gluttony, excess.
Dlaini, Ulainifu (n. 7), softness, smoothness ; TTlaini-ulaini, flat- tery.
Ulaiti (n.), European calico (also adj. applied to anything of European origin).
TTlanifu (n. 7), self-indulgence, cursing.
Ulatifu (n. 7), gentleness.
TTlaya (n. prop.), Europe, mother- country.
Uler/i (n.), boy, lad.
TJlegevu (n. 7), languor, lassitude, slackness, sloth, sluggishness.
Ulekevu (n. 7), straightforward- ness, uprightness, equity, in- tegrity.
TTlevi (n. 7), drunkenness.
TTlili (n. 7), superior kind of bedstead.
Ulimi (n. 7), tongue (pi. ndimi).
TJlimwengu (n. 7), inhabited world, universe, world.
TTlindi (n. |7), African's tinder- box.
TTlinganifu (n. 7), comparison, resemblance.
Ulingo (n. 7), watchers' hut in field.
Ulinzi (n. 7), guard, watching.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
243
(Ku)uliza (v. tr.),to ask a question.
Ulizi (n. 7), art and practice of wailing at funerals.
Ultima (n. 3), run of ill luck.
Uraa (u. 7), fork, gridiron, cautery, iron (pi. Mauma and Nyuma).
(Ku)uma (v. tr.), to bite ; (v. intr.), to ache, hurt, pain (only used transitively of a wound or in- jured member affecting suf- ferer's own person as Kiiwa chaniwuma, his head pains him).
Umande (n. 7), dew, moisture; Uman<7e ulioganda, hoar frost.
Umasikini (n. 7), poverty, want.
Umasihia (n. 7), Christianity.
Umad (n. 7), multitude, crowd, everybody.
(Ku)umba (v. tr.), to create, shape, form ; to descry, pick out (object far off).
(Ku)umbia (v. intr.), to soar about, glide round.
(Ku)umbika (v. n.), to be well formed or fashioned, be strong.
Umbo (n. 5), form, shape, mould- ing, figure.
TJmbu (n. 5), sister.
(Ku)umbua (v. sub.), to deface, mutilate, disfigure, destroy.
-ume (var. adj.), masculine, male, manly, strong.
Ume (n. 7), courage, manliness.
Umeme (n. 7), lightning, thunder- bolt.
(Ku)umia (v. prepl.), to be in pain.
(Ku)umika (v. tr.), to cup.
Umio (n. 7), throat, windpipe.
(Ku)umiza (v. c.), to hurt, cause pain to, inflict suffering.
(Ku)umka (v. n), to rise up, foam, bubble up, froth, effervesce.
Umoja (n. 7), union, oneness, unity.
Umri (n. 7), lifetime, age, life.
(Ku)umua (v. tr.), to take away, deprive.
(Ku)umwa ni (v. pass.), to be bitten by, suffer pain from.
Unafiki (n. 7), hypocrisy, lying, deceit.
Unajisi. (See Najisi.)
(Ku)nnda (v. tr.), to build, con- struct.
Undu (n. 7), cock's comb.
(Ku)undaa (v. intr.), to overflow, pass over.
Une, four (in counting).
Unene (n. 7), thickness, stoutness, bigness, bulk.
Unga (n. 7), flour, meal.
(Ku)unga (v. tr.), to unite, join, connect.
(Zu)ungama (v. tr.), to confess, own, admit, acknowledge.
(Ku)ungamana, (Ku)ungana (v. rec.), to be united, cohere.
Ungereza (n. 7), England.
Ungi (n. 7), muchness, plenty, multitude, quantity, maximum.
(Ku)ungika (v. n.), to be set (as of bones), knit, be joined.
Ungo (n. 5), member, joint, limb.
Ungo la sb.ingo(n. 5), prominence between shoulders.
Ung'ongo (n. 7), palm-leaf slip. (See Ng'ongo, dwarf-palm).
(Ku)ungua (v. sub.), to disunite, sever, cut ; (v. intr.), to be burnt, be scorched, be singed, catch fire.
Unguja (n.), Zanzibar.
(Ku)ungulika ( v. n.), to be troubled at ht art.
(Ku)unguza (v. c.\ to burn, scorch, singe, scald.
Ungwana (Uungwana) (n. 7), gentle birth, freedom, good breeding and education.
Unono (n.), fatness.
Unyago (n. 7), mourning, ngoma.
Unyamavu (n.), silence, quiet- ness.
Unyang'anyi (n.), robbery, extor- tion.
Unyasi (n. 7), blade of grass.
244
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Unyenyekevu (n. 7), humility, meekness, lowliness, supplica- tion.
TJnyeii (n. 7), pride, conceit.
Unyonge (n. 7), weakness, mean- ness, poorness, feebleness.
Unyoya (n. 7), a single feather.
TInyozi (n. 7), shaving.
TTnyushi (n. 7), a hair of the eye- brows.
TTnywele (n. 7), a single hair (of head).
Uo (n. 7), scabbard.
TJombezi (n. 7), meditation, inter- cession.
Uongofu (n. 7), prosperity, happy ending, well-being.
TJovu (n. 7), evil, wickedness.
TJozi (n. 7), marriage.
Upaa (n. 7), scalp, pate, side of sloping roof, bump of venera- tion ; Anaupaa = he is bald.
Upaji (n. 7), gift, benefit, gene- rosity.
Upamba (n. 7), curved knife used in tapping.
Upana (n. 7), breadth, width, extent.
Upande (n. 7), side, part, portion ; P'ando za . . . in the vicinity of ...
Upanga (n. 7), a sword ; (pi. panga).
Upau (n. 7), slanting roof-pole, rafter.
Vpawa (n.), ladle made of half a cocoa-nut shell.
Upele(u. 7), pimple, eruption, itch.
Upembo (n. 7), long stick for gathering fruit.
TJpcndano (n. 7), state of mutual love.
TTpendeleo (n.), preference, favour- itism.
Upenu (n. 7), verandah-roof, eaves.
Upenzi (n. 7), lovingness.
TTpeo (wa mato) (n. 7), horizon, limit of sight.
Upeo (u. 7), broom, (adv.), ex- tremely, of the utmost.
TJpepeo (n. 7), fan, bellows.
Upepo (n. 7), wind, cool breeze, zephir ; Kubadili upepo, to go away for change of air.
TTpesi (n.), quickness, rapidity, speed.
Up'.nda (n. 7), bow.
Uplndo (n. 7), edge or border of cloth, selvage, fold, hem.
Upo (n. 7), long-handled ladle.
TJpofu (n. 7), blindness.
Up'ole (n. 7), gentleness, meek- ness, mildness, moderation.
Uposo (n. 7), sum paid lo brido by bridegroom before marriage.
Upote (n. 7), bow-string (of ox- sinews).
TJpotevu (u. 7), destruction, state of being, lost, moral ruin.
Upotofu (n. 7), pervo rseness, crookedness, iniquity.
Upumbavu (n. 7), foolishness, folly.
Upunga (n. 7), flower-bud blos- som.
Upungufu (n. 7), decrease, deficit, deficiency.
Upuuzi (n. 7), mischief, nonsense, knavery, iniquity.
TTpwa (n. 7), shore.
Upweke (n. 7), loneliness, aloof- ness, independence.
TTpya (n. 7), newness, anew, newly.
Uradi (n. 7), invocation.
Urari (n. 7), even balance, equal- ity.
Uraflki (n. 7), friendship, friend- liness, sociability.
Urefu (n. 7), length, height, tall- ness.
Urembo (n. 7), adornment, orna- ment, finery, glory, beauty.
Urithi (urathi) (n. 7), inherit- ance, heritage.
Urufuba (n. n.), moisture.
Usadiki (n. 7), faithfulness.
SWAHILI-ENGL1SH VOCABULARY
245
Usafi (n. 7), cleanness, purity, brightness.
UsafiM (n. 7), pride.
Usemi (n. 7), conversational powers, oratory, art of speak- ing.
Ushadi'/i (n. 7), strength.
Ushahidi (ushuhur/a) (n. 7), testi- mony, witness.
Ushairi (n. 7), long string of poetry.
Ushanga (n. 7), beads, necklace, string of beads.
Ushekhe (n. 7), chieftainship.
Ushi (n. 7), hair of eyebrow.
UsM (n. 7), string course (archit).
Ushirika (n. 7), communion, part- nership.
Ushujaa (n. 7), courage, bravery.
Ushungu (n. 7), poison, gall, sting (of bee, etc.).
Ushupavu (n. 7), foolishness, folly, hardness, obstinacy.
Ushuru (n. 7), tax, customs, duty.
(Zu)nsia (v. tr.), to command, give orders or instructions con- cerning charge, bequeath.
Usikizi (u. 7), attention, heed, hearing.
Usiku (n. 7), night (pi. masiki) ; Usiku kucha, all night long, till dawn ; Usiku wa manane, midnight, dead of night.
Usiku sana (adv.), late at night.
Usingizi (n. 7), sleep, uncon- sciousness. Kulala usingizi, to be asleep.
Usiri (n. 7), delay, tarrying, pro- crastination.
Usitadi (n. 7), skilled workman- ship, dexterity, expertness.
Usita (n. 7), strip of plated grass for making mats.
Uso (pi. nyuso) (n. 7), face, edge. Uso nati, face to the ground (shame).
Usomo (n. 7), friendliness, fellow- ship.
lisa! hush I
Usubi (n. 7), sand-fly, midge.
Usulufani (n. 7), mastery, do- minion.
Usumbufu (n. 7), trouble, vexa- tion.
Uswafi (see Usafi).
Uta (n. 7), bow; (pi. mata or nyuta).
Utaa (n. 7), corn-store, hen-roost.
Utagaa (n. 7), stem, branch.
Utaji (n. 7), veil, head-cloth.
Utajiri (n. 7), riches, wealth.
Utakatifu (n. 7), holiness.
Ufambi (n. 7), wick.
Utambuzi (n. 7), divination.
Utandu (n. 7), cataract on eye, crust on boiled rice, etc., film.
Utanga (n. 7), long mat.
Utangule (n. 7), central portion of palm-leaf slip.
Ufari (n. 7), towing.
Utasa (n. 7), barrenness, unfruit- fulness.
Ufashi (n. 7), desire, intention, longing.
Utatu (n. 7), the Trinity. Ut'ata (n.), fermentation.
Utauaa (n. 7), godliness, piety.
U<awa (n. 7), lice.
U<awa/awa (n. 7), poultry -lice.
U<awi (n. 7), witchcraft, sorcery.
Uteka (n. 7), captivity.
Utelezi '(n. 7), slipping, slipperi- ness.
Utenzi (n. 7), work, doing, work- manship ; religious ballad.
Uteo (n. 7), sieve, winnowing- basket.
U/euzi (n. 7), election.
Uthabiii (n.), firmness, daring, intrepidy.
Uthalimu (n. 7), cruelty, wicked- ness, violence.
Utimilivu (n. 7), perfection, com- pleteness, integrity.
Ufindio (n. 7), altar for sacrifice.
Utiriri (n. 7), mischief, annoy- ance.
Utisho (n. 7), terror, intimidation
246
SWAHILI GRAMMAK
fJtitiri (n. 7), poultry-lice, fleas.
Tito (n. 7), semscm plant, fluid matter, dripping.
Utofu (n. 7), spoiling, ruination ; Utofu wa ma<o, blindness.
Utonganyi (n. 7), deceit, fraud.
D7oro (n. 7), running away, plundering, piracy.
TTtosi (n. 7), crown of head.
Utoto (n. 7), childhood, infancy. TJtu uzima, prime of life.
TKovu (n. 7), destitution.
TJt'u (n. 7), state, condition (of persons).
Ufukizi (n. 7), hatred, provoca- tion.
Ufoku (n. 7), market (poetical)
U/ukufu (n. 7). glory.
Utukutu (n. 7), insubordination, unruliness, naughtiness.
TKukuzi (n. 7), porterage.
Utulivu (n.), tranquillity, good behaviour.
TTtulizi, utuvu (n. 7), comfort, consolation.
Utamba (n. 7), betrothal, engage- ment.
Utumbo (n. 7), entrails.
TTftunbuizo (n. 7), song, psalm, agony.
U<ume (n. 7), apostleship.
U/umi (n. 7), business, trade, livelihood, work.
Utumishi (n. 7), service.
Utumizi (u. 7), use, service.
U<umo (n.), profit, gain.
TJtumwa (n. 7), slavery.
THunga (n. 7), pasture, herd-
! ing.
TTtungo (n. 7), string (of beads), composition.
THungu (n. 7), bitterness, agony, pain.
Utupu (n. 7), nakedness, empti- ness.
TT<wao(n. 7), dusk, sunset, even- ing.
TJudi (n. 7), scented wood used for fumigating.
TTumbufu (n. 7), destruction, mu- tilation.
Uungu (n. 7), theology.
Uuwaji (n. 7), murder.
TJvao (n. 7), garment, dress.
Uvivu (n. 7), idleness, laziness, sloth, indolence.
TTvuguvugu (n. 7), lukewarmness.
Uvuli (n. 7), shadow, shade.
TJVumba (n. 7), incense ; (galba- num) Ku-fukizn, uvumba, to burn incense.
Uvumbi (n. 7), dust, dirt, small dust.
TJvumilivu (n. 7), patience, long- suffering.
Uvnmvu (n.7), mourning, lamen- tation.
UVimdfu(n. 7), desolation, break- ing down.
Uvundo (n. 7), stench, offensive smell.
TJvurungu (n. 7), hollow, hollow- ness, cavity, i
ITvyazi (or uzazi) (n. 7), birth, bearing of children.
TTwakili (n.), stewardship.
Uwan<Za (n. 7), yard, court, open space.
TJwanga (n. 7), arrowroot.
TTwao (ubao) (n.), hull (of ship).
TTwaziri (n.), superintendence, viziership.
Uwele (n. 7), sickness, disease (pi. ndwele).
TTweza (uwezo) (n. 7), power, valour, strength, might, riches.
Uwlngu (n. 7), heaven, sky.
Tlwongo (urongo) (n. 7), lie, un- truth, falsehood.
Uyabisi (n. 7), dryness.
(Ku)uza (Kuza) (v. tr.), to sell. (Ku)uzanya, to cause to sell.
Uzalishi (n. 7), midwifery.
TTzao (n.), seed, posterity, fruit, progeny.
Uzee (n. 7), old age.
TTzi (pi. nyuzi) (n. 7), cotton, thread, string, wire.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
247
(Ku)uzia, kuuzilia (v. prepl.), to sell to.
Uzima (n. 7), life, health, sound- ness, durability.
Uzinduo (n. 7), alarm.
TTzinifu (n. 7), whoredom.
TTzinzi (n. 7), adultery, immora- lity.
Uzio (n. 7), fish-trap.
Uzishi (n. 7), bnrial preparations, undertaker's duty.
Uzito (n.), heaviness, sorrow, \veight.
TJziwa (n. 7), deep sea, depth, open sea.
TTzuio (n. 7), hindrance.
(Ku)uzulu (v. tr.), to remove from office, dethrone, depose, de- grade.
Uzongo (n. 7), halo round moon.
TTznngu, Europe.
Uzuri (n. 7), beauty.
Uzushi (n. 7), raising, resuscita- tion, bringing to surface.
Uzuzi (n. 7), falsehood, invention, fiction.
(Zu)vaa (v. tr.), to wear, put on ;
(Ku)vaa nguo, to dress, put on
one's clothes. (Ku)valisha (kuvisha) (v. c.), to
cause one to dress. (Ku)vama (v. n.), to wear or cut
by friction.
Vao (n. 5), garment, dress. Vi (pi. prefix) (see note 3, study
18). Via (v. n.), to he spoiled, stunted
in growth, blighted. Viasi (n. 4, pi.), the mean, the
middle, average. Vibaya (adj. and adv.), bad,
badly.
Vifaa (n. 4, pi.), necessaries. (Ku)vika (v. tr.), to clothe, to
dresa (another), to overlay
(with gold, etc.).
Vile (dem. adj., 4th cl. pi.), those ;
(adv.), thus ; Vilevile (adj. and
adv.), those same, exactly thus. (Ku)vimba (v. intr.), to swell;
(v. tr.), to thatch (roof). Vimbi (n. 4), bad things, evil. (Ku)vinjari (v. intr.), to cruise. (Ku)vinya (v. tr.), to shake,
dandle. Viovu (n. 4, pi.) (elliptical for
vitu viovu), evil, wrong, harm. Vipele(vidudusi) (n. 4, pi.), rash,
eruption, pimples. Virakaraka (n. 4), streaks, stripes. (Ku)viringa (v. tr. and n.), to
make or become round. (Ku)viringana (v. rec.), to become
round or spherical. Virugu (n. 4), anger. Vita (n. 4, pi.), war, conflict,
warfare. Virtmvi (n. 4, pi.), plotting,
intrigue, treachery. Vitushi (n. 4), sudden calamities. Vi£wa-vi<wa (adv.), topsy-turvy. Vivi Mvi (adv.), precisely thus. (Ku)vivia (v. n.), to smoulder,
burn low. -viva (var. adj.), idle, lazy,
slothful, indolent. Vivyo (ref. pron.), those same
(tilings, cl. 4) ; (adv.), in that ' manner. Vivyo Mvyo (dem. adj. and adv.),
those very same. Viweo (n. 4, pi.), lap. (Ku)viza (v. c.), to spoil, damage,
mar. (Zu)vizhia(vizia) (v. tr.), to
watch, keep in view, spy. Vizuri (adj. and adv.), beautiful,
nice, beautifully, prettily,
nicely, well, etc. (Ku)vua (v. sub.), to take off
(clothes), to undress ; Kuvaa
kofia, to take off one's hat ; (v.
tr.), to lift up, fish, catch fish ;
Kuvulia(samaki) (v. prepl), to
fish with or by; Kuvua ma/o,
248
SWAHILI GBAMMAB
to look up ; Kumvulia mt'u
mato, to stare at one. (Ku)vnata (v. tr.), to press be- tween palate without biting. (Ku)vuaza (v. tr.), to scratch,
tear, graze, cut, wound, gash. (Ku)vuja (v. intr.), to leak, let in
water. (Ku)vuka (v. n.), to come off, fall
off (clothes) ; (v. intr.), to cross
over, ferry across. (Ku)vusha (v. c.), to ferry one
across. (Ku)vukuta (v. tr.), to blow
(bellows).
Vukuto (n. 3), sweat, perspira- tion. Vuli (n. 3), latter-rains. Period
of latter rains (October —
November). (Ku)vuma (v. intr.), to roar, rage,
make commotion. Vumbi (n. 5), dust, rubbish,
litter. (Ku)vumbika (v. tr.), to bury
in sand or hot ashes, roast in
ashes, to be dust. (Ku)vumburuka (v. n.), to start
upsuddenly (sleeping animals). (Ku)vumilia (v. intr.), to endure,
bear, be long-suffering. (Ku)vumiza (v. c.), to make to be
heard, cause a noise. (Zu)vuna (v. tr.)> to reap, gather
in. (Ku)jivuna (v. ref.), to boast,
glory, bo puffed up, conceited,
vain. (Ku)vimda (v. tr.), to break,
smash, destroy, annul, change
(money); Kuvnnda kambi. to
break up camp, i.e. to start
day's march ; Upepo ukavunda,
the wind lessened. (Ku)vnnrfanga (v. tr.), to crush,
break by pressure. (Ku)vun<iika (v. n.), to become
broken, be conceited, come to
grief.
(Ku)vuruga (v. tr.), to stir. (Ku)vurumiza (v. tr.), to roll
down, throw, fling. (Ku)vuta (v. tr.), to draw, pull,
attract ; Kuvuta makasia, to
row (oars) ; Kuvuta tumbaku,
to smoke (tobacco). (Ku)vuvia (v. intr.), to blow,
breathe on.
Vya (var. prep.), of (4th cl. pi.). (Ku)vyaa (see Kuzaa) (v. tr.), to
bear, bring forth, be fruitful. Vyakula (n. 4, pi.), food, eatables,
provisions. Vyema (adj. and adv.), well, in
good state, all right, rightly ;
Kuona vyema kwa, to delight
in. Vyengine (adj. and adv.), other,
otherwise, differently. Vyengulima (n. 4, pi.), small, low
hills. Vyepesi (adj. and adv.), light,
easy, trifling, then, easily. (Ku)vyoga (v. tr.), to tread upon,
trample.
W
Wa (var. prep.), of; Wa (conj.), ami (Arabic) ; Wa-miji (of towns) (n. 1, pi.), citizens, people, members of a federa- tion.
(Ku)wa (v. intr. and copula), to be, become.
(Ku)wadia (v. intr.), to be the appointed time.
Warfinasi (n. 3), gentlefolk (lit. sons of men, Ar.).
Wan (n. 7), stinging-nettle.
Wahedi (num. adj.), one; Wa- hedi wa ishirini, one and twenty.
(Ku)wahi (v. intr.), to be able (to go to a place, etc.).
Wajibu (n. 7), necessity, obliga- tion, inevitable duty.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
249
(Ku)waka (v. intr.), to burn, bo aliirht, burn up brightly.
Wakadhalika, etcetera, and so on, and the rest.
Waka£i (n. 7), time, appropriate time, season.
Wakf (ece Wakufu).
Wakili (n. 5), steward.
Wako (n. 5), building (see Kuaka).
Wakufu (adj.), consecrated, dedi- cated, sacred, set apart ; Ku- weka wakufu, to consecrate, dedicate.
Wala (adv. conj.), neither, nor.
Walakini (CODJ.), but, neverthe- less.
Walau (conj.), not even.
Wale (var. dem. adj.), those (cl. 1, pi.).
Wall (n. 7), boiled rice (sec Miele and Mpunga). (See Liwali, native governor.)
Walii (n. 3), saint (Muhnd.).
Wallahi (interj.), by God.
(Ku)wama (v. intr.), to stick fast, press into.
(Ku)wamba (v. tr.), to stretch over, lace bedstead.
Wambe (n. 7), corn-dust.
Wanda (n. 3), antimony (used by women for painting eyebrows and eyelids).
Wandiko (n. 7), plaster.
(Ku)wanda (v. intr.), to become fat.
Wangwa (n. 7), swampy or boggy ground, valley, marsh (pi. nya- ngwa).
Wano (n. 5), wooden part of arrow or &pear.
Wapi ? (inter, adv.), Where ?
Waraka (n. 7), letter, epistle (pi. nyaraka).
Waria (inv. adj.), skilful, ex- pert.
WarifZi (n. 5), Rose (see ua).
Wasa (n. 7), lath, stick.
(Ku)washa (v. c.), to set light to,
kindle, irritate, burn, sting, smart, be pungent.
(Ku)wasili (v. intr.), to arrive. Kuwasilisna (v. c.), to convey, cause to arrive.
Wasiwasi (n. 3), doubt,hesitation.
Wafani (see Aufani) (n. 7), home, dwelling, habitation.
Wavu (n. 7), net, snare, hammock.
Wavyele (n. 1, pi.) elders.
(Ku)wawa (v. intr.), to be uneven, slanting, out of the perpen- dicular.
(Ka)wayawaya (v. red.), to bo perplexed, hesitate, waver, be troubled.
Wayo (n. 7), foot-print.
(Ku)waza (v. intr. and tr.), to think, reflect.
Wazi (adj. inv.), plain, clear, open, manifest, ajar, obvious, patent, evident, hollow ; Ku- weka wazi, to show, demon- strate.
Waziwazi (adv.), clearly, in- telligibly, audibly, publicly, frankly.
Wazinm (n. 7), lunacy, madness, imbecility.
Waziri (n. 5), prime minister, overseer, superintendent, vizier.
Wazo (n. 5), thought, intention, idea, opinion.
(Ku)wea (v. prepl.), to be to (sec welea).
(Ku)weka (v. tr.), to put, place, lay by, put aside, appoint ; Kuweka Salama, to save.
(Ku)wekea (v. prepl.), to commit to, place or deposit with.
Weko (n. 5), joint, joining, weld- ing together.
Wekundu (n. 7), redness.
Wele (n. 5), udder.
(Ku)welea (v. prepl.), to do to, show towards, be to, conduce to.
Weleko (n. 7), cloth for carrying infant on back.
Wema (n. 7), good, goodness.
250
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Wembamba (n. 7), thinness, cramperl, circumstances, nar- rowness.
Wembe (n. 7), razor (pi. nyembe).
Wendeleo (n. 7), continuance, durability.
Wengo (n. 7), spleen, reins.
Wepesi (n. 7), ease, facility.
Werevu (n. 7), cunning, skill, shrewdness, device, diplomacy, artfulness, tact.
Weu (n. 7), veldt, plateau, water- less plain, open country.
Weupe (n. 7), whiteness, bright- ness.
Weusi (n. 7), blackness, darkness.
Wewe (sep. pron.), tliou, thee.
(Ku)weza (v. intr.), to be able, " can " (used negatively for dis- ability through sickness) ; (v. tr.) to be equal to, be a match for.
(Ku)wezeka (Ku)wezekana (v. n.), to be feasible, practical, pos- sible.
(Ku)wezesha (v. c.), to enable.
-wi (var. adj.), sad, evil, wicked (concords are muwi, kiwi, viwi, etc.).
(Ku)wia (v. prcpl.), to be creditor to, claim or exact from, be owed by (money, etc.) ; Kuwia rar77ti; to forgive (lit. to be indulgent or clement to).
Wifi (n. 3), sister-in-law (hus- band's sister, or brother's wife).
(Ku)wika (v. intr.), to crow.
Wimbi (n. 5), wave, billow ; Ma- wimbi yaumkayo, foaming billows, breakers.
Wimbo (n. 7), song, hymn.
(Ku)winda (v. tr.), to search or seek for, hunt, chase.
Wingu (n. 5), cloud.
Wino (n. 7), ink.
Wishwa (n. 7), chaff, bran.
Wi<o (n. 7), infection, contagion.
Wivi (n. 7), theft (no pi.).
Wivn (n. 7), jealousy, zeal, envy.
(Ku)wiwani (v. pass.), to be in debt to, owe, be sued by.
Wiwi (n. 5), fern, bracken.
Wizani (n. 7), the weight of a thing weighed.
Wokofu (n. 7), salvation, deliver- ance, help, safety.
Wokozi (u. 7), salvation, aid, succour, help.
Wonyesho (n. 7), manifestation, demonstration, setting forth.
Waroro (n. 7), softness.
Wusuli (n. 7), Advent.
Ya (var. prep.) of; Ya kwamba (conj.), that.
Yabisi (inv. adj.), dry, hard; (Ku)yabisika (v. n.), to become dry, solidify.
Yahudi (n. 5), Jew.
(Ku)yaika (v. n.), to melt, dis- solve.
(Ku)yaisha (v. c.), to melt, smelt, dissolve, liquefy.
Yakiiii (n. 3), truth, veracity, certainty, proof.
(Xu)yakinisha (v. c.), to certify, prove, confirm.
Yale (dem. pron.), those (5th. cl. pi.).
Yambo (see Jambo).
Yamini (n. 3), oath taken with the right hand on sacred book.
Yamkini (adv.), possibly, pro- bably; Yamkinika, it is pos- sible.
Yasimini (n. 3), jasmine, jessa- mine.
Yadma (n. 5), orphan.
Yaya (n. 5), ayah, nurse.
Yayi (n. 5), egg (see li).
Yayo Kwayayo (Prouom. phrase), same things over and over again.
Yeye (sep. pron,), he, him, she, her.
8WAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
251
(Ku)yonga-yonga (v. red.), to
sway to and fro, bend, bow. Yowe (n. 5), alarm, cry of fear,
cry of distress. Yu (pron. pref.), he, she. (Ku)yu'a (v. intr.), to wobble,
waddle. (Ku)yuga-yuga (v. red.), to shake,
sway, stagger.
Yule (dcm. adj.), that (1st cl.). (Ku)yumba (v. intr.), to soar. (Ku)yumba-yumba (v. red.), to
reel, vacillate, roll. Yumbe (n. 5), palace. Yunga-yunga (n. 5), worm. Yungi (n. 5), lily, water-lily.
Za (var. prep.), of.
(Ku)zaa (v. tr.), to bear (fruit), bring forth, beget, breed, givo birth to.
Zaba</i(n. 3), civet-cat ; Kuzabirft, to take civet from the fat.
Zabibu (n. 3), raisins, grapes.
(Ku)zabuni (v. tr.), to buy, pur- chase.
Zaburi (n.3), psalm, prayer-book.
Zafarani (n. 3), saffron.
(Ku)zagaa (v. intr.), to shine, be bright, lighten, glisten.
Zaibak (n. 3), mercury, quick- silver.
ZaicZi (adv. and conj.), more, fur- ther, moreover.
Zaka (n. 3), tithe.
(Ku)zalisha (v. c.). to assist at birth, deli\-er, act midwife.
Zalizali (n. 3), earthquake.
(Ku)zama (v. n.), to sink, dive, be submerged.
Zamani (n. 3), time, period, sea- son ; Zamani hizi, nowadays ; Zamani k'ubwa, Zamani nyi- ngi, long time.
Zambarau (n. 3), fruit (similar to damson).
Zamiri (n. 5), psalm. (Ku)zamisha (v. c.), to immerse
(hence to baptize). Zamu (n. 3), turn, watch. Zana (n. 3), ammunition, store. Zani (n. 3), accident, sudden
danger, crime. Zari (n. 3), gold thread (very
valuable). (Ku)zawa, Kuzaliwa (v. pass.), to
be lx>rn. Za.wa.<li (ZarZi) (n. 3), present
brought from a distance, gift,
keepsake.
Zawani (n. 3), tares. Zei/uni (n. 3), olive. Zeze (n. 3), stringed musical in- strument resembling lute. Zia.<la. (adv.), more. (See Zaidi.) Ziara (n. 3), visit; Ziara (or
Siara) (n. 5), tomb, grave,
burying-place. (Ku)ziba (v. tr.), to stop or plug
up, close, seal, cover, hide, fill
up. (Zuji)zibaziba (v. ref.), to hide
one's self. Kuzibika, Kuzibikana (v. n.), to
be stopped, closed, hidden. (Ku)zibisha (v.c.), to have stopped
up or closed.
Zibo (n. 5), stopper, plug. (Ku)zibua (v. sub.), to unstop,
undo, open. (Ku)zicZi (v. intr.), to increase,
augment, grow, do all the
more.
(Ku)zidisha (v. c.), to add, in- crease, multiply (arithmetic). (Ku)zika (v. tr.), to bury. Zile (var. dem. adj.), those (cl. 3
and 7, pL). -zima (var. adj.), whole, sound,
healthy, complete. (Ku>ima* (v. tr.), to extinguish,
put out, cool.
(Ku)zimbaa (v. intr.), to be repro- bate, cast-away. (Ku)zimia, Kuzima (v. intr.), to
252
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
become faint, go out (lamp, fire), bo quenched, become cool.
(Ku)zimika (v. n.), to go out (fire, etc.), burn low.
(Ku)zimua (v. sub.), to water down, cool, weaken.
(Ku)zinduka (v. n.), to wake up suddenly, rise.
(Ku)zinga (v. n,), to turn round, revolve, change front, turn.
(Ku)zingada (v. n.), to bethink one's self, turn over mentally, reflect, repent.
(Ku)zinga-zinga (v.), to be a turn- coat.
(Ku)zingira (v. tr.), to inclose, surround, comfort.
(Ku)zini (v. intr.), to commit adultery.
(Ku)zira (v. tr.), to abstain from, avoid, abhor.
(Ku)zirisha (v. c.), to cause to abhor (hence to be outrageous, abhorrent, abominable).
-zito (var. adj.), heavy, pon- derous, difficult, hard, thick, sad.
Ziwa (n. 5), pond, lake, reservoir, breast.
Zizi (n. 5), cattle-pen, sheepfold, stable, yard.
(Ku)zoa (v. tr.), to collect together for picking up, scoop up, gather up (used in a collective sense, ctr. okota).
(Ku)zoea (v. tr. and intr.), to be- come accustomed to, acquire the habit of, get used to, be- come tame.
(Ku)zoeleka (v. n.), to be capable of being scooped or gathered up.
(Ku)zonga-zonga (v. red.), to in- close, surround, encompass, gird, wind round.
(Ku)zongomaza (v. c.), to cause to gird.
(Ku)zoweza (v. c.), to accustom, habituate.
(Ku)zua (v. intr. and sub.), to un- earth, unbury, invent, romance, tell untruths, deal falsely.
(Zu)zubua (v. tr.), to pierce.
(Ku)zuia (v. tr.), to prevent, hinder, restrain, refrain, with- hold, keep back.
(Ku)jizuilia (v. ref.), to exercise self-control, be temperate, mo- derate, restrain one's self.
(Ku)zuiliwa, Kuzuiwa (v. pass.), to bo hindered, prevented, with- held, etc.
(Ku)zuka (v. n.), to appear from under the surface, emerge, come on the scene as an up- start, rise.
(Ku)zulu (v. intr.), to be giddy, light-headed, deranged.
Zulia (n. 5), carpet.
Zumari (n. 3), wind instrument, pipe, clarionet.
(Ku)zumbua (v. tr.), to find, dis- cover, search, seek.
(Ku)zumbukana (v. n.), to be dis- coverable.
(Ku)zunguka (v. tr. and intr.), to go-round, walk round, revolve, turn round, surround.
(Ku)zungumza (v. intr.), to talk, converse, chat, hold conversa- tion.
(Ku)jizungumza (v. ref.), to medi- tate, amuse one's self by talk- ing, etc.
(Ku)zungusha (v.c.), to turn, make go round.
Zuri (n. 3), false oath, perjury.
-zuri (var. adj.), pretty, beautiful, nice, handsome.
(Ku)zurn (v. intr.), to visit, pay a visit.
PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED, LONDON AND BECCI.KS.
University of California
SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY
405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388
Return this material to the library
from which it was borrowed.
JEC'O URL CIRC
OCT181993 SEP 1 3 1993
A 000 565 385 2
•
.
- . • I
•
.
•r
•
• " • • • • •
.
.
-
•
-
.
•
•
.
.
.. •
,
• • .